Tears of War
Author: A. D. Trosper
Date: 2013-09-12 04:00:00+00:00
Keywords: Adventure; Fantasy
Description: Faced with a looming war, the dragon riders have no choice but to leave the safety of Galdrilene and reach out to the nations they once fled. It will take more than Galdrilene to bring down the Shadow Riders. But the Shadows are doing the same and not all nations are opposed to them. New discoveries are made, old wounds are reopened, and betrayal hides among welcoming smiles. And as rebellion builds in one nation, it’s clear that some choices, even those made with the best of intentions, can have devastating consequences. About the Author USA Today Bestselling author, A.D. Trosper often found
Publisher: SilverSpirt

“...brilliantly written...somehow Trosper
displays great skill as a writer that is
worth teaching to the other fantasy
writers, especially new ones, on how
to write the perfect dragon and
magician-themed fantasy story.”

- Lit Amri, reviewer, Readers’ Favorite -

“...a rich fantasy story with beautiful
world building and a large cast of endearing
characters. I would recommend this book
to fans of epic fantasy adventures. I look
forward to reading the next book in the series.”

-
Sophie Moss, award-winning author
of “The Selkie Spell”
-

“The descriptions, creativity, and characterization
are amazing, but the story is better...magical,
beautiful, and suspenseful, and should be read by

any person who loves a good book.”

-
Jeff LaFerney, author of “Jumper”
-

“A masterpiece in fantasy...”

-
Katie Jennings, bestselling author
of “Breath of Air”
-

“...a great and entertaining read. A must if
you are a dragon lover...”

-
Annamaria Bazzi, reader
-

“...an absolute wonderful read. The characters are
well-defined and drive the story...”

- Jennifer Donohoe, reader -

“...Ms. Trosper has opened up the possibility of
recreating a new Dragon-rider centric community, and

I look forward to the next installment.”

- Richard King, reader -

Also by A.D. Trosper

The Dragon's Call Series

Embers at Galdrilene

Book One

Ashes and Spirits

Book Three

Available Early Summer 2014

Other Titles

Bound by Time

Available Early Spring 2014

The Legend of Christmas Magic

Tears of War

Copyright © 2013 A.D. Trosper

All rights reserved. Except as permitted under the U.S. Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this publication may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without prior written permission of the publisher.

This book is a work of fiction. The characters, incidents, and dialogue are drawn from the author’s imagination and are not to be construed as real. Any resemblance to actual events or persons, living or dead is entirely coincidental.

Published by

Silver Spirit Publishing

ISBN-13: 978-0615883243

ISBN-10: 0615883249

The Design Team

Cover design, interior book design,
eBook design, map design and editing
by Blue Harvest Creative
www.blueharvestcreative.com

Visit the Author

www.facebook.com/adtrosper

www.twitter.com/adtrosper

www.adtrosper.wordpress.com

For Betsy

First of all, I would like to thank
my readers. You are the best.

Thank you also to my
wonderful husband for all
of your support.

To my children, even if you do
argue like wet cats in a sack.

To my beta readers, your insight
and support is invaluable.

And to my writing friends,
your encouragement means
so much to me.

To my parents for always
believing in me.

To Roxie, whose wagging tail
always brings joy to my day.

And last, but not least,
to Blue Harvest Creative
for all of your incredible work
and attention to detail.

Kalila staggered as exhaustion swept through her. The soles of her bare feet burned, leaving smears of blood with each step. She stumbled to a stop, her eyes sweeping the endless grass waving in the cold wind. A shiver racked her body while the wind tore at her ragged dress and whipped her hair into her face. Kalila pushed the dirty, golden strands away and ran her tongue over her dry lips.

She sucked a cold breath down her parched throat. Where was she? Was she still going west or wandering in circles? Everything looked the same. Kalila turned around, searching for something–anything—to use as a landmark. She couldn’t even tell the position of the sun through the thick blanket of clouds.

Everywhere, the tall grass waved like a green ocean. The newly formed seed heads bobbed up and down. Were they telling her to go forward or mocking her?

Cold moisture landed on her cheek. Kalila looked up as more drops fell, driving into her face with the strength of the wind behind them. She closed her eyes and opened her mouth, letting the rain soak her tongue and lips. Thirst burned in her throat like fire.

Kalila opened her eyes and looked around again. There had to be something to catch the water in. A drink. Oh, the desperate need for a drink! She’d gained her freedom; was a drink so much to ask? Nothing else mattered at the moment. She would happily die on this empty ocean of grass if she could just have one drink.

There was nothing to collect water in, just as there was nothing else in this wretched grassland. At least she’d finally left the desert behind. That had to mean something. Even the desert contained water. With this much grass there had to be water somewhere. Didn’t there?

Her teeth chattered as she started to walk again, only dimly aware of the pain in her feet. She had to keep moving or freeze to death. A ragged laugh burst past her lips. Already dying of thirst and now she had to worry about freezing to death.

Kalila contemplated which would be worse, freezing to death or dying of thirst. She already knew the pain of thirst. She’d heard stories of people freezing. It was said they fell asleep and never woke. Was it really that easy?

Kalila shook her head to clear her mind. Stupid thoughts to have. She’d made it this far. Her sister hadn’t broken her and Fates be damned if she’d let the grasslands break her either.

Her soaked dress clung to her legs making it difficult to walk. She stopped and looked down at the wet, torn skirt. So wet it dripped! Almost sobbing with relief, Kalila yanked the dress off the tiny buttons on the bodice scattered into the grass. She didn’t care if she ever had clothing again.

She tipped her head back and twisted the cloth above her mouth. Water trickled over her tongue. It tasted of dirt and fabric that had been worn too long. It was wonderful. Nothing had ever tasted so good. Her dry throat rejoiced at the moisture. She moved her hands to another area and squeezed more water from the rank material.

Shivers racked her soaked body. The wind lashed rain at her as if to punish her for thinking she could pass through this land unscathed. Kalila stood in it and accepted it, shifting to other wet areas of the dress. She wrung the precious liquid into her mouth until her legs, too weak to hold her any longer, gave out.

Thirst still nagged, but it was quieter now, partially sated. Her eyes closed against the cold storm and she burrowed into the grass. The shivering had stopped; that probably wasn’t good. It was okay though. She’d made her pact. She’d gained her freedom and a drink. The Fates had been kind. If they now wished her to die here, she couldn’t complain. She exhaled quietly as darkness settled over her.

Warmth wrapped around her and lifted her from the cold, wet grass. Her eyes drifted open. A dark sky, full of stars, stretched overhead. Distant voices called to rouse her from her stupor. Kalila couldn’t summon the strength to answer. Bright torchlight swam across her vision and the sharp brown eyes of a woman searched her face.

“Place her in my vardo, quickly,” the woman said, her voice strong despite her age.

“Yes, Shamam,” a male voice answered.

The night began to move again. Campfires and torches lit up the darkness. The light sent little needles into her eyes and she closed them. Rough hands laid her on something soft. The strong voice of the woman flowed around her. Floating in the twilight on the edge of consciousness, Kalila couldn’t quite understand what was said, but they sounded like orders. The softness under her rocked slightly and then warm hands were on her head. Something thick wrapped her in a cocoon.

She drifted in and out of sleep. As her body slowly warmed she began to feel the pain in her feet again. Her fingers and toes felt like they were on fire. She moaned. Why were they trying to set her on fire?

“Shh. It is best if you stay still.”

Kalila opened her eyes. A woman pulled away the thick blankets and replaced them with warm ones. The heat felt lovely except it increased the stabbing and burning in her fingers and toes. She tried to raise her arm, but the woman held it with surprising strength.

“I said to hold still.”

With effort Kalila found her voice, though it was little more than a whisper. “Who are you? Where am I?”

“We are Traders. One of our young men found you. I am their Shamam, their healer. My name is Madeir. You are in my vardo. There is some damage to your toes and fingers from the cold.” Her brown eyes searched Kalila’s. “Who are you and how did you come to be lying naked and nearly frozen on the Ash Plains?”

The Ash Plains. So she was somewhere between Shadereen and Calladar. She couldn’t have wandered into a more empty area. “I escaped. I was trying to get home.”

A furrow appeared between the woman’s eyes. “Escaped from where? Where is home?”

“Markene is home. I escaped…” How could she explain? Who would believe her? There were dragons again. Evil black dragons and multi-colored dragons that she didn’t think were evil like the blacks. How could she possibly explain that a mountain housed unspeakable evil if one traveled east several weeks by foot? This healer would think she was crazy. Kalila had to try. She had to warn them.

“I escaped from a place called the Kormai—”

Madeir’s sudden, sharp intake of breath stopped her. The healer leaned close, her eyes wide. “The Kormai?” The woman drew back briefly, fear flickering in her eyes. “What is your name? How do you know of the—” she paused and looked around as if afraid someone might be listening. Her voice lowered to a whisper. “How do you know of the Kormai?”

“I was captured and taken there.”

Madeir’s expression was full of doubt. “Your name.”

“I am Kalila, fourth daughter of the King of Markene.

Disbelief replaced the doubt on Madeir’s face. “You…how did you escape? How did you come by those scars on your arms and face?”

Kalila flinched at the memories the woman’s questions stirred. She looked away from the earnest brown eyes and stared at the ceiling of the vardo. “Shadows gave me the scars.”

“Shadows?” Confusion filled Madeir’s voice. “How did shadows…never mind. You don’t have to speak of it if you don’t wish.”

An uneasy feeling stirred in Kalila’s stomach. She slowly turned her head to look at the woman. “How do you know about the Kormai?”

Madeir took a deep breath. “I suppose I can tell you. Given what you know and what you are. I am a mage. I can use magic. I was trained in Galdrilene where dragons of beautiful colors live.”

Kalila stared at her. What was wrong with her that she kept running into people and things that shouldn’t be? Except the multi-colored dragons existed. Something the woman said tickled her mind. “What do you mean, given what I am?”

Madeir smiled, the action emphasizing the lines on her face. “My dear, I have been a senior mage for almost ten years. I can sense budding mages. From what I can sense, you have probably used magic at least once already.”

“What!” Kalila started to bolt up, but Madeir’s firm hands held her back; she wasn’t strong enough to fight. “I cannot use magic. I will not be evil. I will not become like my sister.”

Madeir shook her head. “You will not be like anyone but yourself. Your actions are yours to decide. Magic cannot decide your path for you. If your sister chose the darker path it is not the fault of magic. I have used it for a long time. Do you find me evil? Galdrilene can teach you to use your magic.”

“I don’t want to go anywhere or learn anything about magic. I want away from it. I want to go home.”

Madeir’s face softened. “Of course you do, child. It’s best if you learn to control your magic so you don’t harm others, but no one can be forced. You must always choose your path freely. Galdrilene will be there if you decide you are ready.” The healer stood and turned toward a small stove, its chimney pipe running out the top of the small box house on wheels.

Kalila didn’t answer. She didn’t use magic—that was insanity. Or was it? She recalled the feel of the air around her, alive while it moved across her skin with a feather-light touch. She remembered the air telling her someone was going to steal a book. She had tried to send a message on the air to the invisible person to wish them luck. Had that been magic? If it was, if she could use magic, then what? She should turn herself in for execution before she went insane from it.

Did magic really drive people insane? Sadira was most definitely mad. But what about the others? They were just evil. And then there was Taela, who seemed neither evil nor insane. Taela who had tried to escape with her gray draclet. Did she succeed? And what about the others? She’d seen them in the air in the distance, fighting Ranit and the other Shadow Dragons. Were they evil?

She couldn’t go home. Not if she might harm her family because she didn’t know what she was doing.

A delicious aroma filled her nose and pulled her from her thoughts. Madeir helped her sit and held a cup of steaming tea to her lips. Thirst overwhelmed her and she gulped the hot liquid, burning her tongue but not caring. The heat spread out as it settled in her stomach.

“Normally I would use a variety of herbs to heal your cold, damaged fingers and toes. Since you know I can use magic, would you oppose the idea of me using it to heal you? It will be far less painful. Luckily it was full dark before Tarin found you. He didn’t bother to look at any injuries, just wrapped you in his cloak and carried you to me as quickly as possible.”

The burning in her fingers, nearly forgotten during the discussion, now intensified as if just thinking about it made it worse. Did she want magic used on her? Kalila eyed the woman warily. She’d never seen magic that didn’t cause pain. She’d never seen healing that didn’t cause pain. The screams of the people Kovan had ‘healed,’ echoed through her memory. Would she ever be able to shut them out?

Madeir looked her full in the eyes. “I promise I will not hurt you.”

Kalila couldn’t suppress her trembling, but she closed her eyes and nodded.

Madeir laid her hands on her. Heat spread through Kalila’s body, gathering in her toes and fingers. The pain faded until it was gone. The heat moved to the cracked and lacerated soles of her feet. It rippled from her toes to her heels. The pain lessened until it was nearly gone. Then the heat receded.

She opened her eyes and looked at Madeir’s face. “Thank you.”

The healer nodded. “I’m sorry I couldn’t do more for the soles of your feet. The damage in your fingers and toes was newer and hadn’t progressed however, most of the injuries to your soles are older. Injuries left too long don’t heal right. Perhaps a stronger healer could do better.”

“It was more than I expected. Thank you for everything.”

Madeir smiled. “You should rest.”

Sadira watched Oksana pace back and forth across the polished onyx floor. Alden stood silent against the wall, his red eyes tracking her every step. Even after several weeks, Oksana’s unreasonable grief and anger over her sister’s death still radiated from her. Not even the two clutches of eggs laid by Ranit and Dusa could calm her emotions.

Sadira found it amusing. She’d understand the anger better if it was focused on the right thing. She was also angry over a sister. Angry because the rotten piece of dragon-dung had escaped.

But Oksana’s anger was directed by grief. Sadira shook her head and hid her smile as the blonde glared at Alden with red-rimmed blue eyes. She wasn’t afraid of Oksana, but there was no point in provoking a fight with the woman. They didn’t need their numbers cut down any more than they already were and if it came to a fight, she would kill the blonde with no hesitation. Granted, they already had two more riders, but they were new and inexperienced.

Sadira turned her eyes on Alden. He shifted as if uncomfortable under her gaze. As well he should be. She broke the silence, controlling her voice. Calm and quiet would instill more fear than an emotional outburst. Oksana hadn’t learned that yet. “You are brave to come out of hiding Alden. After your…mishandling of the Silver Rider. You cost the Shadow Riders a lot with your assumptions.”

Alden’s skull-like features remained expressionless. “I had no way of knowing they would come in force. The Guardians stopped making rescue attempts long before the end of the War of Fire. There was no foreseeing the outcome.”

“No foreseeing!” Oksana’s shriek echoed across the massive cavern. She stepped up close to him, her voice filled with rage. “Your mistake cost Paylana her life. How dare you act as if none of this is your fault.” Her voice rose with each word. “You didn’t listen to me when I said we should leave the Silver rider in the desert. You didn’t listen later when I said we should kill her and be done with it. Now Paylana is dead. And you are to blame.”

Sadira laid a hand on the woman’s arm. “Easy Oksana, don’t kill him yet.”

Alden sneered as his red eyes settled on her. “Kill me? With what, your shadows?”

She threw back her head and laughed until tears ran down her face. It sounded maniacal. She didn’t care. He truly thought no one had seen Dreth die? Bern was still alive, if broken and bent. But she’d seen the other turned to ash.

Alden’s sneer turned to a glower. She wiped the tears away and took a deep breath to calm the laughter. “You think we are naïve and stupid, don’t you? You may have hid from the battle with the Guardians, but the rest of us were there.” She leaned close to him. “I saw Dreth burn. I watched the silver dragon turn him to a pile of ash. My shadows may not hurt you, but a single command from me and Ranit will end you.”

Fear crawled across the stretched parchment face. “You wouldn’t. You need me.”

Oksana snorted. “What do we need you for? We have had to learn our magic for ourselves. You can’t read the book, and thanks to you, we only have one of those now. You are inept, unsuitable to lead, and a coward. Paylana died weeks ago, and only now do you crawl out from under your rock and show yourself again.”

A faint smile crossed his face. “And who will lead you? Sadira? Kovan?”

Sadira smiled at his attempt to divide them. “We don’t need a leader. We are not sheep; we don’t need a dog to herd us. Because of you we are down two Shadow Riders and countless Kojen. No, Alden, I don’t think we need you.”

A triumphant smile spread across Oksana’s face. Sadira smiled inwardly. Without realizing it, the blonde was already letting her take the lead. Kovan would oppose her and she would have to resort to working with him. But Oksana and the rest would do what she and Kovan said. She turned an indulgent look on Oksana. “It was your sister, your grievance. It is your revenge. Deal with him how you see fit.”

Oksana looked up at the black dragons arranged on their shelves. “Dusa, come to me.” The massive black lifted herself from the ledge and landed next to her rider. “Kill him.”

Dusa drew in a lungful of air. “No!” Alden’s eyes widened. “You can’t do this!”

Oksana cocked her head at him. “You are right. I can’t. Not this way. It would be too quick. Dusa, start with his feet and work your way up. See how loud he can scream.”

Anevay stirred awake. She rubbed her eyes and looked around, confused for a moment. She’d fallen asleep in the records room again. It seemed in the past few weeks she’d spent more time in there researching than anywhere else. She sat up and arched her back, trying to relieve the ache from sleeping in the chair. The orb on the wall still glowed strong, but the candle on the desk she used for more light while reading had burned low. It must be the middle of the night.

A slight energy rippled through her mind. Quiet and unobtrusive, she felt the feather-light touch. Is that what woke her? She rubber her temples and sighed. A ringlet of her long, black hair fell across her face and she pushed it away in irritation. Real sleep in a bed was what she needed. Yawning, she looked at the scroll on the desk in front of her. She had to find the answer.

She’d researched tirelessly since the battle with the Shadow Dragons several weeks before. Spent endless hours reading the detailed accounts of the War of Fire. That war had ended badly, only a mistake kept it from ending worse. The Shadow Riders had come close to winning the War of Fire. Now, five hundred years later, it seemed history would be doomed to repeat itself.

The Shadow Dragons were already reproducing again. Two black eggs had hatched in the last three months. The Silver Riders felt each one. In Galdrilene, only one clutch of twenty-one eggs had been laid. Nydara fired them only a week ago. Though the shells had hardened in the last few days, the eggs had yet to send out a call. Until they sang to their intended rider, they would remain unhatched for however many years it took.

Her eyes drifted over the age-worn parchment. Somewhere, in the history of the War of Fire, there was a key to winning this new war. Something that seemed small and insignificant to others. A clue that would lead her to the weave she needed to make. A weave to eradicate the Shadow Dragons forever.

Anevay rubbed her eyes again. If only it wasn’t so easy for the Shadow Dragons to reproduce. What did it say about the world that Shadow Riders were so easy to find? How were there so many people willing to give up half their souls for power?

Energy flowed softly through her mind again, a quiet hum. She propped her elbow on the desktop and massaged her forehead with her hand, her eyes still on the scroll. She shoved aside her exhaustion and focused on the task at hand. Her talent, beyond healing, was the ability to create new magic weaves. It rested on her to find the needle in the haystack, the one that would save Galdrilene and the Guardian dragons. The one that would save the world.

The hum of energy wove through her mind again; soft, sweet, insistent. She ground her teeth in frustration. She couldn’t afford to be distracted right now. Maybe a break would help. A brief walk in the fresh air. She stood, pulled her cloak around her shoulders and left the room. A short hallway brought her out in the Great Hall.

Only two orbs burned at either end of the massive hall, leaving the passage between the two sets of tall, heavy doors, cloaked in darkness. The doors leading to the city were closed, but those on the other end stood open. The light of the full moon spilled across the broad, inner terrace.

Anevay rubbed her hands together, shivering slightly in the cool air of late spring. In the caldera, beyond the terrace, the lake reflected the bright face of the moon. Again, the humming energy filled her mind. Crooning softly. She strode past the doors and out onto the terrace. She turned her face into the wind and let it wash over her.

The need to get back to work tugged at her. But for some reason, she left the terrace and walked across the grass instead of back through the doors. The rim of the horseshoe-shaped caldera was dark at this hour. The low rumble of dragons sleeping in their lairs drifted on the breeze. She walked to a door set in the side of the rim’s wall. Maybe she would check on the eggs.

The croon in her mind intensified. Elation rippled through her. Elation? What was she so happy about? Her hand froze on the latch of the door. Her lungs refused to work. The energy in her mind, the hum, it was happy. Her breath left her in a rush and tears welled in her eyes. It wasn’t energy she felt. It wasn’t just a random sound in her mind from too little sleep. She heard the Dragon Song. One of the eggs sang to her.

She pulled her hand away from the door. She couldn’t go in there right now. The pull of the egg would be irresistible; she wouldn’t be able to stop herself from hatching it and there was a protocol for this. Still, she stood in front of the door, unable to walk away.

“Anevay?” Maleena’s soft voice called out of the dark behind her.

She turned. Maleena stood a few paces away, swathed in a heavy cloak. Her long, chestnut hair blew around her in the wind. “What are you doing out here in the dark?”

The other woman smiled and walked closer. “I could ask the same of you. I would expect to find you sleeping in the records room, not standing in the dark staring at a door.” She glanced at the door. “One of the eggs is singing, I felt it. It woke me. Nydara senses it too.”

Anevay returned her smile. “I know. I was sleeping in the records room. The Dragon Song woke me.”

Maleena’s eyes, dark purple in the light of moon, widened. “You?” Excitement filled her voice. “One of the eggs calls to you? Oh, Anevay, how wonderful!”

“I made it all the way to the door before I realized what it was. I know I can’t go in yet, but at the same time, I can’t bring myself to leave.”

Maleena smiled. “You don’t have to leave. You just have to go in by the other door.”

“Don’t I have to wait for Emallya?”

“Emallya will already be awake. She will sense it too. So will Taela. Soon, the entire hold with be awake with the news. You only need to wait long enough for food to be made available for the draclet, and for Emallya and Bardeck to be ready.”

A lump filled Anevay’s throat. She wouldn’t have to wait until the next day. “Thank you, Maleena.” The tiny woman smiled at her again then hurried toward the Great Hall.

High above on the ledge jutting out from their lair, Maleena’s silver Nydara and Mckale’s green Tellnox stretched their wings and yawned as they woke from their sleep. Anevay dragged herself away from the small door. When it was time she wouldn’t go in through it anyway. She might as well wait inside where it was warmer.

The Dragon Hold slowly came alive as word spread of the impending Hatching. Anevay sat at a table in the kitchen cavern. A junior cook moved about the dark kitchen stirring coals up in the ovens. Anevay yawned. If the ovens were already warming, dawn would only be a couple of hours away. How long had she slept at her desk in the records room? It couldn’t have been long. An hour? Maybe a little more.

Marda came bustling through the kitchen, ordering instructions at a group of men looking like she dragged them out of bed only moments before. Knowing Marda, she probably had. Whether dragon or human, Marda never let anyone go hungry.

Anevay took a deep breath, a sudden flutter in her stomach. She was called. In a short time, she would hatch an egg. The hum in her mind crooned happily. For some reason, when Anevay had contemplated her future, she never considered she might be called. It hadn’t bothered her; she was happy being a mage. But she wouldn’t trade the sound of the Dragon Song in her mind for anything.

She folded her hands on the table and laid her head on them, closing her eyes. The croon, quiet and soothing, filled her mind.

A touch on her shoulder woke her and she blinked up through bleary eyes. Taela stood with a smile on her face that reached her dark blue, slanted eyes. “It’s time if you are ready.”

Anevay stood. “Already?”

Taela laughed. “You’ve been asleep for a little over an hour. Emallya, Bardeck, the dragons and the other riders are awake. Food has been placed for your draclet. All we wait for now is you.”

Excitement growing within her, she flashed Taela a smile, glad the other woman was there. She remained close friends with Kellinar. When Taela became Kellinar’s bondmate, Anevay had felt an immediate connection to the woman. Taela became the sister Anevay never had.

“Emallya and Bardeck are ready then?” she asked.

Taela nodded. “They are waiting for you in front of the Hatching doors.”

Anevay smoothed her dress, suddenly nervous. What if she was wrong? What if she really was sleep deprived and only thought she heard the song? She took a deep breath and let it out. Such silliness. She’d grown up in Galdrilene. She knew what the Dragon Song was.

Taela led the way out of the kitchen, across the inner terrace, and into the Great Hall. A small door led into a hallway, its stone walls smooth and unadorned. They came to stop at a set of heavy doors. Emallya, her violet eyes shining, stood at one. Bardeck, his dark hair hanging to his broad shoulders, stood at the other. He smiled; his dark eyes kind.

His voice filled the hall, “Beyond this door, a future you cannot yet comprehend awaits you. Within is a very large chamber with a circle of eggs in the center. Though the chamber is large, only those Hatching and a couple of witnesses are allowed. Hatching is a personal thing.”

Emallya picked up the ancient ritual, her voice soft, “Once we open the door, Bardeck and I will step aside. You must step through the doorway and into the chamber of your own free will. Once you are in the chamber, the compulsion to bond with your dragon will overcome you. You must be absolutely sure this is the path you wish to take and accept the offered gift of the bond without reservation. If you feel any doubt at all, turn and walk away from this door. At the end of the hall you will find someone ready to guide you from the Dragon Hold. No shame will be on you for your refusal. Shame can only be found in a false acceptance.”

Anevay stared at the doors. “I accept the offered gift without reservation.”

Together, Bardeck and Emallya pushed open the doors. Inside the chamber, twenty-one eggs rested in a depression in the middle of the floor. Five greens, three reds, four yellows, six blues and three golds. No silvers this time. Her eyes raked across the eggs. One yellow seemed to pulse with light, the hum reverberating off the stone walls of the chamber and in her mind. The egg pulled at her. She walked toward it and reached out her hand. Her fingers touched the satiny, yellow shell.

The room disappeared in a kaleidoscope of images. Galdrilene, as it had once stood, fell away as she rose in the air. A rainbow of dragons flew with her. A dragon, black as despair, flew at her. Green fire flooded her vision. A crystalline dragon, water dripping from its scales, hung in the light of the rising sun above a perfectly round lake. A gold dragon, his scales marred with ancient injuries, tore a black dragon apart in mid-air. The last image was consumed in a massive, swirling firestorm.

Love. Unconditional, irrevocable, all-consuming love washed over and filled her soul until she wept with the sweetness of it. On her hands and knees, Anevay sobbed as tears flowed freely down her face. She raised her eyes. A bright yellow draclet, the size of a small pony, gazed back, her dark eyes filled with the love Anevay felt inside.

In an awkward, uncoordinated movement, the yellow haphazardly folded her damp, leathery wings. Large pieces of yellow shell lay scattered across the floor. Anevay climbed to her feet and scrubbed away the tears. More rolled down her cheeks in their place. The yellow reached her wedge-shaped face toward her. A sense of intense hunger rolled off the draclet. Anevay looked around.

Bardeck smiled at her from where he stood near the exit hall, his eyes full of happiness. “Somehow, I knew one day an egg would call you.”

She sniffed and wiped at the tears again. “I’m so glad she did. I’ve read it about it, heard about it, but nothing can prepare…”

His smile grew wider. “No, nothing can prepare you. Not fully. Are you ready to take her out to eat and meet the other dragons and riders?”

Anevay nodded and followed him as he stepped into the hall. The yellow walked by her side as they moved down the long hall that gently curved up. And then they were at the door, where just over an hour before she’d stood on the other side.

When they stepped out onto the green grass of the caldera floor, they were greeted by the others. Dragons lined up on one side, their riders on the other. The yellow stopped and gazed up at the adult dragons. Nydara lowered her silver head to touch noses with her first daughter. Tellnox, his green scales bright in the pearly light of early morning, gazed down at the draclet with pride in his silver eyes.

The riders, her closest friends, smiled at her but stepped back to allow room for her to lead the yellow past. As soon as the draclet smelled the freshly killed carcasses, she abandoned Anevay in her rush to eat. Her razor-like teeth sliced through hair and hide to the meat below.

Anevay turned tear-filled eyes on her friends. Maleena smiled, joy radiating from her. “I’m so happy for you, Anevay.”

Mckale wrapped her in a hug, his silver eyes full of warmth and happiness. “Welcome to the ranks of Guardians, Anevay.”

Vaddoc, his amber eyes catching the morning light, hugged and welcomed her. Kirynn, her long red braid hanging to the back of her thighs, gave her a brief but welcoming hug as well. Serena, her face radiant with delight, threw a tight hug around her. “Not only a Healing sister, but also a rider sister.”

Taela gave her a fierce hug as well. “You have no idea how happy I am.”

Kellinar stepped forward, the beads at the ends of his pale blond braids clicking together and his ice-blue eyes sparkling. “It couldn’t have happened to a better person.” He enfolded both of them in his hug.

The morning came alive with bright, luminescent threads. Thousands of them flowed out from Anevay. More flowed out from Kellinar and still more from Taela. The threads reached out toward each other, weaving themselves tight. Weaving the three of them together.

Anevay only stood and gaped. As the last thread wove tight, they faded and were gone. Her eyes flickered between Taela and Kellinar. Maleena stood with her hands over her mouth, eyes wide. Anevay couldn’t tell if the tiny woman was shocked, or desperately trying to keep from laughing. When Maleena turned and buried her face in Mckale’s chest with muffled choking sounds coming from her throat, Anevay strongly suspected the latter.

She looked around at the others. Kirynn made no secret of her amusement. She laughed so hard she doubled over, tears leaking from the corners of her eyes. She hung on to Vaddoc for support. Vaddoc’s face held a bemused look as his eyes shifted between the three of them.

Serena ran her hands through her short, dark, spiky hair. Her blue eyes were pinned on Kellinar as if she tried to determine if this was somehow his fault, though her mouth twitched into a smile.

“Well.” Emallya stepped forward. “That was unexpected.”

“Unexpected?” The word sounded so mild compared to the shock driving Anevay’s mind into confusion.

“Oh, Anevay!” Taela’s voice held no animosity. In fact, new tears swam in her eyes as she hugged her again. “We are bondsisters.”

Kellinar shook his head. “Two of them?” His voice rose a little. “What, in the name of the Fates, am I supposed to do with two of them?”

“Well,” Kirynn said between gasps of laughter, “I’m sure you can think of one or two things.”

Kellinar glared at her, but his lips twitched. “You know what I mean.”

Bardeck smiled and clapped him on the shoulder. “I have been bondmated to bondsisters. It isn’t always easy, but you will find it as comfortable as a pair-bond.”

Anevay took a deep breath as Taela stepped back. “Are you angry, Kellinar?”

His face relaxed and his rich blue eyes softened. “No, Anevay. Not angry. Confused. Why would I be angry when I’ve been fortunate enough to be bonded to the only other woman, besides Taela, I could possibly love.”

Warmth flooded through her. He loved her. She’d always loved him but assumed with Taela as a bondmate, it wasn’t possible for them to be together. It was no secret Kellinar loved Taela with his whole heart. Now she was part of that. Emallya and Bardeck had been part of a tri-bond, but Emallya’s bondsister had died five hundred years ago. Anevay had never seen such a bond in real life. She studied Taela’s face. How would Taela feel about a shared bond?

Taela smiled as if she read her thoughts, which she probably had. “It is like the bond with our dragons. At first, you feel there is no room for anymore love. Then you find your bondmate, and the love expands to include him and his dragon.” She looked fondly up at the blue dragon. “All I feel now is another expansion of love to include you and your dragon. We are bondsisters. Like twins that should never have been separated.”

The yellow draclet finally finished stuffing herself full. Her questioning look pulled Anevay from her shock. “You must bathe away the blood, Latia.”

The yellow swung her wedge-shaped head toward the water. To encourage her, the adult dragons all splashed into the lake, their antics sloshing water well up into the grass around the shore. Latia ran for the water in an ungainly waddle. The older dragons settled to allow the youngster to accustom herself to her new environment without sloshing her around. Tellnox and Nydara watched her protectively.

Anevay watched the little yellow play with the older dragons. Her heart felt like it would burst. Even in her play, Latia’s emotions and thoughts were turned to her rider. Love flowed back and forth between them. The adults were beautiful but nothing in the world was so perfectly gorgeous as Latia.

The swim over, her scales cleaned of the blood from her feeding, the draclet waded to shore and walked to Anevay’s side. She yawned, exposing her dagger-like teeth. “Can I sleep now?”

Anevay smiled. “Of course you may, love.” She turned toward Bardeck. “Latia wants to sleep now.” Her eyes traveled up the rock wall of the rim to the broad ledge that fronted the lair Taela and Kellinar shared with their dragons. How was that going to work? She shook her head, that would be worked out later. It would be months before Latia could fly.

Bardeck pointed to the lower caves, no more than six feet off the ground with wide steps leading to them. “Choose your lair, little Latia.”

The draclet waddled forward, folding her leathery wings haphazardly over her back. She disappeared into one of the caves. Anxiety filled Anevay. She couldn’t see the draclet in the dark lair. She started for the steps.

Kirynn beat her there. “Allow me.” Every lamp in the lair and the sleeping quarters through the small door at the back flared to life.

“I could have set orbs,” Vaddoc said, walking up and putting his arm around Kirynn’s waist.

Kirynn shook her head. “She can’t put the orbs out when she is ready. This way she can turn the lamps down or blow them out if she wishes.”

“Thank you, Kirynn. You too, Vaddoc, for the offer,” Anevay said, her eyes on the draclet. Latia lay curled around, her head tucked beneath one wing, already sound asleep.

Kellinar and Taela walked into the lair. His arm around Taela, he looked uncertainly at Anevay as if unsure how to proceed. She didn’t blame him. What were they supposed to do now?

Taela’s smile was reassuring. “It is best if you sleep alone with your dragon until she is ready to join our dragons in their lair. This is your time to bond.”

Kellinar nodded. “Even Maleena and Mckale didn’t share a lair until their dragons could fly. We may be bondmates now, but that doesn’t negate what you and your dragon need now. And what you need is to be alone together.”

Anevay smiled, relief washing through her. Kellinar was right. They may be bondmates, but all she felt was the need to be with Latia. A servant bustled in and began arranging thick bedding and blankets on the sleeping bench inside the lair.

Anevay glanced through the door to the sleeping chamber. A wide, comfortable bed dominated the room. It didn’t appeal to her. Someday, she would sleep in a bed in a bedchamber. But not now. Now, she needed to be closer than that to the little yellow. Kirynn smiled at her again as she and Vaddoc left. Maleena offered soft words of congratulations and then she left with Mckale at her side.

Serena gave her a quick hug. “I’m so glad you are a rider now.” She glanced at Kellinar again. Suppressing a smile, she left. Bardeck and Emallya once more offered her a warm welcome to the ranks of riders before leaving.

Only Taela and Kellinar remained. “We can stay with you if you like,” Taela offered.

Anevay shook her head. “No, I really didn’t sleep much last night and I’m almost too tired to think straight. You two go ahead and get something to eat. I can tell you are both hungry.”

Kellinar hugged her. “If I have to be part of a tri-bond, I’m glad it was you.”

She smiled back. Then they too were gone and she stood alone in the lair. Her eyes rested briefly on the yellow again. Happiness nearly overwhelmed her. She blinked back tears and moved into the bedchamber to blow out the lamps. Back in the lair, she put out all but one lamp and settled down on the sleeping bench. She stared at the draclet curled against the far wall until sleep took her.

Maleena stood in her bedchamber, working her long chestnut hair into a braid that began at the crown of her head. Mckale watched her from the doorway to the lair. “I don’t know how you can do that without seeing what goes where.”

She shrugged and smiled. “Practice.”

After securing the end with a leather thong she reached to pull on her dress. The wide scars on her left arm stood out against her pale skin. More of the same ran across her back. A permanent reminder of her time in the Kormai.

The sleeves of the dress covered most of them although she didn’t make a special effort to cover them up. They were a part of what made her who she was. Maleena wasn’t ashamed of them. She’d gained the scars, but her captors had gained nothing. They were a badge of her own strength.

Her hands froze on the last button of the dress. Fear. No, not fear. Terror. Mckale’s shield usually kept the emotions of others at bay. Only a strong emotion could break through and this felt so strong she could almost taste it.

Mckale was in front of her in a few steps. He placed his hands gently on either side of her face, his silver eyes on hers. “Maleena, what is it?”

“Someone is afraid. More than afraid.”

“Who?”

Maleena cast her mind out, searching for the source. “Kirynn.”

Mckale’s brow furrowed. “Are you certain? I’ve never seen Kirynn afraid of anything.”

She took a deep breath. “I’m sure.” It seemed so alien to feel Kirynn’s fear. Like Mckale, she’d never seen the redhead afraid of anything. Not even when overwhelmed by a sea of Kojen.

“Where is she?” Mckale’s voice was calm.

Maleena focused on the feelings, confusion in her mind. “Her lair. What would frighten her so much in her lair?”

Mckale turned and ran down the hall. Maleena followed, running hard to keep up with his long strides. He took the stairs to the next level two at a time, reaching the doorway to Kirynn’s bedchamber before she did, his twin blades already drawn.

She found him in the bedchamber. Kirynn stood several paces away, her zahri held ready. The fear was stronger here. A dull ache started in Maleena’s head. Her eyes swept the smooth stone walls trying to pinpoint the cause of Kirynn’s emotion.

Maleena sensed Mckale’s confusion. His voice was cautious when he asked, “Kirynn, what is wrong? Maleena felt your fear through my shield.”

Kirynn stared at the base of the far wall. “I need to kill it. Creepy thing sneaking up on me like that. Except I have to get too close and I can’t set it on fire without lighting the wardrobe.”

Maleena followed her gaze. On the floor next to the wardrobe was the largest, hairiest spider she’d ever seen. The fear she felt wasn’t wholly Kirynn’s. A tiny spark of it came from the spider.

Mckale threw his head back and laughed, the tension easing from his shoulders. Kirynn shot him a murderous look. He sheathed his swords and clamped his mouth shut. Only his silver eyes still flashed with mirth in his expressionless face.

Maleena stepped between them. “You are truly frightened of that spider aren’t you?”

The redhead eyed the arachnid warily. Fear still rolled off her in waves. The dull ache in Maleena’s head grew. Mckale stepped forward, placing his fingers lightly on her wrist to reinforce the bond. The painful thrumming in her head eased at his touch.

Kirynn’s breath hissed through her teeth. “Yes, I am afraid of that  thing.” A shudder ran through her body.

Maleena stared at it for a moment. “I wonder where it came from. We don’t have any spiders like that in this region.”

“Who cares where it came from. Kill it.”

She shook her head. “No. I bet he hunts mice. Look at the size of him.”

Kirynn rolled her green eyes. “Who cares what it hunts?” Her voice turned pleading, “Just please kill it.”

“I’m going to take it to the records room. Mice are always trying to get after the scrolls.”

“Cat takes care of the mice. Or one of the others running around here.”

Maleena smiled. “Cat will be going with Namir and Vaddoc when they leave.”

Kirynn snorted. “I forgot about that. Fine, do whatever. I’m leaving until it’s gone.” She turned and stalked from the chamber, one eye on the spider as if she expected it to attack her.

Mckale crossed his arms and shook his head. “Kirynn afraid? Who would have expected such a thing?”

Maleena laughed. “And of a spider of all things.” She crossed the lair slowly, reaching out to the furry arachnid with her mind, washing him with soothing feelings.

The spider watched her approach but didn’t move. She lowered her hand to the floor and sent a picture of him in her hand and then him snug in the records room with mice to hunt.

The spider stared back at her with its too-many eyes and then climbed onto her palm. The hairy monster took up her whole hand. She raised it to eye level and sent another picture of the hold with a question behind it.

Strange, fuzzy images flickered through her mind. It took her a minute to realize she was seeing things through the eyes of the spider. She felt, more than saw, a bird snatch the spider from a forest floor. Dim images of light and dark swirled through her vision until she felt the impact of rock as it tumbled to a ledge.

Maleena glanced at Mckale. He still had his arms crossed, but one eyebrow was raised in question. She smiled. “I think a bird dropped him here. It’s very dark and fuzzy and it was based more on what he felt than what he saw.” She sent the picture of the records room again then tuned and started for the door. Mckale backed away.

She rolled her eyes. “Not you too?”

He smiled but his eyes were on her hand. “I’m not afraid of him, but I don’t want him crawling on me either. Besides, Heleanna says there is a field that is dying. The crop is anyway. She and the other senior mages tried working on it yesterday. It didn’t go well. I’m going to take the other two Green Riders down today and see if we can do something more. They have a pretty good handle on their magic now.” He backed up several more steps as she passed him.

She laughed and slipped out of Kirynn’s bedchamber, the spider still perched on her hand. The hairs on his legs tickled her fingers. It didn’t take long to get to the caldera floor. She ignored the gasps of servants when she passed them on her way through the Great Hall to the small door set midway down its length.

Anevay sat at the large desk in the middle of the room. A mixture of light orbs and candles cast warm light across her creamed coffee skin. Maleena smiled at her. “Already back to work after this morning’s flight?”

“Latia left with the others to hunt. I might as well spend the rest of the afternoon working on finding what I need for the weave.”

“You are certain you will find something? You’ve been searching for nearly a year now.”

Anevay nodded. “It’s here. I can feel it. I’ve already found some of it. The beginning of the weave is coming together.” She looked at Maleena’s upraised hand then and gasped. “What is that?”

Maleena’s smile got wider. “It’s a spider.”

“Why, in the name of the Fates, did you bring him here?”

“He eats mice and bugs. I figured he could help you out in here.”

Anevay eyed the spider doubtfully. “You want him to live in here?”

“Mice are always a problem and the cats can’t get in here very often.”

“What about Cat? He comes in here plenty.”

Maleena sighed and walked to a darkened corner of the room. She knelt and lowered her hand to the floor. The spider crawled off and disappeared under a shelf. She stood and turned to Anevay. “Cat will be leaving with Namir.”

“He is really going to Slide to Shadereen with Namir and Vaddoc?” Anevay asked, her eyes on the spot where the spider disappeared.

“Namir refuses to leave without him. Who knew a dragon would get so attached to a cat?” Maleena laughed. “Kirynn about had a panic attack over that spider.”

Anevay’s startled eyes met hers. “Kirynn? Afraid? And of a spider of all things?”

Maleena nodded. “She was so scared I felt it in my lair. I thought something was horribly wrong. Mckale went running with swords drawn only to find her trying to kill it without getting too close. I guess even the length of her zahri wasn’t far enough.”

Anevay shook her head, her waist-length black ringlets swaying. Her dark eyes lit with amusement. “I wish I had been there to see that. Kirynn can stand against Shadow Riders, Shadow Dragons, and a sea of Kojen, but a single spider terrifies her.”

“He is a rather impressive looking spider.” Maleena laughed walking back to stand by the desk. “I guess it’s a good thing Kojen don’t have eight hairy legs.”

Anevay laughed with her. “Vaddoc will never let her live that down. What is she going to do when she gets to Shadereen?”

Maleena paused. “What do you mean?”

Mirth flushed Anevay’s creamed coffee skin. “Hasn’t she studied up on Shadereen?”

“Of course. She’s learned all about their politics and traditions.”

Anevay shook her head. “She hasn’t studied what lives there besides humans? I wish I could be there to see her run screaming across the desert.”

“Why?”

“They have sand spiders there. They make this one look tiny.”

Maleena tried to suppress her laughter. “Well, maybe they won’t see any.”

Kellinar came through the door, a plate of food in his hand. “What’s so funny?”

Maleena shook her head. “I’ll let Anevay tell you later.”

Kellinar moved the scroll Anevay was looking at and set the plate down. She stared at him. “You didn’t have to do that.”

He dropped a kiss on her hair. “I know, but you will never get around to getting it yourself and you need to eat. I can feel it. Is there anything I can help you with?”

She sighed and leaned back in her chair. “No, not really. But if you want to find Taela for me, I could really use her help with this. Some of the images are easier for her to read.”

“I will hunt her down for you.”

Maleena waited and walked back through the Great Hall with him. “What have you got planned for the day?”

He ran his hand over his braids. “After I find Taela, Dhovara and I are going to spend time working with Tania. It won’t be long before her dragon is ready to Slide, Aylene’s only a month younger than Latia. Tomorrow Dhovara and I both take our turns on the boats. The other senior mages can help with Tania then of course.”

She smiled. “Sounds like you will be busy.”

He smiled back. “Busier than I’ve ever been.”

They walked out onto the inner plateau. The lake at the far end sparkled in the sun and next to it five young dragons slept. Two greens, two blues, and a gold. Loki’s gold, Merru, was nowhere to be seen. “When do you leave?”

Kellinar’s face took on a grim look. “As soon as my turn on the boats is over. Another reason I need to work with Tania. Her magic is quite strong.”

“It won’t be easy leaving Anevay behind.”

He let out a long breath. “Truthfully, I’m glad Latia is too young to Slide well. If I could find a way to make Taela and Paki stay, I would. I understand we need to get the nations behind us, but Trilene is not going to welcome us with open arms. At least Serena understands what we are walking into. Taela never left Haraban when she was growing up. She lived a sheltered life there.”

Worry and sadness rolled off him. Maleena’s heart went out to him. “Galdrilene can’t fight this war alone, Kellinar, and you can’t shelter Taela from the world.” Maleena leveled a stern look at him. “And you can’t make her stay.”

Pain flashed across his face even as he laughed softly. “Don’t I know it. When I suggested it might be best to stay, she threatened to stab me.” The laughter died leaving only anguish in his ice-blue eyes. “I don’t know what I would do if something happened to Taela or Anevay. Losing Serena would hurt more than I can express. She has always been my friend. But what I feel for Taela and Anevay…”

Maleena reached up and placed a finger against his lips. “I understand. You know I do. I wouldn’t be able to bear it if something happened to Mckale.” She wrapped her arms around his waist in a hug. “Anevay is staying here out of harm’s way and Taela is not without her defenses. She may have lived a sheltered life before the call, but you forget she survived the Kormai. And you are wrong if you think for a single moment she is not just as worried about you.”

He sighed and returned the hug, smiling. “Did I ever thank you for not dying on me?”

“Not in those exact words, but yes.”

“Then I’m saying it again.”

Maleena glanced up as the aura of an approaching person rippled across her mind. The aura had a brisk, sure feel to it. “Tania is looking for you.”

“I still have to find Taela.”

“I can find her for you if you like. In fact, I can find her faster.”

“Thank you, Maleena.”

A slight, young woman strode through the doors of the Great Hall. The sun shone off her rich black skin. Her black hair hung in a multitude of braids. The blue and white beads on the ends of the braids clicked as she walked. She smiled as she approached them. “Dhovara said I might find you here.”

Maleena smiled in welcome. “Hello, Tania.”

“Good afternoon, Maleena.”

Maleena turned to Kellinar. “I must go. I still have duties to attend to at the Tower of Spirit after I find Taela. And then later, Taela and I have some experimenting to do.”

He frowned. “I wish you two would stop, it isn’t safe.”

Maleena laughed. “Nonsense. We only messed something up once.”

“And blinded everyone in the Dragon Hold of their senses.”

“It only took us an hour to reverse it.”

He shifted, visibly uncomfortable with the memory. “It felt longer than that.”

She patted his shoulder. “We will be careful, I promise.”

Still laughing softly, she walked into the Great Hall. She and Taela had made a few mistakes, but they had learned far more than they messed up. She reached out with her mind, “Taela?”

The return sending came immediately. “Yes?”

“Anevay needs you in the records room if you have time.”

“Of course. We can meet there after dinner.”

“I will be there.”

Maleena walked through the city, enjoying the sweet smell of roses on the early summer breeze. After two years, her fear of crowds and the people of Galdrilene had faded. It didn’t ease the knot of anxiety in her gut though. In less than a month, she and Mckale would leave for Calladar.

She’d become used to the people here, but Calladar might not be so welcoming to magic users even if some of the ruling houses knew about Galdrilene. She took a deep breath. It would all be okay.

Taela walked into the Great Hall on her way to the records room. Dhovara, the Mage Councilor of the Tower of Air and Water, and a Fire mage stood with a young woman in the hall. Something about the woman tickled Taela’s memory. Golden hair hung to her waist and framed a heart-shaped face. Why did she look so familiar? The blonde turned her head to look at the Fire mage. Taela stopped short, her breath freezing in her chest.

Ropey scars ran down the side of the woman’s face and trailed down her neck. More scars marred her hands and arms. Memories flooded Taela. A massive cave with white marble walls and a polished onyx floor. The woman cowering from Sadira, yet defying her at the same time.

She looked at Taela and recognition flashed in her eyes. Taela forced herself to breathe again, to walk forward. Her eyes didn’t leave the familiar face. She stopped a few paces from them. The Fire mage turned toward her. “Hello, Di’shan. We have a new mage.”

Taela nodded. She’d always felt a spark of something in this woman. “Welcome, Kalila.”

“You two know each other?” Dhovara asked.

Kalila glanced at her. “Yes.” She turned her gaze back on Taela. “So you did escape. I have wondered about it and thought of you and Paki often. Is Paki…well?”

Taela smiled. “Paki is well. She is a mature dragon now. How are you here? How did you get away?”

“Everyone left the Kormai to pursue you. I tried to get Drisa and Larna to come with me, but they were broken. They are empty shells of themselves. So I…I left them and ran.”

The two mages looked back and forth between them in confusion. Guilt rolled off Kalila in waves. Taela shook her head. “You did what you had to. You have no reason to feel so much guilt. How did you make it here?”

“I nearly died in my escape. A band of Traders taking a short cut found me on the Ash Plains just south of Calladar. Their Shamam healed me. She used magic and knew I could too. I traveled with them until we reached Yari then she introduced me to Aleel.” She nodded her head toward the Fire mage. “Aleel brought me the rest of the way.”

“You’ve been traveling for over a year to get here?”

Kalila smiled sadly. “I have nowhere else to go. I can’t go home. Not when I can use magic. Madeir, the Shamam, proved that magic doesn’t drive you insane.”

Taela gave her a hug. “I’m glad you found your way here. Galdrilene is a like a balm on open wounds. You will be happy here.”

Kalila returned the hug and stepped away. “I hope so. My life is not what I expected. Everything seems confused and turned on its head. My time in the Kormai with Sadira changed me. I’m not sure I would fit back into my old life even if I couldn’t use magic. The things that seemed so important before no longer have any worth for me.”

Dhovara smiled, dark eyes full of warmth. “You will find your feet here. Aleel is going to take you to the Tower of Air and Water. I have things I must attend to in the hold, but I will see you later.”

Taela watched as Aleel led Kalila away. She turned to the small door that would take her through a short hallway to the records room. Memories from over a year ago intruded her thoughts.

The door to the records room opened before she even reached for the latch. Anevay stood in the doorway, concern on her face. “What’s wrong?”

Taela shook her head. “Nothing.”

Anevay pulled her into the room. “I may not be a Spirit mage, but I can feel your distress through our bond. Why are you upset?”

Taela let out a deep sigh. “I’m not upset really. In fact, I’m happy. I told you about Kalila, remember?” Her bondsister nodded. “She’s here.”

“Here? In Galdrilene?”

“Yes. She escaped Sadira. She can use magic and with help, made her way here. I’m happy for her, but seeing her brought up a lot of bad memories.”

In her mind, Taela heard the screams of those Kovan tortured with his ‘healing.’ Screams she could do nothing but run and hide from. Images of Maleena—battered, bloodied, and nearly dead—being carried through the marble cavern. The overwhelming fear that Paki would be killed. Too many memories she wished she could forget.

She didn’t notice the tears until Anevay enfolded her in her arms. She stood quietly in the arms of her bondsister and let her silent tears fall. Images and memories of her time in the Kormai, short though it was, burned through her mind.

She sensed Kellinar’s agitation. He would feel her distress too. She pulled away from Anevay and worked to gain control. The past couldn’t be changed; only learned and moved on from.

Anevay’s dark eyes searched hers. “Are you okay?”

Deep love washed through her from her bondsister. More love surrounded her heart and soul, flowing in from Paki, Kellinar, Latia, and Shryden. The memories faded to the background where they belonged. She had so much now. So much more than she ever expected.

Taela nodded to Anevay. “Yes, I’m okay now.” She sucked in a deep breath and wiped away the tears. “Maleena said you needed my help.”

Anevay smiled. “I think I’ve found another key, but some of the symbols are clearer to you. If you wouldn’t mind translating a few.”

“I don’t mind. Maleena is meeting me here later anyway.”

Anevay’s brow furrowed. “You two will be experimenting again?”

“Of course. We have things to figure out too. Besides we can’t let you have all of the fun.”

Her bondsister shook her head and laughed softly. “Just try not to blind everybody this time.”

Taela rolled her eyes. “Why does everyone keep bringing that up? We only did that one time and it was nearly two weeks ago.”

“Losing all of your senses at once so you are left standing deaf, numb, and blind for nearly an hour left quite an impression on everyone.”

Taela mulled that over. She would have to see if Maleena remembered exactly what they did that day; it might come in handy later. Would their friends and bondmates be willing to be experimented on? Probably not. Maybe they could practice on each other.

She sat down at the desk with Anevay beside her and immersed herself in the symbols; the meaning of each line clear as the morning sun to her mind.

Vaddoc walked through the hold trying to suppress his growing irritation. Where had Loki gone off to now? He knew Merru shouldn’t leave the hold. Only a couple months younger than Latia, Merru’s scales had just hardened and the young dragon had taken his first solo flight. Vaddoc didn’t really believe anyone in Galdrilene would harm the draclet, but it wasn’t a chance worth taking.

It wasn’t because Loki didn’t care for the young gold dragon. Anyone could tell he adored Merru. It didn’t help that the draclet was just like his rider. The two were constantly disappearing and getting into trouble. Soon the young pair would be flying together. Vaddoc could only guess the kind of trouble they would get into then.

He would never forget the day they’d stopped everyone’s heart by leaping off the waterfall at the edge of the caldera. Merru’s wings weren’t strong enough to lift himself into the air, much less a rider. But he’d thrown his wings out and locked them, gliding down the seventeen hundred foot drop.

Vaddoc shook his head at the memory. He thought he would never breath right again after that. Every adult dragon had dived over the cliff after them, terrified the two would die. Not even a stern talking to by Bardeck and Emallya, or the long lecture from Marda, had elicited any chagrin in the two.

They’d made many such dives since and sneaked out as often as possible. Loki mastered light-bending so fast, Vaddoc was sure the boy had been using the weave without realizing it for a long time. It made sense. It was probably how he got past all of the Spirit mages every time.

Vaddoc stopped on the inner terrace, his eyes sweeping the caldera again one more time. The adult dragons, back from their hunt, bathed in the lake. He didn’t bother asking Namir; it wouldn’t do any good. Merru wouldn’t answer the older dragon anyway. Not when he and Loki were off getting into trouble. It wouldn’t help to ask Emallya, Taela, or Maleena either. Just as no one sensed magic in him, the Silver Riders couldn’t sense him when he was cloaked in a light-bending weave.

Emallya didn’t understand why no one could sense his magic. Every senior mage was able to sense the magic in another, even a young mage just balanced on the edge of first use. But not with Loki. Something in him kept any of the mages from knowing he was ready to use magic the year before when he went to the Kormai. It had kept Emallya from sensing it in him the moment she met him. But it hadn’t stopped Merru from finding Loki, or bonding with him, too young though Loki was.

Namir looked up at him, water running in streams off his golden scales. His amber eyes held humor in them. “You might as well find something else to do. Loki and Merru won’t be found until they wish to be.”

“Why do you dragons not make the two behave?”

Vaddoc felt Namir’s mental shrug. “Merru is his own being. As far as Loki, we like him.”

Vaddoc shook his head. The same answer the dragons always gave when they let Loki get away with too much. The boy could probably set Galdrilene on fire and the dragons would find no wrong it in. Come to think of it, it was probably a very good thing Loki’s magic dealt with light and energy, and not fire. What a mess that would be.

“How is Loki supposed to learn to be a responsible Dragon Rider when he acts like this?” he sent to Namir.

“Do not worry so, Vaddoc. Loki will be what he needs to be when he needs to be it.”

Heaving a deep sigh, he walked back into the hold. Loki needed training. Vaddoc would leave for Shadereen soon. Hadar would have to teach the boy. If Loki actually behaved and did what he was supposed to.

He met Maleena in the Great Hall. She smiled at him, her violet eyes sparkling with suppressed laughter. “What is so funny?”

“You are broadcasting your thoughts so loudly, I can hear them through my shield. Don’t worry so about Loki. He will be fine. And quit scowling, it makes you look more fierce than you are.”

“How can he be trained if he keeps disappearing? He is my charge now and I cannot keep track of him. What kind of teacher am I that my pupil chases after whatever he fancies?”

Maleena laughed softly. “You are too hard on yourself and have too little faith in Loki. He is a lot like Kellinar. Trust Loki, he will turn out alright.”

“Maybe you are right. I guess he will come to me when he is ready to learn something. If I am not here, Bardeck is and so is Hadar.”

Maleena looked thoughtful for a moment; then a mischievous glint lit up her eyes. “If you still want Kirynn to go to Shadereen, I would suggest you don’t mention sand spiders.”

Vaddoc gazed at her in confusion. “Why?”

“Apparently, Kirynn’s only real fear in the world is spiders.”

“Spiders? She’s completely fearless in the face of armed enemies but terrified of spiders? How do you know?”

“She found a spider about the size of my hand in her bedchamber. She couldn’t even get within zahri range to kill it. Believe me, feeling terror from Kirynn was confusing.”

He threw his head back and roared with laughter Sand spiders were much larger than Maleena’s hand. He tried to imagine Kirynn running in fear from one. His mind couldn’t conjure the image. He shook his head. He would have ample opportunity to see it in person, especially if they visited the border villages in Shadereen.

Maleena’s smile faded and her violet eyes took on a look of concentration. Vaddoc watched her carefully. It was the look she got when her mind was being pulled elsewhere. “Maleena?”

Her eyes flashed to his face. “He let his weave down for a moment. I believe you will find Loki and Merru down by the tanneries.”

Vaddoc smiled. “Thank you, Maleena.”

“You’re welcome.”

He hurried for the broad stairs beyond the outer terrace. In all likelihood, Loki would be gone from the tannery by the time he got there. He paused, turned abruptly, and walked back toward the inner terrace. His long strides carried him past Maleena. She gave him a knowing smile.

He walked out onto the inner terrace. “Namir, would you kindly take me to the tannery?”

The gold immediately started in his direction. “Of course. Although I highly doubt either one of them will show any repentance for missing their lesson today.”

“I still have time. If I have my way, they will not miss it.”

He strode to the equipment cave and pulled Namir’s well-oiled saddle from its rack. Although the seat was sized for him, the skirts were made to fit over the shoulders of the full-grown dragon. Though large, it was surprisingly light. He stood on Namir’s leg and settled it over the dragon’s shoulder peak where the dorsal ridge scales were the smallest. It only took a few minutes for him to fasten all of the straps and settle into the saddle. He buckled the two safety straps snug over his upper thighs.

Namir launched into the air without any command from Vaddoc. They were one; two halves of the same being. Their hearts, souls and lives were blended together until the only separation was that of their individual bodies.

His spirit soared with Namir over the edge of the waterfall. It was impossible not to feel the thrill of flight and the enjoyment of being in the air with his dragon. Namir locked his great golden wings and twisted into a sharp dive, pushing Vaddoc against the safety straps. Pure joy flowed into him from the dragon. They shared the love and happiness together.

All too soon, the tannery came into view below. For a moment, Vaddoc understood how Loki might want to escape and be alone on an adventure with Merru. Nothing was quite so beautiful as the gift of a dragon-bond.

“He is there.”

Namir’s sending brought his thoughts back to the present. Yes, taking off and having fun with your dragon was great, but they all had their duties. Duty was something you didn’t shirk lightly. Vaddoc’s upbringing and training had taught him that.

He followed Namir’s sight path and there stood Loki and his golden Merru gazing up at them. The workers in the tannery stopped their labors to watch Namir land. Many smiled and waved. The big gold rumbled a greeting at them.

Tell, the head of the tannery, walked toward them. “I’m assuming you are here for these two truants,” he said as he got closer.

Vaddoc cast a glare at the youngsters. “Yes, it appears they forgot they had a lesson today.” He had to work at holding the glare. The two looked unabashed and so completely pleased with themselves, he really wanted to laugh. Oh the fun and innocence of childhood. It really wasn’t Loki’s fault. He was so young for the position of a Dragon Rider. Nowhere in the histories was there a record of someone so young bonding with a dragon. No one had ever been called before their sixteenth year of age. “I hope they have not caused too much disturbance to your work.”

Tell shook his head. “Not at all. Full of questions, as usual, but careful to stay out of our way.”

Vaddoc looked back at Loki, “I expect you in the hold within an hour.” He sent to Namir, “Please back me up.”

Namir lowered his head to Merru’s. “It is time, young one, to behave as a dragon. I trust you will not force this issue. Vaddoc is a fair and patient teacher; he does not deserve this disrespect.”

Merru lowered his gaze to the ground and Vaddoc heard his reply through the mind of his dragon. “We will be there, Namir. I am sorry. We did not think of it as disrespect.”

Loki stared at Merru for a moment before turning to Vaddoc. “Merru is right. I really didn’t think of it like that. We will be there, Vaddoc. For this lesson and any others. But we still won’t stay in the hold if there are no lessons to attend. We will have some fun.”

Vaddoc nodded. “An acceptable compromise. Thank you for that.” He glanced at Tell, “Thank you for letting them spend their time here. May peace be on your day.”

Namir brought his wings down in a rush as he launched himself into the sky again. He climbed quickly until he was high enough to ride the air currents. He started to coast toward the hold, but Vaddoc stopped him. “It will take Loki and Merru most of the hour to make it back to the hold on foot since Merru can’t yet carry a rider. Let us enjoy a little flight time.”

“That sounds wonderful.” Namir turned and soared out over the bay, his golden scales glittering in the sun.

Maleena stood with Taela at the desk in the records room, the Ka’ti open in front of them. She watched the translations of the symbols as they formed in her friend’s mind.

“Oh, what about that one?”

Taela’s eyes stopped moving over the page. “That one?”

“No, the one just before. Yes, that one.”

“It does look interesting.”

Maleena nodded. “It looks incredibly useful, especially since we will both be leaving for crowded cities soon.”

Taela glanced up at her. “Should we try it?”

Maleena hesitated for a moment. “We have to know if it works.”

“Who are we going to try it on?”

“Hopefully not the entire hold this time.” They both laughed at the memory.

“What is so funny?” Mckale’s deep voice made them look up. He stood in the doorway with Kellinar.

Maleena smiled. “Nothing of importance. What are you two doing here?”

“Kellinar informed me you intended to experiment with weaves from the Ka’ti again.” His silver eyes were steady on hers. “Are you sure that is a good idea?”

Taela nodded. “Absolutely. There are weaves in here that can be very helpful to Maleena and me. This one we just found, it may make it easier for us to be in crowded rooms. We have to try.”

Maleena smiled. “We will do our best to keep it from affecting everyone.”

Kellinar cleared his throat and glanced at the taller man next to him. “Mckale and I are actually here to offer ourselves as your victims. Maybe if you have someone specific to aim these weaves at, you won’t involve the entire hold.”

Maleena glanced at Taela. The other woman shrugged and she looked back at the men. “You are sure you want to do this?”

Mckale nodded; warmth and humor in his eyes. “Just try not to do anything permanent.”

“What was the weave again?” Maleena sent to Taela.

Taela's eyes scanned the page again. “There it is. Are you sure about using our bondmates for this?”

Maleena glanced briefly toward the men. “I don’t think this weave will hurt them. In fact, it will be interesting to see if it will even work on bondmates.”

Kellinar looked at Mckale. “Watching them talk in their heads is unnerving.”

“Yes,” he agreed. “Nothing like getting meaningful looks and hearing half said remarks to set you on edge. I hope they don’t have anything too drastic planned for us.”

Taela chortled. “Sorry, we are so comfortable ‘talking’ in our minds to each other; I didn’t think it would bother you.”

Kellinar’s blue eyes twinkled. “Only when I don’t know what you have planned for me bondmate. After all, you did threaten to stab me this morning.”

Mckale’s eyes settled on Taela. “She threatened to stab you?”

Kellinar nodded. “I suggested she stay here when Serena and I leave for Trilene.”

Mckale rolled his eyes. “I told you not to mention it. I said it wouldn’t go over well.”

Taela glared at Kellinar. “He will not leave me behind while he flies into danger.”

“Yes, much better that we both be in danger.” Kellinar’s eyes held a touch of the sadness Maleena had seen in them earlier.

She laid her hand on Taela’s arm. “Let us get back to the task at hand.”

Taela held the translation steady in her mind and Maleena reached out to the river of Silver magic flowing through her. She selected several threads, double checking the translation several times. When she was sure she had the right strands, she wove them together, laying each one carefully over the other until the weave looked identical to the one Taela held in her mind.

Maleena looked at Mckale leaning against the doorway. She smiled at him, her heart overflowing, then sent the weave spinning through the air toward him. He couldn’t see it of course; his eyes were still on her even as the weave settled over his head.

Taela leaned closer. “Did it work?”

Maleena shook her head. “I can still feel everything from him.” She let the weave unravel.

“He is your bondmate; it might not work with him. Try it on Kellinar, maybe it will work on him.”

Kellinar laughed. “You are so kind, my love.”

Taela shook her head. “Stop being silly. It isn’t anything that will hurt you. Or it shouldn’t anyway.”

“That’s very comforting.”

Maleena suppressed a smile and made another weave identical to the first and sent it toward her friend. This time, when it settled over him, she felt the immediate absence of all emotion from him.

Her eyes widened and she crossed the room until she stood an arm’s length away. Still, she felt nothing. She purposely reached out with her mind toward his. It felt dim, as if a heavy curtain was wrapped around it. She reached out and touched his arm. His unblocked emotions poured into her. He was a good person with a good soul. The emotional flood wasn’t painful and caused no discomfort thanks to the shield Mckale provided.

She dropped her hand and stepped back. Mckale stood straighter, ready to help her if she needed it. But standing there without touching him, Kellinar’s emotions again receded behind the heavy curtain. She turned to Taela. “It works, but not with your bondmate.” Maleena unraveled the weave and let it dissipate. “You try.”

She watched as Taela wove the threads together and sent them toward Mckale. A look of wonder crossed her face. “This is going to be perfect for crowded rooms.” The weave unraveled and fell away from Mckale.

Kellinar’s eyes glanced first at Taela, then at her. “What did it do exactly?”

Taela smiled at him. “It helps block others. In a crowded room it would reduce the emotions to nothing more than a murmur.”

Mckale nodded. “That will be helpful, but it doesn’t change anything when you touch someone?”

Maleena shook her head. “No, for that your shield will have to be enough.”

Deep sadness from Nydara washed through her and she looked at Taela. Tears shimmered in the other woman’s eyes.

Kellinar walked forward. “Taela?”

“Emallya didn’t make it in time.” Maleena looked at Mckale and saw her sorrow reflected in his eyes.

Taela took a deep breath and wiped away the tear trailing down her face. “The egg is dead.”

Maleena sent waves of comfort to her dragon. Nydara’s despair filled her. Tellnox also grieved the loss of the egg. It was the first egg of their clutch to die. Mckale let his breath out in a long exhalation and moved to put his arm around her waist. “We knew this would happen.The Fates have been kind to allow so many to hatch already.”

He was right. Seven of the eggs had sang and been united with their riders. It could be so much worse. Still, she felt a pang of sadness at the two lost lives and a touch of anger that the destined rider had either taken their own life, or was killed for no reason. It made their journeys back to their previous homes all that more important. They had to let people know. Hopefully, the nations would listen.

Maleena swung her sword in a smooth arch only to have it blocked again. She spun in a quick movement. Not fast enough, Emallya’s blade sent her sprawling. With a growl, she grabbed her sword from where it fell and pulled herself to her feet. Wiping the sweat from her face, she set her feet and brought the sword up again.

Emallya hesitated a moment. Maleena knew the older woman waited to make sure she was ready before launching an attack. This time, Maleena managed to slide smoothly away from Emallya’s blade and make a counterattack. She held her own for a few minutes before Emallya’s wooden practice blade smacked into her again.

Maleena hit the ground with a grunt, her ribs aching. She rolled with it and came up on her feet. Again, she set herself, determined.

Emallya shook her head and sat down on the grass of the practice field. “We’ve been at this long enough today. You are already going to hurt tonight. I imagine you already have some very fancy bruises.”

“I have to learn this, Emallya. We prepare to leave Galdrilene. I can’t be defenseless.” Maleena let her wooden sword drop to her side. “Please.”

“You are hardly defenseless, Maleena.” Emallya leaned back on her hands and stretched her legs out in front of her, ankles crossed. “You just may have to depend more on your magic.”

Maleena flopped to the ground, with a frustrated groan. “Why is this so hard for me? Kellinar didn’t know the sword before he started training with you and that was only a month or so before I started. Kirynn is only two years older than me and infinitely more skilled.”

Emallya smiled. “Kellinar has a natural aptitude with weapons. Even so he prefers the zahri which is akin to a quarterstaff. He has been using one of those for many years. Taela shares his natural abilities with weapons, and she trained for several years before she heard the call. Serena struggles as you do. Like you, the handling of weapons doesn’t come naturally.”

Maleena glanced across the field where Kirynn moved in a blur against Vaddoc. “What about Kirynn. Is she a natural? Are you a natural?”

Emallya threw back her head and laughed before looking at her. “No. I was not a natural. Before becoming a Dragon Rider, I never touched a weapon, never considered being a fighter. I dreamt of a husband, a home, and lots of babies. I am good because I have had over six hundred years to become so.”

Maleena glanced at the lethal redhead soundly beating the taller and stronger Borderman. “And Kirynn? She hasn’t had six hundred years. Vaddoc is very skilled, not to mention bigger and stronger. How is it she always beats him?”

The older woman followed her gaze. “Kirynn is a combination of natural affinity and extreme training. No one trains like the Boromari. Not even their nearest neighbor, Kanther. Which is why Kanther is losing. One wonders why they would choose to pick a fight with Boromar. The Boromari are generally a peaceful nation. They don’t invade other nations but they vigorously defend what is theirs.”

Maleena watched Kirynn slip past an attack by Vaddoc and deliver a solid blow to Vaddoc. “How do they train?”

“At the age of six, all Boromari children go to weapons training.” Emallya paused to brush away the hair tossed into her face by the breeze. “They are not treated harshly. They have warm comfortable beds, good food, warm water to bathe with, and everything they need. They are required to spend a month in training. At the end of a month if they wish to go home they may. However, if they choose to stay, they must complete an entire year of training. Boys and girls are housed together. They do everything together. Eat, sleep, bathe, train, everything.

Emallya shifted forward, drawing her legs up. “At the end of the year, any who want to go home may do so. Again, any that wish to stay are committed to another year. Each year they have that choice until they reach the age of ten at which time they must commit to two years. Only those that are truly doing well are asked to stay.

“At twelve they are determined old enough to no longer need the coddling of small children. They move from the comfortable barracks to the interim barracks, where there are only hard cots for sleeping and cold water for bathing. After two years of that, they can again choose to go home. Any that stay must do so for the next six years when the training is finished.”

Emallya watched Kirynn land another blow on Vaddoc. “They are fourteen then and move to the intermediate barracks, which really aren’t barracks at all. They are issued small tents and cook pots to simulate battlefield conditions. They are often required to sleep without tent or bedroll. It is a matter of pride to graduate from the cots and protective walls of the actual barracks. Warm food is provided, but they are expected to live off the land as much as possible. Few take the provided food. Although they will face no recriminations from their trainers, they will from their peers. Their age-mates will poke fun at them and generally make it undesirable. A lack of ability in living off the land translates to a lack of ability overall to their age-mates.”

Maleena listened to Emallya while she watched Kirynn’s tireless sparing with Vaddoc. “Do many children stay?”

Emallya smiled. “Enough. To complete the training is considered the highest honor in Boromar. The children are fed that with their mother’s milk. From the age of six, Kirynn has eaten, slept, and breathed weapons and training with them. Her days were consumed with it. Vaddoc is bigger and stronger, but the Boromari teach women and smaller men how to compensate for that. The only danger to Kirynn is another Boromari soldier. And then only if a Dragon Rider. Kirynn is much faster and stronger than anyone who is unbonded.”

Maleena drew her knees up, wrapping her arms around them. “So I’m doomed to always be worthless with a sword?”

Emallya shook her head. “Eventually, you will get better if you keep at it. Even I got better. It only took about a hundred years, but I did succeed in becoming a master with the sword.”

Maleena glared at the practice sword lying in the grass. “I don’t know why I am even bothering to take a sword with me.”

“You are good enough to take on someone of middling skill. Especially with your bond-heightened strength and speed.”

Maleena gazed at the older woman for a long time, trying to imagine a young Emallya before the call. One who wanted a husband and lots of babies. “You got more than a husband, you got a bondmate. Did you ever get any of the babies you wanted?”

Emallya looked away and stared at the mountains marching away into the distance. “I had three children. My second child, a son, became a Dragon Rider. He was killed by a Shadow Rider fifteen years after Hatching his dragon. My youngest became a mage. He never had any children of his own and died in the last battle of the War of Fire. My oldest had not a spark of magic in her. She had three children. By the time the last battle came around, I had seven great-grandchildren. The youngest great-grandchild was only a tiny baby. She and her family were all killed in the last battle of the War of Fire. There was nothing left of their home but charred ruins. After Rylin was killed, I no longer cycled. A rider cannot cycle if their dragon does not and my dragon was dead.”

She turned back to look at Maleena, her eyes hardened by memories of despair. “Shadow Riders took everything from me except Bardeck, Mernoth, and…”

“And what?” Maleena’s brow furrowed; the older woman had left something out.

Emallya shook her head and smiled slightly. “Nothing. It is just sometimes the things that survived surprise me.”

Maleena nodded, thinking the other woman meant the Ka’ti. “You only had three in all that time?”

Emallya chuckled. “As you have discovered, we are not a particularly fertile lot. Our dragons have strange cycles and it messes up the rhythm of our own. How many times have you cycled in the two and a half years since you hatched Nydara?”

“Four…maybe five,” Maleena admitted. It saddened her that it could still be many years before she might have a child.

“You see? With your cycles so rare and erratic, it is hard for your body to be receptive and allow a babe to settle in.” Emallya smiled. “It will happen eventually, I am sure.”

Kirynn’s shadow fell across them as she and Vaddoc walked up. “It’s hard to practice when you are lounging around.”

Maleena tipped her head back and looked up at her friend. The redhead smiled at her. “Emallya decided I had enough and it was time to stop. Honestly, I think she grew tired of knocking me into the dirt repeatedly.”

Kirynn laughed. “You will get it. And even if you are never great with weapons, you have other strengths. Not everyone is meant to be a warrior.”

Kirynn sat in the saddle on Syrakynn, waiting for Vaddoc. The light orbs and torches set around the caldera rim held back the dark of a new moon. Two Defenders stood near, ready to lead the horses through the Slide. Thanks to her dragon-bond, she could pick out the scrollwork on the horses saddles. Namir stood to her left, Cat already on the saddle. Kirynn shook her head, remembering the night Cat had scared a very young Namir. Now, the dragon refused to leave for Shadereen without the animal.

Vaddoc strode across the caldera floor to Namir’s side. He stopped to fasten the catcher strap then stepped up on the gold’s front leg and pulled himself into the saddle. Cat trilled and watched with orange eyes as Vaddoc fastened the safety straps.

Syrakynn shifted, ready to lift off and the horses shied back. The Defenders had to work to keep the animals under control. Kirynn laughed. “You really need to stop looking at the horses like you want to eat them, it makes them too nervous,” she sent.

“But I do want to eat them. Surely there is one somewhere that isn’t wanted,” the red sent back.

“I doubt anyone is going to offer one of their horses up for a meal.”

The dragon huffed and eyed the horses again. Kirynn shook her head. Sometimes the red was impossible.

The other riders and their dragons stood around them. Her eyes drifted across Kellinar, Serena, Taela, Mckale, Maleena, and the new riders. Her companions and greatest friends. Her gaze lingered on their faces and their dragons. When would she see them again? What did the future hold? Sadness tightened her chest for a moment. If things didn’t go well…would she ever see them again?

“We are ready,” came Syrakynn’s sending.

Namir lifted off with Syrakynn right behind him. They only climbed a short way before the Slide spun open like a whirlpool of heat waves in the air, opening slowly until it reached the ground. The Defenders led the horses through as the dragons moved into it. The world swirled into indistinct colors and then warm night enveloped them. The sparkling black blanket of the sky stretch from horizon to horizon.

Syrakynn landed and Kirynn undid the straps then leaped off to take the horses. Namir held the Slide open and passed back through so the Defenders could go back to Galdrilene. It only took a few seconds before he reemerged and landed next to the red. Kirynn untied her zahri from her horse’s saddle.

She glanced around the dark, empty prairie. “I forgot how open it is in the east.”

Vaddoc took a deep breath and moved through the night with easy familiarity. “I never really thought about it. This was home.”

“Where are we?”

“On the Ash Plains, half a day’s ride to the northern Shaderian border.”

“I thought you were raised in Marden, isn’t that quite a ways south?”

He smiled at her. “We lived close to the border when I was a small boy. My brother and I used to ride out here on the Ash Plains and pretend we were fighting Kojen. My father would come back from his patrols on the eastern border and find out we had been out there and have a fit.” A look of sadness crept into his eyes. “That was before my brother and I knew what Kojen really were.”

Kirynn swung into her saddle and settled her zahri across her thighs as Vaddoc climbed onto his own horse. “Where are your father and brother now? You’ve never spoke of them before.”

He gazed out at the night for a long moment before answering. “They were both killed in a Kojen raid. About five years ago. I do not care to remember that time.”

Kirynn let it drop; he would talk if he wanted to. They rode for several hours while the stars passed overhead. The land remained quiet around them save for the sound of the wind in the grass. Syrakynn and Namir flew high in the sky above them, watching for danger.

They would reach the northern border of Shadereen the next day. The dragons would have to keep out of sight. They didn’t want to scare everyone before they had a chance to explain.

Maleena watched the Slide spin open and reach all the way to the ground. She tried not to think about the friends they were leaving behind, or what it would be like meeting the people of Calladar. People who wouldn’t welcome their magic; people who would look at her with suspicion and dislike.

Ahead, Tellnox and Mckale entered the Slide. Nydara flew through right behind them. The swirl of colors turned into cold dark sky. Mountains ranged to the north and the west. Beneath them, the mountains gave way to canyons and broad plateaus. They were about three weeks ride north of Calladar. The deep chill in the air surprised her. They weren’t that much further north than Galdrilene, but the air had held the warmth of late spring there.

Nydara settled on a plateau while the Defenders led Arella and Blain through. She’d worried about bringing the aged mare, but a thorough examination by Serena assured her the old mare could handle it.

She undid the safety straps and jumped down from the saddle. Arella greeted her with a soft whinny as she took the reins. Blain gave a soft snort and nudged her arm. She gave the massive black horse an affectionate pat.

Within minutes, Mckale had slid the Defenders back and returned. He jumped off Tellnox and came to stand next her. Blain shoved him with his head as he took the reins. Mckale laughed and scratched the horse around his ears. “I’ve missed you too, Blain.”

Maleena smiled at the two of them. Although they had ridden a couple of times a week in Galdrilene, the horses didn’t see as much of them there. She stroked the dished face on the old gray mare.

“I won’t let anything happen to her,” came Nydara’s sending.

Maleena turned her smile on the silver dragon. “I know you won’t.”

Mckale reached out and took her hand. “Come on, there is a path off this plateau. In the canyons we will find enough small trees and brush to have a fire to take the chill off.”

“You aren’t worried about someone seeing it?” she asked. She remembered his refusal to have a fire during their journey to Galdrilene over two years ago.

He shook his head. “Tellnox and Nydara will see anyone approaching long before they can see the fire.”

She followed him down the narrow path and into the canyon. Stubby trees and scraggly bushes lined both sides of the canyon and a narrow river ran through its center. Tellnox and Nydara pulled up several of the trees, clearing a place by the wall.

Maleena and Mckale pulled the packs from the horses and stacked them against the wall. While the dragons made a competition out of breaking the trees into smaller pieces, Maleena took each horse’s head between her hands. When she released them, they began to graze on the newly formed buds on the trees and bushes.

Mckale piled the wood together and stepped back. “Tellnox, do you mind starting the fire?”

The dragon lowered his head and shot a thin band of flame at the pile.

When the fire was burning well, Mckale glanced at the horses. “You aren’t going to tether them?”

“I don’t need to. They won’t go far, I made sure of it.”

He shook his head and walked over and put his arms around her. “You always amaze me.”

She pulled his mouth down to hers. After a moment, he broke away. “Perhaps we should get the sleeping rolls laid out.”

Maleena watched Mckale untie the sleeping rolls from the packs. The firelight played across his bronzed skin and gathered in his silver eyes. A brief tingle of energy interrupted the happy mood filling her.

She glanced out at the night, her eyes scanning up and down the wide canyon. What had she felt? She sent her mind out searching. The tingle felt foreign and familiar at the same time. Her confusion was reflected in Nydara.

“What was that? I feel as if I should know, but the answer is out of reach,” the silver sent.

Maleena maintained her concentration, her mind searching farther into the night. “It did feel familiar, like a long forgotten memory or dream,” she sent back. “Tellnox, did you feel it?”

The massive green lifted his long nose, taking in the smells on the breeze. “I felt it, but I don’t know what it is.” He turned his silver eyes to her. “Like you, it seems as if I should know it.”

Mckale touched her arm. She glanced at him; he stood with his eyes on the canyon. “You might as well come back. If you haven’t found it yet, you probably aren’t going to. What I sensed through Tellnox didn’t feel that far.”

She sighed and brought her searching mind back. “I suppose you are right. If there is someone…something out there that can use magic, I should be able to find it.”

He turned away from the canyon and put his arms around her. “You can’t find Loki a lot of the time.”

“This was not Loki. This was different. It worries me that I can’t find the source. It’s gone now anyway.”

“Tellnox and I are going to hunt. We will search for anything in the canyon and the surrounding area.Perhaps we can locate the source. We won’t go far in case you need us,” Nydara sent.

“Good hunting, my love. We will be fine,” Maleena sent back. Nothing would sneak up on them with the dragons in the air.

She tipped her head back and smiled up at Mckale. “The dragons go to search. Nothing will slip past them.”

A smile danced in his eyes as he lowered his lips to hers and his fingers began slipping the tiny buttons on her shirt loose. She set aside her worries and lost herself in his arms and his touch.

Early the next morning they rode through the canyon, the rock sides rising high above them. The river flowed narrow and deep to their right. A light, cold breeze drifted down the canyon and the horses’ breath made small clouds in the crisp air. The crunch of last year’s leaves under the horses’ hooves mingled with the sound of the river’s slow, deep rush.

Maleena didn’t pay much attention to the morning or the stark beauty of the canyon. Her mind was focused on what lay ahead. Whoever or whatever had used magic the night before was just ahead of them. Tellnox and Nydara soared high overhead, ready to aid if need be. The dragons saw nothing when they searched the canyon, but Maleena felt them.

She turned that over in her mind. Them. There was only one who used magic, but there were others there too. The aura felt familiar. She should know what it belonged to. Maleena suppressed the growing frustration. Emallya and Amariel had counseled often enough that frustration hampered the ability to ‘see.’

As they rounded the bend in the canyon, the mouth of another canyon opened up to their left. She reached out for Nydara. “Where does this other canyon lead?”

“It leads nowhere,” the silver sent back. “It goes several hundred paces and ends in a large rounded space.”

“I can feel a gathering of beings in it. Do you see anything?”

“Beings?” Overhead, Nydara and Tellnox banked and made another pass over the canyon.

“I don’t think they are human.”

“We see nothing. You are certain they are in this dead end canyon?”

“Yes.”

Maleena reined Arella to a stop directly in front of the opening to the dead end. It had a slight bend and she couldn’t see to the end of it, but she knew they were down there.

“Maleena?” Mckale looked from her back to the canyon.

“They are there, around the bend.”

“Tellnox and Nydara see nothing.” His eyes studied her face.

She nodded. “I know. But they are there. I feel them.” A sudden understanding ran through her. “The magic is keeping the dragons from seeing them. They are hiding.”

Mckale sighed. “You have every intention of going down that canyon, don’t you?”

In answer, she nudged Arella into a walk and started into it with Mckale close beside her.

They came around the bend and stopped.

Ahead, as Nydara had said, the canyon ended. Kojen filled the large, rounded space. Fully two paces taller than Mckale, their massive horns curled around their heads like a ram’s. Their deep purple skin was shaded almost black in the shadows cast by the high rock walls. They stood, weapons in hand, staring at her and Mckale.

Beside her, Mckale drew a sharp breath and pulled his twin blades from their sheaths. Blaine pinned his ears back and snorted. But though the war trained stallion was ready to follow his rider’s commands, Maleena felt confusion rolling off the animal. Something wasn’t right.

Tension mounted among the Kojen. It radiated from them and Maleena searched frantically among them. What was she missing? Something was different. She had to find it before the situation exploded. Then it struck her. She felt the Kojen. Not a mental attack but emotions. Readiness, determination, sadness, and even fear from some of those hidden by those in front.

Kojen didn’t feel normal emotions…did they? These were not Kojen. They looked like them, but they were different and one among them used magic. Mckale started to move forward. Maleena touched his arm lightly and he stopped. “Mckale, wait,” she said softly, her eyes on the largest Kojen. His horns were heavier and he stood out in front of the others. She sensed leadership in him. A need to defend those hidden in the back and sadness that a fight was likely inevitable.

She slid off Arella and slowly walked forward.

“Maleena?” Mckale’s voice was strained. Sudden fear rolled off him in a wave and Blaine plunged forward, blocking her path. “What are you doing?”

She looked up at him. His silver eyes were dulled to iron-gray. She laid her hand on his leg. “Trust me, my heart.”

Maleena felt his internal struggle as he stared at her, his face a blank mask. Finally, he backed Blaine out of the way. He didn’t like it, but he did trust her. She walked forward again, her eyes locked with the black eyes of the big male in front. She’d seen the empty blackness of a Kojen’s eyes before. These were not empty. A mixture of distrust and curiosity filled these intelligent eyes.

She stopped when she was only a few paces from him. He towered over her. She felt Mckale directly behind her. His fear had turned to terror, though she knew without looking that none of it would show on his face. Maleena gazed up at the broad face. The Kojen stared back as if he didn’t know what to make of her. They stood there, studying each other for several long moments, the morning still and quiet around them. Maleena broke the silence. “You are not like the Kojen I’ve encountered before.”

A startled look flashed across his face followed by anger. Behind her, Mckale shifted slightly and Blaine pawed the ground. Maleena felt no fear of the anger that flashed through the non-Kojen’s eyes. It was anger born of pride, not rage.

“We are not Kojen.” The deep, thick voice surprised her, as did the way he spat the word Kojen. She’d never heard a Kojen speak before and wondered how she knew this one could or would respond.

“You look like them though.”

A low growl ran through the gathering. The big male drew himself up taller and glared at her. “We are not filthy Kojen.” His voice was harsh this time.

Maleena nodded. “Alright, not...Kojen. What are you then?”

Surprise flickered in the deep black eyes. “We are Ke’han, and you are very brave human.”

Mckale rode Blaine up beside her. Sitting atop of the massive stallion, he was tall enough to look the male in the eye. “What are Ke’han?

“We are warriors. We are what the Kojen were before Galdivan the Traitor.”

Maleena felt her own flush of surprise. “You know of Galdivan?”

He looked down. “Of course. He is the one that tore my people apart and scattered us. He and his kind are the ones that captured our warriors, our women, our young, and twisted them with his magic until they became beasts.” He stared at her for a long moment. “You are not like Galdivan and his ilk. Our Shama told us you were not, but I did not believe her until now. Who are you? Why do dragons take to the skies once more?”

“I am Maleena, and this is my bondmate, Mckale.”

The black eyes flicked between her and Mckale. “There are bondmates again? You are Guardians. We have seen the Shadows in the dawn; we know the black dragons fly again. We saw dragons last night and again today, but they were too high to see what color. They are your dragons?”

Maleena smiled. “Yes, would you like to meet them?”

The big Ke’han inclined his head slightly. “I am Hakan, headman of this camp of Ke’han. I would like to meet your dragons.”

“Nydara, would you and Tellnox please come down here?”

Nydara didn’t need to answer; Maleena felt her shift direction and dive for the ground. The dragons landed in the canyon behind them. They furled their wings and walked forward until they stood right behind Maleena and Mckale. A collective gasp went up from the group of Ke’han. Both dragons lowered their long, wedge-shaped heads to look at the group. Like the Kojen, the Ke’han were huge compared to humans, but the dragons’ heads were bigger than the Ke’han.

Nydara fixed Hakan with her large violet eyes. “This is not a Kojen. I have distant, ancestral memories of these beings.”

Maleena looked up at Hakan. “This is my silver, Nydara. She says she has ancestral memories of your kind. The green is Tellnox. He is Mckale’s dragon.”

Hakan put his fist over his heart. “I am Hakan. I am honored to meet you. I am also glad to see you. We were fearful after we saw black dragons flying again. It is good you are here.”

Mckale dismounted from Blaine and moved to stand by Maleena. “Where have you seen the black dragons?”

“They have been seen flying over many places in the desert. We have also seen them above the Ash Plains, Calladar, and Shadereen. If they have flown further west, I do not know. We go no further west than the Blood River.” He paused. “Come, we have much to talk about it would seem. Welcome to our camp.”

At his words, the front line of warriors gave way. Maleena’s eyes swept the camp as they followed Hakan to the center of the circular area. She estimated there were less than fifty all told, women and children included. How strange to see women and children. She never really thought about it, but she supposed even Kojen must reproduce.

The women weren’t as tall as the men, though they were still taller than Mckale. The horns that curled around their heads were much thinner, almost dainty compared to the males. Their skin was a lighter shade of purple and their long, flowing black hair made a sharp contrast to the bald heads of the males. Short skirts made of leather wrapped their lower bodies, but many of them wore little else.

One woman, with several beaded necklaces resting above bare breasts, came to stand in front of them. “I am Avendala, headwoman of the camp and mate to Hakan.” She reached out a hand, making the numerous bone bracelets on her wrist rattle. She held her hand flat, palm up. Maleena looked at her, uncertain what the gesture meant. Avendala smiled, exposing perfect white teeth and two small, pointed canines. “It is customary to place your palm on mine and introduce yourself back.”

Maleena hesitated. Would it be uncomfortable to touch the Ke’han? She took a deep breath and placed her palm on Avendala’s. “I’m Maleena. The Silver dragon is Nydara.” Though she sensed Avendala’s basic emotions, there was no overflow from the woman, no discomfort.

The headwoman’s eyes traveled over the Silver before she turned her attention back to Maleena. “Come, our Shama would like to speak with you.”

Maleena glanced at Mckale. He was in the middle of introductions with men. Avendala tugged at her hand. “Come, we leave the men to talk. It is custom.”

“Be careful, Maleena,” Nydara sent. “There is something else here. Something that feels familiar and yet very different.”

“What?” Maleena’s eyes swept the camp and the rock walls pocketed with small caves, some mere depressions in the rock, others dark openings to who knew where.

“I don’t know. Whatever it is, it hides in one of the caves. I don’t think they wish to harm you, but be watchful anyway.”

Maleena hesitated, trying to decide if it might be better to stay close to Nydara. She didn’t want to go against their customs; there was too much to talk about and learn from them. She sensed disregarding their ways would be a grave insult so she followed Avendala to the group of women waiting. One woman watched her come toward them with more interest than the others. Her eyes were a startling cornflower blue.

The red bracelets on her arm clicked as she held out her hand, palm up. Her other arm cradled a sleeping infant. “I am Angeni, the Shama of this camp.”

Maleena placed her palm on the woman’s hand, suppressing the twinge of envy she felt at the sight of the infant. She had a bondmate and a dragon who laid eggs, but Dragon Riders were not a fertile lot. It might be fifty years or more before she held a babe of her own. “I am Maleena. The silver dragon is Nydara. I don’t mean to be rude, but you have blue eyes. Is that common among the Ke’han?”

Angeni smiled. “No, Maleena, rider of Nydara. Blue eyes come only to Shamas; those who can work magic and talk to the spirits.” Angeni’s smile faded and she closed her eyes.

Maleena felt a tingle wash through her. Angeni gasped and pulled her hand away, her eyes wide. “You have been to Maiadar. You have done more than pass through it; you have touched it. You have a connection to it.” Her eyes went to Nydara. “Old things come again,” she looked back at Maleena, “and new things surface.”

Puzzled, Maleena asked, “What do you mean new things? How did you know I have passed through Maiadar?”

“I am a Shama. It is part of my magic. I have heard of those who passed through Maiadar, but I have never heard of one who touched it. You touched it—connected to it—before you ever passed through it.”

Memories of the battle by the lake filled Maleena. In her mind, she saw the massive silver ghost of Emallya’s dragon, Rylin, hanging above the lake, water streaming off her gleaming scales in the morning light. “Yes, once. I pulled the spirit of Nydara’s mother from Spirit Lake.”

Angeni’s eyes went wide. “New things surface. Spirits are supposed to remain in Maiadar. That is their world when they leave this one. There is not supposed to be a path back for them. Yet you were able to connect with a spirit there. You can still connect with them; I can feel it in you. Some of the spirit’s energy and power clings to your aura. Is there anything in your human histories that say something like this has happened before?”

Maleena shook her head. “No, even when the Ka’ti was searched, there was no reference to it.”

“You see,” Angeni smiled, “new things surface.”

Avendala placed her hand on Angeni’s arm. “Come, sister, the others would like to meet Maleena.”

The infant cradled in Angeni’s arm stirred and let out a little cry. She made shushing noises and held the baby to one ample breast. The babe immediately quieted and latched on. She smiled when she noticed Maleena watching. “This is my youngest son, born less than two moons ago. His name is Etu.”

Maleena gazed wistfully at the infant. “He is beautiful.” And though his skin was dark purple and tiny horn buds were already showing on his hairless head, she didn’t think him any less beautiful. He looked like he should for his people.

Another woman introduced herself as Algoma. A baby with chubby legs and black hair that hung to her shoulders gazed at her from where she sat on Algoma’s hip. Algoma introduced the child as Nidawi.

Each woman was introduced, although many hung back. Not Maleena learned because of reticence, but due to the strict hierarchy of the camp. She found herself sitting around a small fire with the five highest status women of the camp. Avendala, Angeni, and Algoma who was the mate of Hakan’s second, though Angeni outranked her because she was the Shama. The other two were Avendala’s grandmother, Pamuya, and a younger woman named Aponi

Children played and moved about the camp with total disregard for the status of their elders.

Avendala’s infant daughter, Adsila, crawled back and forth between the fire her mother sat at and where her father sat with the men, pulling up on them and crawling into their laps. Maleena watched with amusement as the chubby baby less than a year old interrupted her father’s discussion to crawl onto the massive warrior’s lap. The child popped her thumb in her mouth and snuggled into him.

Aponi, a very young woman newly mated to a high-ranking warrior, cooked thin flat bread on a heavy stone, while Pamuya set a pot of cold stew from the night before on the fire to warm.

Maleena looked about the end of the canyon. It didn’t look like a permanent residence. “Do you stay in one place long?”

Pamuya answered in a deep, raspy voice. “Except for one permanent settlement on the eastern coast, the Ke’han are nomads. We always have been. For most of our history, it was necessary to follow the food and part of our tradition. After Galdivan, it became necessary for our safety as well. Whole camps were rounded up by him and his foul shadows.”

“We never stay more than a quarter turn of the moon in any one spot,” Avendala added. Aponi served Maleena a bowl of thick stew and several flat breads. Maleena waited to eat. There were no spoons and she wasn’t sure the proper way to eat it.

Angeni came to her rescue. “You tear off a bit of flat bread and use it to scoop the stew out. We cannot eat until you have taken the first bite. It is rude to eat before the guest has begun.”

Who would have thought they would have so many customs and traditions? She tore off some bread, scooped stew up with it, and put in her mouth. Pamuya nodded in approval and everyone around the fire began eating. The flavors in the bread and stew were unfamiliar yet delicious.

Pamuya watched her, the fire casting flickering light across her time-withered face. “Why do you not show your breasts?”

Maleena nearly choked on her food. After clearing her throat she stared back at the old woman. “What?”

Pamuya gestured to the other women at the fire. “Only girls too young and women too old to reproduce, like me, cover their breasts. Women who can bear children proudly display their breasts to show their status. How can your people know you are healthy and able to bear children if you do not bare your breasts?”

A look of sympathy flashed in Avendala’s eyes. “You can bear children?”

“Yes, I can. Among my people, it isn’t considered appropriate to show our breasts like that.”

“How strange.” Avendala shook her head. “You and your…bondmate,” she said the word slowly as if unsure of its meaning, “are the first of your kind we have actually met.”

Although unable read their thoughts, she still felt their sudden unease. “How do you live so close to Calladar and never meet any of the people there?”

“We stay on the move and are very careful to shield ourselves. We are lucky to have a powerful Shama. Not all of them are capable of the kind of shielding she does. She makes it so we cannot be seen. Others though, they have had encounters. We are often confused with Kojen and the border people have wiped out some camps completely.”

The sun climbed higher in the sky, spreading its light into the canyon. Angeni looked at her. “How did you know we were here? And how did you know we are not Kojen? Your mate was ready to cut us down, I could feel it.”

“Though we are very different, our magic must run along the same lines. I use Spirit magic. I sensed it when your shield went up and though I couldn’t find you through it from a distance, once we got closer, I sensed you.” Maleena glanced across the canyon to where Mckale sat with the men. He struggled to come to terms with the new knowledge of these people. She felt the conflict in him. These people had always been too close to Kojen and long standing prejudices fought with acceptance. “Mckale grew up in Calladar. He was a Border Guard, as is his father and others in his family. I think it was an ingrained reaction.”

She turned back to Angeni. “I grew up being pushed away by everyone in my village for my differences. I’m used to looking at things differently. I try to understand before I judge. I’m not perfect, but I do try. I knew there was something different about you because I could sense your emotions. Kojen do not have emotions, only blood lust.”

A mixture of sadness and revulsion filled Avendala’s eyes. “The Kojen are not natural. We once captured one and tried to reason with him, and show him our ways. His mind was beyond understanding. He was as willing to kill us as he was anything else. Other camps have tried as well. Each attempt was met with failure. Angeni was the only woman allowed to get close to him so his mind could be examined. Even then, every man in the camp was there to protect her.”

Angeni glanced at the slender, curved sword hanging from Maleena’s belt. “I see you have been taught to fight. Our women do not learn such things. We do not go into battle.”

Maleena glanced around at them. “None of you know how to defend yourselves?”

Pamuya shook her head. “Our men ensure our safety.”

“But why?”

The old woman’s hand made a sweeping gesture across the women of the camp. “We are the future. One man can sire many young ones if need be, but we can only carry one at a time. It takes ten turns of the moon for a Ke’han woman to bring a babe to birthing. Only we can carry the next generation in our bodies; bring them into this world; feed them through infanthood. Among our people, a woman’s place is one of honor. Our safety and happiness is always placed above a man’s. Any one of the men would die for us. We have no need to go to battle. All that would do is get many women, the holders of our future, killed.”

Maleena turned that over in her mind. Many of the women in her world didn’t fight either. Serena hadn’t been allowed to. It wasn’t something that was done in Lowden either. Kirynn had begun learning the use of weapons as a toddler, and Taela learned young as well.

But in the areas where it wasn’t acceptable for women to learn, it wasn’t because women were the future. It seemed more like the men were afraid to have women on equal footing. Some places valued women and their contributions more than others. And while the Ke’han women didn’t learn the use of weapons, it was obvious it wasn’t because they were considered less than the men.

“Besides, we have Amara to protect us women,” Angeni said.

Avendala sucked in a breath and shot Angeni a sharp look. Angeni gazed back at her. “What? These people mean us no harm. They have introduced us to their dragons. It is not right to keep the secret from them.”

Maleena glanced from one to the other. “Who is Amara and why must she be kept a secret?” Was that what Nydara sensed?

Avendala turned to Maleena. “Amara is like a dragon in some ways.”

“A dragon?” Maleena stared at them, her eyes wide. She felt the tension in Nydara and Tellnox. Mckale glanced her way, no doubt sensing her unease.

Angeni nodded. “Yes, but not like your dragons. We call them Nagas; or Nagi if they are female. She cannot fly but can breathe fire. Nagi are strongly connected with water. Amara is our water finder and our protector. Docile and sweet, she only becomes aggressive if we are threatened and cannot defend ourselves. Nagas are strongly connected to the earth; they are metal and mineral finders.”

Questions flooded Maleena’s mind and she took a moment to sort them out before speaking. “Why is she a secret? Where does she come from?”

Avendala took deep breath. “She is kept secret so those who may attack us are not prepared to defend against her. She has eliminated several bands of Kojen. Amara and others like her live on the far eastern coast, where the ocean meets the desert. There are not many. As far as we know, they have always been there.”

“How did you get her to bond with you? Did you have to hatch her?”

“That takes a strong Shama like Angeni. Their nests are impossible to find, but it does not take Hatching to bond. When we found Amara, she was already half-grown. Angeni is strong enough to connect with Amara. It took almost a full turn of the moon to tame her, but once tamed, they are bonded completely to us and are safe to leave unsupervised with even the youngest of the camp.”

Maleena searched her memory of the stories Emallya had told. Never had she mentioned this. The Ka’ti had nothing in it either. “I wonder why no one has ever known any of this.”

Pamuya scooped the last of her food from her bowl and set it aside. She popped the bite in her mouth and chewed slowly before answering. “Before the War of Fire, before Galdivan came to this place, since the beginning of time, the Ke’han have kept to the desert. Considered wild tribes of beasts by your people, we were left alone in our desert. There are none of your cities or people on the far side of it. In all but one place, the sand runs right up to the ocean; there is no reason for your people to cross to it.”

She cleared her throat and shifted to lean back against a large pillow before continuing. “For many generations, the Ke’han rarely came this far west and your people rarely went beyond where the grass gives way to sand.

“Many years before Galdivan’s cursed mother was even born, we began to explore further west. There was a time when food was not as plentiful. Your people and mine stayed well away from each other, as if an invisible line had been drawn in the sand. It was not until Galdivan came along and turned everything into chaos that we began to run into your people. After many encounters where we were mistaken for Kojen, we learned to keep our distance. Many Ke’han camps refuse to go this far west, but there are herbs and medicines that grow only in this area. So some of us still come.”

Maleena’s memories drifted to that first morning with Emallya next to the lake. Emallya’s voice rang in her memory, “Galdivan took the wild beasts known as Kojen and he twisted and changed them as he had the eggs.” How had Emallya failed to see what Ke’han were?

Nydara’s gentle sending interrupted her thoughts. “You must remember, Emallya was not even born when the War of Fire began. All she knew were Kojen. Those before her probably called the Ke’han by the name Kojen as well. If they kept to themselves as much as Pamuya says, it is no wonder both sides have misunderstood each other.”

“You are right, of course. I hadn’t thought of that.”

“I know; that is why you have me.”

Maleena laughed softly. Avendala looked at her. “Why do you laugh?”

“Nydara was just being smug. She loves it when she is right, which is most of the time.”

A knowing smile crossed Angeni’s face. “Would you like to meet Amara? She is very curious and has remained hidden only because I asked.”

“I would love to.”

Nydara stood up and walked down into the canyon end, careful not to crowd the men or step on any children. Adsila, Avendala’s daughter, woke from her nap on her father’s lap and gazed up at the massive silver as she passed.

Angeni turned to one of the dark cave openings. “Amara, come here, good one.”

Maleena stared at the dark opening as the Nagi slid from it. Low-slung, she was still as tall as Mckale’s horse and several times longer. Her body was covered in a multitude of dark burgundy scales that faded to emerald green on her throat and underbelly. A yellow dorsal ridge ran down her back and five large, yellow talons adorned each of her four feet. A short, dark blue mane surrounded her blocky head. A golden horn swept back then curled at the tip on either side of her head.

Amara looked as different from Nydara as Maleena did from the Ke’han. Yet, just like with the Ke’han, Maleena found similarities as she gazed into the yellow, cat-like eyes of the Nagi.

Nydara stood perfectly still, staring at the strange, smaller dragon. Maleena sensed a combination of shock and wonder in the silver. She glanced at the dragon. “What is it?”

Nydara didn’t look away from the burgundy beauty that moved with quick grace across the ground to Angeni’s side. “I have memory of this type of dragon! So distant, so faded, so alien. Another time, another world, a dying world…the world my kind came from so long ago. They lived in that world with us, a distant relation. I find no memories of what happened to them, or how they came to be here. Their differences must be what allowed them to tether their souls to this world without the need for an anchor.”

Nydara lowered her head until her long, tapering snout nearly touched Amara’s square, blocky one. Maleena heard her sending to the Nagi. “Hello, my cousin, it is good to see your kind escaped our failing world so many years ago.”

Anevay stood next to Paki on the inner terrace, her heart heavy as she fastened the straps. She glanced over at Taela, who secured the packs behind the saddle of her horse. Tears stung Anevay’s eyes. Her bondmates would be leaving in a few short minutes. She couldn’t imagine days and nights without them. Serena, one of her greatest friends, was going with them. The only comfort she found in their leaving was they would have the healer with them.

Farther out in the caldera, Latia stood next to Mernoth and watched with sadness in her large dark eyes. She would miss the older dragons and their riders too. “We will have each other still,” she sent to the yellow dragon.

“I know. I still wish I could Slide well enough that we could go with them.”

Anevay laughed quietly. “You and me both.” Her eyes traveled over the younger riders and their dragons. They weren’t much younger than Latia. It wouldn’t be long before all of them were able to Slide. “We have plenty of dragon and rider company.”

Latia snorted in agreement. Old friends were leaving, but newer friends remained, the ties of friendship cemented by the bond of dragons. “At least Loki and Merru seem to actually be trying to show up for lessons.”

Out the corner of her eye she saw Loki approach Kellinar as her bondmate turned from fastening the last strap on Shryden’s saddle. Loki held out his hand. Kellinar looked at the hand for a moment, then pulled the half-grown boy into a fierce hug.

Loki hugged him back tightly. “Be careful, Kellinar.”

Kellinar stepped back and smiled. “With Taela and Serena along, I won’t have much choice. You try to be good.”

Loki grinned at him, his sandy-blond hair falling in his bright blue eyes. “I always try. I don’t always succeed, but you know what they say about that.”

Kellinar’s full and rich laughter filled the air. “Try, try again.”

Loki’s grin faded. “Don’t take too long.”

“I’ll do my best.”

As Loki walked away, Kellinar walked over to where Anevay stood. She smiled at him when he stopped in front of her. “He’s going to miss you.”

He glanced back at the departing boy. “I’ll miss him too.” He turned back to her, his blue eyes intense. “I’m going to miss you more.”

Her throat tightened as tears burned her eyes again. She cleared her throat and blinked them back; she would cry later. “I will miss you more than you know,” she whispered.

Kellinar traced his thumb lightly across her cheek. “I’ll know.”

She couldn’t help the tear that tracked its way down her face. He was right; their bond ensured it. Distance wouldn’t make the bond weaker. He would know every moment of her misery.

He drew her to him, bending to press his lips against hers. She rose to meet him, letting the kiss deepen, knowing this would be the last time she felt his touch for possibly months. She wrapped her arms around his neck, clinging to him, savoring every passing second. When he finally released her, he kept his eyes on hers. “I love you,” he said, his voice thick with emotion.

Taela moved to his side as he took a step back. The shorter woman made no attempt to hide the tears coursing down her face. “I am going to miss you so much.” She threw her arms around Anevay.

Anevay hugged her back with the same intensity. “How will I live each day without you, bondsister?”

Taela stepped back, her dark blue eyes serious. “Remember, I am but a mental call away. I will be able to hear you no matter where we go. If you need us for anything, we can Slide back.”

Anevay wiped away another tear before it fell and smiled at her bondmate and bondsister. “I will be fine. After all, I have Latia. And there are all of the other new riders. Bardeck is here and sometimes Emallya. And my family, I have them. Dhovara can’t decide if she’s relieved Latia is too young to Slide or upset for me that I can’t go.”

Kellinar chuckled. “Your aunt is a good woman.”

“Yes, she is.” She glanced behind him. The Defenders who would lead the horses through had arrived on the terrace. “Looks like everyone is about ready. I wish you would let Latia walk through like the horses.”

Kellinar took her hand, and kissed her palm lightly before letting go. “You know I would if it was safe. If something happened and we had to Slide home fast, Latia would be trapped where ever we were or she would try to Slide without enough experience and end up who knows where. It isn’t safe for her or you. What the rest of us had to do when we went to the Kormai for Maleena was dangerous, and we were lucky we didn’t lose anyone with the way we had to force the learning of Sliding. It’s better to take it slower and give your dragon time to learn it properly. I won’t take the chance of losing either of you. Once she learns to Slide when she wants to and where she is intending to go, you are more than welcome to join us.”

A haunted look crept into his eyes and Taela laid her hand on his arm. Anevay knew he was remembering Maleena’s and Nydara’s accidental Slide to the Kormai a year and a half ago. He didn’t want to take the chance of something like that happening to her or Latia. She understood. She didn’t like it, but she understood.

Anevay knew he would keep Taela from going if he could. But Paki was old enough and had been Sliding for months. His one attempt to persuade Taela from going had nearly resulted in her harming him. Anevay was glad she’d been there as a restraining force for her bondsister. Taela was strong and stubborn, with a temper that sometimes burned quick and hot. Although she usually kept it under control, when something really upset her, she didn’t always think before she unleashed it.

In her mind, Anevay heard Shryden’s voice. Full of humor, the sending came only to her. “It serves him right for trying to force Taela to stay. If she really had stabbed him, he would have deserved it. I could have handled the shared pain. He is a good man, but too often worried about losing those he loves. I think it is because he had no one to love and no one to love him back for so long.”

She looked up at the massive blue. “I think you are right. Still, Taela should have understood that instead of letting her temper get the better of her.”

“If Latia was old enough and he had tried that with you, how would you have taken it?”

“I see your point.”

A heavy rumble issued from Shryden, the dragon equivalent of a laugh. Kellinar looked back at his dragon. “What is so funny?”

Anevay laughed softly. “We were just discussing you.”

He raised an eyebrow. “A private conversation between you and my dragon, that can’t be a good thing.” He put an arm around Taela and steered her toward Paki. “It is time to go. Let’s get out of here before Anevay corrupts my dragon.”

“He is already corrupted; a reflection of his rider.” She laughed at the way he tried to stop smiling long enough to frown.

It didn’t take much time for them to climb in the saddles and fasten the safety straps. Serena, a bag slung across her shoulders, dashed across the terrace. She paused to give Anevay a brief hug before running to Miya. She settled in the saddle and fastened the safety straps, then signaled to the others that she was ready.

Kellinar flashed Anevay a quick smile just as Shryden launched into the air with Paki and Miya right behind him. The wind from their wings buffeted her as they moved down the crater. A whirlpool of heat waves spun open in front of Shryden, growing bigger until it reached the ground.

The dragons slowly moved into it. Below them the Defenders led the horses through. Within minutes, Shryden reappeared as the Defenders, now empty-handed came back. With a last dip of his wings, Shryden turned and flew back into the Slide. The whirlpool in the sky disappeared and silence cloaked the terrace.

Anevay felt a bump on her arm and turned to see Latia next to her. She leaned her head on the dragon’s neck and let her tears run down the yellow scales. She would miss them so much.

Taela watched Kellinar and Shryden come back through the Slide and land. In the gathering darkness, the small mountains to the north rose into the last pale pink stain in the sky. In the distance to the west, the trees of a large forest stood like silent sentinels. A light, warm breeze rippled across the grass, their newly formed seed heads bobbing. The first blooms of the wildflowers swayed as if waving in welcome.

She took a deep breath, the familiarity of the air bringing a mixture of comfort and fear. A little over a week of travel on horseback would bring them to Haraban, her birthplace. Would her father accept what she was? What about Sehlas? What had become of him? That was a wrong she fully intended to right if there was a way.

Serena stood a few paces away staring at the horse. Tall and sleek, its bay coat shone in the fading light. The other woman took the reins. “I really hoped that with Miya, I would never have to ride a horse again.” She sighed. “Oh well, I guess at least this time I will know what I’m doing when I get in the saddle.”

Taela suppressed a laugh. Serena had never been comfortable around horses and in the time she’d known her, she had never seen her ride. She always managed to avoid it. Kellinar wasn’t so nice. He let his laughter loose as he walked to his own horse. “You were never all that great at riding. At least this time, you should be able to get both feet in the stirrups.”

Serena scowled at him and stuck her tongue out. Another thing she’d never seen Serena do. In Galdrilene, Serena was always careful to behave in a certain manner, only occasionally joining in the goofing around the others did. But here, with just the three of them, Serena was finding her playful side again. Kellinar said she could be quite fun; now she saw where that belief came from.

Serena gave a snort and turned to her horse with her nose in the air at a comical angle. “I seem to remember you riding like a half-empty potato sack in the beginning, sliding all over your saddle and only staying on because your scruffy little horse was too lazy to toss you off.”

“Ah, but I got the hang of it and I am now quite good . You on the other hand will be lucky if you don’t end up sitting in the saddle backward.”

Serena’s laugh floated on the breeze like wind chimes. Taela stayed silent, enjoying their playful and friendly banter. Serena swung into the saddle and cast a haughty look at Kellinar. He smiled back and leaped into his saddle without even using a stirrup. His horse danced sideways as he settled the reins. Serena rolled her eyes and shook her head.

Miya snorted in amusement and Shryden rumbled his dragon laugh. Taela climbed into her saddle without any display. She was an accomplished rider, but she didn’t feel the need to show off the way Kellinar did. Besides, they only had an hour or so of riding before they would have to stop for the night. Just because they saw extremely well in the dark didn’t mean the horses were able to.

When the last shred of light had faded from the sky and only a blanket of stars shone above, they stopped for the night. Taela lay next to Kellinar in her sleeping roll. Miya’s and Paki’s slumbering rumbles drowned out most of the nighttime sounds. Above, Shryden glided on updrafts, keeping watch for anyone who might approach. Sometime during the night he would switch off with the other two dragons. They insisted on keeping watch and had a schedule of their own.

Taela stared up at the stars, her mind miles away. Anevay was up, researching again. Quiet loneliness clung to her bondsister’s mind, held at bay by the connection to her dragon and because she could still feel the other two thirds of the bond. Taela sent comfort and love to Anevay and felt an immediate change in her bondsister’s mind. The simple mental touch had cheered her up.

“Paki,” she sent to her silver. “Make sure Latia reminds Anevay to get some sleep.”

Paki’s rumble lightened as the dragon woke. “I have already done so. Anevay pushes herself too hard. Latia will do her best to make sure Anevay takes care of herself.”

“Thank you, love.”

“Anything for you, Taela.”

Kellinar rolled over and put his arm around her. “You checked on Anevay?”

“Yes, she is awake, researching still.”

He frowned. “She needs to get more sleep than she does.”

“Paki already spoke to Latia and she promises to do her best to make sure Anevay gets what she needs.”

“I guess that is all we can do until we can be together again.” He tightened his arm around her. “Maybe you should go back. Serena and I can handle all of this.”

She stiffened. “Kellinar, don’t even start with this again. I will not go back. And if I did, how would you get into my father’s palace to speak with him?”

Kellinar snorted and his tone held disbelief when he said, “Do you really think so little of my abilities? I could steal half your father’s possessions and be gone before he even knew I was there.”

She shook her head, still having trouble imagining that he used be a thief. “But you aren’t going there to steal anything. You are going there to talk to him and you would have trouble getting him to listen if he caught you breaking in.”

He shrugged. “I could bind and gag him with Air until he was ready to listen.”

She couldn’t help laughing. “Your diplomacy leaves something to be desired. I think you had better let me handle that part.”

“Not like you are going to give me a choice anyway.”

“No, I’m not. So you might as well go to sleep and stop trying to think of ways to make me go back to Galdrilene.”

He burrowed his face into her hair. “I just don’t want anything to happen to you.”

She rolled over and pressed her lips lightly to his before pulling back to look into his eyes. “Nothing is going to happen to me. You worry too much.”

He yawned and closed his eyes. “That’s what Shryden says.”

She snuggled closer to him, letting her eyes drift shut. “You should listen to him more often.” A soft snore from him answered her.

As the week passed and the countryside became more populated, the dragons hung back more and flew higher. There were times when they were nothing more than tiny specks in the sky. High enough to be unnoticed, but still close enough to reach the ground within a few moments if need be.

They rode past farms where dogs ran out to the road barking their challenge, and through villages where children dashed among the houses and wives hung laundry to dry. The familiar land unfolded around them; a sense of a warm homecoming mixed with dread filled her mind until an anxious knot formed in her stomach. A knot that no amount of comfort from Kellinar or Paki could undo.

The road curved along the slope of a large hill. Taela’s palms began to sweat. She shifted the reins and wiped her hands on her cloak. Warm humidity hung heavy in the morning air and a soft breeze carried the sweet scent of wild honeysuckle and roses. She wore a light cloak in spite of the warmth and kept the hood pulled well forward. Taela didn’t want anyone to recognize her before they reached the gates to the palace. She had no idea what her father believed or what had been said about her.

If her fears were true then he knew she could use magic. She would be wanted but not for a reunion. It wouldn’t help their cause if they had to battle the people of Haraban to keep them from killing her.

“I hope it doesn’t come to that,” Paki sent. “It will be difficult to convince them we are not evil if I have to set half of them on fire to save you.”

“You will not do that,” Taela sent back.

“I don’t want to, my instinct is to protect them, but my need to protect you is greater. I will do my best to hold off on killing anyone as long as possible if things don’t go well. I will not allow them to kill you though.”

Taela sighed. She really couldn’t expect anything less. If she died, Paki died with her and they had survived too much to allow themselves to be killed because magic and dragons were misunderstood.

They came around the final bend and there stood the city of Haraban, the white castle walls riding atop the massive hill and the city spreading out over the hillside. Houses filled the countryside beyond the city walls. A few were even built into the edge of the forest to the west.

Taela gazed at the towers of the castle and the knot in her stomach tightened. She tugged at the hood of her cloak nervously, glancing up at the three tiny dots soaring with the high, thin clouds and drew some comfort. Even from that height, Paki tracked her every move.

Kellinar reached over, squeezing her hand. “It’ll be alright.”

“Of course it will.” Serena nodded. “But we do actually have to go there. We can’t just sit on our horses staring at it. Either it will go well or it won’t. But if it’s going to go badly, it’s best best to swallow nasty medicine quickly and get it over with. The not knowing is what has you all tied up and anxious. Let us get a move on and get to knowing.”

Taela smiled at the other woman and took a deep breath. “You are right. Good or bad, it will be better to know. Let’s get it over with.” They rode forward, Kellinar in front and Serena bringing up the rear.

It was late afternoon by the time they passed through the city gates. So far, no one had given them more than a passing glance. This was a large city and strangers were not uncommon. The guards at the gate barely looked at them. Their horses and clothing both showed a quality that spoke of wealth and prestige.

Kovan looked up from the roughly sketched map on the table in front of him. A servant stood in the doorway. Already a small woman, she appeared to shrink in on herself when his icy gaze settled upon her. He hated being disturbed. “Are you here for a reason or did you just plan to stand there and try my patience?”

“Sadira requests your presence in the main cavern.” The servant shifted uncomfortably. Her timid voice conveyed that it was nothing more than a request, but he caught the undercurrent of her desperation.

Failure to return with him would likely earn the woman time spent with Sadira’s shadows. He rubbed his hands over his face and stood. Sadira frequently used the female servants against him in this fashion. A male servant would likely receive a painful meeting of Kovan’s own magic for interrupting his thoughts. But he couldn’t bring himself to use his magic on the women.

They all possessed some quality that reminded him of his mother. This one’s voice was quiet and timid, just as his mother’s had been when his father was home. He hated that tone, especially since it was aimed at him. He had never lifted a hand or used his magic against any of the female servants and still they slunk around him like beaten dogs. It irritated him. He was not his father.

She shrank away as he walked through the doorway. She started to follow behind, but he stopped and glared at her. “I don’t need an escort. Go. Find something useful to do with yourself.”

Her face paled as she bobbed a quick curtsy and fled in the opposite direction. He growled low in his throat and stormed toward the main cavern. Damn Sadira and her infernal shadows. She enjoyed using them far too much. There was very little method behind her madness. No temperance in her. She loved causing pain just for the sake of causing it. There was nothing wrong with indulging occasionally, and using it when the situation called for i;t however, Sadira overdid it.

When he entered the main cavern, he found Sadira sitting on one of the long, built-in benches that ran along the walls. Plush cushions ensured that the cool stone they were made of wasn’t noticed when sat upon. Sadira’s pet sisters knelt at her feet.

“Why did you send someone to interrupt me at this late hour? What do you possibly have to say that is important?”

Sadira sneered at him. “I see you didn’t tell her to get lost. Such a softie, Kovan. I’m sure whatever you were doing was of the utmost importance,” her tone said just the opposite, “but I have need of you.”

His eyes narrowed. “What can you possibly need, Sadira?”

“I need help with the prisoner.” Frustrated anger crossed her face. “My shadows continue to fail against him.”

Kovan shook his head. “He is, or rather was, a Border Guard. Did you expect him to break easily? They’ve been hardened against pain. It’s part of their training. I think you would have learned something from the last time you confronted one.”

He smirked at the flash of hatred in her eyes. He loved to taunt her with that. She had thought she was so powerful with her shadows until the mate of the rider they captured didn’t so much as flinch when she used them on him. Not only did he not flinch, he’d attacked right back. That had shaken the dark haired beauty some.

Her eyes narrowed. “Perhaps my shadows don’t work as well as I would like them to against certain types of people. This is why I asked you to work your magic on him. We need answers and he remains silent.” She paused for a moment and leveled a considering look at him. “That is, of course, if you can bring yourself to do it.”

He knew that comment was coming, but it still irritated him. She’d never let him forget that he’d been unable to take part in the torture of the rider they’d captured over a year and a half ago. Those violet eyes—his mother’s eyes had been the same. He couldn’t bring himself to look into those eyes as he caused the prisoner pain. Sadira found his inability to inflict pain and suffering on women amusing.

“Fine,” he snapped. “I will do what you cannot.”

“In the meantime, I have sent Dreth to find more magic users with the right temperament.”

He nodded. “Yes, we need more riders for the eggs.”

“We need them for more than that. During that battle, the Guardians had more magic users than dragons with them. We shouldn’t restrict our training to only those who can hatch eggs. We need to build our own army of mages to fight.”

Kovan shook his head. “According to Dreth, the only reason they do that is because a rider must be called by a draclet before they can hatch an egg. We have no such constraints. We have no need of mages.”

Sadira rolled her eyes. “Don’t be a fool, Kovan. There will be plenty who think as we do, but don’t want to risk death if they are unable to fully hatch a black egg. We should offer them a haven. To do otherwise would be a waste of talent and opportunity.”

“Fine, do what you wish with that.”

Before she could say another word, he walked away. If only he could just kill her. But her hair. Her damn hair. Whenever he saw it, he saw another woman with that color of hair. His mother. What had his mother done to cripple him so? He had loved his mother. But even years after her death, his love for her haunted him, and he despised her for it—and himself.

He set the confusing emotions aside and descended the steps into the dungeon. Torches lit the curving stairs, although he hardly needed them with his enhanced vision. At the bottom, three more torches burned in brackets across from a row of cells. Cells that now had caps welded onto the ends of every hinge pin thanks to one of the new Shadow Riders whose magic did things with metal.

The torches cast flickering light across the man chained to the wall in the second cell. A Calladaran Border Guard. Light gray eyes stared at Kovan through the bars from under a mat of tangled hair. Festering, blistered skin covered the man’s arms and bare chest, evidence of Sadira’s shadows.

The Border Guard squinted up at him. “You here to try your hand at torture?”

“I’m not here to try anything.” Kovan smiled slightly as he unlocked the cell. “Calladar was less than welcoming when we approached them. It took several deaths to put them in their place. Since we cannot maintain a constant presence there, we need to know what kind of resistance they plan, what kind of defenses have been put in place, and whether you have found any allies. You were high-ranking enough, you will know.” He hung the keys back on their hook and grabbed the simple wooden chair from where it stood next to the wall, before pushing past the iron barred door.

The man’s eyes narrowed as Kovan stepped into the cell and was no longer backlit by the torches. “You are Calladaran. How can you do this? How can you betray Calladar this way?”

Kovan sat the chair down and straddled it, his arms resting on the chair’s back. “My father was the interrogator in Calladar for many years. He was very good at his job, never killing any of those he put to the question and always getting a confession. He enjoyed the work, a little too much. I knew every pressure point on the human body by the time I was six. I learned more as his son than his apprentice did working with him. I use the healing element of magic, it makes getting inside the body much easier, it makes what I do more intense. I have passed beyond what my father could do.”

He leaned forward until his chest rested against the chair back and looked the man in the eye. “I tell you this so you understand what you are facing. So you know you will not be facing Sadira’s shadows again. To give you a chance to give the information freely. You will not die until I am ready for you to and you will suffer greatly at my hands. I can make your death quick and relatively painless, or I can draw it out and when the times comes, kill you very slowly. I will give you a moment to think it over if you like, but know that one way or another, I will get the information that I want.”

“There is nothing for me to think about. I am not you. I will not betray Calladar.”

Kovan settled back until only his arms were on the chair back again. “It will be as you wish.”

Power built within Kovan and he reached for the first pressure point. He would move on to other, more painful nerve centers as the torture escalated. Sweat broke out on the man’s brow but his face remained impassive. Kovan kept the original thread of power and added to it, reaching for another pressure point, doubling the pain and working the weaves to intensify it. Though the man’s face remained expressionless, his breathing hitched and the sweat rolled down the side of his face.

Kovan worked a third a weave and reached out to another bundle of nerves. The man’s muscles quivered and he drew a shuddering breath. He wove a fourth thread and applied it. The first low moan broke past the man’s lips but still he worked to hold against the pain. The moan showed they were getting somewhere, but it was going to be a long night.

Kovan walked slowly back to his quarters. The halls of the Kormai were silent, even the servants were asleep at this late hour. Quillan gazed down at him as he passed through the main cavern. He barely glanced at the dragon. Using magic for such an extended period and in such a controlled manner left him exhausted.

He reached his quarters, ignored the map still spread across the table, and went directly to bed. He found little relief in the soft bedding or in the chance to close his eyes. The Border Guard was dead after divulging everything he knew, which was precious little. Calladar was scrambling to come up with a defense against the dragons. They had no allies yet except maybe Shadereen. The alliances between nations weren’t what concerned them. Rather, it was contact with the Guardian dragons from Galdrilene or their riders.

The torture and killing of the Border Guard wasn’t what weighed on his mind. Those things were necessary. It was what would come after he closed his eyes that stole the relief he should have found in sleep. The dreams that always haunted his slumber after such a task. The dreams that never left him alone.

Despite his fatigue, he fought his heavy eyelids, reluctant to slide into the subconscious realm of dreams and nightmares. The bed, soft and warm, hugged his body. His eyes closed, giving to the weight of exhaustion.

The dream started almost immediately. He watched, a part of the dream and yet separate as if he were a spirit, hovering unseen as the door shut behind his father. His mother slid the heavy locking bar into place. She told his father that she did it out of fear of being alone in the house while he was gone fulfilling his duties as interrogator. But Kovan knew better. The locking bar gave his mother a few precious moments in case he should come home early. Time enough to protect herself and her son.

Down the hall, a young Kovan opened his bedroom door and peeked out. His mother, her smile radiant and her violet eyes alive now that his father was gone, motioned him forward. He ran down the hall to her and she wrapped him in a tight hug. “Would you like to help me make us some breakfast?”

The young Kovan nodded and they headed to the kitchen. She laughed as she cooked, then she played with him in the enclosed courtyard behind the house, the only place he was allowed to play. His father had forbidden him from playing with other children, insisting they would poison his mind. They never had company and his mother never left the house unless his father accompanied her. Kovan knew he had grandparents on his mother’s side, but he had never met them.

Before lunch, she carefully slid one of the books from the shelf. His father had made clear that neither of them were to touch his books, but his mother did anyway. She sat on the floor with him, reading to him and teaching him how to read for himself. Always they kept part of their attention on the door. His mother always seemed to know when his father was coming home early, but she still left the bar in place.

Thankfully, he rarely came home early and often worked extra days. His mother was a different person when he was gone. She danced, she sang, she let him help bake. Her smiles were beautiful, her love lavish. She was quick to hug and praise him.

The dream held a golden quality as images blurred from one into another. The warm sunshine in the courtyard as she held him up so he could reach the lower limbs of an overhanging tree. He loved climbing high into the branches and seeing the city. Although he never stayed long. Always there was a nagging fear that he would miss hearing the door and he would climb down to find his mother cowering and his father standing beneath the tree. He could have used the tree to escape. He could have run away, but he couldn’t leave his mother and she was too frightened to attempt it.

The golden dream drew to a close, shifting and darkening as it always did. The sun sank toward the western horizon and long shadows crawled across the ground. His mother’s smiles began to falter as anxiety tightened her eyes. She put together the evening meal in silence, her eyes flicking toward the door every few minutes.

Without needing to be told, Kovan gathered his few toys and hid them under the floorboards beneath his bed. He swept the floors and looked carefully for anything that might be out of place. Then he returned to the kitchen and helped clean things up as she cooked. The air thickened with palatable tension.

Soon, his father would return and something wouldn’t be right. Nothing was ever right, nothing ever good enough. Kovan couldn’t stand straight enough or he stood too straight; he couldn’t respond to questions quick enough or he responded too quick and was accused of trying to anticipate what his father was going to say. His mother changed from a beautiful rose glowing in the sun to a wilted, fading flower. Dinner was too cold or too hot. She had cooked too much food or not enough.

There was no pleasing his father because his father enjoyed what he did all day too much. He enjoyed inflicting pain and having power over someone. The home that always felt secure and warm after his father left, became cold and hostile upon his return.

The dream shifted again, growing darker as the claws of black memories dragged him further from the golden dream.

Kovan no longer looked on, he was part of it. A boy of fourteen cowering in the hall from his father, trying to ignore the pain, trying not to give his father the satisfaction of hearing him cry out. His father stormed closer, in his hand a thin knife used to open the seals on scrolls.

Kovan screamed as the knife dragged a furrow down the side of his face. The skin ripped open as it tore a twisted path from the corner of his left eye to the line of his jaw.

Something inside his mother snapped. Out the corner of his other eye, Kovan saw her hurtle out of the darkened hallway behind his father. Candlelight from his parents’ room cast dimly into the hall and glinted off the kitchen knife in her hand.

His father roared as she plunged the blade into his back. Blood splattered the wall as she yanked it free and plunged it again. She pulled it free as he turned and she buried it in his chest, missing the mark of his blackened heart.

His father lunged at her as she fled toward the kitchen. Kovan didn’t see everything that happened, but he heard her screams. He made it to the kitchen in time to see his father slam his mother’s head against the stone cooking hearth. She crumpled to the floor in a puddle of blood, her empty eyes staring sightlessly at the ceiling.

Kovan backed away as the man turned toward him. Staggering forward, his father’s breath wheezed and bloody froth bubbled from his lips. His father fell to the floor a couple of paces away. Kovan didn’t run for help. He sat in one of the chairs in the front sitting room with the side of his face bleeding and throbbing, and watched his father, his tormenter, slowly die.

The dream shifted again, flickering through short images of the grandparents he’d never known. Taking him in and trying to love him. But he was too far gone, too damaged to give or receive love. Never again would Kovan be put in that position. Never would he allow someone to use the power of love to trap and torment him as his father had. The twisted scar on his face was nothing compared to the deep scars on his heart, the ones that festered and seeped their own kind of poison.

Vaddoc glanced back as they left the small town behind. Still three days north of Marden, they’d stayed only long enough to take a meal before riding on.

Kirynn twisted in her saddle to look back. “What?”

“Hmm?” Preoccupied with his own thoughts, he wasn’t really paying attention. A sharp jab to his shoulder immediately brought him to the present.

Her green eyes were narrowed and irritation showed plain on her face. Never one to have a lot of patience, she sighed. “Why are you looking back? What has you lost in your head?”

He glanced back at the town once more, a sense of unease worming its way through him. He turned back to her. “Something is wrong.”

Kirynn rolled her eyes. “Of course something is wrong. This is the third town we’ve visited where everyone looks beaten. Unless the people of Shadereen normally look whipped and frightened. I wouldn’t know since I’ve never been here before, although I was under the impression they were a bunch of stone faces like you.”

“Have patience, Vaddoc. You care for her, remember?” Namir’s sending cut through his the defensive irritation that flashed through him at her words.

“Why should I always be the patient one?”

Vaddoc heard a rumble of amusement in his mind as Namir answered, “Because one of you must and we both know it won’t be Kirynn. Syrakynn is not much better. Neither of them have much tolerance for round about answers or methods. Both prefer a direct and open approach to everything.”

Vaddoc sucked in a breath and let it out slowly, allowing the negative emotions to flow out with it. Namir was right, as usual. With his emotions fully under control he answered Kirynn. “Everyone here is not a ‘stone face’ like me, but they certainly do not act like that. I have never seen my people so afraid or tense. If the Kojen invade a town, the people will grab anything that can be used as a weapon and charge into the fight.”

He shifted the reins in his hands and guided the horse to the edge of the road as a wagon rumbled past on its way to the town they’d just left. Vaddoc tried to catch the eye of the driver, but the man kept his head down, staring dully at the rump of the horse pulling the wagon.

The driver finally looked up in surprise when the horse stopped short. Kirynn was blocking the road with her horse. Vaddoc watched as wary distrust filled the man’s face.

She flipped her braid over her shoulder and glared at the man. “What is wrong with you?”

“Excuse me?” the man asked, clearly puzzled.

Vaddoc mentally counted to ten and tried to keep his voice civil. “Kirynn, what are you doing?”

She shot him a glare before turning back to the wagon driver. “I asked what was wrong with you. First, all of them,” she jerked her thumb back toward the village, “are slinking around like dogs that have just been beat. Now here you are with the same manner about you. I was given the impression Shaderians were warriors, but that isn’t what it looks like to me.”

Anger flashed on the man’s face. “You must be recently come to Shadereen or you would not talk like this. We are warriors, we are brave.” His face crumpled. “But what is that in the face of dragons?”

“Dragons?” Vaddoc tried to keep his voice even.

The man looked at him for the first time. “She is not Shaderian, but you are, so you should know. Then again, maybe not. These are strange and dangerous times.” He ran his hands over his face. “Yes, dragons. Blacker than a night without a moon and with evil in their eyes, ridden by people with the same evil. There was no defense against them. How do you fight magic shadows? Or fire that is breathed faster than anyone can hope to put out? How do you fight against magic?”

He looked wildly between Vaddoc and Kirynn. “You can call me crazy if you want!” His voice rose until he was nearly shouting. “Think whatever you will, but magic and dragons are loose again and it will be your own heads you lose if you do not start believing real quick!”

He slapped the cart horse with the reins, nearly running it into Kirynn. She quickly moved her horse out of the way and watched the man and wagon pass with her eyes wide and her mouth slightly open. She turned to Vaddoc. “You have strange people in your birthplace, Vaddoc.”

Vaddoc stared at her. “He just said Shadow Riders and their dragons were here burning things and you are worried about how he acted?”

She shook her head and gazed back at him. “I’m not surprised. A little irritated they beat us here, but I rather expected it.”

“You expected it? Why?”

She rode her horse past him, reaching out to pat his cheek on the way by. “Because it’s what I would do if I were them. They need control of the nations too. Now it’s up to us to see if we can wrest Shadereen’s freedom back from them.”

He nudged his horse forward and rode next to her. “Why did you not say anything?”

She smiled. “Why didn’t you think of it? Besides, I was hoping we would make it here first. Your plan to ride in on horses and approach all of this quietly made sense if we were first. But, we aren’t. Tomorrow we stable the horses at the next town and finish this trip on our dragons.”

“Are you sure that is a good idea?”

She nodded. “If the past three towns are any indication, Shadereen has been torn down and is drowning in fear and apathy. We need to shock them out of it. Tell me, how shocked do you think the King of Shadereen will be when two dragons land on his doorstep?”

Vaddoc couldn’t help the chuckle that rose at the mental picture she painted. “Shocked enough that I hope they do not kill us before we can explain.”

Kirynn glanced up at the sky. “They won’t.”

He followed her gaze. Namir and Syrakynn circled so high above them, that even his bond-enhanced eyes had trouble seeing them. She was right, they wouldn’t. Not because they wouldn’t try, but because he wasn’t the newly emerged magic user he was the last time he was here. He was strong enough and skilled enough to shield both of them and their dragons this time. No one would succeed in trying to harm Namir, or Kirynn and Syrakynn.

The next morning, Vaddoc rose with the first light of dawn in the sky. He stood and stretched, his mind automatically reaching for Namir. He found him, miles to the northeast slumbering in the endless grasslands of the Ash Plains. He bent down and grabbed his sword belt, buckling it around his hips. A blood curdling scream whirled him around. He whipped his swords from their sheaths and embraced the flow of his magic. In his mind, he felt Namir come fully awake.

Kirynn stood balanced on top of a rock no more than a few inches high, hands engulfed in flames as she looked around, her expression a mixture of terror and anger. A few paces away a patch of grass burned in the semi-darkness. “Creepy, filthy thing is as big as a blasted horse!”

Vaddoc swept his gaze around the campsite. He saw nothing that warranted her behavior. The way she was acting he expected to find…what? Not even Shadow Dragons elicited this kind of response from her. What would scare her like that? He looked closer at the ground. There it was, crouched beyond the burning clump of grass.

He threw back his head and laughed. Until now, he wasn’t entirely sure he had believed it and the proof was hilarious. A small ball of fire narrowly missed his head. Kirynn glared at him. “Next time, I swear your head will light up like a torch.”

Vaddoc managed, with some effort, to gain control of his laughter as he sheathed his swords. “It is only spider.”

“Only a spider! That’s not a spider—it’s a monster. ”

Vaddoc looked at the spider again. It was only about a foot across, including legs. He shrugged. “It is a sand spider. They are all over the southern part of the desert. They keep rodents down.”

She didn’t move from her rock. “I will take mice and rats, thank you very much.”

“You will have to get used to them at some point. They are quite common and you cannot go around burning everything down because of a spider.” He couldn’t help his amusement as he prodded her a little. “Besides, you can eat the larger ones.”

She stared at him, her eyes wide. “The larger ones? You mean there are spiders bigger than that? You’re lying.”

“No, I am not.” He picked up his saddle, ignoring the spider. “That must be a young one. The adults can reach twice that size.”

Vaddoc felt Namir’s approach. “Do you have need of me?” came the sending.

“No, Kirynn is just confronting her own eight-legged demon. She will be fine and I am not bothered by the spider.”

He set the saddle on his horse and tightened the cinch. Glancing over his shoulder he asked, “Are you going to stand on that rock all day, afraid of a spider, or are you going to saddle up your horse? We have a big day ahead of us. Unless you intend to spend the day here.”

“Fine.” She stepped gingerly from the rock and walked toward her horse, keeping an eye on the spider still crouched against the ground. She reached for her saddle then hesitated. “What if there is one under here? Laugh if you will, but I don’t think I can handle that right now.”

Vaddoc studied her face. It was unusual for her to admit defeat—the same way it was unusual for dogs to fly. He picked up her saddle and placed it on her horse’s back. Her hands no longer flamed and she stood with her arms crossed.

He flashed her a wide smile. “I hope you do not expect this all the time now.”

She glared at him for a moment, then shook her head. “I just can’t shake my fear of them. Thank you for picking my saddle up.”

He stepped closer and reached to cup the back her neck. Pulling her close he kissed her firmly. With a last brush of his lips, he stepped back. “Any time, my lady.”

Kirynn laughed softly, and her eyes held a different kind of heat. She turned and began cinching the saddle. “If you keep that up, we won’t get anything done today.” She glanced back at the spider. “Then again, there is no way I’m going to do anything this close to that thing.”

In moments they were on the road, riding toward the next small village. The sun wasn’t quite at its peak when they entered the moderately sized town. Men and women were busy in their everyday tasks. Wives hung clothes to dry in the warm breeze, men worked at a variety of tasks, and children played on front stoops. But an undercurrent of fear flowed through it all. Women kept their heads down and their eyes on their children. Men glanced at the sky and spoke in hushed tones. Children didn’t run with the usual abandon and glee that was typical of youth.

A large, heavyset man greeted them with eyes downcast when they dismounted in front of an inn. “What can I do for you?”

“We need to stable our horses for a time,” Vaddoc said. He took in the man’s slumped shoulders and his expression of defeat. Were things really that bad in Shadereen?

“My stable is for guests of the inn. Do you plan to take rooms here as well?”

Vaddoc shook his head. “No, but I will be happy to make sure you are well compensated. Name your price.”

The innkeeper glanced up at him. “If you do not plan to stay, why stable your horses? Are you planning to walk to where ever you are going?”

“No.”

The innkeeper’s amber eyes flicked across Kirynn and their horses. He shrugged. “Whatever you like. It does not really matter much anymore. Not like there is a lot of traffic and guests these days. Most are staying close to home. Even the Traders are spooked. If you were smart, you would get on those horses and ride somewhere far away, though I cannot think of any place that will be safe after a while. You probably know this, being Shaderian and all.”

Vaddoc nodded. “I have been far from home for some time, but I have heard the rumors since coming back.”

“Rumors?” The man looked at him as if he’d lost his mind. “They are more than rumors. The stories are true. Those black devils landed in Marden and when they were not made welcome, they tortured and killed people. Set fire to things. Once they finished making sure Marden would not oppose them, they flew over every town and village, making sure we all knew who really ruled this nation now. Those that tried to stand up to them were killed in the blink of an eye. One man, he looked Calladaran, killed a man here in town. Made him bleed out through his mouth, nose, and ears. It was…” he shuddered and smoothed the thin strands of gray hair on the top of his head. “Never mind. Follow me, the stable is around back.”

When they reached the stable yard, he pointed to the row of empty stalls. “Choose whichever you like. My stable boys quit after the black dragons showed up. Said they did not see the point of sticking around. I will make sure your animals are fed and cared for properly. Fates know I need something to do with myself.”

They put the horses into the stalls while the innkeeper forked straw in for bedding. He made sure they had water and hay while Vaddoc and Kirynn stowed their saddles in the tack room.

Back out in the wide street that ran through town, the innkeeper looked at them. “I wish you luck with whatever business you are about, though I cannot imagine what it would be here in town.”

Vaddoc counted gold coins into the man’s hand while he answered, “Our business is in Marden.”

“Then why stable your horses? It is a long ride yet to the capitol.”

“We have other means of travel.”

The man’s eyes narrowed. “What other means?” Then he glanced at the coins in his hand and nearly choked. “This is far too much,” he sputtered.

Vaddoc smiled. “We may be a while.”

“What business are you headed to Shadereen for?” The innkeeper smoothed the thin hairs on his balding head again. “Or would it be best if I do not know?”

“I don’t see a reason for you not to know. Everyone will soon enough,” Kirynn said.

Vaddoc glanced at her. “You are certain this is a good idea?” He wished she wouldn’t spring things like this on him.

She leveled a look at him that said he was dense. “Unless you intend to walk out of this town and continue for several miles, I think they’re all going to see in the next few minutes.”

Alright, so she had a point. “I suppose you are right.” He took a deep breath and turned to the innkeeper. “You have had contact with Shadow Riders and their dragons, you have seen the way they use magic. But there is more than one side to this.”

The innkeeper looked back and forth between them. “More than one side? What do you mean?”

Vaddoc took a deep breath. “There are other dragons, other magic users, who do not behave this way. Who feel that the protection of people and their nations is important. Magic users who use their power not to kill but to heal. Who put out fires, rather than start them. Who create fertile land and bring rain, or stop the rain when there is too much.”

The innkeeper shook his head. “Magic drives people insane and dragons are evil. These Shadow Riders and their dragons, they are proof of that.”

Kirynn took a step forward. “What if we could prove our words?”

He laughed. “What proof can you possibly offer?”

She smiled. “How about ourselves?”

His laughter cut short and his eyes widened. “Y…you?”

“Yes, us.”

A sheen of sweat broke out on the man’s forehead. “Please, do not hurt me. I have taken good care, have I not? I stabled your horses. I promise I will care for them.”

Vaddoc shook his head. “We have no intention of hurting you and I am sure you will do fine taking care of the horses. But you must realize, all magic is not bad.” He glanced at Kirynn. “Do you mind backing up and tossing a fireball at us?”

“A what? No, no, no, no. Please.” The man started shaking.

Vaddoc stepped to the innkeeper’s side. “What is your name?”

“M…Medar.”

“Medar, I promise, no harm will come to you or anyone in this town.”

Kirynn backed up until she stood in the middle of the street. “How big do you want it?”

“Big enough to make an impression.”

Medar groaned as a ball of fire began spinning in front of her. It grew until it was the size of a wagon. On the street, people screamed. Most ran. With a quick nod, Kirynn sent the fireball roaring toward them. Medar ducked, but Vaddoc stood relaxed next to him. In the space of a second, he wove the shield. The fire came up against the shield and flowed around them, dissipating as it did.

Vaddoc let the shield fall. “You dispersed it a little quicker than I expected.”

Kirynn walked back to them. “You two are standing right in front of his inn. I didn’t want to take the chance of it catching on fire. I could’ve put it out, but there would still have been damage.”

Medar straightened and Vaddoc turned to him. “You see, not all magic is evil. I do not expect you to accept us right away, that would be asking too much. But I wanted you to see that there are good uses for it and to see we mean you no harm.”

Kirynn cleared her throat. “We might as well get all of the shocks over with at once, before the townspeople recover and decide to skewer us.”

Sweat rolled down the side of Medar’s weathered face. “What now? Why me? Why my inn?” His voice trailed off into incomprehensible mumbling.

Vaddoc nodded and reached out for Namir. “It is time for you and Syrakynn to join us.”

Vaddoc watched the innkeeper’s face as the sound of the dragons’ wings grew closer. At first, confusion filled the man’s expression, but it slowly changed to horror when recognition clicked. He backed away, pressing his back flat against the front of the inn as his complexion turned a disturbing shade of green.

The shadows of the two dragons filled the street as the massive dragons landed slowly. Vaddoc felt Namir gauge his landing carefully to ensure he could make the last distance to the hard-packed dirt without smacking his wings into the buildings. It wasn’t easy; both dragons had to compensate by dropping the last twenty feet.

The ground shook under the weight of the heavy landing. The street was completely deserted. Medar’s mouth opened and shut but no sound came out. He stared at the two dragons with wide, terrified eyes.

Kirynn smiled at him, a look of concern in her eyes. “Medar, are you alright? I assure you, these are not the dragons you encountered before. For one, they aren’t black and for another, they don’t have an evil bone in their body.”

“Medar?” Vaddoc laid a hand on the man’s shoulder. “Please, say something. You are starting to worry me.”

In response, Medar turned and vomited on the ground. Vaddoc and Kirynn both reached for him as he started to topple. They helped him away from the mess, and eased him down so he sat on the ground leaning against the wall.

“Perhaps this was not the best idea.” Vaddoc said. It certainly hadn’t gone at all like he’d hoped it would.

“They had to meet them at some point. After a visit from Shadow Riders, I can’t imagine it would ever be easy to accept any dragons,” Kirynn said as she knelt next to the innkeeper. “Medar, would you please at least hear us out? Are we like the Shadow Riders? Have we treated you or your town badly? Even our dragons landed in an awkward fashion to avoid damaging anything with their wings. Surely you can see these are not the same type of dragons.”

His face had at least returned to a normal color Vaddoc saw with relief. Instead of answering though, the man buried his head in his hands and began to weep. Vaddoc heaved a sigh. This was going nowhere.

A loud scream made him turn. Kirynn also whirled toward the sound.

A girl of no more than three or four broke loose from the hold of an older girl and ran into the street. Her mother, gripping an infant in her arms, ran a short way after her before stumbling to a stop. She looked between the toddler and the infant. More people spilled into the street, but they too stopped well short of the girl, indecision on their faces. Vaddoc didn’t need Maleena to see their desire to save the child warring with their fear of the dragons.

The little girl didn’t seem to share the fear of her elders. She scampered up to the two massive dragons without hesitation. Namir, who adored children, immediately lowered his great golden nose down, his breath ruffling the dark curls on her head. Her mother let out a strangled cry and stumbled forward a few more steps.

The girl giggled and reached up, grabbing hold of Namir’s lip to pull his nose closer. Namir obliged the tiny demand with a soft, contented rumble in his throat. With the bold curiosity that only a child has, she lifted his lip and prodded at his huge, curved teeth.

“Yous has big teeth!” She let his lip drop and grabbed the edge of his nostril in her pudgy hand. “I likes you. You not like those icky ones.”

Vaddoc bit back a grin at her matter-of-fact tone. “Be very careful, Namir. Her mother is about to have a complete breakdown.”

“Am I ever anything other than careful with little ones?” Namir sent back.

As the little girl gazed up at the dragon, a loud meow broke the silence. She looked up at Namir’s back and squealed, “Kitty!” Cat, sitting in the saddle, meowed back.

The girl tugged on Namir’s nostril and started walking back to her mother. At first Namir didn’t move, but when she gave another tug, he took a step forward. Another tug and another step. Slowly, the dragon followed her until they stood directly in front of her mother. Vaddoc started to worry the woman might faint with the infant in her arms.

“Momma, looky what followed me home! Can I keep it?” She beamed up at the woman.

Her mother slowly sank until she sat on the ground. She stared at her daughter with wide, dark eyes. “Lenya…we cannot…” her words trailed away.

“But Momma, he is nice. And he has a kitty.” Large tears welled in the eyes of the toddler. Her mother reached for her but she retreated until she stood under Namir’s chin. “I want him,” her little voice wailed.

Namir settled his bulk on the street and crooned to the little girl. Her mother looked up at the dragon, her expression showing she was at a loss as to how to handle the building temper tantrum.

Vaddoc strode across the street, coming to the rescue of the young mother. When he reached Namir, he knelt down next to the little girl. “You like this dragon?”

She turned tear-filled eyes on him. Not real tears, but the kind small children use to drive guilt into their parents. Lenya nodded. “I wants to keep him. He will keep the bad ones away. I know it.”

Vaddoc smiled. “Yes, he will keep the bad dragons away. That is his duty. His name is Namir. The red one is Syrakynn. She will keep the bad ones away too.”

She gripped the edge of Namir’s nostril again and leaned over to peek at the big red dragon with a smile on her face. “Is Sykynn and Mir married?”

Vaddoc laughed and Namir snorted in amusement, the wind from it blowing the young mother’s hair and ruffling her dress. In her arms, the infant stirred. Vaddoc shook his head. “No, little one, she is not Namir’s wife, although they do care for each other.”

“What is kitty’s name?”

“That is Cat, he is Namir’s kitty, although he likes me too.”

She gazed up at him, her eyes little dark pools full of trust. “Can I keep Mir?”

“Not in the way you want. You see, Namir is bonded to me; we share each other’s emotions and thoughts. It would be very hard for us to be separated. Beyond that, Namir is not a possession. He is his own being, with his own thoughts and feelings. He is more intelligent than a person. You cannot keep him anymore than you can own another person. It would not be right.”

Lenya looked down at the road and a single tear rolled down her cheek. “Will he go away now?”

“Only for a little while. We have to go to Marden so that other people can know there are good dragons. You do not want other people being afraid do you?” She shook her head. “And you want other people to know they are not facing the bad dragons alone, right?”

She nodded and looked back up at him. “Will he come see me again?”

“Absolutely. Our horses are here, remember. Besides, he says he likes you.”

“Do you ride on him when he goes up into the sky?”

He smiled again. “Yes, I do. It is very exciting.”

“Can I do it?”

Vaddoc glanced at her mother’s face and her alarm. He winked at her and turned back to the little girl. “Yes, someday. You see, there are special straps that hold you in the saddle and you are not big enough yet. They would not fit on you and you would be in danger of falling off.”

Lenya pouted and hugged the tip of Namir’s snout. “Momma, can I go see Sykynn before they go?”

Her mother looked at Vaddoc, Namir, Kirynn, Syrakynn, and finally back at her daughter. “Y…” she cleared her throat, though her voice still came out thready, “Yes.”

With a squeal of delight, Lenya ran across the street to the big red. Syrakynn happily lowered her nose to the girl. Vaddoc stood up and watched her with one hand laid against Namir’s neck.

Kirynn knelt down so she was level with the girl, while Lenya plied her with questions about the red.

“Vaddoc, would you please assure the mother that I would never hurt her or her little ones? Fear is still rolling off her.”

Vaddoc turned to the woman and offered her a hand. “My name is Vaddoc. My dragon, Namir, would like me to relay a message.”

She glanced at the dragon, slowly took the offered hand and Vaddoc helped her back to her feet. She stared at the great golden dragon. “What message?”

“He would like to reassure you that he would never hurt you or your children, or anyone else in the village. He asks that you please not fear him.”

The woman gave a shaky laugh. “My name is Anly and I will do my best, but I am afraid it is not so easy to turn off.”

The older girl who had been holding Lenya stepped forward. She was probably a year or two older than Loki. “My name is Tenyi. Can I meet your dragon too?”

Vaddoc nodded. “Of course, he will be very happy to meet more people.”

A boy, a little older than Tenyi, edged out into the street. “I want to meet them.”

Slowly, more children stepped forward. The adults, although more hesitant, eventually followed the lead of their more adaptable offspring. A touch on Vaddoc’s arm made him turn.

The innkeeper stood smoothing his thin hair. “I must apologize. I never knew there could be dragons like this. When those black dragons and their riders came, all I saw was confirmation of the tales.”

Vaddoc laid a hand on the man’s shoulder. “Medar, there is no reason to apologize. How would you have known?”

Medar nodded. “Can I…can I meet your dragons?”

Vaddoc dropped his hand. “Of course. I think Namir would like that.”

Kellinar glanced up as they reached the castle gate. The wall, topped with flags bearing the standard of Haraban, rose high above them. Beside him, Taela still rode with the cowl of her cloak pulled forward. How she could stand it was beyond him. The heat of the late afternoon, combined with the heavy humidity, created an oppressive blanket over the area. Sweat dampened his face. As soon as he wiped it off, it was back.

Ten uniformed men, five on either side of the steps leading up to the open heavy doors, stood guard. Three of the guards stepped into their path.

The oldest of the three, his hard face creased with experience, glanced at them. He barely registered Kellinar or Serena, but his eyes hardened with suspicion as he took in Taela with the hood of her cloak pulled forward. Backlit by the sun, the shadow of her hood effectively hid her face. “What is your business here?”

“We seek audience with King Bahar of Haraban,” Taela said softly, her voice belying the anxiety Kellinar sensed underneath. She wanted to get in without being recognized. None of them knew her status in Haraban. Was she a desperately searched for daughter, or the shamed female member of the household wanted for the crime of using magic?

“The king is not accepting audience today. Leave your name and if possible, he will see you when he can.”

Taela reached up and hesitated. A mixture of fear and irritation flowed through their bond. He sensed her inner struggle. With resignation, she lowered her hood and lifted her chin. “Then inform him that his daughter is the one who seeks audience with him.”

All of the guards dropped to one knee. The older man glanced up briefly. “Princess Taela! Please, accept our apologies.”

She rolled her eyes. “Apology accepted. Stop kissing the paving stones, it’s annoying.”

They stood as a group. The older man stepped forward and offered his hand. “Allow me to assist you off your horse. Your father will be most anxious to see you.”

Kellinar leaped down from his saddle and pushed between the guard and Taela. “I will help her down.” He reached for her but paused when he heard the whisper of steel against leather. Turning slowly, he eyed the guard who stood with his sword drawn.

“The princess is not to be touched by those not of the king’s house without permission from the king himself.”

Kellinar chuckled. “I assure you, I have done more than merely touch her.”

He watched as the guard turned a fascinating shade of reddish purple. The others behind him scowled. Taela grumbled under her breath and Kellinar sensed her exasperation. She leveled a look at the guard. “He is the only one allowed to touch me. The king’s permission no longer applies.”

“But, Princess—”

“It is not your place to question me. Now put your weapon away.”

With a glower at Kellinar, the guard complied. Kellinar flashed him a smile and reached up to help Taela down, not that she really needed it, but it would needle the guard. As Taela straightened her divided riding skirts, she looked up at him with narrowed eyes. “You don’t have to antagonize them.”

He grinned. “I know I don’t have to.”

Serena dismounted and walked over to them. “You will likely never break him of it, Taela. Old habits die hard.”

Kellinar ignored her comment and held his arm out for Taela. “My lady.”

The sweet smile she gave him held a hint of poison. He was testing her temper and he knew it. “Try to behave,” she whispered.

The guard’s eyes flicked between them but he voiced none of the questions that seemed to lurk behind the look. Without a word, he turned and led them up the stairs.

Once inside, they followed him down a column lined hall. The polished stone floor reflected the fading light pouring through the tall glass windows on both walls. Kellinar glanced at the large, manicured gardens visible through the windows. Beyond, the inner walls of the castle threw deep shadows over the flowerbeds and bushes. More tall windows lined the inner castle walls. Occasionally, a light breeze brought the mixed scents of blooming roses, wisteria, magnolias, and honeysuckle into the hall.

They stopped at a set of ornate doors. While the guard rapped on the door, Kellinar looked at the designs of fish and flowers carved into it. Although beautiful, the carvings didn’t compare to those in Galdrilene. Once these would have seemed exquisite, but over two years spent seeing wood and stone carved by mages had educated him on the true beauty of such things.

The doors swung open and the guard walked forward. “Your majesty…”

Taela walked past the guard, her eyes sharp on his. Without a word the guard turned and left. Kellinar glanced at his bondmate. What had she done to the poor man?

She brushed past the other guards inside the doors and strode across the massive room. An angular man, dressed in fine clothing, turned from a conversation with two other men. A neatly trimmed, silver-white beard and mustache covered his face below dark brown slanted eyes. That must be Bahar.

Bahar’s eyes widened as he left the other two men standing there and walked toward Taela with long strides. “Taela,” he breathed. “Thank the Fates.”

She smiled and ran the last few steps into her father’s welcoming hug. Kellinar hung back. Being this close, his shield should help protect her from the discomfort of touching, although he still monitored the bond to be sure. He kept an eye on the few other occupants of the room, watchful for any who might not welcome her return.

Her father kissed her forehead and then stepped back, holding her hands. “What happened to you? Where have you been?”

“There is a great deal to tell, much of it needs to be discussed privately.” She squeezed his hands and glanced back at Kellinar. “I also have some introductions to make, but again, we need to talk in private.”

Bahar looked over Taela’s shoulder, settling first on Serena and then on Kellinar. His eyes narrowed. Kellinar didn’t smile in greeting. The man was obviously intuitive enough to suspect there would be more to the introductions than he would probably like. Kellinar tried to set aside his instinctive distrust of royalty; he was bondmated to a princess after all. In his heart, he knew his bond with Taela was what allowed him to love and trust her explicitly. Her father might be a good man, honorable and honest to an extent, but royalty rarely did anything that didn’t stand to gain them something.

Bahar cleared his throat. “Yes, of course.” He turned and started across the massive room. Kellinar followed with Serena beside him. Kellinar eyed Taela’s right hand, still clutched in her father’s, feeling the bond to ensure the shield kept her from discomfort. Bahar glanced back and Kellinar sensed a challenge in their depths. This time he flashed the king a smile. Bahar was seriously mistaken if he thought he could separate him from Taela.

The vast ceiling soared over their heads, swallowing the slight echo of their footsteps off the polished floor. Kellinar swept he gaze over the other people in the room. All of them seemed frozen. None had made a move or a sound since Taela’s entrance. Only their eyes followed the small procession across the room. As they stepped into an antechamber, he looked back and saw the first signs of thaw beginning. No doubt the second the door closed, they would thaw completely and within the hour the entire city would be buzzing with the news of Taela’s return.

He put them out of his mind as the heavy ornate door swung shut. The king took a seat behind a large, wooden desk and leaned his elbows on its polished surface. “Please, sit. A servant will bring refreshments.”

“Father, before we all sit down, I believe introductions are in order.” She held a hand out toward Serena. “Please welcome Serena, a… senior member of the Tower of Healing.”

Her father nodded at Serena as she sat on the edge of one of the chairs.

Taela paused and took a deep breath and raised her chin slightly. Kellinar sensed determination and suppressed fear as she lay her hand on his arm. “This is Kellinar. A senior member of the Tower of Wind and Air, and my bondmate.”

Bahar’s eyes flicked between them. His voice was calm and level when he asked, “What do you mean, ‘bondmate’?”

Taela shook her head. “You may not understand the exact words but you know the basic meaning. I can read it in your mind.”

Bahar jerked slightly and sat back in his chair. “Taela, I told you not to speak of that; it’s too close to magic. These two,” he indicated Kellinar and Serena, “do not seem surprised, so I assume you have spoken of such things to them. It does not change the fact that such admissions might bring you harm.”

He shifted back, trying to look more relaxed, but Kellinar saw the flush at Bahar’s neck and the sheen of sweat on his upper brow. Bahar glanced again at Kellinar before leveling a stern look at Taela. “As far as this ‘bondmate’ thing you spoke of. I hope you are not alluding that it is a type of marriage. Without my permission, you have no marriage. I do not know this young man’s history, his family ties, nothing.”

Kellinar sat in one of the chairs facing the desk. Leaning back, he propped his ankle on the opposite knee. He’d read the challenge in Bahar’s eyes correctly. “I’m afraid getting to know my birth family would be impossible since they all died of fever in the Mallay District of Trilene when I was boy. However, there are many in the Thieves’ Caves that are pretty close to family. They’ve never met a member of royalty. Well,” he chuckled, “at least not when the member of royalty was awake. Much easier to remove valuables from a sleeping person than one who is awake, don’t you think?”

“Kellinar.” Taela growled his name through gritted teeth.

He would pay for this later, but right at that moment watching Bahar’s face fill with red was worth the price.

“Are you mad, Taela?” Bahar roared, rising from his seat so fast he sent the chair crashing to the floor. “A thief from the Mallay of Trilene?” He slammed his fist on the desk. “I will not have it!” He glared at Kellinar, his brows drawn down. “Whatever you think you have with my daughter, you do not. You will leave Haraban, not just the city, but the nation.”

Kellinar smiled pleasantly. “I will go nowhere. Nothing short of death will break a bondmating; it goes far beyond a marriage. And though I’m sure you would like nothing better than to see me dead, you won’t get the pleasure of killing me. Not only would an attempt on my life bring down a wrath on your palace such as you have never witnessed, if you somehow succeeded in your attempt, you would bring unimaginable grief upon your daughter.”

Taela glared at Kellinar with fire in her dark blue eyes. “Don’t be so sure I won’t kill you myself when this is over.” Oh yes, he was going to pay. Maybe he could hide behind Shryden.

Dragon laughter filled his mind. “You wish to place me in front of her anger? I will of course protect you if she actually tries to kill you, but beyond that, this is a forest you have set fire to all by yourself. I think I will stay out of the way while you put it out.”

“Thanks a lot. See if I scratch that spot above your wing ever again.”

“You love me. Of course you will scratch it.”

Kellinar chuckled. Of course he would scratch it. He would give his life for Shryden. Fate-forsaken dragon just had to call his bluff. Shryden’s rough version of a chuckle echoed through his mind.

He glanced at Taela’s face again. At least he ran faster than she did. How long until Latia could Slide reliably? Anevay was always able to dispel Taela’s anger.

“Now you are threatening my kingdom?” Bahar’s shout brought him back to the conversation.

Kellinar shook his head and leaned forward. He leveled a hard look at Taela’s father. “No Bahar, the innocent people in your kingdom are perfectly safe. I’m not threatening them, just you. There will be no separating my bondmate from me.”

“Alright, that is enough.” Serena stood and moved to stand between Kellinar and Bahar. “This male posturing is ridiculous. Black dragons ride the dawn and there are Shadow Riders again for the first time in over five hundred years. There is much to talk about.”

She pointed a finger at Bahar. “Taela and Kellinar are bonded for life. It cannot be broken or revoked, so you might as well come to terms with it. It is done, you cannot undo it.”

She turned to Kellinar, her blue eyes flashing. “And you, I know it is hard for you to trust those in a wealthy, ruling position, but you are going to have to set that aside. You are no longer the Thief Lord of Trilene. You are Di’shan Kellinar Doryne, bonded to the Blue dragon Shryden. Your station is above this pettiness. You are a Guardian of Galdrilene. Act like it.”

Kellinar stared at her, chagrined. She was right. He couldn’t go into every situation with the mindset he had lived within Trilene. He needed to get this man on his side, not alienate him. His natural inclinations were to buck authority and push people in power to find out where their limits were, and he was a fool to give into those inclinations.

“Don’t be too hard on yourself, Kellinar. It is natural to fall back on old behaviors when confronted with things like this.” Shryden’s soothing voice filled his mind.

“You are too forgiving of my faults.”

“You sensed the challenge to your bond with Taela. I understand , after all, if he separated you from Taela, then I would be separated from Paki and that will never happen. Your reaction to such a threat was natural.”

“Natural or not, Serena is right. I may have blundered beyond repair here,” Kellinar sent.

Amusement shadowed Shryden’s return sending, “If Bahar proves too much of a problem, I can always eat him.”

Kellinar couldn’t help the soft chuckle that welled up. In the midst of his sudden feelings of failure, Shryden had lifted Kellinar’s mood. Love from the blue flowed along the bond and he returned it with every fiber of his being.

Serena narrowed her eyes at him. “What is so funny?”

He smiled at her. “Just Shryden, offering me his wisdom.” Kellinar let his smile fade and turned to Bahar. His face was drained of color as he fumbled for his chair. Taela rushed around the desk to help, a worried look on her face as her father sank slowly into it. His gaze flicked across the three of them and he swallowed.

“Dragons?” His voice was quiet and shaky.

Taela walked back around the desk and took one of the chairs. “Yes, Father, dragons. What I do isn’t too close to magic, it is magic. Magic users that make it to Galdrilene to train usually become mages. But I hatched a silver dragon. Her name is Paki.”

He stared at her with wide eyes and his mouth worked a couple of times before sound came out. “Is…is that where you went when you left?”

She sighed. “Not exactly. I was in the garden, trying to find a way to make Sehlas change his mind. I thought I could use my gift to do it, but it didn’t quit work out that way. I thought Sulwyna, Sehlas’ youngest wife, had seen me and made the connection between me hiding in the bushes and her husband’s condition. I ran for my rooms.”

Taela smoothed a wrinkle in her divided riding skirts. Kellinar could sense her unease. He didn’t blame her; this was going to drudge up bad memories. He leaned over and laid a hand over hers. He searched her face. “You can leave for a bit and I can tell this part if you need me to. You don’t have to go over it again.”

She took a deep breath, her eyes sad as shook her head. “No, I will tell it, but thank you.” He gave her hand a squeeze.

She turned back to Bahar. “When I got to my rooms, I slammed the door shut and the locking bar down. When I turned around, there were two dark figures in the room. They offered me a way out, a sanctuary. I almost refused them but then you started shouting and pounding on the door. I panicked. I thought you had found out and were there to arrest me so I took their offer.” She took a deep breath and let it out, her fingers absently stroking Kellinar’s hand. “I ended up at the Kormai where the Shadow Dragons live. It’s a place of evil and darkness, and where I hatched Paki, my dragon. Her egg was flawed and she didn’t hatch as a Shadow Dragon. I don’t have good memories of that place other than Paki. Kellinar helped me escape while rescuing another Dragon Rider. If wasn’t for him, I don’t think Paki and I would have made it out of there alive.”

Bahar let out a slow breath and leaned back in his chair. “I had no idea magic had been used. All I was told was Sehlas had collapsed in the garden and you were seen running. As I came to your door, I heard you scream. When I finally gained entrance, you were nowhere to be found. You couldn't have jumped out a window and survived, but you were not on the stones below.” He wiped his hands over his face and took a deep shuddering sigh. “I tore the kingdom apart looking for you.”

His gaze settled on Kellinar. “It appears I need to offer my thanks for saving the life of my daughter. And perhaps, an apology.”

“No thanks are needed, Bahar.” Kellinar glanced at Taela. Maybe if he smoothed things out, her anger would dissipate. “I have my own apologies to offer. My dragon, Shryden, pointed out my behavior was a natural reaction to your challenge to my bond with Taela, but it’s not an excuse.”

Bahar folded his hands and obviously worked to get himself back in control. “Your dragon? Did you also hatch yours in this Kormai?”

Kellinar shook his head. “No, I hatched Shryden in Galdrilene. One of my friends was captured by the Shadow Riders, but the Kormai is like a honeycomb and difficult to navigate. My talents, honed by years as a thief in the Mallay, made me particularly qualified to sneak in and bring Taela and Maleena out.”

Bahar looked at Serena. “I suppose you have a dragon as well?”

She nodded. “A yellow named Miya.”

Bahar rubbed his face again. “It seems with mention of this Kormai and Shadow Riders, there is much more to be said. Please, Serena, sit. I promise there will be no more of this, how did you say, ridiculous male posturing.” He reached behind him and pulled a cord several times as she sat down. “It is past time for food and drink, don’t you think?”

Kellinar’s stomach rumbled in response and Bahar smiled slightly. “I am to assume then that these dragons are somewhere nearby?”

Taela nodded, relaxing into her chair a little. “They circle high above us, but it would only take a few seconds for them to dive the intervening distance. And, of course, we are not without our own protections so they would have plenty of time to get here.”

Bahar chuckled and set a few pieces of paper to one side. “I have no intention of testing that.” He glanced up at Kellinar. “That was the wrath you spoke of if I tried to take your life, wasn’t it?”

Kellinar leaned forward and two of his braids swung over his shoulder, the blue and white beads at the ends clicking. “Yes, and I feel it’s only right to tell you that Shryden did offer to eat you.” He smiled. “He was only joking of course.”

Bahar reshuffled the thick parchment papers and smiled, though his hands trembled. “Of course. I didn’t know dragons joked. The legends speak of nothing but mindless, flying beasts that burn and kill at will.”

“That would be Shadow Dragons,” Taela said.

Bahar said nothing. Instead, he stood and walked to a set of double doors on the far wall. They slid open to reveal a small room with a polished wooden table and chairs. “Please, join me for dinner. This is a private dining room. Once the food and drink is set, we will be left to our private conversation. And I do think it is best to keep it to ourselves for the moment until I understand better what has happened in the world. I imagine there are going to be enough rumors flying around about your return in the company of strangers especially after being shuttered away for a long time with me in a private conference. I want to make sure I have all of the answers before the questions start flying at me.”

Kirynn smiled at the townspeople standing back. She and Vaddoc had decided it was best to take off just outside of town where the dragons wouldn’t risk damaging any homes with their wings. Kirynn didn’t want Syrakynn hurting herself either by trying to take off in an awkward position.

Only Medar stood next to them. “Are you sure you do not want one of us to accompany you? It might make things go over a bit better.”

Vaddoc shook his head. “I doubt it; they would likely just think we had threatened your family or something. Unfortunately, I do not think there is going to be anything easy about any of this.”

“Thank you for offering though,” Kirynn said, smiling down at him from her saddle.

Medar nodded. “If you ever need anything, we will be here for you.” He backed up until he stood next to the others. Kirynn scanned their faces. Lenya sat in her mother’s arms, big tears rolling down her face. Beside them, her older sister, Tenyi, stood with a yearning hunger in her eyes as she watched Kirynn on her dragon. She had been Kirynn’s shadow the entire past week in the village. Full of questions, the girl must have asked her everything under the sun. She showed particular interest in Kirynn’s zahri and in Syrakynn.

With a last glance across their faces, she let Syrakynn know it was time to go. The red leaped into the air at the same time she brought her wings down, making the lift off dramatic and beautiful. Kirynn smiled. “Show off.”

“They are good people. They deserve a show,” came the dragon’s smug reply.

Kirynn only laughed as they climbed higher into the sky. When they reached a comfortable altitude, Syrakynn spread her wings and rode the updrafts, finding them with ease and showing no particular hurry.

“You certainly don’t seem in a rush,” Kirynn sent.

“Why should I be? We will easily reach Marden by late afternoon. And when we get there, you plan to land in the middle of the castle grounds. I imagine there will be all manner of people trying to kill you.”

Kirynn chuckled. “It wouldn’t be the first time. Tell you what; if someone tries to kill me and I in turn must relieve them of their life, you can eat their horse.” Syrakynn immediately picked up speed, drawing another laugh from Kirynn.

The sun rose hot in the clear blue sky. Kirynn couldn’t believe how warm it was already in Shadereen. In Boromar it would still be shifting between warm and cool. It was a time of year for wicked storms. But not a single drop of rain had fallen since they arrived.

As the day wore on, the towers of Marden reared up on the horizon. It wouldn’t be long now. She felt the familiar rush of adrenaline as she set herself for a possible battle. The last thing she wanted to do was kill anyone, but she wouldn’t stand by and let someone use her as a pincushion for their sword either.

Syrakynn and Namir angled down, coming in low over the city. In the streets below, people screamed and ran, dropping possessions and snatching up children as they fled to the shelter of their homes. Kirynn growled under her breath. What had the Shadow Riders inflicted on these people? A certain amount of fear was understandable given the legends told about dragons. But the abject terror she saw unfolding in the streets as they flew over went beyond that.

They approached the fortress-like castle in the center of Marden, flanked on three sides by the barracks and training yards of the Border Guard. Kirynn reached out to Syrakynn, “There is a huge open courtyard just inside the wall of the castle. Don’t land in it just yet.”

“I planned to land on the wall,” the red returned. “I have no intention of giving up the high ground just yet.”

Kirynn smiled, feeling a rush of love and admiration for the dragon.

Syrakynn slowed, working her wings in short, powerful strokes to lower herself toward the curtain wall. As men scattered for the shelter of the various towers, the red landed with one back foot on the wall walk, the other on the parapets of the curtain wall, and her two front feet on the low wall on the inside of the wall walk. The stone groaned under the weight of the dragon but held.

She kept her wings spread, ready to lift off at any indication of a serious threat to her rider. At the red’s request, Kirynn made no move to loosen her safety straps. She sensed the coiled readiness in the dragon.

To their right, Vaddoc and Namir landed on the next section of wall. The stone groaned and crumbled slightly under the heavier frame of the golden male. The inner courtyard below boiled with chaos. Border Guards rushed to place themselves between the dragons and the massive keep of the fortress. But even as they put up a show of defense, there was a certain hesitancy among them; a visible sense of defeat before the battle had even begun.

The other inhabitants scurried for cover. Horses were left unattended, and everything from buckets to trays were dropped and abandoned.

Within minutes of the dragons’ landing, silence settled over the courtyard like a heavy blanket, the tension and fear thick in the air. The Border Guards stood with weapons drawn, numerous arrows pointed at the riders and their dragons through the arrow slits in the keep walls. Everyone waited.

The main door to the keep opened and eight men walked out. The Border Guards moved smoothly in response to keep themselves between the dragons and the men. One imposing man with graying hair to his shoulders walked in front of the other seven. He never took his amber eyes off the dragons.

Though he held his head high and his broad shoulders straight, worry tightened his eyes, and anger and defeat filled his expression. He stopped in the middle of the courtyard. The silence seemed to deepen. He squared his shoulders and lifted his chin, his voice strong and deep as it rang out. “Why are you back here? What more do you want? What more do you wish to inflict upon us?”

Vaddoc held his hands up to show they were empty although Kirynn didn’t see the point in the gesture. How could they find empty hands comforting when they were staring down the snout of a massive, fire-breathing dragon? She turned her attention back to the fortress, alert for any sign of attack and praying to the Fates it didn’t come. A bunch of dead people wouldn’t exactly ingratiate them with the people of Marden.

“Alrendoc,” Vaddoc called. “We have no wish to inflict anything on you or force you into anything.”

Alrendoc scowled. “Why do you play games now?”

Vaddoc unbuckled his safety straps and leaped down from the saddle, pausing only long enough to release the catcher strap. “We are not Shadow Riders. We are not here to harm any of you.”

“You expect me to believe such lies?” Alrendoc called back, anger thick in his voice. “I have had enough of you and your ilk. Since I cannot stop you, say what you need to say and leave.”

The hiss of it slicing through the air was the only warning Kirynn got of the arrow before it pinged harmlessly off Syrakynn’s breastplates. The red turned with a snarl in the direction the arrow had come from, smoke curling from her nostrils.

Kirynn sent soothing waves to the dragon as she held her own flare of anger in check. She turned a glare on Alrendoc. Kirynn didn’t care what the Shadow Riders had done; she wouldn’t stand for them trying to kill her dragon. It didn’t matter that an arrow had no hope of penetrating the red’s scales, what mattered was the intent.

She raised her voice enough to be heard, her tone conversational. “If you wish to keep this peaceful, I would encourage you to reign in your archers. I don’t want to cause injury to any of you, but another attempt on my dragon’s life and I will burn this place to the ground.”

Even at a distance of fifty paces, she heard Vaddoc’s resigned sigh. Kirynn didn’t care if it ruffled the feathers of these prancing ponies. She saw no point in beating around the bush. They had made their intentions clear with the arrow; it was only fair that she made hers known as well.

Alrendoc turned to her with a startled look. He recovered quickly and bent his head to one of the Border Guards. The guard turned and ran into the keep while the others shifted to fill in his empty spot in a fluid maneuver. “I apologize for that incident. It will not happen again. Please do not hurt anymore of my people.”

She smiled at him though she knew it held no friendliness. “Refrain from threatening my dragon and we won’t have any problems. If you feel the need to come at me then do it like a man and attack me directly.” Syrakynn swung her head around until her large green eyes glared straight at Alrendoc. A quiet but menacing rumble in the dragon’s throat made it clear that attacking her rider would be an unwise decision.

Kirynn unbuckled her safety straps and leaped lightly to the ground. With quick fingers she loosened the catcher strap then walked to the stairs leading down from the wall walk. She crossed the courtyard, keenly aware of the multitude of arrows pointed at her. She paused when she reached the line of Border Guards and smiled at them. “Don’t make me move you.”

They looked uncertainly at her, obviously afraid of what she might do. Kirynn knew some of what the Shadow Riders had done and although torture wasn’t her style, she intended to use their fear against them. All was fair in love and war and until the lines of peace were drawn, they had shot an arrow at her dragon, this was war.

Several of the guards looked to an older man who must be their commander. Indecision warred on his face as he grappled with what to do. Alrendoc stepped forward, waving the men away. Kirynn’s respect for the man went up a notch. He may be a king, but he was willing to put himself in harm’s way rather than hide and watch his men suffer the consequences he believed her capable of.

Kirynn eyed him for a moment, taking his measure. “Since it appears we can refrain from killing each other perhaps we can attempt a peaceful approach that doesn’t involve arrows, fire, and angry dragons.”

Alrendoc wasn’t a fool. He glanced up at the two dragons and back at her. “If this is some sort of twisted game…”

Kirynn shook her head. “I told you, we are not Shadow Riders. I’m Kirynn Izenar, rider of Syrakynn, senior member of the Tower of Fire, and Guardian of Galdrilene. I don’t play games. I will be upfront and honest with you at all times. When I tell you we are not here to force you into anything by way of torture and death, I mean it.”

Alrendoc must have seen the truth in her eyes. He nodded slowly. “Understood.”

She turned as Vaddoc crossed the courtyard. “I believe you already know Vaddoc.”

A sharp intake of breath from some of the Border Guards and the hard look in Alrendoc’s amber eyes told her that Vaddoc was indeed recognized.

Vaddoc approached, his shoulders squared and his face impassive. Kirynn wondered how it would feel when it came time for her to face the judgment of her birthplace, even if the King of Boromar did know the truth about magic. A slight shift ran through the Border Guards though not all of them looked on with distrust or hostility. Interesting.

Alrendoc turned his stony eyes on Kirynn. “You expect me to trust what you say when you bring a traitor into our midst?”

“Vaddoc is the traitor?” She shot him an icy look. “And what are you? Vaddoc was as loyal as anyone else. In fact, it took him some time to be able to sever the ties and his loyalty to Shadereen and the Border Guard. Perhaps if those he was loyal to hadn’t been so ready to kill him, he wouldn’t have had to abandon everything.”

“It is the law,” Alrendoc said, his tone flat.

Kirynn shrugged. “It’s a stupid law.”

“People who can use magic go insane. I have yet to see anything to convince me otherwise.”

Kirynn laughed darkly. “Oh but my dear King, Vaddoc and I can both use magic. Do you see us running about torturing people?”

Alrendoc’s brows drew down at her casual address of him. “The day is early yet. I will wait and withhold judgment, but do not expect me to trust you yet.”

“You don’t have to trust us at all.” Kirynn shrugged. “In fact, you can tell us to leave now and we will. If you wish to take on the Shadow Riders by yourself or break under their rule that is your business. You are, after all, the wise and powerful ruler of this nation. We wouldn’t presume to know any better than you.” He eyed her uncertainly, as if trying to decide whether or not she had just insulted him.

Vaddoc’s approach turned the king’s attention to the man that had once sworn allegiance to him. His face was devoid of expression as he looked the king in the eye. “Alrendoc.”

The Border Guards around them shifted, a barely audible angry muttering running through them. But again, not all of them.

“Vaddoc.” Alrendoc’s brows knit together in a scowl. “Is this the proper way to greet me?”

“I greet you as one equal to another. My allegiance belongs to my dragon and Galdrilene.”

“You are not a king and a Border Guard’s pledge is for life.”

Vaddoc smiled slightly. “My old life ended the moment Namir hatched. And I am indeed equal to you. Not that Galdrilene’s hierarchy is set up quite the way you are used to.”

“I will not have this,” Alrendoc’s voice rose slightly. “This woman said you would leave, I am asking you to leave. Be gone from Marden and Shadereen. You are not welcome here.”

Kirynn shrugged. “If you wish. If you decide in the future that you would like help defending your city, I am sure you can find us. However, I’m afraid we will not be leaving Shadereen. We will not interfere with the working of your nation, but there is at least one village we promised to protect and we won’t break that promise. Any other villages that come to us for protection against the Shadow Riders will also be guaranteed that protection.”

She didn’t wait for Alrendoc’s response. With Vaddoc at her side, she walked away.

“Wait!”

Kirynn stopped and turned to see who had spoken. A balding man, short for a Shaderian, pushed past the Border Guards. Alrendoc turned his glower on the man. “This is decided and not up for discussion.”

The man glared back, his golden eyes hard. “It is not all up to you, Alrendoc. When it comes to national defense, the Council of Seven has a say. I think we should hear them out. Thus far they have not behaved in the way of the Shadow Riders. I have no wish to bow under the rule of sadistic people who take pleasure in causing harm. I am intelligent enough to know we are not capable of defending the people of Shadereen from the whims of the Shadow Riders. I am not alone in feeling it is in our best interests and those of the nation to hear them out. Our people have suffered enough and we are not the leaders we should be if we send away a chance to put a stop to this nightmare.”

He turned from Alrendoc and addressed them. “I am Lord Deslin of House Menar and a member of the Council of Seven.” He spread his hands in a placating gesture. “Please, will you reconsider leaving? Join us instead within the council room so we may further discuss your intentions and what you can do to protect Shadereen.” Deslin glanced at the dragons perched on the curtain wall. “I promise, no harm will come to your dragons.”

Vaddoc snorted. “Of that I am sure. You do not yet have the weapons or knowledge to take down a dragon. All you will do now if you attempt something is irritate them. I will warn you, however, if our safety is compromised once we are inside, our dragons will come to our defense, even if that means tearing the keep apart.” He smiled slightly. “And you will have to answer to a little girl in the village of Welan as to why you tried to harm ‘her’ dragon.”

Deslin cast a nervous glance at the red and the gold. “I promise. All four of you are safe.”

Vaddoc inclined his head a fraction. “We would be most pleased to accept your invitation.”

As they followed Deslin past the assembled Border Guards and through the door of the keep with the rest of the Council and a still scowling Alrendoc on their heels, Syrakynn sent, “Please be careful. I don’t trust them.”

Kirynn glanced back at the red before stepping through the door. “Neither do I.”

Vaddoc knocked on the familiar wooden door of the small house at the edge of Marden. Three long days of talks had finally resulted in the king and Council of Seven deciding their best defense against the Shadow Riders would be siding with Galdrilene.

Now, as the Council worked to figure out how to implement Dragon Law in Shadereen, Vaddoc finally had time to visit his family. A small knot of worry bound up inside him. Would they accept him? Or would they still continue to feel that he had shamed them when he left?

The Border Guards were left reeling after finding out several of their members had been to Galdrilene. The welcome from those who’d been and from the men that helped Emallya get him out of Marden, had eased the tension he’d felt about returning home. The Border Guards as a whole, as well as the king and the Council, knew he hadn’t abandoned his Watch for no reason.

The knot in his stomach tightened as the latch on the other side of the door slid back. It opened, revealing the face of his mother. Her graying hair hung loose and there were new lines in the familiar face. Her eyes widened and then she embraced him in a tight hug.

“Vaddoc,” she breathed. When she stepped back, tears shimmered in her eyes. “I was not sure what to think when I heard you returned, and riding a dragon no less.”

He swallowed and squared his shoulders. “I had to leave. They would have killed me for nothing. Magic does not drive people insane and not all dragons are bad.”

Her eyes warmed as she smiled at him. “I know, son, I know. Come in. Your sisters will be back from the market soon and will be delighted to see you.”

Vaddoc frowned slightly. “What do you mean, you know?”

She took his hand and led him into the house. “Vaddoc, I can use magic. Not a lot, certainly not to the degree you do, or even mages like your aunt. But enough that I have never had to use flint to set a fire in the hearth since I was a few years younger than you.”

Vaddoc glanced at the mantel over the hearth. The flint lay there, as it always had. “But there has always been flint there.”

His mother laughed softly as she closed the door. “Of course there has. I had to keep appearances up after all.” She waved her hand as if it was of no consequence. “Besides, your sisters often set the fire these days. So far neither of them have shown any magical ability, and if they do, it may not present as fire.” She laid her hand on his cheek. “From what I hear, you use light. Although it sounds like you have brought a fire rider with you.”

Vaddoc chuckled. Nothing ever seemed to be the way he once thought it was. “Yes, Kirynn uses fire.”

“Will I meet her?”

He nodded. “She is out with her dragon right now.”

His mother glanced at the door. “And your dragon, where is he and what is his name?”

Vaddoc sat down at the table as his mother placed plates of food and pitchers of drink on the table. Some things never changed. His mother and Marda would get along very well. Both believed every situation was made better with good food. “His name is Namir and right now he hunts. He has to go quite far for that. The dragons will not hunt livestock unless given permission from the owner of the animals.”

She nodded and sat down across the table from him. “You must tell me everything. Arnya is with the girls and will be back soon. I know she is anxious to find out how everything went.”

Vaddoc paused over a bite of food, thinking back to that foggy night when he’d left Marden. So much had happened since then. It was going to be a long tale.

The sun slowly edged its way behind the peaks of the mountains to the west as Mckale and Maleena rode toward a large village a short way from the walls of Taragen, the capitol city of Calladar. He gauged the sun’s descent; they would arrive just after full dusk. It would be the hour of the evening meal; the streets would be largely empty. The sharp chill in the air made having the cowls of their cloaks pulled up natural and the falling light would make it difficult for people to see them.

They had stayed with the Ke’han a full week. The last three weeks on the road had been long and hard. He glanced at Maleena as she yawned. He sensed her exhaustion. The journey had been harder on her than him. He was used to grueling travel. During the last week she’d been more tired than usual, although she never complained and never asked to stop early.

He glanced ahead at the village. The lampposts had been lit and glowed softly in the distance. It wouldn’t be long now. He was anxious to get her someplace warm where she could get proper sleep in a soft bed. Hopefully, his family would welcome him back. His father knew about Galdrilene and the dragons. He wouldn’t turn them away.

Maleena yawned again. She hadn’t eaten much the last couple of days either, insisting she was too tired to eat. Worry nagged at him as he studied her. She wasn’t getting sick was she? He reached for Nydara, “Is Maleena alright? Do you sense any illness trying to take hold of her?”

“No, she just feels tired,” came the silver’s sending from high above. “There is no illness in her.”

Mckale felt a hesitation in the dragon’s sending. “You sense something.What?” He glanced at his bondmate again.

“I don’t know. Something makes her tired, but I don’t know what it is, only that it isn’t illness.”

Mckale rubbed the tension in the back of his neck with his free hand. He watched her face, reading the exhaustion in it as easily as he could feel it. She needed to rest for a while. A good rest could do wonders.

Maleena looked up at him and shook her head. “You shouldn’t worry so much. I said I wasn’t ill and I would know as easily as Nydara would.”

He smiled slightly; of course she would overhear his conversation with her dragon. “You are tired, more so than usual.”

“It has been a long ride. I’m not used to it.”

“You didn’t tire like this when we traveled from your home after we first met. You were less used to it then. It worries me.”

She yawned again. “I know. I sense your worry and read it in your mind. I just need to sleep in a bed I think. I don’t sleep well on the hard ground.”

He refrained from mentioning that she slept like the dead every night, barely stirring once she laid her head down.

The last rays of the sun sank below the mountains, drawing the dark purple of deep dusk across the sky behind it. The cold sharpened and the wind drove it through his cloak. Mckale enjoyed the crisp refreshing feel, but Maleena drew her cloak tighter around herself. Raised in this weather it didn’t feel cold to Mckale. He felt the beginning of spring in the chill. But Maleena was more sensitive to it. Perhaps a combination of the cold and weeks on the hard ground really were the cause of her exhaustion.

An hour later, as full dark settled over the world, they rode in among the first houses set well apart from each other. Light spilled out of unshuttered windows into front gardens. The familiar smells of evening meals being served filled the air. They passed occasional open windows from which quiet conversation filtered through.

A wash of pleasure flowed through Mckale as they approached the house he’d grown up in. Built solid and added on to several times, it was a large house with a wide porch. With his bond-enhanced sight, he saw the familiar lines of its two-story roof and the lines of the barn behind it that housed the horses, chickens, and the small herd of goats.

His family’s property, set near the edge of town, stretched over several acres. Another street or two in, the houses got closer together as the gardens became smaller.

They stopped in the front garden and Mckale dismounted, looping his reins around the cross post out front. Maleena slid off her mare and sighed with relief, stifling another yawn. She carefully tied the small horse to the same cross bar. Together, they walked up the steps to the well-maintained house. Mckale knocked on the heavy wooden door. From inside the house, a dog barked and whined. He could have just walked in, but somehow, the past couple of years separated him from this place in a way he hadn’t noticed until this moment. This was his birthplace, his childhood home, but it wasn’t home anymore. Home was Galdrilene and the lair he shared with Maleena and their dragons. These people were his family, but the other riders had become even more so.

The small square flap set in the door opened and his younger sister’s face peeked through. “Who…?”

He smiled. She had grown up while he was gone. “Hello, Sonja.”

“Oh, by the Fates!” The little square slammed shut and the door swung open. She threw herself into his arms. “Mckale!”

He hugged her back as fiercely. At eighteen, she stood nearly as tall as him now. He released her and she stepped back. “You’ve grown, Sonja.”

A white shaggy dog with a black mask had followed Sonja out of the door and jumped on Mckale with something between a yip and whine. Mckale ruffled the dog’s fur and rubbed behind its ears.

The young woman smiled and twirled around, her long, dark hair flowing around her. “Grandme says I’m as tall as Mumma was.”

He smiled through a twinge of sadness. “I think you are, although it has been so long the memories fade.” He sensed Maleena hanging back, allowing him this moment with his sister. Under that, he felt her nervousness. She still wasn’t good at meeting new people.

He turned slightly and slid his arm around her, drawing her up beside him. “I would like to introduce you to Maleena.”

Sonja’s eyes widened. She glanced at his arm resting comfortably around Maleena’s shoulders and he could almost see the gears turning in his sister’s mind. Sonja had always been quick of mind and he knew she picked up immediately that Maleena was more than a traveling companion.

His sister gazed at the much shorter woman for a moment. What was going through her mind? He hoped it was welcoming because Maleena would pick up on everything in Sonja’s head. His sister had always had an open mind.

“Welcome, Maleena,” Sonja said, a smile blooming on her face. “It seems Mckale’s travels have taken him among beautiful women.” She glanced at Mckale. “Beautiful enough to catch his attention when no woman in Calladar was ever good enough. There will be several girls at the Spring Dance that will first celebrate over the news you are back and then weep with jealousy when they hear you are attached.”

Mckale only smiled and reached down to rub the dog’s head again. “And this is our dog, Mola. She was barely out of puppyhood when I left. I guess dogs have good memories.”

Maleena knelt down and reached out with her hand. Mckale sensed her reaching out to the dog mentally as well and watched Mola’s instant acceptance of her without surprise. Sonja’s eyes widened though. “Wow, Mola never befriends someone that quickly. She must really like you.”

“Sonja!” a deep voice shouted from within the house. “Who is at the door? If it’s that young man come to loiter about and beg to be chosen by you at Spring Dance tell him to get lost before I have to throw him off my porch again.”

Sonja grabbed Mckale’s hand and pulled him forward. “Everyone is going to be so excited to see you.”

Mckale followed, drawing Maleena behind him with Mola on their heels. They crossed the threshold and swung the door shut. Sonja skipped across the front room and practically danced into the kitchen where the long, polished table rested.

Mckale followed more slowly. He felt Maleena moving quietly behind him. If she thought she would be able to hide behind him, she was mistaken. His grandmother’s sharp eyes missed nothing and Sonja wouldn’t fail to announce them both.

Ahead of him, his sister smiled widely. “Mckale has returned to us!”

He stepped into the large kitchen to the sound of chairs scraping back. Emotion welled up in him at the sight of them. His father stood at the head of the table. He was a little shorter than Mckale, with gray streaks through the black hair that fell to his broad shoulders. His older brother, Kaden, was a few inches taller than Mckale though lankier and with eyes still full of mischief and amusement. His sister of course. And his grandmother, unbent by the years and with sharp intelligence in her dark eyes.

His father moved first, nearly overturning a chair in his rush to throw a crushing hug around Mckale. He laughed and returned the hug with vigor. Kaden was only a step behind and he too clasped his arms around Mckale, nearly choking him from the pressure.

They stepped back and his father’s eyes raked over him, missing nothing, Mckale was sure. Not even the new scar on his face, a barely visible white line that traced right in front of his ear. A legacy of the battle with the Shadow Riders. “It’s good to have you back, son.”

Kaden nodded. “We weren’t sure you would ever come back. You will have a bit of explaining to do to your commander.”

Mckale chuckled. “You know, Father, you could have saved me a lot of worry if you’d told me you knew about Emallya and Galdrilene.”

His father’s eyes lit up at the same time his brother’s wrinkled in confusion. “So you made it there?”

“Made it where?” Kaden asked.

His father shot Kaden a look, “Mckale will explain later. Right now I want to know about it.” He reached for Mckale’s arm. “Sit, son. Take the evening meal with us.”

“Who is the young woman behind you, Mckale?” his grandmother asked, her voice strong and commanding.

His father and brother turned, as if they only then realized a tiny woman stood behind him. Sonja smiled wide. “That would be Maleena. She travels with Mckale. Although I get the feeling there is more to it than that.”

Mckale felt Maleena‘s anxiety spike and turned to her, using his body to shield her from the curious looks of his family. She’d been fine until all of the attention focused on her, then she became a bundle of nerves. He placed his hands on either side of her face and looked down into her violet eyes. “Will you be alright?”

She nodded slightly and answered in a whisper, “I have to be. This is something I have to get over.”

He smiled and moved so that he stood beside her and she could see his family. They had stepped back to allow them some privacy.

“This is Maleena,” he glanced at Sonja. “Yes, there is more to it than traveling companions. Maleena is my bondmate.”

His father’s eyes widened. “Bondmate? But that only happens to…”

Mckale smiled. “I hatched a dragon, Father. I use Earth magic, so I hatched a green. His name is Tellnox.”

His father stepped back until he reached a chair and slowly sank down to sit. “A dragon? By the Fates, I never expected that. Where is he? Can I meet him?”

“He is circling high above the house right now, waiting to make sure we will be safe here before he finds someplace in the mountains to rest for the night.”

“A dragon? You can use magic?” The flat tone of his brother’s voice made him turn. Open hostility twisted Kaden’s expression. “You’re in league with them!”

“Mckale!” Maleena’s warning came only a second before Kaden rushed him. He grabbed the front of Mckale’s shirt and slammed him back against the kitchen wall. “How could you? How could you join the ranks of something so evil?”

Mckale had never seen his older brother so furious, so beyond reason. Their father leaped from his chair and tried to pry them apart. “Kaden, back off! What is the matter with you?” Mola backed away, her sharp barks of distress filling the room.

Kaden, his face red with anger and his eyes filled with hate, ignored the older man. “I’ll kill you!”

“Mckale, do you have need of me?” came Tellnox’s anxious sending.

“No! Fates no. You crashing through the roof would only make things worse. He is my brother. I can make him see reason.”

“If he tries to kill you, I will intervene, no matter the consequences.”

“Kaden, please stop,” Sonja begged, her voice wavered as tears filled her eyes.

Mckale pushed back. Kaden was taller but Mckale was stronger, though he had no wish to hurt his brother. “Listen to me.” He had to make Kaden understand. What would bring such a reaction from his normally easy going brother? Kaden had always been quick to laugh and slow to anger.

Kaden pulled back his arm, his fist balled. But instead of swinging, he grabbed his head and sank to his knees with a groan. “What have you done to me?”

Maleena moved forward and placed herself between them. “I’m truly sorry. This is not how I would have preferred our introduction to be, but I won’t let you harm Mckale and I won’t allow you to behave in a way you will regret later.”

Mola’s barks quieted to a low keen and she looked from one person to the other, her brown eyes worried.

“What did you do?” Mckale asked, a little concerned.

“The weave Taela and I accidentally used on the entire hold a few months ago. I adjusted it slightly so he can hear us. Beyond that, he sees nothing and feels nothing unless he tries to fight it.” She was completely calm in the face of his brother’s anger, though Mckale sensed the dull headache she was beginning to feel. Kaden’s anger was stronger than he had thought.

Mckale rested a hand on her shoulder to strengthen the bond. Even with that, the ache in her head remained. Why wasn’t his shield working like it should? Maintaining the weave was draining her more and she held her exhaustion at bay through sheer will.

“Kaden, you are causing Maleena undue hardship. She’s already beyond tired and holding the weave is making it harder on her.”

“Then release me so I can finish what I started,” he growled.

“Kaden,” their father said, “you need to stop and listen. The dragon he speaks of is not a black dragon. He is not evil. Neither is his bondmate or her dragon.”

“How do you know she has a dragon?” Mckale asked, surprised.

“She has to have one if you are bondmates.” He looked at Maleena. “Will you release him?”

She sighed. “Only if he promises to not attack Mckale again. For one, if I let the weave go, I’m not sure I have the strength to create it again right now. For another, Tellnox intends to prevent Kaden from killing Mckale at any cost. He won’t let his rider be killed if there is any way for him to stop it.”

Kaden lifted his head, his eyes staring unseeing at the wall. “Fine. I don’t have much choice under the threat from a dragon, do I?”

Mckale felt Maleena release the weave as she sagged back against him. “I’m sorry Mckale, but I really need to sit down now.”

The ache pounding in her head from the heightened emotions in the room and the fatigue were dragging her down. He glanced at Kaden as his brother regained his feet. Keeping a wary eye on him, he focused his attention on Maleena. She shouldn’t be this tired. He helped her to a chair at the table.

McKale turned to his brother but remained close to Maleena, as tired as she was, she wouldn’t be able to protect herself if Kaden attacked. “What, in the name of the Fates, is wrong with you?”

His father took a position between him and Kaden. “Calladar was visited by black dragons and their riders. People were killed. Tenale was one of them.”

Tenale had been Kaden’s best friend from childhood. He’d been Mckale’s friend too. Tenale and Jesten were brothers. The four of them had once been inseparable. Jesten had died during the attack that brought Mckale’s magic out. And now Tenale had been killed by Shadow Riders. Oh Fates, Shadow Riders in Calladar.

“Kaden, Maleena and I are not Shadow Riders. We, along with our dragons, are called Guardians and for good reason. It is our duty to protect against the Shadow Riders and their filthy Shadow Dragons.”

Kaden shook his head. “They tortured people with shadows. Only one survived the torture and the infection afterward. The scars he bears now…”

“Like these?” Maleena’s soft voice interrupted him.

Everyone turned to look at her as she pushed her sleeve up to bare her right arm. Wide, pink scars cut through the soft flesh. Kaden stared at them. She gazed back at him with a haunted look. “I was captured by Shadow Riders and tortured by those shadows. I nearly died. Do not accuse me of being one of them. I am not a Shadow Rider. Neither Tellnox nor my Nydara are shadows. I suffered at their hands and because of my bond with Mckale, he suffered with me.”

Kaden leaned back against the wall, a look of defeat on his face. Their father laid a hand on his shoulder. “I have been to Galdrilene. I met the great golden dragon there named Mernoth. When I found out Mckale could use magic, I sent him there. I knew they could teach him. I thought he would become one of the mages there.” He urged Kaden toward the table. “Why don’t we sit down. We have a lot to talk about it seems.”

Kaden looked sharply at their father. “Why didn’t you tell me?”

“I couldn’t. Galdrilene had to protect itself. All of those who go to train have a weave laid on them by the Spirit mages. The weave only allows us to speak of it to others who know of it.” He ran a hand through his hair. “Until Mckale came, and told you, you didn’t know.”

Kaden moved to the table and sat down in one of the chairs. Mckale chose a chair that placed him between Maleena and Kaden. His father sat down across from him in the chair next to Mckale’s grandmother. Sonja sat on the other side of Maleena. “Is there anything I can get you?” She started to lay her hand on Maleena’s shoulder.

“Don’t.” Mckale’s tone was sharper than he meant it to be. “Maleena is a Silver Rider. She works Spirit magic; it deals with emotions, thoughts, and other things of the mind. Touch is difficult for her with anyone other than her bondmate. Normally my shield would be enough, but she is so tired right now, I don’t think she can handle it.”

Maleena laid her hand on his and said softly. “No need to snap at her, she didn’t know.” She turned to Sonja. “I would love a cup of hot tea if you have any.”

“Of course.” Sonja stood. “Anything for you Mckale?”

“Tea and if you wouldn’t mind, bring Maleena something to eat.”

Maleena shook her head. “Just tea.”

He searched her face, concern filling him. “You’ve barely eaten anything the past two days. You have to have something.”

She sighed quietly. “If it will make you feel better, I will eat a little.”

Sonja stood. “Normally, it would be Kaden or my father’s place to serve you, but since things are a little out of sorts this evening, I will do it.” It took only a moment before Sonja returned with hot tea and plates of food for both of them. While they waited, Mckale introduced Maleena to everyone.

As Sonja sat back down she asked, “So what exactly does bondmate mean?”

Mckale took a long drink of the tea, enjoying the feel of the heat as it slid down his throat. He set the cup down and looked down at his plate. Slices of roasted goat meat swimming in gravy, a large pile of frost peas, roasted potatoes, and a slice of dark bread. His stomach grumbled in anticipation. He hadn’t realized how hungry he was.

While he sliced off a piece of meat, he answered his sister’s question. “It means married, only more. When two people and their dragons are compatible, a bond forms between them. Maleena can read everything about me, including thoughts if she chooses to, without feeling any discomfort.” He paused to slip the dog a bit of meat. “I can read her emotions and her physical state. I can sense if she is afraid, tired, hungry, hurt, and any number of things. It goes far beyond and far deeper than a husband and wife relationship.”

“But you can’t be husband and wife,” his grandmother said. “You haven’t completed the Spring Dance.”

His father cleared his throat. “Bondmating doesn’t require the dance, mother. It is a force of nature that can’t be held back or made to wait. I witnessed it between Bardeck and Emallya at Galdrilene.”

His grandmother shook her head. “It isn’t proper, Barden.”

“When is the Spring Dance?” Maleena asked.

“In two weeks. The first flowers have bloomed and it’s the big spring festival,” Sonja said, a dreamy light in her eyes. Mckale looked at his sister. Perhaps the young man his father kept throwing off his porch had a chance.

Maleena gave Sonja a knowing smile. “Will you be taking part in the Spring Dance?”

Sonja didn’t answer right away, as if she was thinking over her answer. Finally, she nodded. “Yes, I think I will be.”

“Sonja,” their father’s voice held a note of annoyance, “we are not going over this again. You are not dancing this year, especially if it means it will be for that love-struck fool.”

Sonja sat up straighter and glared at Barden. “No, we will not be going over this again. It is my choice when to dance and who to dance for. It is none of your business; you have no say in the matter. Only Grandme has the right to discuss this with me, and she supports my choice.”

Mckale watched his father’s face redden. “I will have a say in it.”

“Hush, Barden,” his grandmother said, her voice sharp. “Sonja is right. This is none of your affair. I approved, the discussion is closed.”

Barden started to open his mouth, to argue or try to reason Mckale didn’t know, but he thought his father was wise when he closed it and remained silent.

Grandme turned her dark eyes on him. “Your Maleena hasn’t asked what the Spring Dance is. Have you been discussing it with her, Mckale?”

He shook his head. “No, Grandme. I told only what the dance is for, nothing more.” He glanced at his father. “I know it’s not for me to discuss further.”

She smiled warmly at him. “You are a good boy.” She glared at his father briefly. “Unlike others who seem to have forgotten.”

Maleena turned back to Sonja. “Perhaps I will join you in the dance.”

Mckale nearly choked on his food. He coughed and swallowed. “There is no need for that, bondmating can’t be undone.”

Maleena glanced at him and he saw the mischief dancing in her eyes. “Kirynn once told me it would make her dress look conservative. If it makes us husband and wife in the eyes of your family, then we should do it.”

He started to protest, but seeing the merriment coming through her exhaustion made him stop. When she looked at him with that light in her eyes, he could refuse her nothing. “It will be as you wish, my love.”

She rewarded him with a radiant smile and looked back to his sister. “I don’t know the steps. You will have to teach me.”

“Of course I will! It isn’t that difficult.”

“Enough, Sonja,” Grandme interrupted. “We will discuss this when it is just us women.”

Maleena stifled a yawn. “I need to sleep anyway.”

Mckale glanced at her plate and was pleased to see she had eaten every bit of food. Sonja jumped up. “I will show you to Mckale’s room,” she paused and looked at him, “unless you are ready to sleep too.”

“No, there is a lot that still needs to be discussed.”

“They shouldn’t be sleeping in the same bed until after the Spring Dance,” Grandme protested.

Mckale leveled a look at her. “Grandme, I love you and respect you, but I will not sleep separate from Maleena. We are participating in the Spring Dance only because Maleena wants to. We are already bonded to each other in every sense of the word. Proper or not, we remain together.” Maybe it was something in his tone or expression, but much to his surprise, she nodded and let it go.

Maleena stood and followed his sister from the room. He watched her walk away, briefly distracted by images in his mind. Maleena, flowers in her hair, her entire mid-drift bare, her hips swaying seductively to the music as she wove the ribbons of marriage together. A soft laugh in his mind told him she’d seen his thoughts.

Reluctantly, he let the images go and turned back to the table and those still sitting at it. He could let his imagination run wild later. He had a lot to talk about and a lot to hear. He turned his attention back to his brother. Though Kaden hadn’t said much, he seemed calm, almost pensive.

“Are you feeling better, Kaden?”

He shook his head. “No, brother, I’m not. There are black dragons and their riders, who are evil. And there are your dragons, which are not in league with them. I’m assuming there are others besides you and Maleena?” Mckale nodded. “Then it can only mean one thing, another war between dragons.”

“It would seem so, my brother.” Mckale leaned back in the chair and took a drink of his tea. “Tell me, Father, what happened after I left? What became of the charges against me? I need to know what I’m facing when I ride into Taragen tomorrow. Galdrilene hasn’t received any messages for some time.”

Kaden looked at him, confusion clear on his face. “Charges against you for what? Unless it would be abandoning your Watch, which father insisted was by his order.”

Barden frowned and leaned his elbows on the table. “Well, it is all a little strange to be honest. There are no charges against you. When you came back from that patrol you hadn’t yet given your commander notice of whether or not you were taking the month leave you were due. The morning you left, I informed him that I felt you needed it and sent you out in the world to travel some. He of course was fine with it.”

Barden stared at the table for a moment as if the smooth, glossy wood held the answers to a strange puzzle he was laying out. He looked up at Mckale again, his gray eyes troubled. “I thought maybe there would be an investigation into what happened on that patrol, but nothing was ever said about it. Then, a few days after your month leave ended, Lord Arandrall summoned me. He wanted to speak privately about you. He asked what happened after you came home from the patrol and then he asked if the strange events that happened when your patrol encountered the Kojen had anything to do with your continued absence.”

“I was here when the summons came,” Kaden said. “Sonja and Grandme were worried that father had somehow got himself into serious trouble.”

Mckale nodded. The First of the Nine had trained in Galdrilene and he was one of their allies. “You were honest with him, I hope.”

“I was. I confirmed that it was directly related to your extended leave.” He paused and took a long drink of his wine. “Here is where it gets stranger. He asked me if you had gone to Galdrilene.”

Mckale smiled slightly. “Emallya told me he trained there and that she has visited with him a few times over the years since.”

Kaden frowned. “I thought the weave the Spirit mages put on you made it so you can’t talk about it?”

His father shook his head. “It doesn’t stop me or anyone from talking about it. It stops us from talking about it with people who don’t already know. Around the family here, I have hardly been able to think of it and I couldn’t bring it to my lips if I tried. But sitting there, in private with Lord Arandrall, I found speaking of it came easy. The weaves recognize each other. So I told him the truth that I had indeed sent you to Galdrilene.”

Mckale nodded. “And then?”

“He didn’t say any more about Galdrilene. He stood and clapped me on the shoulder and told me not to worry about your extended leave. He said he would take care of everything. There was never a word said about what happened on your patrol other than the men thinking it was a stroke of luck no matter how strange. No mention was ever made of your absence other than people hoping you came back.”

Mckale turned that over in his mind. So people thought that patrol had been lucky did they? Jesten’s face swam across his memory, mingled with years of memories. It hadn’t been lucky enough.

Kaden frowned. “You have known all of this from the beginning, Father? I feel like a fool for acting as I did.”

Mckale punched his brother lightly on the shoulder. “No need to feel like a fool. You didn’t know. I think I will have to talk with Maleena about lifting the weave that keeps everyone silent. There is no need of it now and things might go smoother if people can speak more freely about Galdrilene.”

Barden studied him with a considering look. “You aren’t here just for a visit are you?”

Mckale sighed and leaned forward to place his elbows on the table. “No, I’m not; although the visit is a nice addition. As Kaden said, a new war is starting. Galdrilene can’t fight it on its own. We need the nations behind us. Those who hatched dragons first have scattered to their birthplaces to find out where those nations stand now, and where they will stand in the future.”

Barden glanced at Mckale’s grandmother. “You haven’t said much.”

Grandme smiled. “You often learn more by listening than you do by speaking.”

Mckale chuckled. His grandmother hadn’t changed one bit. Still strong and wise. But her hands, a detail Mckale didn’t think his father or brother noticed, trembled. She was wise enough to look into the future with fear.

Kaden leaned back and folded his arms across his chest. “So, little brother, tell me about your journey after you left here. What happened? When did you meet Maleena? And when do we get to meet these dragons of yours?”

Mckale smiled and stroked Mola’s head as she sat next to him with her chin on his knee. “You are in for a long story, brother.”

Kaden spread his hands. “I couldn’t sleep now if I tried. So unless you are rushing off to bed sometime soon, we have plenty of time.”

“I am not as tired as Maleena. If you wish to spend the evening listening to me regale you with stories then that is what I will do.”

Kaden laughed. “Regale away brother.” Mckale’s smile widened. It was good to see his brother’s humor return.

Maleena stretched long and slow, relishing the warmth and the comfort of a real bed. Her eyes opened and she glanced around the room. The sky outside the window was the pale gray of early morning. Beside her, Mckale snored lightly. She tried to snuggle back down in the covers and go back to sleep, but her mind was already waking up despite her wishes.

Easing out of the bed, she tiptoed to her pack by the wall and pulled out the dress and shift she’d been keeping to wear when they got here. The dress she had traveled in hung over the back of a chair in the corner. Even in the dim light Maleena clearly saw the travel stains on it. It would have to be washed before it could be worn again.

Maleena reached for Nydara and found the dragon sound asleep. Tellnox informed her they had found a cave in the mountains across the river to rest in. She sent him warmth and love and turned back to dressing for the day.

As quietly as she could, Maleena slipped the old shift off and laid it over the chair with the dirty dress. Her skin pebbled in the chill of the room as she pulled the clean shift and dress on, then rummaged into her pack for a pair of clean stockings.

Maleena picked up her shoes and glanced at the bed. Mckale still slept. She would slip them on after she got downstairs so the sound of her footsteps wouldn’t wake him. She opened the door and stepped into the hall, pulling the door shut soundlessly behind her, then moved quietly down the stairs, not wanting to wake anyone else at that early hour.

When Maleena reached the kitchen she slipped on her shoes and looked around. Someone else must already be awake. A hot tea kettle sat close to the hearth and the kitchen smelled of steeped rosehips and mint. Half a loaf of bread and a knife lay on a board on the table next to two empty cups and a few scattered crumbs. More loaves of bread were rising on a cupboard top not too far from the hearth.

Maleena glanced at the tea kettle. Would it be wrong to get a cup? Insistent thirst nagged at her throat. She didn’t see any water, so the tea would have to do. Hopefully they wouldn’t find it rude. She lifted a cup from one of the hooks, filled it with the tea, and took a long drink, relishing its warmth. The sweet and refreshing mix soothed her thirst and left her feeling energized for the morning.

Her stomach rumbled but she shook her head. Eating the bread would be rude; her stomach would have to wait. Besides, the tea had relieved her thirst and intensified another urge. She pulled on her cloak and stepped out the back door of the house.

The pale glow of early morning provided more than enough light. Several buildings perched behind the house. The first one she looked in held rakes, hoes, and other gardening equipment. The second also stored things. Where was it? These were the two smallest buildings. Surely it wasn’t located in one of the other larger structures.

One was clearly a barn and she doubted it would be there. Another was located closer to the house than the others. Maleena opened the door and peered in. A single candle burned in a mirrored sconce inside and in its flickering light she saw that this building was indeed what she searched for. The floor and halfway up the walls was paved in smooth stones. She barely gave them a glance. The heavy, smooth, carved plank in the back with a hole was what she needed. This building wasn’t so different than what she had used in Lowden, although considerably nicer.

As Maleena left the building feeling much better, she started to turn back to the house. The glow of lantern light showing through the partially open barn door stopped her. Whoever left the empty cups and the bread must be out here. She glanced at the dark house and shrugged. She really didn’t want to sit in the empty kitchen by herself.

Her breath came in clouds in the cold morning air. Maleena turned and walked across the expanse of open space to the barn door, the frost covered grass crunching underfoot. The voices of a man and woman floated on the chilly morning air. When she stepped inside the barn she saw Mckale’s father and grandmother each sitting next to a goat, their backs to her as they milked. Although they didn’t see her, the goats in the pen next to the stand did and a chorus of loud ‘maaaas’ went up. In a pen across the way, a gaggle of baby goats hollered back. The dog, laying between the milk stands, thumped her tail against the ground in welcome.

They both turned at the noise. Barden smiled. “Good morning, Maleena. You look much better than you did last night.”

Grandme appraised her. “You definitely have more color in your face.”

Maleena smiled back at them, a little uncomfortable at being the center of their attention. “Thank you, I feel better this morning. I think I just needed a good night’s sleep in a real bed.”

Grandme pursed her lips for a moment. “Perhaps.”

What in the world did that mean? The older woman looked her up and down as if she knew something Maleena didn’t. Pushing the strange actions of Mckale’s grandmother away she asked, “Can I help?”

Barden looked startled. “You wish to milk goats?”

She nodded. “There are lots of goats in Galdrilene although I suppose you already know that. Each of the mage towers has a few of their own and even Dragon Riders are expected to help with tower chores. I am quite proficient at milking.”

Grandme stood up and dusted her hands on the apron of her dress. “Well, if you truly want to, then yes you can milk and I will go in and drag Sonja out of bed so we can prepare the morning meal.” As the old woman passed on her way out of the barn she stopped and looked Maleena up and down again. “I think Mckale has found a good one in you.”

She left without another word and Maleena moved to sit on the now empty stool beside the goat, hoping the dim light of the lantern would cover her blush. The goat turned her head and looked at Maleena with curiosity, its long ears framing its face. The goat had a convex nose, making her think briefly of Vaddoc’s nose. As she began squirting milk into the pail a slight giggle bubbled up at the image of Vaddoc with long goat ears.

“What is so funny?” Barden asked as he pulled his goat off the stand and put her in a different pen than the one full of those who had greeted Maleena.

Maleena shook her head and giggled again. “I have a friend, another Dragon Rider, whose nose rises like the goats do. My mind conjured an image of his face with these long ears on either side of it.”

Barden chuckled. “He must be a Shaderian, they do have quite a beak don’t they?” He pulled a goat out of the noisy pen and placed her on the milk stand then paused for a moment before bursting out laughing again. “That would indeed be a funny sight.” Still chuckling he settled down to milking again.

Maleena set her pail aside and unlocked the head gate. She placed the doe in the same pen as Barden had placed his and went to get another, patting the dog on the head on her way by. It took her a minute to separate one from the four still waiting. They all rushed the gate in their enthusiasm to be next. After a bit of wrangling, she managed to get one out. It eagerly ran to the stand and jumped on.

“There is a scoop in the grain bin over there,” Barden said motioning toward the wall. “Pour one of those in her feed bucket.”

Maleena did as he instructed and the goat happily buried her nose in it. She latched the head gate and settled back on the stool.

She felt Nydara wake and reached out to the dragon. “Good morning, love.”

“Good morning. Do Tellnox and I have time to hunt before you leave Mckale’s sire’s house?”

“Yes, but please stay well away from any livestock.”

Maleena felt a flash of indignation from Nydara. “We would never take someone’s livestock without permission. We leave to hunt now. Do not leave the house until we return, please.”

“I promise.” Maleena smiled to herself, feeling a warm rush of love from the dragon.

Leaning her head against the doe’s warm flank still covered in winter fuzz, she began to milk, relishing the peace in the barn. Animals didn’t have the complicated thoughts and emotions of humans and they never intruded on her. Animals had more mental respect than humans although Barden had a quiet mind that she didn’t find intrusive at all. He reminded her of Mckale.

The sound of the milk swishing into the pail soothed her and she lost herself in the rhythm of it. Before Maleena realized it, the milking was done. She helped Barden turn the does and the babies eager to be back with their mothers loose in their pasture and then began toting the full pails to the house, the dog following them happily. What did they do with all of this milk? Surely they couldn’t drink it all and if they got this much each day, not even making cheese would use it all up.

She glanced at Barden out the corner of her eye as they walked toward the house. “What do you use all of the milk for?”

“We sell a lot of it, either as milk or cheese. Not everyone has the time or inclination to keep their own animals. Milk animals are something you kind of have to have in you. Some don’t ever have it, some find it later.”

“Do you get this much every day?”

He shrugged slightly. “More or less. We pen the babies away from their dams at night so they can’t drink it all. They get to spend the day and early evening drinking their fill, so they aren’t deprived.”

Maleena nodded. “That’s what we do in Galdrilene.”

He smiled. “I know.”

Barden tapped the back door of the house with his foot and within seconds, Sonja opened it. “Good morning, Maleena. And you too, Father.” She beamed a smile at both of them as she backed out of the way so they could enter.

The smell of cooking food nearly overwhelmed Maleena as she stepped into the kitchen. Her stomach clenched. Thick slices of ham sizzled on a flat piece of metal hung above the fire in the hearth. Beside that, a pot of water boiled as Grandme lowered eggs into it. On the cupboard top, loaves of freshly baked bread cooled. Maleena’s mouth watered but she turned to follow Barden back out the door.

He stopped her with a shake of his head. “Oh no, you have helped enough. You are our guest, not a hired hand. Besides, you have a busy day today. You should get ready for it.”

“It won’t take long to bring the other pails in. I don’t mind helping,” she protested.

“I’ll help him. You go sit down and relax,” Mckale said as he came down the stairs.

Maleena turned and smiled at him. “Good morning, bondmate.”

“Good morning, my love.” He brushed a kiss against her cheek as he stepped past her, following his father out the door.

Sonja smiled as she flipped a sizzling slice of ham. “Breakfast will be ready soon.”

Maleena hung her cloak on a peg by the door and glanced around. “Is there something I can do to help?”

“You are our guest,” Grandme repeated Barden’s words.

“I can’t just stand around here and do nothing. Please, give me something to do. Anything.”

“You can set the table if you like.” Sonja waved toward the sideboard and the stack of dishes there.

Maleena let out a relieved breath. “Thank you.” She picked up the stack of plates and carried them to the table, going back for the cups and utensils.

Grandme smiled and nodded in approval. The old woman looked at Sonja. “Mckale has done well to be chosen by Maleena. First she is up at the crack of dawn insisting that she help with the milking and now she refuses to sit by and let us do all of the work even when we tell her she doesn’t have to help.”

Sonja grinned back at her grandmother. “Yes, I think he was chosen by a good woman. At least he avoided getting chosen by that back alley cat, Rona.” She made a face and shuddered.

Grandme scowled. “That woman is as useless as a cart without wheels.”

Sonja giggled. “Well, she has certainly ‘been’ around the city like a race cart.”

“Sonja! A lady doesn’t speak of such ugly behavior.” Grandme aimed a deep scowl at her granddaughter.

Maleena paused in the act of setting a cup next to a plate. “You’re a lady?”

Sonja nodded and shrugged slightly. “Father is a lower lord. Nothing fancy but it makes me a lady nonetheless.”

Grandme huffed, disapproval still on her face. “You hardly speak like one half the time. Soon you will start sounding like a common tavern wench.”

Sonja rolled her eyes. “Yes, Grandme. I will do better,”

“No, you won’t.” The old woman shook her head. “Sometimes I wonder what that young man sees in you. How he can come around here moony-eyed and smitten when your mouth gets away from you, I will never understand. Back when I was a girl, we knew better.”

Sonja heaved a dramatic sigh and rolled her eyes again. “Yes, Grandme.”

Maleena smiled. She sensed the emotions in the room weren’t antagonistic. Mckale’s shield and her dragon bond kept the feelings at bay this morning, but it didn’t block them completely. Nothing could do that except the weave she and Taela had found.

Grandme’s disapproval was real, but behind it was a deep adoring love for her granddaughter. Sonja’s irritation at her grandmother’s scolding was real, but underneath it a deep river of respect and love flowed.

The door opened for a moment as Mckale and his father set pails of milk down. Barden glanced at his mother. “One more trip and we will be in.”

She nodded absently and pulled the last of the eggs out of the water. As the two men left again Maleena asked, “Where’s Kaden?”

“He is a Border Guard,” Sonja said as she set the platter of ham on a cupboard. “He has duties to attend to. Thankfully, he won’t be on patrol during the Spring Dance. I know he is looking forward to seeing his younger brother claimed.”

“He needs to quit worrying about Mckale and start trying to find a woman willing to claim him.” Grandme set the bowl of eggs next to the platter. “He is older than Mckale and its time he stopped avoiding the dance.”

Maleena looked around. “Is there anything else I can do?”

Sonja walked to the table and settled in one of the chairs. “Take a seat.”

Grandme also settled down at the table. Maleena looked at the food still resting on the cupboard top. “Shouldn’t we bring the food?”

Mckale’s sister shook her head. “Last night I served the food because of the chaos caused by Kaden, but it isn’t my place. Here in Calladar, the women prepare and cook the food. The man serves it and cleans up afterward to offer his thanks to his woman for cooking his food and keeping his house.”

Grandme nodded. “We do the laundry, have babies, keep the house clean, raise gardens, preserve food and any number of things that go with being the lady of the house. We make sure the house runs smoothly for the man and in return he takes care of the livestock, keeps the children out of the way while we preserve food, brings in the coin that keeps the wheels of the house turning, and protects us. We offer thanks for their part by cooking the meals and he offers his back by serving them. Even the Head of the Nine serves his wife meals and she goes into the kitchen to help cook his food.”

Maleena was surprised at the complexity of their culture. In Lowden, the men worked and came home and the woman shifted from taking care of the house and children all day to taking care of all of that and him. She liked the way they showed mutual respect for each other with the Calladar tradition.

The door opened, allowing cold air to sweep the room as the two men stepped into the kitchen with Mola on their heels. They shut the door and set the pails of milk in line with the others. After pulling off their light cloaks and hanging them from the pegs, they each lifted a bucket and poured it into a funnel at the top of a metal tube. Curious, Maleena leaned around the table to get a better look at the tube. It disappeared into the floor.

“What are you doing?” Maleena asked as they each picked up another pail and poured the milk into the funnel.

Barden smiled at her, setting his empty pail down and reaching for another full one. “There is a piece of fine mesh cloth in the funnel to filter out any hair or debris in the milk. Then the milk goes down the tube to a holding tank.”

“Why down there?”

Sonja picked up the explanation. “Our well is under there. It’s a good place for it since it keeps birds and such from falling in it and it means we don’t have to trek through snow in the winter for household water. There is another well in the barn. It makes life easier.”

Confused, Maleena looked away from where the men dumped another set of pails. “You’re dumping the milk into the well?”

“Oh, no.” Sonja laughed. “I guess that didn’t quite explain it.”

Mckale chuckled. “There is a holding tank for the milk set down into the water of the well. It stays very cold there. The pipe enters from the side near the top and there is a lid on it that can be removed so the milk can be dipped out. It stays in the holding tank until we ladle it into containers to be carried down to the market in the afternoon so it can be sold. Then in the evening the tank is washed and put back so it’s ready for the next morning’s milk.”

When the last of the twelve pails had been dumped, Mckale picked up the bowl of eggs and the platter of ham while his father carried the bread board and a dish of butter. After they placed the food on the table, Mckale lifted a slice of ham onto each of the women’s plates, followed by a couple of eggs and his father placed buttered slices of bread on their plates.

As they placed the items on each plate they murmured, “Thank you, my lady, for the meal.”

In turn Grandme and Sonja quietly said, “Thank you for serving it.” Maleena thanked them as well out of habit. She didn’t realize it was part of the custom until it continued throughout the serving of every item.

Once Maleena and the other two were served, the men piled food onto their plates and sat down. Maleena took a bit of ham and savored the taste. Her stomach grumbled anxiously. She felt absolutely famished. The eggs had been served three to a bowl and she watched as the others tapped the top of each egg to crack the shell. She followed their example, cracking and removing the top part of the shell. The white inside looked like any other boiled egg but when she got to the yolk she found it warm and runny. Her stomach rolled and lurched.

Mckale looked at her, concern in his silver eyes. “Are you feeling sick again?”

She pushed the eggs away, the turning in her stomach easing when she couldn’t see the yolks anymore. “Not really. I guess the yolks cooked that way don’t appeal much to me.”

Grandme waved her hand in Barden’s direction. “There are two eggs in another bowl over there. I got distracted and overcooked them. I was going to feed them back to the chickens since we don’t normally like them cooked through, but Maleena is welcome to them.”

Barden’s chair scraped across the floor as he jumped up to get the eggs. Maleena took another bite of the ham. She loved bacon, but she didn’t usually like ham that much. This morning though, she couldn’t seem to eat enough of it. Mckale watched her while his father set the new eggs on the table next to her plate. “You don’t usually eat ham. Not that I’m complaining. It’s a relief to see you eat.”

She finished chewing and swallowed. “I know I don’t. It must be seasoned differently or something because this is delicious.”

Across the table, Grandme’s eyes appraised her again with a knowing look and a small smile played across her face. Maleena felt delight rolling off the woman. What was that about? She thought about probing the old woman’s mind but immediately put the thought away. One did not invade the mind of another out of curiosity. Besides, given the current instability of Mckale’s shield it wasn’t a good idea anyway.

Instead she turned to her bondmate. “Who is Rona?”

Mckale set his fork down with a groan and looked across the table at his sister. “Really? You had to bring up Rona?”

Sonja waved away his comment. “Oh please, everyone knows she never had a chance. Although you can bet, she will try now that you are back.”

“I’m already claimed, there is nothing for her to try.”

Sonja just laughed. Maleena held her gaze steady on Mckale. “Are you going to answer my question?”

He sighed and leaned back in his chair, casting a glare at his sister. “She has tried to find a way to claim me since I left Border Guard training.”

Sonja leaned forward. “She would have tried before, but Border Guards in training aren’t allowed to be present during the Spring Dance. It’s felt that they will do better if not distracted by a wife and young family. Once out of training though, they are fair game and Rona has been trying to latch onto Mckale with her claws since the spring after he graduated. Thankfully, Mckale was smart enough to always be on patrol.”

“Is she also a lady?”

Mckale snorted. “She holds the title but she is no lady. I’m surprised she hasn’t already claimed some poor fool.”

Grandme’s eyebrows drew together. “I think she has been holding out, hoping you would return.” Her face smoothed and she smiled at Maleena. “I have to say, I’m glad to see you return with this young lady ready to claim you. It lifts the worry of Rona. If that woman set foot in my kitchen I would be forced to throw her out the back door by the scruff of the neck and set Mola on her.”

Sonja and Mckale burst into laughter. Barden chuckled. “She means it too. Rona’s mother tried to claim me, which might be where Rona gets her obsession with Mckale. Grandme threw her out that very door and told her if she ever tried to lay claim to her son she would personally see her skinned alive and fed to the pigs. Rona’s mother was terrified of your Grandme after that and never tried to claim me.” His voice softened to a sad, wistful tone. “She did approve of your mother though.”

Grandme nodded. “Nia was a good woman. Why the Fates saw fit to end her life so soon and leave the likes of Rona and her mother alive, I will never understand.”

As they finished their food, Maleena felt the dragons finish the meal of elk they had hunted. Both dragons had eaten lighter than normal. Usually they would have taken most of the herd and not needed to hunt again for a week or two. But she sensed a desire to hurry back in the silver. The dragons would need to hunt again in a few days.

Maleena glanced at her plate. She had only eaten one of the eggs but devoured three of the thick slices of ham. She would have to figure out what they used when they smoked it. All too soon the comfortable breakfast was over.

Mckale glanced at her. “It is time that Maleena and I took our leave. We have to get to a meeting with Arandrall today. I can’t imagine the Shadow Riders will be gone long. They are going to want to solidify their hold over Calladar.” He turned to Barden. “As soon as we meet with him and get acceptance, you will get to meet our dragons.”

Barden leaned back with a smile. “I’m looking forward to it.”

The cool wind rushed over Anevay as she and Latia soared over the bay. Below, the white sails of boats stood out against the dark blue of the water. She closed her eyes and let her body feel the thrill of flying—letting the morning sun and wind clear her mind. She kept coming up against a wall in her research. Maybe there wasn’t a key in the records; maybe there was no way to stop the Shadow Riders.

“You will find it,” came Latia’s reassuring sending.

“What if I don’t? What if I can’t find it because there is nothing to find?”

“If you think there is something to find, then there is.”

So much depended on her finding the keys to the weave. For a while she’d thought she had it, but it turned into nothing. Soon, Latia would be able to Slide to where Kellinar and Taela were. It would be good to see them again. She missed them more than she could have ever imagined.

The wind roared in her ears and she worked to clear her mind again, allowing her thoughts to drift away from the weave. Her body automatically shifted as Latia banked to the left in a wide turn, but she kept her eyes closed. Images from Latia’s Hatching began to flit through her mind, none of them staying long until she saw the one of the crystalline dragon hanging above a lake, lying in a perfect circle. Standing knee deep in the water, a woman wove rivers of magic together until bright-white light burst from her and turned the attacking Kojen to dust.

The woman was Maleena. Somehow, she had pulled Emallya’s dragon through the lake from Maiadar. Anevay studied the image. Why did this particular event keep playing through her mind? Why was it more important than the others she’d seen during Latia’s Hatching?

She let the scene replay itself in her mind again. The ghost dragon, translucent yet solid, gleamed in the light of the rising sun. Something clicked in her mind and the solution she’d been searching for was laid bare. So easy to see, so difficult to accomplish. The weave would be simple in its complexity. Excitement surged through her body. Would it work? Could she really make such a weave?

Latia shifted this time banking to the right. Anevay opened her eyes and saw the dragon was already headed for the hold. Without being asked, Latia knew she needed to get back to the records room. She sent waves of love to the dragon. “Thank you.”

“Do you think it will work?” Latia sent.

“I won’t know until I start on it, but I hope so. As far as I can tell, it is our only hope. We will be able to hold the Shadow Riders for a time, but like the end of the War of Fire, they will overwhelm us one day.”

Within moments, they landed in the caldera of the old volcano. The younger dragon’s called out in greeting. Anevay didn’t see Merru among them. Loki and Merru had made their first flight a few days ago. Most likely the two were off getting into trouble somewhere.

She didn’t have time to worry about them. Anevay climbed down from the saddle, then began unbuckling the saddle straps. She pulled the saddle off and carried to the equipment cave, her mind already turning the problem of the new weave over. There was so much to do, so much to research.

She smiled at Latia as she crossed the inner terrace. The big yellow stretched out on the grass next to the lake. She’d fed the day before and wouldn’t need to feed again for several days. Anevay sensed the dragon’s desire to do nothing more than sleep the afternoon away.

She rushed through the Great Hall. Once inside the records room, she paused, trying to decide the best place to start. Spirit magic—she needed to look deeper into what could be done with it.

Several scrolls lined one shelf. As Anevay pulled the first scroll down something large, dark, and hairy scuttled across it. She yelped and jumped back, covering her pounding heart with a hand. With a shaky laugh, she reached for the scroll again. “You nearly scared me to death, Nica.”

Her face reflected in the multiple eyes set in the spider’s head as it watched her slide another scroll off the shelf. She had to admit, there were far less mice in the records room with Nica there. She walked to the large desk and settled down. The light orbs glowed strong on the walls, but she lit the candles on the desk anyway. More light made it easier on her eyes to read for long periods of time and Anevay had a feeling she would be there for quite a while.

As the hours slowly passed, Nica found his way to her desk. She glanced at him from time to time as he crouched on his eight legs near the candles burning at the corner of the desk, his many eyes watching her. Anevay smiled, enjoying the quiet company of the arachnid.

Maleena and Mckale rode past the gates to Taragen, the capitol of Calladar. Houses built three- and four-stories high rose around them. Shops crowded in amongst the houses and people filled the streets. Maleena did her best not to look at any of them, concentrating instead on breathing evenly. The press of buildings and people made her feel claustrophobic. Galdrilene, though larger than this city, was more organized and felt more open.

High above them, no more than specks in the sky, Tellnox and Nydara rode the winds.

Mckale stayed to the wide, paved boulevard running through the city. After a while the wooden houses gave way to stone structures set back from the road. Though massive, they were dwarfed by the walls of the fortress in the middle of the city.

They turned onto a wide paved, half-moon path that led off the road, and curved around toward a stone stairway. Mckale stopped Blain at the bottom of the stone steps leading up to the wide doors of the structure.

Maleena gazed at the building. Was it a house or a miniature fortress? Two guards stepped forward and Mckale leaned toward them. “Please inform Lord Arandrall that Mckale Mandarran has returned and wishes to speak with him.”

The guards climbed the steps and disappeared through the door. Maleena glanced at Mckale. “Who is this Lord Arandrall?”

Mckale flashed her a reassuring look and turned his attention back to the doors. “He is the head of the Council of Nine. Calladar has no king; it is run instead by the nine highest ranking houses.”

A flutter of nerves built in Maleena’s stomach and she worked to squash them. Lord Arandrall may be a powerful man, but in the end he was only a man. She sighed quietly to herself. Why couldn’t Lord Arandrall be a dog? They were so much easier to be around and easier to predict.

The doors swung open as the guards returned, followed by three other men. Two of them immediately went to the horses while the third, dressed in fine clothing, bowed low. “Lord Arandrall is most anxious to see you. These two young men will see that your horses are taken care of during your visit.”

Maleena dismounted and let one of the men lead Arella away. Hopefully he would take good care of the old mare. She took Mckale’s offered arm as they climbed the stairs and followed the fine dressed servant into the halls of the massive house-fortress.

The soaring ceiling arched high above them and several wide corridors led off the main one. But the servant led them to the far end of the hall where it ended in a polished ornate staircase. At the top of the stairs was a landing and more stairs branching off in two different directions, following the curve of the outside wall until they reached the next level.

The servant took the stairs. At the top they turned left down another mighty hall until coming to a stop in front of two heavy wooden doors. He opened them and led them inside. “Lord Mckale of House Mandarran as you requested, my lord.”

Lord Arandrall waved the servant away and rose as the doors closed behind the man. He was the same height as Mckale with the same broad shoulders and the same hard-planed face that seemed to be common among the men of Calladar. Deep lines cut through his face and gray heavily outweighed the black in his shoulder-length hair.

He walked forward and held out his hand to Mckale who reached out and clasped forearms with him. “Mckale, it’s good to see you. I trust you found your way to Galdrilene.” He turned to Maleena and surprise flashed through his dark gray eyes before his brow furrowed. He dropped his hand back to his side. “And who is this? She must have been there too or I wouldn’t have been able to mention the name of the place.”

Mckale glanced at Maleena. “I found Galdrilene and hatched a dragon egg. This is my bondmate, Maleena”

Arandrall turned his attention back to Mckale with a startled look. “You were called? That is wonderful. Which color did you hatch and where is your dragon? And you have a bondmate as well. This is indeed good news.”

“I hatched a green. He is flying high above us right now with Maleena’s silver dragon.”

Arandrall looked at Maleena and bowed slightly to her. “It is my pleasure. Forgive my rudeness. It was a shock to hear that Mckale is a Dragon Rider.” A furrow appeared between his eyes again. “For a moment, I was sure Mckale walked in here accompanied by Emallya. You are shorter than her, but the resemblance is uncanny. And a Silver Rider as well. If I didn’t know that she lost her entire family except Bardeck by the end of the War of Fire, I would say you were her daughter.”

Maleena blushed under his scrutiny. “We have the same color of hair and eyes.”

He nodded. “I suppose that could be it.” Arandrall shook his head slightly. “To business, we have much to discuss. Please sit and tell me everything. You have visited your father I presume? If not, he will be most anxious to see you.”

Mckale nodded as they moved to a grouping of chairs at the side of the large room and sat down. “We arrived last evening and stayed the night at my father’s house. He is the one who told me of you.”

Arandrall nodded. “Yes, that makes sense. I’m surprised Emallya or Bardeck didn’t send you straight to me.”

“I think they both knew how much I wanted to see my family again,” Mckale said with a smile.

“Did your father tell you of the recent visit by Shadow Riders?” Arandrall waited for Mckale to nod. “Caused quite a stir and not in a good way. I imagine it will make Calladar’s acceptance of Galdrilene and the dragons both easier and more difficult at the same time. The Shadow Riders caused quite a few deaths and left one man physically scarred for life.”

“We heard.” Mckale said. “When my brother first heard we were Dragon Riders, he became enraged. In the end it was Maleena who convinced him.”

Arandrall’s eyebrows rose as he looked at Maleena. “And how did you accomplish that?”

She looked him in the eye and said quietly, “I showed him my own scars. I have been on the receiving end of the Shadow magic that Kaden described. Mckale too bears his own scars from such an encounter.”

“How did you come up against Shadow Riders already? I think you should start at the beginning and tell me everything that has happened in Galdrilene. I have received a few scattered messages here and there but nothing with too much information. I was hoping Emallya would make her way to Calladar soon to fill in the rather large gaps, although now that you are here I don’t have to wait.” He held up his hand. “Before we get started, let me take a moment to order refreshments and send out orders for the Council of Nine to meet in the Council chambers.” He smiled briefly at Maleena. “This is my personal residence. Meetings between the Nine take place within the walls of the fortress. We are careful to never have more than three of us together in any one place otherwise.”

Maleena nodded as he turned away and rang a bell. The servant who had brought them up came through the doors a moment later. Mckale leaned toward her as Arandrall spoke quietly with the servant. “You seem to be feeling much better today.”

She smiled at him. “I think I just needed a good night’s sleep.”

Arandrall glanced at them. “Excuse me for a moment so I can write out the orders.”

He stood and crossed the room to a heavy, polished desk and pulled out several sheets of paper. He dipped the pen in the inkwell and began to write, the sound of it scratching across the paper in quick movements loud in the quiet room. Maleena felt intense curiosity, along with an undercurrent of distrust, rolling off the servant though he kept it under tight control.

As he left with the stack of folded and sealed papers in his hand, he glanced at Maleena and she was struck by the coldness in his eyes. Had he overheard their conversation? Or was he always this way with the people who came to see Lord Arandrall?

She put the thoughts away as Arandrall resumed his position in the chair facing them. Sitting next to Mckale with his hand in hers she could sense Arandrall but nothing more. Maleena gently reached out for his mind. His servant seemed suspicious; was Arandrall sincere?

Her weave touched Arandrall’s mind, and his emotions and thoughts poured into her: intense devotion to Galdrilene and Calladar; deep worry and hope for the future; anger over the Shadow Riders; worries over the Council and their reaction; the knowledge that two others on the Council knew of Galdrilene. There was more but she pulled back quickly, the brief touch bringing an instant ache in her head.

“You should have waited until you rested a few more days before trying that. I’m sure this is not the last time you will be in the same room with this Arandrall,” came Nydara’s sending.

“I thought it best to know sooner. His mind is much like Mckale’s. The pain will fade soon,” she returned.

Mckale squeezed her hand and she looked into his silver eyes. Maleena heard the question in his mind but merely shook her head slightly.

Arandrall glanced between them. “Is everything alright?”

“Yes.” Mckale nodded and looked at him. “Would you like us to fill in the gaps now?”

Arandrall settled back into his chair and propped an ankle on the opposite knee. “Yes, please. We will meet with Council this afternoon. That gives you time to bring me up-to-date and for me to prepare you for the Council’s questions.”

Loki held the weave until he no longer felt the searches of the Spirit mages flutter across the shield.

“Are sure this is a good idea?” Merru sent. “We did promise Vaddoc and Namir to take more responsibility.”

“And we did take more responsibility, but I have to do something else for a little while.” Loki peered out through the thick growth of trees and ferns. He glanced back at Merru, who had his bulk pressed against the forest floor. “You don’t have to hide like that, Merru. Someone could stand three feet from you and not see you right now. We’re only in this spot to keep someone from walking into the shield and alerting the Spirit mages.”

“I’m still unsure about the wisdom of this.” Merru’s sending had an anxious feel to it.

Loki shrugged. “For weeks we have done everything we were told and it is driving me insane. Day after day of lessons. I want to do something different for a while and now that I can fly with you over long distances, we can do something fun.”

“It’s a shame I can’t Slide yet. We could see what Kellinar and Shryden are up to.”

“That’s the spirit.” Loki smiled fondly at the golden dragon. “You may not be able to Slide, but that doesn’t mean we can’t go places.”

“Did you have someplace in mind?” Curiosity replaced the anxiety in the dragon’s sending.

“I’ve always want to see Ardien in Boromar.”

Merru raised his head. “You want to fly to another nation? That would be rather dangerous don’t you think?”

“It’s not like we’re going to land in the middle of the street, Merru. If we stay fairly high, you will look like a big bird to the people on the ground and we’ll get to see it, even if not too well. At least it is something to do.”

“I suppose you’re right.” Merru stood. “I don’t feel them searching this area anymore.”

“I don’t either.” Loki glanced back toward the city wall but saw no one this far out. He turned back toward the gold and propped his foot on the dragon’s leg. With quick movements, he tightened the cuff of the catcher strap around his ankle. With an agile leap, he gained the saddle in a single move. In moments, he had the safety straps fastened. “Fly as low and as fast as you can at first. I’ll hold the shield as long as I can, but it’s much harder to keep it intact when you’re flying. If the weave fails on me and anyone in the mage towers sees us, our adventure is over.”

“You only need to hold it for a few minutes.” Merru moved through the forest, taking care not to crack his wings on any trees. “After that I will have us around the bend in the valley and out of sight of the towers. I’m still not sure why we must sneak away. After our first flight together, we are supposed to be full Guardians and have the freedom to fly where we wish.”

“Yeah, well, I guess that doesn’t apply when you are the youngest rider ever.” Loki couldn’t keep the sour tone from his sending. He was tired of the emphasis constantly put on his age. He may be young, but he wasn’t stupid. He had survived the streets of the Mallay for years before Kellinar took him in. Loki tried to count the years he’d spent on his own. Maybe three. He wasn’t sure how old he’d been when his parents died. He thought he was around six, but his parents hadn’t been able to count well so there was no way of knowing for sure.

Merru walked out of the trees and into a small clearing. “Maybe you’re not.”

“Not what?”

“Not the youngest rider.” The dragon extended his wings. The morning sunlight rippled along the length of leathery skin in a golden wave.

Loki pulled his thoughts from trying to figure his age and focused more fully on Merru. “What in the name of the Fates are you talking about?”

“You don’t really know how old you are, and neither does anyone else. They’re sure you are at least thirteen, but you might be fourteen. Maybe you aren’t the youngest.”

Loki laughed. “It’s possible that we are off a year on my age, but even so, there hasn’t been a rider younger than sixteen in the history of dragons in this world.”

“True. I guess we will just have to work around the unusual restrictions placed on us then,” Merru sent.

“That is what we’re doing, my friend.” Loki smiled as he made the sending, feeling a rush of excitement at the impending adventure. A chance to get away from everyone and all of the rules. He knew everyone was just concerned and wanted to help him be the best he could be and for that, Loki loved them. But, every now and then, he needed his freedom.

Loki sensed Merru ready to take off and grabbed the handles on the pommel of the saddle as the dragon lifted off with powerful strokes of his wings. His heart made the familiar leap as they rose above the tree tops. Diving off the edge of the caldera floor and coasting to the ground below when Merru had been younger didn’t compare to the thrill of actually flying the dragon.

Merru angled his wings and flew low and swift, the tops of the trees only a few feet beneath him. Loki didn’t have time to soak in the enjoyment of flying at that moment; every ounce of his concentration was on maintaining the shield that hid them both from view and from the searching weaves of the Spirit mages.

The stunning gold dragon raced down the valley. Loki nearly lost the weave and Merru’s anxious sending came only a moment later. “Are you alright? I can feel the strain on you from trying to maintain the weave. Perhaps we should try this later.”

“I’m fine. Besides, how many times has Bardeck told me how useful this weave might be in battle if I could ever master it? How many times has he worked me to maintain it while moving?”

“Very true. Hold on just a little bit more; I will be around the bend in a moment.”

Loki fought to hold the weave, sweat rolling down his face and chilling in the wind that rushed passed them. Only a moment more. The weave wavered and he threw more energy into it. He had to hold it. If they got caught, they would have to work ten times harder to get away next time. Desperation fueled his determination and he managed to keep it just long enough.

The weave collapsed as they rounded the bend and Galdrilene was lost from sight. Loki sat up and sucked in a deep breath. Throwing his hands in the air, he let it out with a loud whoop. “We did it Merru! Fates be damned, we did it!”

Merru rumbled his pleasure and soared down the wide, deep canyon that opened up before them. It was all new territory for them. Never had they flown this far in this direction. They had flown far into the unpopulated northern range, but never south or east.

They followed the canyon and its river rushing along the bottom until they were far from Galdrilene. Then Merru climbed higher and turned south, the sun flashing off his strong wings like golden fire.

Merru rose until he caught the updrafts to conserve energy. Not that he would tire anytime soon. Dragons possessed incredible stamina. Still, it was a long flight to Boromar and they would spend most of the night flying back to Galdrilene. Loki wanted a little freedom, but he didn’t want to worry everyone back home. He never left longer than a day and a night and knew they would worry if he stayed away longer. He would make sure they were home before the sun rose the following morning.

Hours moved by, the landscape below sliding smoothly past. Loki stretched his arms over his head and arched his back to loosen the muscles made stiff by hours sitting on the back of the dragon. The sun had passed its zenith and now sank slowly toward the ocean spreading out to the horizon on their right.

Loki glanced at the unbroken stretch of blue water and then looked again. Dark storm clouds boiled in the sky over the ocean and lightning flashed from cloud to cloud. It had been clear just a little while ago. He knew from living in Galdrilene that storms came in quickly off the Abendigo Ocean. It was never an issue there since the Weather mages sensed storms long before they arrived.

There would have been no warning for this one though since it was well over a half a day as the dragon flies to the south and no one was supposed to be this close to Boromar right now. “That storm might be a bit of a problem, Loki,” came the apprehensive sending from Merru.

Loki watched the clouds roll in, the sound of thunder echoing through the air. He glanced down and saw the city of Ardien in the distance. “Do you think we can still make a fly over of Ardien and get out of the way before it reaches us?”

“We’ve come all this way, it seems a shame to not make it. I think we’re going to try.” He felt the determination in the dragon’s sending and smiled as Merru picked up speed. Loki tightened the hood around his head to keep the chill wind off. The day had been warm enough, but at this altitude, it was cold.

Loki kept a close watch on the clouds as the city approached far below them. The storm seemed to be picking up speed. Lightning split across the sky, the ensuing thunder so loud it vibrated Loki’s chest and made him flinch.

“We aren’t going to make it, Merru. Forget the city. Fly east as fast as you can and see if we can put enough distance between the storm and us so we can turn back north.”

“I think you are right.”

Merru banked to the east as more lighting filled the sky. Loki looked down and saw Ardien directly below them. At least they had made it there. Now if they could get away before they were hit by lightning.

Lightning flashed in front of them and Merru twisted in the air, throwing Loki against the safety straps. As the clouds started to roll over them, Merru started to climb higher. “What are you doing?” Loki sent, holding tight to the handles on the saddle and leaning forward to balance with the dragon.

“If I can get high enough, I can come out above it and then we will be safer and able to fly straight back to Galdrilene.”

Loki laughed a little darkly. “You’ll be safer, my friend. Kellinar told me all about these kind of storms. They go up too high. You’ll be able to breathe up there just fine, but I won’t.”

He sensed Merru’s surprise as the dragon turned and dove down. The rain soaked them and the turbulent winds lashed at them, attempting to pull them from the sky. “I will have to get below it then. I can’t even tell which direction I’m going in this mess.”

More lightning flashed around them, the claps of thunder deafening inside the storm. The wind became violent and shoved Merru toward the ground and then shifted and dragged him higher in the sky. The golden struggled to maintain his direction. A nasty swirl of turbulence caught the dragon’s wing and flipped him, sending them tumbling toward the ground.

Loki held tight, his heart in his throat as he worked to keep his sudden fear under control. He stayed out of Merru’s mind so the dragon could concentrate on recovering his flight. The storm fought the dragon, knocking him around every time he tried to catch the air with his wings. Somewhere in the distance, a roaring whine filled the air.

The wind became more violent as the roar increased until it overpowered the noise of the thunder. Merru righted himself and unfolded his wings only to have the gusts slap one wing up and the other down. The gold folded his wings slightly and rolled with it this time, but he was no match for the powerful down rush of wind that smacked them out of the sky. Loki sensed Merru’s frantic distress call broadcasting to every dragon he could reach.

Rain lashed at them as the wind shear hurtled them toward the ground. The streets of Ardien rushed up at them. “Merru!” Loki shouted in the dragon’s mind. Terror and regret flashed through him and then the violence of the storm slammed them into the paving stones of a wide road.

Loki hung from the safety straps, his mind full of fog and the enclosing darkness. He dimly noticed the whining roar growing louder as the world faded.

Anevay!” Tania shouted as she ran into the hold. “Loki and Merru are in trouble.”

Anevay was already sprinting for the caldera. “I know, Latia heard him too.”

“I got Latia’s saddle on for you.” Tania panted as she turned to follow Anevay.

Anevay barely heard her as she ran for the large yellow dragon waiting for her on the inner terrace. Bardeck too, ran toward them. “I’m coming with you.”

“We have to hurry. I can’t reach Merru,” came Latia’s anxious sending.

Anevay grabbed the catcher strap and started fastening it around her ankle as Bardeck did the same with the second. “Where is Mernoth?”

He pulled the second catcher strap down. “Mernoth’s wings hurt him enough when he flies without trying to fight a storm. He will stay here and I will ride with you.”

“Are you sure that’s a good idea? Mernoth is going to be sick with worry.”

Bardeck shook his head. “Mernoth will be fine. It’s Loki and Merru who need us now. From what he sent out before they crashed, it seems as though they crashed in the middle of Ardien. That’s going to cause a few problems.”

She looked at him sharply as she tugged on the catcher strap to make sure it was snug. “Boromar is a friend of Galdrilene.”

He flashed her a wry smile. “That’s not a commonly known fact in Boromar. Only the very top leaders are privy to that information. Everyone else thinks they believe the same as the rest of the world. It’s why their ‘executions’ for magic are not done publicly. They send them up here and announce to the nation that the deed has been done.”

He gave the catcher strap a yank and continued, “However, a dragon crashing in the middle of the city is going to blow it all wide open. We were hoping to wait until Kirynn had a chance to make it there before that happened. She is an accomplished person in their army and is someone they would all relate to. It would have made it easier. Too late to worry about it now.”

Anevay climbed into the saddle with Bardeck right behind her. She was glad again of the ingenious two saddles in one design thought up by one of the apprentices among the saddle makers. It made transporting two people on dragon back much easier. As they both began to fasten the safety straps, Anevay looked over her shoulder. “What about the storm? It’s only been a few minutes. I doubt it has let up.”

“We’ll have to do the best we can. Latia is older and a stronger flier. She can also Slide if she needs too, she’s gotten much better at it.”

Latia gathered herself and leaped into the air. When she reached the height of the rim, Anevay saw the image of Ardien that Merru had broadcast form in Latia’s mind. The Slide spun open and the yellow dove into it.

A roaring whine pressed on their ears and the wind knocked Latia sideways as they came through the Slide. Lightning arced across the clouds. The yellow threw her wings out and she felt panic flash through the dragon. Anevay looked ahead and her heart nearly stopped.

A huge funnel of twisting, roaring clouds danced on the ground obliterating the houses in its path. Chunks of stone and broken trees flew through the air. Latia narrowly dodged a full tree, its roots ripped from the ground, as it hurtled toward them.

“I can’t fly in this!” Desperation lay in her sending.

Anevay didn’t blame her but when she saw the image of Galdrilene form in the dragon’s mind and felt her prepare to Slide, she reached out, “We can’t go back without Loki and Merru. They are somewhere in this and…”

A large branch slammed into them. It knocked the wind out of Anevay and sent black flecks swirling across her vision. Her cheek and scalp stung as shards of wood tore through her skin before the branch flipped away and flew like a thrown spear toward the ground. She barely noticed the warm blood pouring down her face as she struggled to breathe. The safety straps cut into her thighs as Latia hurtled through the air, tossed by the violent winds. Behind her, Bardeck coughed and groaned.

With tremendous effort, the dragon righted herself and struggled against the wind and blinding rain. With a gasp, Anevay was able to take a breath and get her lungs to work again. “Are you alright?” she shouted over the storm to Bardeck. She thought he shouted something back but the gusts whipped it away.

“Are you hurt, Latia?”

“I think it scraped and bruised the leading edge of my wing, but I’ll live. You are injured though, we should go back.”

“I won’t die from my injury.We can’t leave them in this.”

A sudden silence interrupted the storm. The twisting finger of clouds disappeared and the rain became nothing more than mist as the wind died to nearly nothing.

Stunned, Anevay looked around. A massive blue dragon hovered not far from them.

Kellinar and Shryden.

“Shryden says Kellinar can only hold the storm for so long. He says for us to get Loki and get out of here while he tries to direct the fury of the storm to a less populated area.” Latia paused and the rest of her sending came in a mental whisper. “They are both very angry.”

Anevay took a deep breath. “They will have to get over it. They have their duties and we have ours.”

She started to scan the streets below for Loki and Merru.

“There they are,” came Latia’s sending at the same time Anevay spotted the pair in the middle of an intersection where two wide roads met. Her heart clenched at the sight of the broken pair.

Latia tilted her wings and angled toward the ground. Anevay’s heart thundered in her chest. What if they were dead? The yellow pulled up just short of the ground and landed heavily, jarring Anevay in the saddle.

She didn’t care how rough the landing was. She ripped away the safety straps and leaped from the saddle without bothering to unbuckle the catcher strap. It was long enough that she could reach him with it on.

Anevay ran to Loki first, knowing if they lost him they lost them both. She dropped to her knees beside where he hung from the safety straps at an odd angle and reached for him with her hands, a healing weave already forming. A deep sigh pushed past the ache in her side where the branch had hit her. He was alive.

Beside her, Bardeck laid his hands on Merru and began a healing weave. Anevay’s heart soared with relief. Merru was alive too.

She was keenly aware of the strain on Kellinar high above them as he held back the storm. However, she could only work so fast. Loki’s head must have hit the pavement. His skull was cracked and he had a massive concussion. His back was broken too, but the immediate threat to his life was the damage to his head.

Merru began to stir and Anevay reached for Latia immediately. “Tell him to hold still. Loki cannot be moved right now. He is close enough to death as it is. I have to get this repaired before the swelling in his brain becomes too much.”

She heard the yellow relay the message and the gold stilled. She worked fast but thorough, using multiple weaves to work on several areas of his head at once as she reduced the swelling and repaired some of the damage to his brain and skull. After several tense minutes when Anevay felt she had done enough to make it safe to move him, she gently took him in her arms to support him.

“Bardeck, can you release his safety straps? There is still healing to be done, but he’s stable enough to get back to Galdrilene.”

Bardeck quickly unbuckled the straps and took Loki from her. She turned to Latia who had stood over them with her wings spread to keep the drizzling rain off them while they worked. Anevay jumped into the saddle and made quick work of the safety straps then reached out for Loki, ignoring a wave of dizziness.

Bardeck stepped up on Latia’s front leg, balanced carefully, and lifted the boy up to her. She sent a brief thanks to the Fates for the increased strength of the dragon bond as she pulled him up until he sat sideways in front of the saddle her arms secure around him and his head resting against her shoulder. Anevay looked down at Merru who slowly gathered himself together. She shot a worried look at Bardeck. “Can he fly?”

Bardeck nodded, a weary look on his face. “He broke both wings and had some internal damage from the impact, but I healed it all. He is tired, but he should be able to fly.”

“How are we going to get them both home? Latia isn’t old enough to open a Slide large enough for two dragons to get through.”

Bardeck climbed into the back saddle seat. “No, she isn’t, but Shryden is.”

Several people peeked out the windows of their shops and homes. Anevay ignored them; there would be time to deal with that later. Latia took off as smoothly as she could. Anevay glanced back to make sure Merru was following before turning her attention to Shryden and his rider. Even from this distance she saw Kellinar’s stony face. His fury rolled along their bond. She had never seen him this angry.

A large Slide spun open as they reached him and the three dragons passed into it, the sound of the storms released ferocity echoed behind them then disappeared. The familiar swirl of colors faded and Galdrilene spread out below them. Anevay ignored another wave of dizziness as Latia circled in for a landing with Merru and Shryden right behind.

Kellinar was off Shryden before Anevay even reached for her safety straps. She let Kellinar take Loki without looking him in the eye.

Little black flecks swirled across her vision for a brief second and were gone. She shook her head and stared at the buckles on the safety straps. What was she doing?

“Are you sure you are alright?” Latia sent.

“I’m fine. I think maybe that branch dazed me a little.”

“Branch? The thing was practically a tree.”

Bardeck climbed down from the saddle. He looked at her with a worried frown. “Are you coming?”

That is what she was supposed to be doing. She loosened the buckles and let herself down from the saddle. After pausing a moment to unbuckle the catcher strap, she followed Kellinar and Bardeck up to Loki’s bedchamber.

Kellinar laid the boy on his bed while Merru looked on anxiously through the doorway between the sleeping room and the lair. Anevay took a deep breath and moved toward the bed but Kellinar stopped her. She looked up into his blue eyes, the emotions coming through the bond as tumultuous as the storm they had left behind. His gaze raked over her as he lifted her hair away from her face, his fingers gentle despite the anger she felt in him. She glanced down and saw her long, ebony ringlets coated in blood. “You’re hurt.” His voice was soft.

“I’ll live. I have to take care of Loki. His back is broken and I still have work to do on his head.” Kellinar glanced at Loki’s still form, a mixture of rage and torment flooding his face. He turned back, his eyes steady on hers for a long moment before he stepped away and allowed her past.

She settled on the edge of the bed with Bardeck on the other side and reached for her magic, allowing Bardeck to link them before starting the healing. It was a long and delicate process to remove the remaining brain injury, and mend the broken bones and nerves in Loki’s lower back. When they finally pulled their hands away, he was healed and resting peacefully.

“Is he healed completely?” Kellinar asked, his voice rough.

Bardeck nodded. “He is. I don’t believe there will be any lasting effects from the brain injury, but we won’t know for certain until he wakes. We will have to wait and see how much he remembers of his misadventures. Maybe he will have learned something from this.”

Kellinar glared at the boy though Anevay felt his worry through the bond. “He better have.” He turned his gaze on her. “May I have a word with you, bondmate?”

Anevay nodded. Another wave of dizziness came and went. She focused through it and followed Kellinar from the room. Based on the symptoms, she figured she had a mild concussion from the branch. It could be healed later after Kellinar went back to Haraban. In his anger he had missed the signs and she preferred to keep it that way.

They climbed to the next level and entered their sleeping quarters. He shut the door quietly behind him, leaned against it, let his breath out in a low growl and rubbed his hands over his face.

Anevay held up a hand. “Before you say anything, you have to realize that I have duties I’m called to. You can try to wrap me in swaddling clothes if you want, however you won’t keep me there. Be angry with me if you must, but you are going to have to get over it.”

He dropped his hands and stared at her for a long moment. “Angry with you? You think I’m angry with you?” He started pacing back and forth. “I am not angry with you at all. You did what you had to do even if it did scare the life out of me.”

Kellinar’s voice rose as he continued. “I’m angry…no I take that back. I am furious with Loki! He nearly got himself and Merru killed with his antics and at the same time endangered you, Latia and Bardeck. I can accept he has a hard time settling into his role as a Dragon Rider, but he had better flaming start getting used to it and grow up a little…”

Another wave of dizziness rolled over her accompanied by black flecks in her vision. She blinked several times. What was he yelling about? Oh yes, Loki. She wished he would stop shouting; it made her head hurt more.

“Kellinar,” she said softly, trying to calm and reason with him. “He is still a child. This is hard for him.”

Kellinar threw his hands in the air as he paced. “I don’t care how hard it is. A rider doesn’t endanger others for his own selfish pleasure. He should know better. Merru should have known better. Dragons are supposed to be smarter than humans. What in the name of the Fates was he thinking?”

Anevay opened her mouth to answer when more dizziness struck. The black specks obscured her vision. She placed her hand on the wall to steady herself

“Anevay?” Kellinar’s hand touched her arm. “What’s wrong?”

The specks and the dizziness faded and she blinked. “I don’t know. The tree branch hit me pretty hard. I think it left me kind of dazed.”

He took her chin in his hand and tilted her face up. “Look at me.”

She stared at him.

“There is something wrong with your eyes, Anevay. One of your pupils is bigger than the other.”

She groaned, the dragon was out of the shell now. “I must have a bit of a concussion. That branch hit me harder than I thought.”

He pointed at the bed. “Sit. Shryden is having Mernoth send Bardeck to us. You need your cheek and the side of your head healed anyway.”

She sank down on the edge of the bed and nodded. Bardeck would be there in a minute and she would feel fine.

Serena paced back and forth, waiting for word of Loki and Merru. How could the boy endanger himself like that? Miya had relayed the extent of the injuries to both Loki and his dragon.

“I don’t know why you are so nervous,” Taela said from where she stood next to Paki in the giant courtyard garden. “Anevay is a very capable healer.”

Serena nodded. “I don’t doubt her ability, but sometimes there is only so much even we can do. He has extensive injuries to his brain, and I won’t take an easy breath until she is finished.”

Taela stared into space for a moment and Serena narrowed her eyes at the other woman. “What? Is Latia telling you something?”

Taela shook her head, a shadow of worry on her face. “No, but I’m feeling something in the bond. Not all is completely right with Anevay. I don’t think it’s anything life threatening.”

“What do you feel?”

“She’s dizzy and has lost her train of thought a couple times. That isn’t normal for her.” Taela waved her hand absently. “You know how focused she is.”

Serena went over everything that Miya had relayed to her. Most likely she had a mild concussion. Bardeck could heal it with little effort or one of the others from the Tower of Healing.

“Kellinar and Shryden are furious,” came Miya’s sending. “If Loki wakes while Kellinar is still there, the boy is going to get an earful. Merru is already getting a stern lecture from Shryden and a long distance one from Tellnox and Nydara.”

“He needs it. They both do. That was beyond foolish of them and they have done some foolish things,” Serena sent back.

“Latia says Anevay and Bardeck have completed the healing on Loki and they were able to repair all of the damage,” Miya sent.

Serena nodded, relieved. Hopefully Kellinar wouldn’t be too long. The dragons had been announced to the city the day before and things were still pretty tense as the people tried to come to grips with it. It was more than just the dragons and the magic they struggled with, it was also the knowledge that people who used magic had been put to death for no reason for the last five hundred years.

She didn’t blame them. It was a hard brew to swallow. Guilt and anger ran high. Serena was just glad they had Taela’s father on their side. Fates knew it wouldn’t be this easy in Trilene.

A gasp from Taela made her turn. She stood with her slanted blue eyes wide and her hands over her mouth. Serena followed her line of sight. Down the garden path, two women walked with a man between them. His long, dark hair hung lank around his slack face.

He slowly shuffled forward, changing directions only when the women tugged on his arms. He never looked up, not even when one of the women gently dabbed drool from his chin.

Serena looked back at Taela. “Who is that?”

“Sehlas,” she whispered. Taela turned to her with sorrow in her eyes. “I never meant to do that to him.”

Serena reached out with her magic and felt along the break in his mind. “I can feel the break. What did you do exactly when it happened? I might be able to heal it.”

“Can you?” Hope sprang in Taela’s face then her brow furrowed as she looked back at the man. “I don’t know what I did. It just happened and then everything changed so fast after that.” She continued to stare at the broken man. “I was going to ask you for this. I thought we would have to stop in Turindar though. I wonder what he is doing here? And where are his wives?”

As Sehlas and his attendants passed, Serena searched his face for any sign of emotion. There was no flicker in his eyes. No reaction as he followed the path that wound past the two massive dragons and disappeared through the doors.

Taela let out a long breath as the door swung shut behind the trio. She turned to Serena. “Anevay has been healed and is resting. Kellinar is still angry and intends to stay in Galdrilene until Loki wakes unless we need him.” She paused and glanced at the door. “Since it appears disaster has been averted for now, I’m going to locate my father and find out what is going on with Sehlas.”

“Do you mind if I come with you?” What Taela had done—unintentionally of course—to the man’s mind was a puzzle to be worked out. Perhaps Bahar would be able to answer a few questions.

Taela shook her head. “I don’t mind.”

A few moments later, they stood in front of the door to her father’s study. Taela knocked then opened it. “May I speak with you a moment?”

He glanced up from the document on the desk top. “Is it important? I just got another report of violence breaking out, this time in eastern Haraban and more in the northern part of the city. The Guardians can only save us from the Shadow Riders if we don’t implode first.” He rubbed a hand over his forehead and stared as if lost in thought for a moment. His angular face looked haggard and tired. “Why can’t they see there is a greater danger out there? I will be the first to admit the laws against magic use were wrong. How were we to know? They were put in place across all nations hundreds of years ago. All we had were the legends of mad magic users and their black dragons.”

Serena wasn’t sure if he was talking to them or to himself.

Taela led the way into the room. “Father, you know through me what dangers we all face in the coming years. But the people of Haraban don’t. It’s all just smoke and shadows right now to them. An enemy they can’t see and don’t know.” She leaned her hands on the desk. “But the people down the street who turned their son or daughter in for magic use? They can see that. Even if they agreed at the time with turning them in and the punishment that followed, now they have to face the guilt of having that child put to death when there was no real reason to. It’s easier to focus that guilt on the people down the street rather than admit they were just as wrong.”

Bahar took a deep breath and turned his eyes on them. “I’m sorry. You wanted to speak to me about something.”

Taela took one of the chairs in front of the desk while Serena sat in the other. “I saw Sehlas.”

He nodded. “I meant to talk to you about that, but the last couple of weeks have been rather busy.”

“What is he doing here? Where are his wives?”

Bahar leaned back. “Not long after you disappeared, I sent word to Sehlas’ brother. Rehnlas showed up here a month or so later. He visited Sehlas and asked the healers a few questions. He stayed for three weeks. When he left, he took the three wives of Sehlas’ that were here and said he would send someone for his brother. He never did and messages sent to Turindar since have gone unanswered.” He shook his head, sadness in his expression. “News arrived after Rehnlas’ departure that he had taken the throne of Turindar and added Sehlas’ wives to his own. All but the youngest—Sulwyna I think her name was. I’m not sure what happened to her but it’s rumored that Rehnlas put her out though I don’t know any reasons or if it’s even true.”

Anger bloomed across Taela’s face. “He left him here? Sehlas is his brother, his own flesh and blood for Fates sake! How could he just abandon him like that?”

“Rehnlas never was pleased to be the second born.” Bahar smiled though it held no mirth. “I think he is rather pleased his older brother is out of the way. He never did see eye to eye with Sehlas over the slave trade among the boats. Sehlas wanted it ended; Rehnlas thought it should stay the way it was.”

“Even if he did care more about gaining the throne than he did about his brother, in the condition Sehlas is in, it’s clear he couldn’t possibly run a nation.” Taela shook her head. “Why abandon him?”

Bahar shrugged. “I don’t think Rehnlas cares if Sehlas is blood.”

Serena leaned forward. She didn’t care about Rehnlas or the politics involved. She wanted to solve the riddle of the damage to Sehlas’ mind. Serena had never encountered anything like it. “Bahar, has Sehlas been like this the whole time?”

“No, not the whole time.” He rubbed his beard, his eyes lost in thought for a moment before focusing on Serena again. “After the initial attack, he communicated more or less. But as time went on he seemed to fade more and more until he became the man you saw today. He doesn’t move unless prodded. He can no longer chew. The servants that attend him have to prepare food as if for a baby and feed it to him. It has gotten progressively worse. I fear one day he will no longer be able to swallow.”

Bahar looked at Taela. “I know you never really cared for Sehlas, but he was a good man. His father was my friend, despite my distaste for the blind eye he turned to the boats. When he died, I was happy to see Sehlas take the throne. Regardless of what you may feel about him, he was a fair and honest king. Rehnlas is not and I fear for Turindar under his rule.”

Taela blushed slightly and stared at the floor. “I didn’t hate him. I just didn’t want to marry him.”

Serena leaned back in the chair and thought over what Bahar had said. “Can you take me to him? I would like to see if I can heal him.”

Bahar’s face lost some its strain. “Do you think you can?”

“I don’t know for certain, all I can do is try.”

“I appreciate any of your efforts.” The brief light in his eyes faded. “Although I’m not sure he will thank us. He has lost everything.”

Serena stood. “It doesn’t matter what he lost, no man should be reduced to spoon feeding and drooling. If I can heal Sehlas, then I’m sure the Fates will have something else for him.”

Bahar and Taela stood and Serena followed them out into the hall beyond the room. On the other side of the castle they stopped outside a small room. Inside, Sehlas sat in a chair facing a window. A narrow bed occupied the wall across from the window.

“For a long time he stayed in the guest apartments. But as his condition deteriorated and his care became more intensive, I had him moved here. It’s easier for the servants to keep a close eye on him. His needs are many. Sehlas has become, to an extent, a man-sized infant.” Bahar gazed sadly at the man in the chair. “It pains me to see him this way.” He looked at Serena. “If you can bring him back, even a little, I will be forever grateful.”

Serena smiled and slipped past him into the room. “I will do my best. I will send word when I know one way or the other.” She pulled up a chair to sit next to Sehlas, her attention focused on the injured man. She barely heard Bahar’s grumble about being dismissed in his own castle as he left.

She laid her hands on Sehlas and began to explore the break in his mind. After several long minutes, she reached out for Miya. “Can you speak with Nydara for me? Maleena was present in Taela’s mind when this happened. Taela doesn’t remember exactly what she did. Can you find out if Maleena does? Show Nydara what I am ‘seeing’ with my weave so she can pass it to Maleena.”

Maleena sat waiting for the eight other members of the Council of Nine to arrive. She was glad Loki was healed, but she wouldn’t be able to fully relax until the boy woke and Anevay and Bardeck determined if he had any lasting damage.

Mckale spoke quietly with Lord Arandrall on the other side of the room when Serena’s request came through Nydara. For a brief moment, Maleena’s memory took her back. She stood on the inner terrace, the cold wind tugging at her hair while she saw a man on his knees in a garden, clutching his head.

What had Taela done exactly? “Do you have a clear memory of it?” she sent to Nydara.

“Of course. Dragons have excellent memories,” Nydara returned.

“Send me the picture of what Serena is seeing now and then go slowly over the memory of what happened when Taela connected with me.”

Nydara did as she asked. Maleena scrutinized everything, her mind focused. Her own memory came to a conclusion before the breaking of Sehlas’ mind but Nydara’s memory of the incident was clear enough.

“Taela broke the soul shield within his mind. It is something that should never be done for obvious reasons, however, she didn’t know at the time what she was doing,” she sent to Nydara.

A few moments passed before Nydara’s return sending. “Serena says she has heard of the soul shield but would like further clarification.”

Maleena nodded to herself. Of course she would. The soul shield was known among the healers but its exact purpose wasn’t widely known. Very few had the ability to do what Taela did to Sehlas. Taela had enough power to bring down a whole room even if she didn’t remember how. Emallya could do the same and she did know how. Maleena herself knew and her power was great enough to bring down much more than a roomful, many more. The fewer who knew the exact purpose of the soul shield and how to break it, the better. In the wrong hands it would be devastating.

She didn’t like passing on this information, however, a man’s life hung in the balance. It wasn’t like Serena would ever tell anyone what it meant or how to use it. Maleena reached out for Nydara. “The soul shield is much like it sounds. It’s a barrier within the mind that keeps the soul connected with the body. When Taela broke that, she also broke his soul loose from his body. That is why he has deteriorated over time. His soul is slipping though the break and waving in the wind like a flag tearing loose from its pole. In the condition you say he is in, you don’t have much time to heal him, if you can. A couple of weeks at most.” She paused for a moment before continuing.“You can’t heal a break like this alone. Taela is going to have to find Sehlas’ soul and pull it back in. Otherwise, you will repair the break with most of his soul on the outside. He’ll remain as he is and his soul will remain in limbo as it is now until old age takes his body.”

Serena kept her hands on Sehlas but turned her attention to Taela. “Maleena says you’re going to have to help. His soul is slipping through the break you made and Spirit magic is what will have to get it back.”

“How do I get it back?” Taela twisted her hands as she looked at the man.

Serena shook her head. “I don’t know, she didn’t say. Trying to communicate that through the dragons would likely be difficult. You will just have to try.”

Taela nodded and walked over to the bed. She sat on the narrow mattress and closed her eyes. Serena paused before turning back to Sehlas. “I can’t sense Spirit so you will have to let me know when you’ve gotten it back.”

The other woman gave a slight nod of her head.

Serena continued to explore the break with an examining weave. Such an interesting thing. The shield was solid and whole on one side, but as her weave skimmed across the surface she felt where it started to bend and warp. In the middle of the distorted area, she found the break. Thin, little more than a crack really, except it felt like a gaping emptiness. A shiver ran down her spine and in that moment she was even more thankful that Taela hadn’t turned out to be a Shadow Rider. Hopefully, they never got another who used Spirit.

With a gasp, Taela jerked and her eyes flew open. Serena whipped around. “What’s wrong? Did you find him?”

Taela nodded and took a deep shuddering breath. “I can’t get him back. I tried but something forcibly stopped me.” She looked at Serena, her eyes troubled. “I got the impression I’m not allowed to go where he is. So much of his spirit has already slipped through and I…”

“You what?”

Taela’s brow furrowed as confusion clouded her face. “I don’t have a connection?”

What was she talking about? Serena frowned. “Someone told you that you don’t have a connection so you can’t go get him? You aren’t making sense, are you alright?”

“I’m fine. And no, nobody told me exactly. It was a very strong impression. Like someone whispering to me just beyond my ability to hear, yet I still understood. When I tried to push anyway, I was thrown back into my own head with some force.” She rubbed her temples. “It was…uncomfortable.”

“Would it help if you were touching him?”

Taela exhaled. “I can’t. With Kellinar so far away, it would be too uncomfortable, even in the state he’s in.” She pushed her hair behind her ears. “Besides, I don’t think it will help.”

Serena looked back at Sehlas, searching his slack face. There had to be some way to heal him. Magic had its limitations but surely there was a way. She reached for Miya again. “Relay what happened to Nydara. Make sure to include every word Taela said. I get the feeling there is something important in them.”

Maleena stood with Mckale and Arandrall; the Council of Nine would be convening soon. Her nerves passed the time by tying themselves into knots. She wasn’t looking forward to being in a roomful of people where everyone would be staring, appraising, and judging. Although nine people didn’t constitute a roomful, and technically it would only be eight strangers since they had spent the day with Arandrall and he already knew of Galdrilene. It it didn’t matter to her nerves.

“Miya says Taela has tried to fix what she did to Sehlas; however, she has been unable to reach him. She said Taela got a strong impression she wasn’t allowed to and didn’t have the proper connection to go where he is. Serena wants to know if there is another way,” came Nydara’s sending.

Nerves and the pending Council meeting forgotten, Maleena focused on the problem. Not allowed to go there? No connection? A memory of her meeting with the Ke’han floated to the surface. She recalled Angeni gasping and pulling her hand away: “You have been to Maiadar. You have done more than pass through it, you have touched it. You have a connection to it.”

Taela didn’t have the proper connection and Sehlas would die without help. Maleena wondered if the connection Angeni had sensed was the right one?

“Maleena? What is it?”

Startled, Maleena looked up at Mckale. She had been so deep in thought she had almost forgotten she was standing in Arandrall’s office. “I have to go.”

Mckale turned his full attention on her. “Go where?”

“Haraban. Sehlas is dying and Taela can’t reach him. I have to try.”

Mckale frowned. “Sehlas? What is going on?”

“Tellnox can fill you in,” she said.

Arandrall looked first at Mckale then at her. “You have to leave right now?”

Maleena nodded. “A man’s life is more important than a meeting.”

He frowned, frustration filling his expression. “It’s too late to call off the meeting. Perhaps I can explain it myself. Lords Yennale and Holden have both been to Galdrilene. They can at least confirm what I’m saying.”

“There is no reason for you to hold the meeting by yourself. Mckale can still do it.”

Mckale shook his head. “No, we go together.”

She reached up and laid her hand on the side of his face. “We may be bondmates, but we can’t always be together. I have a duty which my magic calls me to. You can do nothing to help Sehlas and you have a duty here.”

“You will be without my shield at that distance.” His eyes were soft with worry as he trailed his hand over her shoulder.

She dropped her hand and caught his. “I lived without it for many years and it hasn’t been working all the time here lately anyway. I have to do this.”

“I don’t like it.”

Maleena smiled at him. “You don’t have to. It isn’t as though I will be without protection. I have my magic. Nydara will be there as well as Taela, Serena, Miya, and Paki. If I have need of you, I can call for you.”

Mckale nodded. “Once again you’re right, my wise woman.”

Her smile broadened. “Don’t forget I have some skill with a sword. If some untrained servant comes at me, I should be able to defend myself.”

The deep bass of his laugh warmed her heart. He enfolded her in his arms. “Yes, you might even be able to kill an experienced swordsman—if he was already severely injured or missing his arms.”

She pushed him away with a laugh. “Think you’re funny, don’t you?”

Arandrall smiled at her. “I promise to take good care of him while you are absent.”

Maleena looked him full in the eye. “I know you will. Tellnox is circling above us right now and will be waiting in case Mckale needs him. I can be back in a matter of moments. I will be most unhappy if he comes to harm.”

Mckale rolled his eyes but Arandrall bowed low from the waist. “It will be as you say, my lady rider.”

She took a deep breath. “Now, by the time the Council convenes, they are going to know exactly what the topic is.”

Arandrall’s brow furrowed. “Why is that?”

“Because Nydara is already descending with the intention of landing on the tall tower in the center of this…house… to pick me up.”

His face seemed frozen for a moment. “Oh Fates. She is going to scare people half to death. Follow me, quickly. I will show you the stairs to the upper tower.”

As they followed him through the fortress at a near run, screams could be heard from outside the walls. They reached the top of the stairs and Arandrall shouted to the guards ahead of them, “Open it!”

They turned to him with startled looks. “But my lord, there is a dragon—”

“I know, open it!”

They pulled the heavy latch back and shoved the door upwards until it stood up, a heavy chain keeping it from falling over. Arandrall was the first up the steps with Maleena and Mckale right behind him. The sound of Nydara’s expansive wings moving in quick, short movements filled the air. In the streets below, women screamed and ran as Border Guards poured into the spaces between the buildings.

The silver landed carefully, her back feet on the parapets and one front foot on the flat top of the tower. The stone groaned under the weight of the dragon and the parapets crumbled slightly, sending pieces showering down the side of the tower.

Maleena ran to the dragon and pulled the catcher strap down from where it was looped up on the saddle. As she fastened the cuff around her ankle, she glanced up at Arandrall.

He stood staring at Nydara, a mixture of pride and amazement on his face. “She is truly beautiful.” He bowed to the dragon. She reached out with her long, tapered snout and blew a puff of smoke around him.

Maleena smiled. “Nydara says thank you and that she looks forward to meeting you properly. The smoke was her warning to keep Mckale safe in our absence.”

He stood straight and gazed at the dragon. “He will be safe, I promise.”

Mckale shook his head as he walked toward them. “I am perfectly capable of protecting myself, thank you.” Maleena hugged him back when he wrapped his arms around her and brushed a kiss across her cheek. “Be safe, my heart.”

She pulled away. “Always, bondmate.”

Maleena stepped onto Nydara’s leg and gained the saddle with a practiced leap. She secured the safety straps and gave Mckale one last smile. Nydara pushed off with her back feet, sending more crumbled stone clattering down the side of the tower. Her wings came down with a powerful rush as she climbed into the sky.

The tower and the men fell away as they gained in altitude until Nydara thought it safe enough. Maleena saw the image Miya had sent form in the silver’s mind. The Slide spun open and Maleena felt the tug as they were pulled into it.

The world faded into a swirling kaleidoscope of colors and then they came through the other side. The castle in the center of the city of Haraban sprawled beneath them. Nydara angled her wings and turned toward the big inner courtyard. She made a large spiral as she descended. Miya and Paki raised their voices in greeting. Maleena felt the vibration through the saddle as Nydara answered back.

Nydara landed next the other dragons, doing her best not to trample the carefully trimmed and sculpted shrubbery. Maleena glanced around. Large windows faced the courtyard from nearly every wall. The palace was not built to be as defensive as those in Calladar.

An angular man with a neatly trimmed mustache and beard came barreling out of a door. He skidded to a stop on the garden path and stared at her. Maleena tried to ignore his stare as she unbuckled the safety straps and climbed down. “I’m sorry about the plants. Nydara did her best to avoid them.”

He shook his head. “I don’t care about the plants. Who are you?”

“I am Di’shan Maleena, rider of the Silver dragon Nydara and a Guardian of Galdrilene.”

The man glanced up at Nydara and then back to her. “You are from Galdrilene?”

She nodded. “And you are?”

He scowled slightly and Maleena felt his irritation. “I am King Bahar of Haraban. It’s not my intention to sound rude, but what are you doing here?”

“I’m here to assist with the healing of Sehlas.” Maleena shook the skirt of her dress to straighten it out, hardly the appropriate thing to fly in. She’d rode sidesaddle on her horse and hadn’t thought to dress for dragon travel.

Bahar looked at Nydara. “You are a Silver Rider. I thought only Yellow Riders could heal.”

She sighed. “I’m afraid it’s a little more complicated than just healing. His soul needs to be pulled back into him before the break in his mind can be healed. Taela tried but was unable to recover it. I am quite a bit stronger than her so I’m here to try.” There was no need to tell him of the connection to Maiadar that was apparently needed.

He studied her for a moment and she sensed him evaluating what she had said. A mixture of worry and hope filled him. “Follow me. I will take you to them.”

As they started toward the door, Taela came dashing through it. “Maleena, Paki said you came. I hope you have more success with this than I did.” She glanced briefly at her father. “I’m sorry you were interrupted. I can take Maleena to Sehlas.”

Bahar nodded, the exhaustion plain on his face. “Yes, unfortunately this nation seems determined to tear itself apart.” He bowed his head a fraction toward Maleena. “If you will excuse me.”

She offered him a small smile. “Of course.”

He left with brisk steps and disappeared through the door. Taela looked at Nydara and then around the garden. “Mckale didn’t come with you?”

Maleena shook her head as they started walking. “We were just getting ready to meet with the Council of Nine about Galdrilene and the Shadow Dragons. They have already been visited by Shadow Riders. Several people were killed and another bears many scars like mine. Mckale stayed to talk to them.”

“You might be thankful the Shadow Riders got there first,” Taela said.

Maleena felt a heavy worry in her Spirit sister. “What would make you say that?”

Taela looked at her with sadness in her eyes. “There is no common enemy to pull them together. The people of Haraban are turning on each other because of their grief and anger over those persecuted for magic. It’s a mess.”

Maleena glanced down at the scars on her arm and tried to imagine feeling thankful for Shadow Riders. She shook her head. No, nothing would ever make her thankful for that. Nothing was worth that.

Taela led her through several halls and into a small room. Serena sat on stool next to a man in a chair. He stared out the window, his face blank. Maleena stared into his eyes. The emptiness within the dark brown depths sent a shiver through her.

Serena smiled slightly. “It’s good to see you, Maleena. Hopefully you can help him.”

Maleena sat down on the bed, her eyes still on Sehlas. “I hope so. I will try to retrieve his soul. As soon as I tell you I have him back, you need to close the break. I will have to provide the shield while you work, and it will be very taxing.”

Taela sat next to her on the bed. “How do you know about this?”

“Emallya told me. It’s how I knew you would break his mind if you continued to push like you were.”

“So Emallya has done this before? That is a relief. At least now we know it will work," Taela said with a relieved sigh.

Maleena shook her head. “It’s been tried before, but never successfully. No one has ever recovered the soul.”

Serena looked at her sharply. “Then why did you bother to come if this has never been successful?”

Should she mention the connection Angeni seemed to think she had with Maiadar? No, they didn’t even know who or what Angeni was. Maleena kept her eyes on Sehlas. “I have to try.”

She closed her eyes, cutting off the sight of the broken man though she still saw him in her mind. Maleena built her power and sent it seeking deep within Sehlas’ mind. Many thought the mind and the brain were the same thing. They weren’t. A brain was a highly sophisticated organ of the body, a physical aspect. It was a vessel that held conscious thoughts, assimilated information, and kept muscles and the other organs working together.

The mind, on the other hand, was a vessel for unconscious thoughts. It was the vessel of the soul, an ethereal thing, insubstantial yet everything. The mind was where Maleena needed to go, deep into the recesses where the last attachment for Sehlas’ soul still held.

The vast emptiness inside was unnerving. There should have been a myriad of emotions, thoughts, dreams and the building blocks of his personality. Everything that was Sehlas should be here instead this vacant darkness. She continued searching and found what was left of him tucked into a corner of his mind. A huddled piece of translucent silver clung tenuously to its holdout. The break was slowly tearing away the last of his grip.

Maleena bypassed the last of the spirit and followed the thread of trailing silver. The pull from the break made it easy to flow along the stretched and worn spirit. She reached the break, the gap feeling enormous as she passed through. Maleena floated in a void for a long time, following the spirit as it waved slowly as if blown by a soft, otherworldly breeze she couldn’t feel.

Then she came up against a transparent wall in the dark. Sehlas’ spirit thread passed through it. On the other side there was the shifting, formless cloud that was him. Around her, Maleena sensed a thousand whispers brushing through her mind. Inquisitive, they circled her, gently probing her magic. Something silent yet familiar moved among the voices. It was joined by more sensations, some familiar and some not, although still somehow they were known to her. A single whisper arose from the gathering, echoing quietly through her mind as if from many mouths as once. “Welcome, child. Collect what you came for and leave quickly. This is not for you yet. Your thread has much weaving left to do. The connection is strong, but the blood shield can only protect you for so long.”

The barrier keeping her from Sehlas disappeared. She moved forward, surrounded him, and pushed him back along his thread. The closer she got to the break, the harder it became to move. The break was only supposed to go one way. Time stretched as she fought to bring Sehlas back. It was like trying to drag a water-soaked log up a quick moving stream.

Maleena poured her strength into it, refusing to give up, refusing to leave him. She could see the break now. Like a river being pushed through a narrow gorge, the outflowing energy rushed at her, threatening to pull her under its current. Maleena pushed back, everything in her focused on moving forward.

Then they were through and back inside Sehlas’ mind. Somewhere, in another place, she sensed her body wave its hand. More voices flowed around her. These weren’t spirit voices though. Taela was telling Serena to close the break. Maleena didn’t have time to worry or think about it. The break fought her. It wanted to send the spirit on. She placed herself between Sehlas’ soul and the gap, and held there with every ounce of strength she had.

Bit by bit, the pressure from the break lessened until finally it was gone. Someone shook Maleena’s shoulders. “The break is healed. Maleena, you can come back.”

As Maleena flowed back from Sehlas, she paused. Her soul was mostly out of her body that lay on its back upon the bed, only a fraction left to run basic functions and very basic movements. So why did she still see a whole and complete soul in her body? She moved back slowly, examining the strangeness. It seemed very familiar, but it wasn’t exactly hers. Suddenly, she understood.

Maleena jumped back into her body and opened her eyes. She looked up at the ceiling in wonder as tears welled in her eyes and laughter bubbled up. How in the name of the Fates had she missed that?

Nydara’s surprised sending rushed into her mind. “Oh, Maleena! I should have guessed, but it’s so different from what I experienced.”

“Please, keep this between us for now. I want to be able to tell Mckale myself,” she sent back.

“Of course.” Happiness and warmth flowed from her dragon.

“Maleena? You’re crying. What’s wrong? Are you alright?”

Maleena turned her head to see saw Serena’s concerned face. Exhaustion from the task of bringing Sehlas back made her body feel like lead. With some effort, she pushed herself up and tucked her feet under her. It was amazing how heavy her body felt after the weightlessness of her spirit form.

She opened her mouth to say something, but the joy was so overwhelming all she could do was laugh and cry at the same time. Finally, she gained control of her emotions and looked at her friends, glancing once at Sehlas. He looked completely confused.

“Paki says Nydara claims Maleena is perfectly fine.” Taela stood twisting her hands, the look on her face saying she didn’t believe it.

Serena leaned down to look her in the eye. “Talk to me right now. What is wrong?”

Maleena took a deep shuddering breath and smiled at them. “Nothing is wrong. In fact, it’s great. I’m pregnant, Serena.”

Taela’s hands flew to her mouth. “Oh Fates, that is wonderful!”

Serena’s face grew serious. “How do you know for sure?”

“On my way back to my body I saw the baby’s soul inside it. It was…so beautiful, so sweet and pure.”

Serena laid a hand on her arm and Maleena felt the warmth of a weave spread through her body. “There is nothing to heal, Serena. I know what I saw.”

“Hush a moment,” her friend said quietly, concentration on her face.

After a moment the warmth faded and Serena stood up. “You are almost four months along. How did you miss it for so long? Maleena, you’re going to have a baby!”

“Four months?” She looked down at her perfectly flat stomach. “But there isn’t anything showing.”

Serena smiled. “It’s your first baby, honey. As tiny as you are, it will likely be another month or so before the pregnancy starts to show itself.”

Sehlas cleared his throat. “I am truly happy for whoever you are, but can someone please explain to me what is going on?”

They turned to him. His eyes roamed around the room and Maleena sensed him trying to understand where he was. He looked at Taela for a long moment before rubbing his forehead with the fingertips of one hand. “Something happened in the garden of your father’s palace. I was supposed to marry you and then my head hurt.”

Serena sat on the edge of the bed, her hands folded in her lap. “Do you remember anything else?”

Sehlas’ eyes searched the room again as if the answers lay somewhere on the walls. “I remember my brother came to see me but I could not really get any words out. And Bahar said Taela had disappeared into thin air after he heard her scream in her room. It is all very fuzzy. And then nothing. Just darkness. What happened? Was I injured in some way?” He glanced at Taela again. “Is the wedding still on? How long has it been?”

Taela shook her head. “I’m sorry, but no, the wedding isn’t still on.”

Serena leaned forward and placed a hand on his knee. “You were in a coma. It’s been a year and a half since your head hurt in the garden. A lot has happened since then.”

“A year and a half?” A bewildered expression filled his face. Maleena’s heart went out to him. He seemed so lost. “Where am I? What happened? Please tell me.” He picked aimlessly at the robe he wore is if trying to figure out where it came from.

Taela sat on the stool next to him and bowed her head. “I’m so sorry. I did this to you.” Maleena felt the deep sorrow and guilt in her friend.

Sehlas’ eyes widened. “You? I don’t remember you in the garden. Why would you do something like that?”

“I didn’t mean to,” she whispered.

“Sehlas,” Serena interrupted. “You are still in Bahar’s palace. There is a lot of information you need to know. Bahar has been anxious for your recovery and wants to speak with you as soon as possible.” She stood and smoothed her skirt. “Why don’t I have the servants bring some soap and water so you can clean up? I will also have them find some of your clothes.”

He nodded, his eyes still on Taela. Serena plucked Taela’s dress to get her attention and beckoned to Maleena. “We will give you some privacy.”

Maleena stood, although a nap in the bed sounded better, and looked at Sehlas. “I know you are confused, but it will be alright.”

He gazed at her a furrow appearing between his brows. “Do I know you? Your eyes, your face, they seem so familiar. Almost like I dreamed of them. They were a shining, silver light in a dark place.”

She smiled. “No, you don’t know me. But I’m glad I managed to bring light to the dark place of your dreams.” She walked passed him and followed Taela into the hall where Serena spoke briskly with a servant.

Maleena walked over to Nydara who examined the sculpted trees and bushes in curiosity. “I need to get back to Calladar. If the Council of Nine is still meeting, I should be there.”

Taela nodded. “Father will be happy. Though I’m not looking forward to explaining it all to Sehlas. The poor man lost everything.”

Serena sighed. “He’ll just have to deal with it and move on. She looked at the dragons. “Any more news on Loki yet?”

Taela shook her head and frowned. “Paki say not yet I’m afraid.”

“You should get back. I’m happy for you, my friend,” Serena said.

Taela wrapped Maleena in a tight hug. “ I’m so happy for you and Mckale. Kellinar and Anevay will be too.”

Maleena hugged her back, thankful that sharing thoughts with and hugging her fellow Spirit sister brought no discomfort. “Just wait to spread the news. I don’t want any of the dragons to leak it to Tellnox and have him tell Mckale. I want to tell him myself.” She glanced at Miya and Paki. “I know you two won’t. Females know when to keep quiet. But if Shryden, Mernoth, or Namir hear about it they won’t be able to help themselves.”

Serena laughed. “We will keep it under wraps as long as we can.”

Taela stepped back and gave her a wry smile. “Don’t take too long. You know how hard it is to keep things from a bondmate.”

Maleena nodded as she walked to Nydara. “That I do.”

In a few short moments she was in the saddle with the safety straps secure. “Take care, my friends. I look forward to the day we are all together again in Galdrilene. I miss everyone.”

“We miss you too,” Taela said as she and Serena backed away to allow Nydara room to maneuver her wings.

With a tremendous jump, the silver launched into the air, climbing higher with powerful strokes of her wings. The light of the setting sun rippled along the silver’s scales as the Slide spun open. The tug pulled them in and in seconds they were over the darkened landscape of Calladar, where the sun had already set.

Nydara reached for her, “Tellnox says the meeting with the Council just ended and went better than we had hoped. There was some opposition from a couple of members that insisted no Dragon Riders could be trusted; however, in the end the Council voted six to two to stand with Galdrilene and the Guardians. It was up to Arandrall as the Head of the Nine to uphold the vote, which he did of course. The Council has met Tellnox already and they have planned a…” Nydara hesitated and Maleena felt her trying to understand the word. “They have planned a ‘ball’ to introduce you to the rest of the hierarchy in Calladar. What planning goes into a ball? Isn’t it just a round thing that humans like to kick and throw around? How will a ball help introduce you? Will you throw it to people?”

Maleena laughed softly, amused at the things not included in the dragons ancestral memories. “There is more than one type of ball, my love.” She had to admit the image of a bunch of people in fancy dress standing in a field and throwing balls at each other was rather amusing. “This type of ball is a formal dance. Mckale taught me the steps to these dances in the past. Do you remember?” She sensed the dragon’s confirmation. “People gather together in a great room. They dance, drink, eat a certain amount of food, and gossip. I have never been to one myself, but I have been told of them. Galdrilene has celebrations and dancing, but it isn’t really formal like this will be. In Galdrilene, everyone can dance with everyone. From what I understand of formal balls, only those invited are allowed to participate and servants remain servants, which is silly if you ask me. So in essence it’s the same thing.”

“So this ball is a good thing?”

Maleena imagined a crowd of people all in one room. “I guess it depends on your perspective.”

Nydara changed the subject. “Tellnox says Mckale can sense how tired you are. They suggest I take you back to the lair of Mckale’s family. He will be there after a while.”

“That is fine. It’s dark so not many will see you.”

Nydara snorted a thick curl of smoke that the wind whipped away. “Enough will. Mckale’s family is either going to be very popular or very hated with the neighboring families come the morning.”

“They will be whether you land there or not. After your dramatic landing atop Arandrall’s fortress and the Council meeting, everyone will know of you and where Mckale and I are staying by mid-morning.”

“Should Tellnox and I stay closer to you tonight?”

Maleena’s hand trailed protectively over her still flat stomach, a twinge of anxiety in her gut. “No, I want you to sleep safe. Mckale and I can defend ourselves from anything long enough for you and Tellnox to Slide to us if we have need.”

Nydara landed behind the barn. Mola’s piercing barks filled the night as the dog rushed toward them. As Maleena got down from the saddle, Nydara lowered her head and eyed the canine.

Mola stopped a few yards from the dragon, a low whine in her throat. Maleena sensed the dog’s desire to protect warring with self-preservation in the face of such a large and dangerous adversary.

Maleena sent the dog soothing emotions as she unbuckled the catcher strap and looped it up on the saddle. “It’s okay, Mola, Nydara is no threat to you or your family.” The dog wagged her tail slowly, her eyes still locked on the dragon.

“I will leave now. The dog is still upset by my presence,” Nydara sent.

Maleena backed away to give the dragon room. “Sleep well, love.”

As the dragon lifted off Barden came around the side of the barn with a lantern. “Mola, what are you—” He stopped, his mouth agape as the massive silver rose into the sky, the wind from her wings whipping around.

Maleena patted Mola on the head and walked over to Barden. “She’s beautiful isn’t she?”

He nodded. “That she is.” Barden’s eyes flashed to hers, sudden worry rolling off him. “Where is Mckale?”

“He is leaving the meeting now. It went well although we should wait for him to explain the details. I had to leave before the meeting began, so I missed it.”

“Why did you have to leave?” He immediately waved his hand. “Never mind. It’s none of my business. Have you eaten this evening?”

She didn’t realize how hungry she was until he mentioned it. Her stomach clenched and her mouth watered at the thought of the ham they had eaten that morning. “I would love something to eat. Do you have any more of that ham?”

He laughed. “I’m afraid we won’t have any more until morning. We do however have roasted chicken and potatoes with early spinach if you like.”

It sounded wonderful. “Yes, I would like that. Just as long as it isn’t eggs.”

Mckale rode slowly around the house to the barn. After untying Arella’s reins from the ring on his saddle, he lowered himself to the ground. He removed the tack from the horses and placed it inside the barn before brushing them both down and turning them out into the pasture. He did it all without thinking much about it, his mind preoccupied by Maleena and the conversation he’d had with Tellnox.

The green had informed him that something had happened while she was in Haraban but Tellnox didn’t know what. He had felt a flash of surprise from Nydara and then the silver had walled him off. Nydara cryptically refused to say another word and said when it was the green’s business he would know.

Mckale turned and walked across the grass to the house. Hopefully Maleena would tell him what was going on. He sensed the wall in the bond between them. She’d walled him off too. What were she and Nydara up to?

Barden and Kaden sat in the front room. Both looked up as he came through the kitchen. “You’re back finally,” his father said. “I thought you would return hours ago.”

Mckale rubbed his neck. “Arandrall wanted to speak further with me.”

Kaden scooted over on the cushioned, high-backed bench. “Sit and tell the details of how it went. Maleena said she had to leave and missed it. The guard yard was chaos today after word spread of a dragon landing on Lord Arandrall’s fortress.”

Mckale glanced at the stairs then looked back at his father and brother. They would have to wait for a little bit. “I will tell you about it shortly. If you’ll excuse me, I need to speak with Maleena for a moment.”

Without waiting for them to answer he crossed the room and started up the stairs. He sensed that she was still awake although little else. Damn the Fates for making it so she could wall him off. He pushed open the door to their room. She was sitting on the bed wearing a shift with her long, thick chestnut hair falling over her shoulders. She looked up from some papers on the bed and smiled at him, her face radiant.

Mckale’s chest loosened. Obviously whatever happened wasn’t too bad. Why wall it away then? He closed the door and leaned against it, his arms crossed. What was she hiding? “Care to explain why you have me walled away and why Nydara has done the same to Tellnox?” Her violet eyes only sparkled in the lantern light. He glanced away before she made him forget what he wanted to say. “What happened in Haraban today?”

“I was able to retrieve Sehlas. Tellnox filled you in on that didn’t he?” She paused and looked at him with an innocent look in her eyes that could only mean trouble.

Mckale nodded. “Yes, he filled me in. What else did you do?”

“I discovered why I have been so tired lately. Why the eggs this morning made me sick to my stomach.”

He didn’t know what he expected, but it wasn’t that. His chest constricted again. Had Serena healed it? “What was it?”

She smiled. “You mean, what is it...”

It still affected her then. Was it something Serena couldn’t heal? “What is it then?”

“A baby.”

He stared at her. “Who had a baby?”

“We’re going to. I’m pregnant, Mckale.”

Mckale’s heart stopped and his breath froze in his lungs. Maleena was pregnant! The thought thawed him and he could breathe again. His eyes flew to her perfectly flat stomach and then back up to her glowing face. “How—” he cleared his throat. “How do you know for sure?”

“I saw the baby’s soul during Sehlas’ healing. Serena confirmed it. I’m almost four months along.” She looked uncertainly at him. “Are you happy?”

Was he happy? The last time he’d been filled with this kind of emotion was at Tellnox’s Hatching. Mckale crossed the room in long strides and dropped to his knees next to the bed. He took her hand in one of his and slid the other around the back of her neck, drawing her face to his. “Am I happy?” he whispered against her lips. “So much I can’t even describe it.” Then he pressed his lips to hers and kissed her thoroughly.

The next morning Maleena and Mckale came down to breakfast together. Barden looked up at them as they sat down and Mckale began to place food on her plate. Barden’s eyes drifted between the two of them. “Kaden and I finally gave up waiting for you, Mckale. I guess you got sidetracked.”

Blood rose in Maleena’s cheeks and she stared at her plate. Mckale chuckled. “I guess I did. A few hours of time makes no difference.”

Kaden smiled and shook his head. “At least this is an off day for me. Maybe if I have a full day, I can hear what happened at the meeting yesterday. Unless you two are headed back upstairs this morning.”

Mckale smiled back but there was light of warning in his eyes and Maleena sensed some irritation in him. “Actually, Maleena came back from Haraban with a little news of her own. So yes, I was distracted from thoughts of the meeting last night.”

All eyes turned to Maleena. She concentrated on cutting a bite of ham, her face feeling redder. She hated being the center of attention.

“Well?” Grandme said. “It must be fairly big news if it trumps the meeting with the Council. Has something happened in the west that we should be aware of?”

Mckale shook his head. “No, all is as well as can be expected in the west. The news affects Maleena, myself, and this family.”

Maleena glanced around the table. Would they be upset since she and Mckale hadn’t participated in the Spring Dance yet? Not that it really mattered one way or another, but she really didn’t want any bad feelings between Mckale and his family. Sonja looked at her with worry in her eyes.

Barden leaned back in his chair. “What will affect this family?”

Mckale looked at his father and Maleena felt nothing but happiness rolling off her bondmate. “It’s going to get bigger.”

Grandme let out a whoop that made everyone at the table jump. “I knew it.” She smacked a wrinkled palm against the table. “I’ve had my suspicions since the morning after you arrived.”

Kaden frown at her. “What are you talking about?”

Sonja’s smile spread across her face. “Don’t you see, Kaden? We are going to be an aunt and an uncle.”

Kaden stared first at Mckale then Maleena. “Fates be damned! Congratulations.” He clapped Mckale firmly on the shoulder.

Barden rubbed his hands over his face and smiled across the table at Mckale. “I feel old.” There was moisture in the older man’s eyes and Maleena sensed his pleasure.

Grandme slapped his arm. “Now you know how I felt when you and Nia started producing these three.”

“As you can guess,” Mckale said. “That news blew the Council right out of my mind. However, we can discuss it after we’ve eaten.”

Kellinar paced the room waiting for Anevay, Bardeck, and Gideon to finish testing Loki for any permanent brain damage. Loki needed to be well and whole so Kellinar could strangle him. The past couple of days had done nothing to dampen his anger.

Anevay glanced at him, worry in her eyes. He knew she felt his anger through the bond but there wasn’t anything he could do about it. He wasn’t a Silver, he couldn’t wall the others in the bond away from his thoughts and feelings. Kellinar tried to rein in his emotions. The only good thing in this whole mess was the time spent with Anevay. He had missed her and knew that Taela did too. It surprised him how much he’d missed Galdrilene as well.

Gideon and Bardeck stood and pushed the wooden chairs they’d sat in against the wall. Gideon looked down at the boy. “You are incredibly fortunate that you not only had a skilled healer to work on you but one with the amplified powers of a dragon bond. I would never have been able to heal that.”

Kellinar stopped and looked at the three of them. “So is he going to be alright?”

Bardeck nodded. “There is no sign of any lasting damage. Anevay did a good job.” He looked back at the boy. “You could have died or ended up severely impaired.”

Anevay smoothed the blankets across Loki’s lap. “I know you wish to speak with him, Kellinar. We will leave you two alone.”

Kellinar waited until they left and closed the door behind them before resuming his pacing. He glanced at Loki and saw the boy’s eyes tracking him from where he lay propped up against the pillows. Kellinar waited as he tried to gain better control of his anger. After several minutes, he decided partial control was the best he could achieve.

He looked at Loki again though he didn’t stop pacing. “What were you thinking?” he managed. It sounded reasonable. Nothing like the threat to throttle him that he’d thought was going to come out.

Loki looked down. “I don’t know. I remember leaving Galdrilene. Merru and I just wanted to do something different.”

“No, you mean you wanted to do something different and you somehow talked Merru into it,” Kellinar said, glaring.

“I guess it was something like that.” Loki fidgeted with the covers. “I just thought it would be fun to fly over Ardien and then be back home by the next morning. I don’t know what happened though. All I remember is flying down the valley holding a light-bending weave and then waking up here.”

“You flew into one of the worst storms I’ve ever seen is what happened. You crashed into the middle of Ardien. Emallya has spent the last two days doing damage control there. Only the king and the heads of the leading houses knew about Galdrilene. They had the same weave laid on them as anyone else that knew about Galdrilene.” He stopped and crossed his arms. “It was done for the protection of Galdrilene and the protection of budding mages in the Boromar. Now everyone there has seen not only you and your dragon but Anevay, Bardeck and Latia as well.”

Loki twisted the edge of the blanket around. “I’m sorry.”

“You’re sorry?” Kellinar scowled as his voice rose to a shout. “Loki, you endangered yourself, you nearly killed Merru, you endangered Bardeck and Latia, and put my bondmate in danger trying to save you. And all you can say is you are sorry? Fates be damned, this goes way beyond flaming sorry!”

“What do you want me to say?”

Kellinar shook his head and started pacing again. “Honestly, I don’t know. I don’t know that you can say anything. I know you are young to be a Dragon Rider, Loki. I know you have struggled with the requirements of Galdrilene, but burn it all, it is time to grow up! Fates, Loki,” he was shouting again but couldn’t help it. “You nearly died! You scared the flaming life out of me.”

He stopped and sank into one of the chairs. Propping his elbows on his knees he buried his face in his hands and let out a deep sigh. The silence stretched out. Finally, Kellinar dropped his hands and sat up, leaning his head against the wall behind the chair. He stared at the smooth rock ceiling of the sleeping chamber. “When Shryden and I arrived,” he said quietly, “Latia was barely holding against the wind and Anevay was injured from a huge branch flung through the air. I saw you and Merru after I had control of the storm.”

Kellinar closed his eyes, trying to shut out the memory of their broken bodies against the wet paving stones. The awkward way Loki had hung from the saddle. Merru’s wings wrenched to an odd angle. “I thought you were both dead,” he whispered. He looked over at the half-grown boy. “Don’t ever do that to me again. I may have a dragon and bondmates now, but that doesn’t mean I have ceased to love you like a little brother.”

Loki stared at him, his blue eyes serious. “I promise, Kellinar.”

Kellinar nodded and felt the tension in his shoulders relax. Like himself, Loki always kept his word.

Loki glanced around the room. “Where are Taela and Serena?”

“Still in Haraban.”

“Oh.” Loki’s face fell. “I guess that means you won’t be staying.”

Kellinar shook his head. “I wish I could. I never imagined I would miss Galdrilene like I do. But I can’t stay. We have to leave Haraban and go to Trilene.”

“How do you think it will go in Trilene?”

Kellinar rubbed his hands over his face. “I don’t know.”

Loki was silent for a long moment before he spoke again. “Will Anevay go with you when you leave this time?”

“I want her to and I don’t want her to.” Kellinar laughed. “It isn’t like I have a choice now that Latia can Slide reliably. Anevay will go where she chooses though I know she is trying to work on that weave of hers. So in my long, rambling, round-about way, I’m saying I have no idea.”

Kalila held the weave of air, funneling the smoke from the fire through a series of twists and turns while holding a small ball up with another weave. Sweat beaded on her brow from the effort but she was proud of the ability to hold two weaves, simple though they were.

“Good,” said Katian, the senior mage overseeing her training that day. “You are doing very well and progressing nicely.”

Kalila smiled but kept her concentration on the weaves. This was her life now and she was determined to give it her all. Another hour of training left and then it would be time to help with tower chores.

Dhovara came sweeping into the room. “Drop the weaves. I need to speak with you.”

Kalila glanced at Katian. Had she done something wrong? She let the weaves unravel as Katian grabbed the ball and put out the fire. Kalila took a deep breath, wiping the sweat from her brow. “What is it, Mage Councilor?”

Dhovara glanced at Katian. “I will speak with her alone, if you will excuse us please.”

A nervous knot started in Kalila’s gut as she searched Dhovara’s dark face for some sign of what was wrong. When the door clicked shut, Dhovara motioned her to the chairs at the side of the room. “Sit, we have a matter of importance to discuss.”

Kalila moved to a chair and sat as the Mage Councilor took the one across from her. “What is this about? Have I done something wrong?”

“What?” Dhovara looked startled. “No, child, you have done nothing wrong. In fact, you are a model junior mage and your training is coming along nicely.”

Confused, Kalila’s brow furrowed. “Then, what?”

Dhovara frowned though there was compassion in her eyes. “We just received word that your father has died.”

Kalila’s breath left her in a rush as a fist tightened around her heart. Her father was dead. He hadn’t been the father he should have been to Sadira, but Kalila’s childhood was filled with happy memories of him. Now she would never to see him again. He would never know that she was alive and safe and happy.

Dhovara leaned forward and placed a hand on hers. “I would give you more time to absorb this and grieve, but there is more.”

A tear trailed down Kalila’s cheek as she focused on the older woman. “What else?”

“Apparently he died a month ago but we just now received word. Your brother assumed the throne as was intended; however, he doesn’t seem to be doing very well in his new position. The high-ranking nobles are pushing him around and Markene has become quite a mess.” Dhovara folded her hands in her lap. “Normally this would be none of our concern except another egg has begun to sing and Emallya has tracked it to your brother.”

Kalila stared at her dumbfounded. “You mean…Toren is going to be a Dragon Rider? That’s wonderful, isn’t it?”

“It would be if there was someone to take his place in Markene. The man your older sister Larna was supposed to marry is trying to take things over. Your mother is useless; she has barely made a sound since your father passed. Drisa is also gone. Your other sisters are too young.”

Kalila frowned. “They can’t take the throne anyway. Only the male heir can and now Toren has to come here.” She shook her head. “Haden will make a real mess of things. He can barely run his household.”

Dhovara nodded. “This is why the state of Markene has become our concern. With a few years under his belt, even months, Toren would likely do fine. However he can’t do that if he comes here. A woman could assume the throne in Markene, but she would have to be a strong woman. One who knew herself and was determined not to get walked on. And she would have to carry the blood of the king in her veins in order to make her claim valid.”

Kalila stared at her as Dhovara’s words sank in. “You want me to take the throne?”

The Mage Councilor nodded. “You are the best candidate. If Toren decides to answer the call, Galdrilene will be removing a sitting ruler from a nation. It is our duty to offer the next best candidate. This would have to have your brother’s approval. As the current king, only he can choose his successor. Things will be different once Dragon Law is everywhere again. For now though, we have to tread carefully.”

“A woman has never ruled Markene, not in the five hundred years since it rose from the ashes of the War of Fire.” Kalila shook her head slowly. “No, I think my place is here now. A woman trying to take the reins of power might cause more of a mess and more hardship for the people than Haden could ever think of doing.”

Dhovara shrugged slightly. “It is of course your choice. No one can force you to walk a path you are not destined to. Take a couple of days to think about it. We will honor whatever decision you make.” She stood and walked to the door, pausing with her hand on the latch, Dhovara looked back. “If you should decide to try and carry this mantle, you will have the support and backing of Galdrilene. You will also still be able to continue your training. One of the senior Weather mages would travel with you to Markene. Kellinar leaves in two days. He can take you if that is your decision.”

She left and closed the door behind her. Kalila stared at the door. A woman couldn’t rule Markene, it was preposterous. Wasn’t it? She curled her legs up into the chair, her mind in turmoil. Her short time in Galdrilene had already taught her there was no reason that a man or a woman couldn’t do anything.The people in Galdrilene seemed to fall into whatever suited them best. Three of the towers had female leaders.

Why couldn’t she take her brother’s place? Because she was a woman and therefore automatically incapable? She shook her head; some may think that in Markene, but when it came to this, she knew she would do as well if not better than her brother.

Why was she having a hard time with her decision? Was it because it had never been done before? That was a silly reason. If people stuck with that way of thinking nothing would ever move forward. As she thought about it, she realized that was exactly what happened in a lot of the downlands. So many were stuck in a rut and unable to find the ladder out.

Could she leave Markene in the inept hands of Haden? She really didn’t know a lot about running a nation. She’d sat in on a few things and her father had discussed things with her and her siblings on occasion, but he reserved most of that for Toren. Daughters were for marrying off and solidifying relations with higher nobles and other nations.

She scowled. Maybe she would take up the mantel. Between escaping Sadira and her time in Galdrilene, Kalila had found her own worth. She wasn’t a horse to be sold off to the highest bidder or to the man with the best pedigree. If she allowed the status quo to stand, allowed Haden to take the throne, her younger sisters would end up being married off just that way.

And one day Sadira would visit Markene. Haden would be extremely disadvantaged. In fact, Markene would likely fall to Sadira and the Shadow Riders. Her younger sisters would either become Sadira’s pets or killed outright.

It was that last thought more than anything else that made Kalila’s decision. She would do it. She would step up and take her brother’s place. She wouldn’t leave Markene unprotected. Even Toren didn’t know what he was up against if he thought Haden and a few nobles were the worst of his problems.

Kalila stood up and left the room. She buried her grief deep within; to be dealt with later when there was time. She climbed the circling stairs to Dhovara’s study and knocked on the door.

“Come in.” Dhovara’s answer came from the other side.

Kalila opened the door and stepped into the spacious room. “I will do it. I don’t have much choice. Markene will need protection in the coming years and not even Toren understands the true danger that lies beyond the borders.” She lifted her chin slightly. “I know magically I am nowhere near, nor ever will be, the strength of Sadira, so I ask for a few things.”

Dhovara nodded. “I’m glad you have made this decision. You will be provided with whatever you need as long as it is sensible.”

“I would like to take at least three mages with me. One senior mage for teaching, which you have already offered. The other two can be whatever level of mage you feel comfortable sending. When Sadira comes to Markene, and she will, I want both the senior mage and myself to be able to defend against her.” She took a deep breath and looked Dhovara in the eye. “I will never allow myself to be tortured by Sadira again. I will choose death first.”

The darker woman nodded. “Your determination is good to see. You will do well in your place in life. I will grant you a senior mage and four other mages for a total of five. My understanding is that Sadira is quite strong and I will not have her hurting any of my mages.” She smiled, her white teeth brilliant in her dark face. “I get the feeling this is not the only thing you are requesting.”

Kalila shook her head. “No, it isn’t. I want to take some Defenders with me. I will be facing a lot of resistance from higher nobles in Markene, maybe even from some of the people. Sadly, I won’t be able to fully trust the soldiers in Markene.”

Dhovara shook her head. “That may not be possible. Bringing foreign soldiers into the nation you plan to rule may cause more problems. It will certainly upset the nobles.”

“Putting me on the throne will do no good if someone slits my throat in my sleep.”

The Mage Councilor frowned. “You may have a point. I will speak with Hemmen Warrick about it. As the leader of the Defenders, it will be his decision whether or not to send his soldiers there. I am sure he will consult with Bardeck and Emallya on the matter. Is there anything else?”

Kalila nodded. “I know very little of running a nation. That training was reserved for my brother. I ask for an advisor that is well-versed in such things. I don’t intend to run Markene into the ground while I muddle through a bunch of mistakes.”

A smile spread across Dhovara’s face. “You were indeed a good choice. Already you recognize your weaknesses and reach out for help. You will have your advisor. Perhaps Tarik will be able to suggest a good person for such a task. Who better to ask than the governor of Galdrilene?” She pulled a few sheets of paper over in front of her. “I will pen the messages to Hemmen and Tarik and send them immediately.”

Kalila concealed her relief. She wouldn’t be headed into this alone and she wouldn’t make some grave mistake and ruin Markene. “Thank you, Mage Councilor.”

Dhovara glanced up from writing. “You are most welcome. Kellinar leaves in two days. I suggest you take that time to gather anything else you need and prepare yourself. As you said, you will be the first woman to take the throne of Markene in the history of the nation. You will be walking into a lion’s den. Make sure you are ready.”

Kellinar buckled the safety straps across his thighs and glanced over his shoulder at Kalila. “Are you set? Make sure you have the straps tight.”

“Trust me, they are as tight as I can make them. I may have cut off the blood flow to my legs.”

He heard the nervous tremor in her voice. “I promise Shryden will fly nice and easy. There is nothing to be afraid of.”

A shaky laugh floated over his shoulder. “That’s easy for you to say.”

Kellinar smiled and looked at Anevay. She stood on the inner terrace. He couldn’t help feeling relief that she was staying here for now. He waved at her as Shryden gathered himself to take off.

The dragon took off as slowly and smoothly as possible. Even so, Kalila grabbed him around the waist and clung so tight he almost had trouble breathing. Her face was buried against his back, and he had a feeling she was determined not to look until they were on the ground again.

The blue climbed to a high altitude before the picture of Markene formed in the dragon’s mind. Thankfully, Emallya had returned from Boromar in time to provide it. Others had seen the city, including Kalila, but getting a clear picture from them was nearly impossible for the dragon. Dragons easily passed images between each other and got images from their riders. But when it involved non-riders, they needed someone with Spirit magic to handle that kind of thing.

The Mage Councilor of the Tower of Spirit could have tried to transfer an image from Kalila to Shryden, but the process was uncertain. Emallya’s powers were so much stronger that it made things more exact. Kellinar wasn’t sure he would have trusted anything less when it came to Sliding. He didn’t want Shryden to get lost in a fold.

The Slide opened and pulled them in. Behind him Kalila groaned and tightened her grip. The swirl of colors lasted only a moment and then they were over Markene. The castle, built on a natural rise, stood in the center of the fortified city on the banks of the massive Galdar River.

He turned his head and shouted over the wind, “Where do you want Shryden to land?”

She yelled something he didn’t hear.

“What?”

The wind whipped her answer away again but he caught some words, “…don’t want…inner courtyard…best…”

“I think she said I should land in the inner courtyard,” came Shryden’s sending.

“I think you are right. If this Toren decides to answer the call we will fly him to Galdrilene and then bring the advisor and the others.” Kellinar paused before voicing his next thought. “What happens if he refuses the call?”

He felt Shryden’s mental shrug. “Acceptance can’t be forced. If he truly wishes to be left alone, the egg will grow quiet and when Toren dies either of sickness a year from now or old age fifty years from now, the egg will die with him.”

Kellinar turned that over. The idea of an egg just sitting there quietly waiting to die rankled him. Hopefully it wouldn’t be an issue.

As Shryden settled down to the inner courtyard, people ran screaming. Kellinar rolled his eyes. It would be nice once people were used to dragons again. The whole running and screaming thing was wearing thin. Didn’t they realize that if Shryden wanted them dead they would probably already be so?

Armored guards flooded the inner courtyard, at first looking determined to stand their ground, but as the massive blue continued to descend they seemed to get it through their heads that the dragon was landing here and scrambled out of his way.

Shryden’s feet touched down and he swung his head around to take in the guards and their positions. An arrow zinged passed, ripping a hole in Kellinar’s sleeve and slicing his shoulder. It wasn’t deep though blood flowed down his arm, soaking his sleeve.

Shryden lifted his wings and his thunderous roar filled the courtyard. Guards cowered and covered their ears. He turned to find the archer who shot the arrow.

With a curse, Kellinar grabbed his shoulder. Flaming dragon-blasted idiots. In his mind he reached for Shryden. “Stop. Whoever it is, you can’t kill them. We are trying to help Kalila not make an enemy of Markene.”

“I’m not going to kill him,” came the return sending. “I’m going to rip his arms off.”

“Not right now you’re not. You can rip them off later.”

He twisted in the saddle, looking over his shoulder at Kalila. “Are you alright?”

“Less than a hand widths difference and that would have been my temple.” Her voice sounded shaky.

“Undo the safety straps.”

She didn’t argue with the tone of his voice and he felt her scrambling to get the straps unbuckled. As soon as she was loose, Kellinar twisted around as far as he could and yanked her in front of him, using his body to shield her from any more arrows.

Through the bond he sensed Taela’s anger flare and he hoped she wouldn’t suddenly show up. An angry bondmate wouldn’t help the situation. He felt a thud against the saddle and looked back. The shaft of an arrow stuck up from the seat behind him. Another pinged harmlessly off Shryden’s scales.

Kellinar made a quick weave of air to carry his voice. “Enough!” His voice echoed across the courtyard, bouncing off the stone of the tall inner curtain wall. “My patience is wearing thin. I have restrained my dragon but I swear by the Fates if one more arrow flies I will give him permission to eat the lot of you.”

A heavy silence fell over the castle. Leaving the weave in place so all would hear, he said, “I have urgent business with Toren, King of Markene. My passenger is Princess Kalila, I believe her brother would appreciate it if you didn’t fill her full of arrows.”

Kellinar’s eyes swept the courtyard until they settled on the man nearest the keep doors. “You.” He pointed at the man. “You will go find your king, now.”

A tingle ran through him and the hair stood up on the back of his neck. Acting on instinct, he wrapped his arms around the woman in front of him, leaned forward, and flattened them both against the front of the saddle. Sharp pain tore across his back as another arrow flew past and pinged off Shryden’s neck.

Burn it all! He sat up, reached out for the air currents and asked them to find the fire-brained fool who kept shooting arrows. In seconds he had the information and lashed out with his power. Using weaves of air, Kellinar yanked the screaming man from the window of the guard tower behind them. He separated the weave again and wrenched the bow from the man’s hands and tossed it over the wall. After wrapping the man securely in another weave of air so he couldn’t move, Kellinar hurled him down on the stones. The guard hit with a grunt, his head knocked against the ground and he passed out.

“Anyone else need a trip through the air?” he asked, glaring back at the towers. Several men threw their weapons down and backed away.

“That won’t be necessary.”

Kellinar turned around to face the man with sandy hair down to his collar standing in the doorway to the keep. He dropped the weave for his voice and asked Kalila, “Who is that?”

She pushed herself up and peered around Shryden’s neck with. “My brother ,Toren.”

Toren walked a short way into the courtyard, his hazel eyes wary. “I was told you have my sister?”

Kalila slid down from the saddle. Kellinar made short work of his safety straps, praying to the Fates no one decided to stick an arrow in her. He leaped from the saddle and stood behind her, keeping an eye on the guards around the walls. Shryden lifted and stretched his wings out, creating a shield between them and the guard towers.

Toren took a couple of steps forward. “Kalila?”

With a small sob she ran forward and threw herself in her brother’s arms. Toren stroked her hair. “It’s alright, you’re home now.” He glared over her shoulder at Kellinar. “What did you do to her?”

“I did nothing. You can thank your twisted, older half-sister for what Kalila has been through,” Kellinar said with disgust.

Toren’s brow wrinkled. “Sadira? She disappeared months before Kalila, Larna, and Drisa. What does she have to do with it?” He pulled Kalila away and looked into her face, his eyes traveling over her scars. “Where are Larna and Drisa?”

“Gone. Sadira has them, but their minds have fled her torment and they are empty shells.” Kalila’s voice broke. “I tried to get them to come with me when I escaped, but they wouldn’t move. They wouldn’t even look at me.”

Toren put his arm around her and turned toward the keep. He glanced back over his shoulder at Kellinar. “I would like to speak with you, if you don’t mind.” He paused and looked around the courtyard before raising his voice, “I swear as the King of Markene, this…dragon…will be safe within these walls. At this point, an attack on the dragon or its rider is an attack against me.” His green eyes came back to Kellinar. “Will you step inside with me?”

Kellinar shrugged, ignoring the pain in his arm and back. Sure why not, who cared if he bled all over their castle. “Works for me. I need to speak with you anyway about a matter of great importance.”

Toren paused. “What is of greater importance than the return of my sister?”

Kellinar offered a half smile. “I think you can probably guess, but I also think it’s a conversation you are going to want to have in private.” Just what he wanted, a bloody shirt, an angry bondmate in his head, and an afternoon spent talking to a fire-brained noble.

He followed them through the halls until they reached a large study. Toren led his sister to a chair and then sat in the one next to her. With a sigh Kellinar settled in a chair across from them. Kalila seemed to have regained her composure. He leaned back and propped his ankle on his knee. Maybe it would be better if Taela showed up; she had more finesse with these types of things. Or even Serena, his back burned like fire and a healer would be nice right about now. The man used Fire magic, Kirynn should be here.

No, scratch that. She would probably have killed every guard in the courtyard and considered the problem solved. With another sigh, he realized this was on his shoulders, Fates be damned.

Toren looked as if he was uncertain how to address him. Kellinar cleared his throat. “I’m Di’shan Kellinar, rider of the Blue dragon Shryden, a senior member of the Tower of Wind and Water, and a Guardian of Galdrilene.”

Toren shook his head. “I have no idea what most of that means. Where is this tower you speak of?”

Kellinar smiled. “Galdrilene.”

Toren’s eyes widened. “Galdrilene is dead, wiped away in the last battle of the War of Fire.”

Kalila laid her hand on her brother’s. “He speaks the truth, brother. I have been there the last few weeks.”

He narrowed his eyes at her. “I thought you said Sadira did this to you.”

She nodded. “She did.” Her hand went to the wide, pink scars marring the side of her face. “I traveled for nearly a year after escaping Sadira to reach Galdrilene.”

“Why, sister?” Toren’s brow furrowed. “Why didn’t you come home?”

“I didn’t come home because I couldn’t.” She took a deep breath and seemed to brace herself. “I had to learn to control my magic first.”

Toren paled and yanked his hand away from hers. “Your…” he swallowed. “Your magic?”

Kellinar dropped his foot to the floor and leaned forward, resting his elbows on his knees. “Yes, magic. Just like you can use.”

Toren turned to him, his face paling further. If he lost any more blood from his face, he was going to pass out. He shook his head in denial.

Kellinar chuckled. “Don’t try to play games with me. I can sense the magic in you. You can use Fire magic. But you have something Kalila doesn’t have. You have a hum in your head that you sometimes pick up feelings from.”

Toren gaped at him, his eyes wide. “How…?”

“How do I know?” Kellinar leaned back and propped his ankle on his knee again. “Because a couple of years ago, I heard the same thing.”

“What does it mean? Is my magic driving me crazy?” Toren gripped the arms of his chair as if waiting for a verdict. “I would have turned myself in for execution, but there is no one else to rule Markene. If I were put to death it would leave Haden as the successor to the throne. I can’t let that happen.”

“You are not going crazy. You’re being called to a future you cannot yet comprehend. You are being offered a gift.” Fates be damned, he was starting to sound like Emallya.

“A gift? What are you talking about?” Toren gripped the chair tighter.

“I’m talking about a red version of the dragon in your courtyard.” Kellinar shifted, trying to ease the pain in his back. The wound on his arm burned too, but the slice in his back must be deeper. They were going to have a fine time trying to get the blood out of the chair.

Toren’s hands finally let loose their death grip and he slumped back. “A dragon?”

Kellinar rolled his eyes. Could the man say anything that didn’t come out as a question? Had he sounded like this much of a fire-brain when Emallya first told him? “The hum in your mind is a young dragon, still in its egg. It will only hatch for its destined rider. The hum is the draclet calling to you.”

“What if…” Toren licked his lips. “What if I don’t want any part of this?”

“If you truly reject the call and the offered gift, the draclet will leave you alone. It will still be tied to you though, so when you die, it will die as well.”

“Toren.” Kalila leaned toward him. She started to reach for his hand again, hesitated and laid it on the arm of her chair instead. “Whether you choose to answer the call or not—though how you could give up such a gift I don’t know—you have to get control of your magic. Fire magic is very dangerous in untrained hands. You could do a lot of damage to Markene and those around you. You have to go to Galdrilene if for no other reason than to learn how to use it properly.”

Toren rubbed his hands over his face. “I can’t leave Markene. The only person who can take the throne would be Haden and he would make more of a mess than I have.”

Kellinar shook his head. “No, Haden would have no chance of burning the city to the ground or setting a loved one on fire. And he isn’t the only one who can take the throne.”

Toren’s eyes locked on his. “Who else?”

Kellinar nodded toward Kalila. “Your sister.”

“What?” Toren leaped from his chair and stared at Kellinar like he’d grown an extra head. “A woman can’t rule Markene! It has never been done in the history of the nation.” He shook his head and slowly sat back down. “No, if there is no male heir or something happens to the heir, the next in line for the throne is the highest ranking male noble and that would be Haden.”

“You are the king are you not?” Kellinar did his best to keep his voice level and reveal none of the impatience he felt. “According to your laws and customs, you do have the choice of who your successor is. I know, I’ve studied every nation.”

“Yes, I have that choice, but it says nothing about placing a woman on the throne.” Toren waved the notion away.

Kellinar scowled. “Are you saying your sister is somehow less than you? That she is lacking in brains or ability?”

Toren glanced at Kalila. “No. I’m not saying that at all. It’s just…”

“Just what?” Kalila’s eyes narrowed.

“Look,” Toren said. “I would love to answer this call. It pulls at me and it takes everything I have to resist, but to leave Kalila here on the throne would be like signing her death warrant. She would be set on from all sides.”

Kalila straightened. “I have made arrangements so that I will be protected. I admit the idea of a queen instead of a king will be difficult for Markene to accept, particularly Haden and the other high nobles. They will have to get used to it. I will never allow myself to be pushed around by anyone again. I am not the woman I was raised to be. All of that changed at the hands of Sadira. Markene will get used to me and so will the high nobles.”

Kellinar watched Toren’s eyes and saw the man’s resistance wavering. Toren rubbed his face again and let his hands fall in his lap. “I will have to think about this for a couple of days. This isn’t something that can be decided in a moment.”

“Understandable.” Kellinar nodded. “However, I cannot stay for a couple of days and neither will Kalila. I will take her back to Galdrilene and if you decide to answer the call, I will return her.”

“My sister will stay with me.” Toren’s eyebrows drew down. “She is under my protection.”

“No, she is not.” Kellinar leaned forward, ignoring the bolt of pain that shot down his back. “Kalila is a junior mage at the Tower of Air and Water; she is under the protection of Galdrilene and always will be. As the senior representative of the Tower of Wind and Water as well as a Dragon Rider and Guardian of Galdrilene, at this moment she is under my personal protection. You cannot protect her here.”

Toren seemed stunned but recovered quickly. “You have no say in this.”

Kellinar smiled slightly. “I have every say in this.”

“What in the name of the Fates do you possibly think I can’t protect her from here in my own castle?”

The demanding tone in Toren’s voice irritated Kellinar but he did his best to rein it in. “Sadira, for one. You already failed to protect her from that once, I won’t allow that to happen again. You have no idea what you are up against. Sadira is a Shadow Rider; their black dragons are the dragons from the tales we were all fed with our mother’s milk. She and her fellow Shadow Riders are a living nightmare. If Sadira were to show up here, and she will eventually, Kalila would end up in her hands again. I will not allow that to happen to her. As a junior member of my tower, she is my responsibility and my charge until another senior member arrives to relieve me of that duty.”

Toren turned to Kalila. “You will not let this man take you away now that you have finally come home, will you?”

Kalila brought her chin up and sent an icy stare at her brother. “My allegiance is to Galdrilene. Kellinar is a senior member of my tower. If he thinks it is best for my safety to return to Galdrilene while you search yourself for the courage to put me on the throne and answer the call, then that is what I will do.”

She stood and looked down her nose at him. “I truly hope the draclet has made a good choice in you. You hardly have the backbone to be a rider. You allow yourself to be pushed around and run over by Haden and the other nobles. That is why Markene is in such a mess. You are so busy trying to do everything everyone tells you without making any enemies that you have done nothing that you should. And now, you are offered the greatest gift possible and you are whining about it.” She shook her head, disgust clear on her face.

Toren stood up and looked down at her from his height advantage. “I am not a coward or weak-willed. I have only done the best I can to keep everything from falling apart and excuse me if I don’t just jump on the wagon when it comes to you being queen. It seems to be the only thing you care about. If that is all you want, then you will not be the best thing for Markene.”

Kalila stepped forward and glared into his eyes. “I. Don’t. Want. It. I have never wanted to be a queen or ruler of any nation but it’s the duty I am being called to. I was perfectly happy as nothing more than a junior mage in Galdrilene. I could have lived out my life there as a mage and never wanted for anything more.”

She poked him in the chest with her finger. “Instead, I am here because you have been called to a greater duty and because I am the only one who can take your place. Believe me, if Larna were here, I would happily let our eldest sister take this weight. But Larna is gone. She might as well be dead, and for her sake, I hope she is. Because I have been Sadira’s ‘pet’ in the Kormai. I have seen the evil that happens there. I can’t escape it; it invades my dreams and turns them to nightmares almost every night, even though it’s over a year later. These scars,” she motioned to those on her face and then rolled up her sleeves to show more on both arms, “didn’t appear by themselves. I have more all over my back. I have lived through more pain and terror than you can imagine.”

Kalila planted her hands on her hips. “So yes, if Kellinar says you cannot keep me safe from Sadira and I should go back to Galdrilene, then that is what I’m going to do.”

Toren stared at her as if he didn’t recognize her. His eyes kept returning to her scars. Finally, after a long moment he swallowed and turned to Kellinar. “Sadira will come here?”

Kellinar stood and nodded, wincing slightly as the skin pulled along his back. “She will come and if you don’t know what you’re doing, the people of Markene will fall to her.”

“Can I really destroy my own people with my magic?”

“Yes.” Kellinar wished this guy would hurry up. His back hurt. “A rider, even one not yet bonded to his dragon, has powers that are magnified to many times that of a regular mage. As your powers grow, without training, you could easily turn Markene to ashes.”

Toren stared at him for several minutes then nodded. “It appears I am ignorant of things that are happening outside my borders. I think it’s time I learned. I have no wish to bring harm to my nation. It seems I have no real choice.”

Kellinar crooked a half-grin at him, the memory of Emallya’s words filling his mind and said, “You always have a choice. If you decide to go to Galdrilene and hatch your dragon that is your choice. If you decide to stay here and maybe burn your kingdom down that is also your choice. We will never force you into it. I will take Kalila home now and be back in two days for your decision.”

They started for the door but Toren stopped them. “Wait.” He took a deep breath. “I choose to go to Galdrilene. I will call the nobles together and Kalila will be queen by the morning. It is highly irregular and it won’t go over well, but it will be done.”

Kellinar nodded and reached out with his magic and placed weaves of air across the windows. “Then you both will stay here in this room with you until I return with her protection. I will be gone no more than a few minutes. And if any of your guards shoot any more arrows at me, I will let my dragon eat them.” He wouldn’t of course, but Toren didn’t need to know that yet.

Toren nodded. “I have already given my order to them. If they disobey, I give my own permission for the dragon to do as he will.”

At least the man had some sense. Kellinar turned to walk from the room but Kalila’s gasp stopped him

“Fates! Kellinar, you’re bleeding.”

He looked over his shoulder. This was the first time he’d had his back to them. “I’m well aware of this.”

Toren stepped forward. “Sit down. I will send for a healer.”

He shook his head. “I’m headed to Galdrilene where the best healers in the world are. I won’t die before I get there.” Kellinar opened the door and walked from the room, closing it firmly behind him. He’d done a good job ignoring the pain until now. He gritted his teeth against it and placed a weave over the door before starting down the hall.

When he emerged into the courtyard it looked as it had before. Guards still lined it, pressed against the walls, clearly afraid to move in the presence of the dragon, especially since they weren’t allowed to defend themselves now.

Shryden reached out to him, “You’re still bleeding.”

He grabbed the catcher strap and started fastening it around his ankle, biting back a groan as fire lanced up his back. “How very observant of you.”

“One of us has to be. Considering the amount of time you spent sitting conversing while you lost blood, I thought perhaps you had missed it.”

He glared up at the dragon’s face that was cocked so one big blue eye watched him. “I had to get this done. I can’t run off to a healer every time I get a little scratch.”

Shryden huffed a puff of smoke as Kellinar climbed into the saddle, breathing through his teeth at the effort. “What is on your arm is nothing to worry about Kellinar, but the injury to your back isn’t a scratch. I can feel it too you know.”

In moments, the safety straps were across his legs. He rubbed his forehead with a shaky hand, surprised to find cold sweat beading there. “I know and if I could keep you from it, I would. Unfortunately, I’m not a Silver, so I can’t play those mind tricks like walling people off. Let’s get this over with. Anevay is going to chew my hide for waiting.”

Shryden launched into the air and climbed just high enough to open a Slide. They were tugged into it and then they were gliding toward the crater at Galdrilene as the sun slowly sank behind them. A large group of people gathered on the inner terrace.

Anevay was the first to Shryden’s side when the dragon landed. She glared up at Kellinar. “What in the name of the Fates were you thinking? You should have come back immediately to be healed.”

He gave her a weary smile as he unbuckled the safety straps and climbed down. “Sure, that would have went over well. ‘Toren, you need to go to Galdrilene and hatch your dragon, and your sister here is going to be queen even though there has never been a queen, and she can use magic too. See ya, gotta leave now.’” Kellinar pulled the catcher strap off. “Yep, that would have settled things nicely.”

She rolled her eyes. That eye roll, the one that said she thought he was an idiot and if he bled to death it was his own fault. How did women manage to make eye rolls have so much meaning? Kind of like when they argued with you and then all of a sudden agreed. Yeah, like that wasn’t a trap.

Anevay pulled his shirt up. “What happened? This runs from midway up your back to your shoulder. Sit down.”

Kellinar sank to his knees next to Shryden and the dragon turned a concerned eye on him. “They were shooting arrows at us,” he motioned up toward the saddle where the shaft of an arrow still protruded from the second seat. “I had to shield Kalila or they would have killed her.”

Anevay laid her hands on his back. “You can tell me about it in a minute. Right now hold still.”

Warmth spread through him, the heat gathering in the wound on his back. The burning pain slowly faded until it was gone completely. The warmth moved to his shoulder, healing that as well. He drew a deep, relieved breath and reached to steady himself against Shryden as he stood.

Anevay’s worried dark eyes filled his vision. He reached out and stroked his knuckles down her cheek. “I’m fine now, thanks to you.”

Kellinar glanced at the others in the caldera. “Is everyone ready to go?”

She placed her hands on either side of his face and made him look at her. “You’ve lost quite a bit of blood. You aren’t going anywhere until you’ve had food and tea. You can either walk yourself up to the kitchen cavern or you can sit here, but either way, you stay until I say so.”

He shook his head. “Anevay, I have to get back. I don’t like leaving her there with tenuous protection at best.”

She stepped back, crossed her arms and raised one slim eyebrow. “Fine.”

Kellinar eyed her warily. “Fine?” This wasn’t good.

“Yes, fine.” She gave a sharp nod of her head, her dark eyes full of innocent challenge. “Do what you want. Don’t listen to me. If you think you are well enough to go, then go.”

Oh rotting piles of shadow carcasses, she was agreeing with him. He wasn’t falling into that trap again. He gestured toward the kitchen cavern. “You’re right. I should eat and drink something.”

She smiled sweetly at him and stood on tiptoe to brush a kiss across his lips. “Of course you should.” She turned and started for the kitchen cavern. He sighed and followed her.

“You held your own for a moment there,” came Shryden’s amused sending.

He shot a glare over his shoulder at the massive blue. “I will remind you of that comment the next time Paki and Latia are harassing you.”

The rumble of Shryden’s equivalent to a laugh followed him into the kitchen. Anevay promptly pushed him onto a bench at one of the long tables and then Madra was there, pushing food and drink at him and fussing like a mother hen.

Kellinar had taken no more than two bites when Shryden’s happy sending came bursting into his mind, “Maleena is pregnant.”

Kellinar nearly choked. “You are certain?”

“Tellnox tells me that Maleena told Mckale a few days ago and Nydara has confirmed it as well.”

Maleena was pregnant. He felt a rush of happiness for his friends. “Send my congratulations and sincere happiness to them.”

“I will. Maybe one day one of your bondmates will have a child.”

“Honestly, Shryden, we have enough to worry about right now. I’m thrilled for them, but I don’t envy them. One day, in the future, it would be great if Taela or Anevay became pregnant.”

Anevay sat down across from him, a dreamy look in her eyes. “Did you hear?”

Kellinar nodded. “I’m happy for them.” Marda stood off to the side of the kitchen, dabbing her eyes with her apron. “I guess she has heard already?”

“I was talking to her when Latia sent me the message.”

He smiled. “Someone new for her to mother.”

Less than an hour later he sat on Shryden. Kellinar looked back to make sure everyone who was going stood well behind the dragon. The other dragons had retreated to the ledges in front of their lairs. He reached for Shryden, “Looks like everyone is ready.”

The blue lifted himself into the air then opened the large Slide all the way to the ground and held it as the people on the ground moved forward. The dragon entered it slowly, making sure to pass through with everyone on the ground. In moments, Shryden was hovering above the inner courtyard of the castle at Markene.

Shryden let the Slide close and landed carefully to give the people under him a chance to move. Kellinar unbuckled the safety straps and jumped down beside the dragon as Toren appeared at the door to the keep. He ground his teeth together; the man didn’t listen very well.

He crossed the courtyard in long strides. “Toren, I said Kalila stays with you in that room. Not leave her alone when you feel like it.”

Toren looked over his shoulder then back at Kellinar. “She is still in the room. She is safe.”

Kellinar brushed past him. “Yes, just like she was safe when Sadira took her.”

Toren caught his arm. “Who are all of these people?” He eyed the soldiers warily.

Kellinar glanced back and waved his arm absently at the group. “Toren, this is everybody. Everybody, this is Toren.” He pulled his arm away and strode into the hall. Stupid. He should have taken her back with him. Kellinar didn’t draw an easy breath until he yanked open the door to the study and saw her standing in front of the empty fireplace.

“Your brother has trouble listening. He was to stay in here with you.”

Kalila laughed but it held a bitter sound. “Do you really think if Sadira had shown up that me being in this room with Toren would have saved me?”

“Actually, yes. It would have saved you both.” He scowled. “I placed wards over the windows and door. Anyone trying to pass through that used Shadow magic would have found a nasty surprise. It wouldn’t have held them for a long period of time, but maybe long enough for me to get back to you. However, Toren passing through the wards weakened them.”

She looked away from him. “Oh, we didn’t know.”

He crossed the room and took her chin in his hand, forcing her to look up at him. “You are not a Dragon Rider but that doesn’t mean you aren’t important. You have a purpose. If you want to fulfill it, you will have to be more careful.”

Kalila stepped back, pulling her chin away. “I will be more careful.”

He nodded. “Good. Now come with me. There are quite a few people in the courtyard. Hemmen sent the Defenders you requested.”

A look of surprised relief swept over her face. “He did?” She took a deep breath. “You have no idea how much more confident that makes me.”

Kalila followed him back to the courtyard. As they stepped into the darkness, Toren saw her and walked over. “Who are these soldiers? Why are they here?”

She looked at the gathered men. Hemmen had sent fifty Defenders. Kalila lifted her chin slightly. “They are here by my request to be my personal guards.”

“Foreign soldiers? Are you insane, Kalila? You really will have everyone against you.” Toren glared as if he could somehow put sense into her.

Kalila gave him another of her frosty, high and mighty looks. “I will have every hand against me anyway. At least this way, I know my guards can’t be bought.”

Five women flowed out of the evening shadows. All of them wore dark blue robes, and their hair hung in a multitude of small braids with blue and white beads at the ends. The oldest approached and stopped in front of Kalila. Kellinar saw the gratitude spread across her face.

She bowed her head slightly. “Thank you Katian, for coming.” She glanced at the others. “All senior mages?”

Katian nodded. “Dhovara thought it best to be on the safe side. I agreed with her. I don’t think when it comes to Shadow Riders that we can take too many precautions.”

The Defenders moved into defensive positions, already taking up their task. The leader strode over to where Kalila stood. “I am Arryn Warrick, Hemmen’s brother. My second is Hammel. We will work in shifts.”

Kalila smiled graciously. “Thank you, Arryn.”

A tall woman in silver robes with long red hair spilling down her back, flowed to her side. She gazed at Kaila with pale blue eyes. “I am Lalani, your advisor. I will help limit your mishaps when handling your nation as well as other things.”

“Thank you for coming.”

Toren looked at Lalani. “What experience do you have ruling a nation?”

The Silver mage gave him a cool look. “Twenty-five years ago, I was the heir to the Boromari throne. As the eldest child, I was groomed for the position from the time I could walk and talk. In Boromar, we have no…restrictions against a woman ruling the nation. It is based upon birth order and capability, not whether one is male or female. I grew up working alongside my father until it came to light that I possessed Spirit magic in my twentieth year.” She smiled slightly, her tone cool. “Boromar does not follow the barbaric laws dictating the slaughter of magic users. We keep up the pretense to avoid the backlash from other nations—although thankfully that pretense can be done away with now—but the ‘private executions’ in Boromar are an illusion. Magic users who turn themselves in have been sent to Galdrilene for the past two hundred and fifty years.”

Lalani turned her eyes back on Kalila. “I am well-versed in running a successful nation. As a strong Spirit mage, I will also be able to sense the emotions in a room and within a specific person at close range. I will be able to tell if someone is lying to you.” She glanced briefly at Toren. “In the event of a visit by Shadow Riders that is above the abilities of the mages—and it will be—I can send for help. I am not a Dragon Rider so I cannot send direct thoughts. However, I can send the sense of need to either of the two Silver Riders, bringing help to Markene in a matter of moments.”

Kellinar clapped Toren on the shoulder. “I told you she would be well protected. Against everyone.”

Toren swallowed and eyed the mages nervously. “I guess she will be.”

“Shryden and I will stay until tomorrow morning after you have made Kalila queen. Then we’ll give you a lift to Galdrilene.”

Toren frowned. “Who is Shryden?”

Kellinar pointed at the blue dragon filling a good portion of the courtyard. “My dragon.”

“And you want me to ride on him?” Toren’s eyes were wide.

Kellinar chuckled. “It won’t be that bad. Perhaps for now you should figure out where all of these people are supposed to sleep.” He frowned and glanced around. “Where is the rest of your family?”

“I had them all stay in their rooms with guards at their doors.” He motioned everyone into the keep. “Once everyone is settled, I will have them come out.”

Within an hour, Toren had his possessions moved from his apartments in the east wing of the castle and several beds brought in. Kalila chose to share the group of rooms with the six other mages. She didn’t say anything, but the occasional glimpses of fear Kellinar saw in her eyes told him she didn’t want to sleep alone.

More beds were brought up and placed in the rooms across the hall for the Defenders. They would never be far from her. Kellinar felt she would be safe. Well, as safe as anyone was with Shadow Riders in the world.

He collapsed in the large, comfortable bed in the room given to him for the night on the same floor as Kalila’s apartments. Exhaustion flooded him as he laid his head on the large, soft pillow. Despite feeling incredibly tired, Kellinar lay on his back and stared at the ceiling. He had spent the past week in Galdrilene and found his missed Anevay’s soft body next to his. In the same week he’d been separated from Taela and he missed her next to him as much. He exhaled and wondered when the day would come when they could all be together again. The night dragged on for several hours before he finally found sleep.

Kalila woke with a start and sat up, her heart pounding as she looked up. Only the ceiling. No Ranit perched on a ledge, staring at her with empty eyes.

A hand touched hers as Lalani leaned over the bed. “You are among friends.”

She blinked a few times, trying to remember where she was. That’s right, she was in Markene. Early morning light crept around the edges of the heavy curtains hung at the windows. Windows heavily guarded by wards made by Katian with linked powers of the mages.

She lay back against the pillows as Lalani pulled away and glided from the bed, listening to the others stirring in the next room. She wasn’t alone. Kalila took a few deep breaths to calm her racing heart. Damn the Fates for allowing Sadira to infect her dreams.

Kalila swung her feet over the side of the wide bed and stretched. Today Markene would have a queen for the first time in its history, and in all likelihood, many hands would turn against her. There was always the possibility some would accept her, but she didn’t hold out a lot of hope.

It didn’t matter. She had protection and it had to be done. Markene would fall apart without a firm hand. A couple of years ago, Kalila would never have dreamed that hand would be hers. The last time Kalila had seen her home, she’d been fifteen. With her coming out ball over, she’d had several men vying for her hand. Beautiful dresses and picking the right husband from among her father’s approved selections had consumed her thoughts. Now at seventeen, she stood ready to take control of the nation, ready to take her father’s place. The girl Kalila had once been was destroyed and the woman that had been forged in the Kormai now took her place—her beauty marred with so many scars, no man would ever want her again.

Not that it mattered. If she never took a husband she didn’t care. All of the things that had mattered before no longer held any importance. Her light blue tower robes were more than adequate. Fancy dresses no longer had the allure they once had.

Kalila slid off the bed and walked to the wash basin to rinse away the sleep from her face. After running a brush through her hair she pulled the sides up. With quick twists of her wrists, she wound the front section of her hair into a neat bun on her head, leaving the rest to fall in honey-blonde waves down her back.

She stared at her reflection in the mirror. The wide, ropy scars that ran down the one side of her face and onto her neck were clearly visible with her hair pulled up. People would just have to deal with it. Kalila stood for a moment longer, gazing into her own blue eyes. They looked the same, but there was a hardness to them now of innocence lost. She searched for any hint of the girl who had laughed and danced without a care in the world. After several long moments she looked away. There was no sign of that carefree person.

Lalani gazed at her from across the room. “It does not do to mourn the past and what was lost. You need to be strong and face forward. How do you expect to see the blade coming at your front if you insist on looking behind you?”

Startled, Kalila turned to the woman. “I thought mages weren’t able to read thoughts.”

The Spirit mage gave a slight shake of her head. “It is true, I cannot see into your mind. However, I can sense your mourning and easily read where it comes from. Reading people is what I do.”

Kalila looked back at the mirror. Lalani was right. Such was life, it moved on. She mentally pulled away from her past and what might have been and turned to face the here and now.

Kalila pulled the light blue robe of the Tower of Air and Water over her head then buckled the belt, a shade darker than the robe, loosely around her waist. She looked up as Katian strolled in.

The older woman smiled. “You have a big day today.”

“I know.” Some of the worry she felt must have filtered into her voice.

Katian patted her shoulder. “Your tower sisters will be with you every step of the way.”

Kalila smiled back and pushed her nerves away until they were nothing but a small ball in her stomach. She couldn’t let any of it show today. If there was any hope of letting everyone know their new queen was not to be trifled with, they could see nothing but calm confidence.

A soft knock on the door made her turn. She glanced into the adjoining room to make sure everyone was dressed before calling out, “Come.”

The door swung open part way and a Defender looked around it, his sharp blue eyes sweeping the room. “Your brother is here to see you, my queen.”

Taken aback, she shook her head. “You are Defenders of Galdrilene; I am not your queen.”

He bowed his head slightly. “With respect, we swore fealty to you until such time as you send us back to Galdrilene, be that today or years from now.”

Her brow furrowed. “What about your duty to Galdrilene?”

“You are our duty to Galdrilene. We go where we are needed most and this is where we are needed. Hemmen had us swear fealty to you. He wanted no misunderstanding that our first duty is to you for the honor of Galdrilene. No matter what happens here, you will be our queen and commander until you release us from our oath.”

Kalila controlled the surprise and the overwhelming love she felt for those in Galdrilene. “Thank you. Will you please send my brother in?”

The guard stepped back and her brother came into the room. Toren glanced back at the door as it shut behind him. “They take their duties seriously, don’t they?”

Kalila smiled. “There are none more loyal than the people you will find in Galdrilene.”

He nodded but said nothing as he glanced at the mages behind her and she knew he worried about his future there. He pushed his hand through his sandy hair and took a deep breath, his green eyes steady on hers. “Everything is ready. People are already arriving. They know they are coming for something important and attendance is required, but they don’t know the reason for it.”

“So early?” Her nerves tried to rise up again and she shoved them back down.

He smiled the familiar crooked smile she’d grown up seeing. He was barely a year older than her and they’d always been close. To see him now, a king and soon to be a Dragon Rider, made pride well up in her. Toren would find everything he needed in Galdrilene to grow into the man he was meant to be. “There will be a feast afterward, so there is no reason to worry about the morning meal. No sense putting it off.”

Kalila took a deep breath and let it out slow. “I guess you’re right.”

He held out his arm to her. “Would you be so kind as to accompany me, my queen?”

She took his arm and gave him a small smile. “I will make you proud, brother.”

He reached for the handle on the door and pulled it open. “I know you will.”

They made a procession down the corridor. Five Defenders in front with the mages following directly behind Kalila and Toren. Another fifteen Defenders brought up the rear. As they passed one of the doors, Kellinar fell into step on the other side of Kalila.

When they reached the throne room, Kalila saw more Defenders lining the walls mixed with palace guards who looked at the Defenders with distrust and confusion. Kellinar hung back near the side door they had entered from. Toren sat in the throne on the dais and Kalila stood to his right, one hand on the back of the chair. Her mother and five remaining sisters stood on the steps to the dais. Her mother had hugged her fiercely when they finally met again but she hadn’t uttered a word.

She stood staring with empty eyes. Kalila knew her mother must be devastated by the loss of her husband; even so, life went on. One couldn’t walk around in a catatonic state. Now Kalila saw where Larna and Drisa had gotten the trait to just shut down and stop fighting.

Slowly, the room filled as nobles dressed in their best filed in. Quiet, nervous conversation filled the hall and tension hung thick in the air. It only took Kalila a moment to understand why. Surely everyone in the city had seen Shryden land the day before. She was used to the sight of the dragons, but it must have caused chaos in the city.

Gasps replaced the murmured conversation in the room as the assembled nobles and their wives caught sight of Kalila. Several sideways glances were sent her mother’s way. Understandable, since Kalila stood where her mother should have until Toren selected a wife. This wouldn’t be the last of their surprises this morning.

When the big doors at the end of the room swung shut, Toren stood and the room fell silent as everyone bowed low. When they stood, Toren inclined his head a fraction. “Thank you for coming promptly. There is an announcement of great importance to be made.

“As I am sure you are well aware, a dragon landed here yesterday.” Tension filled the room to the breaking point as everyone seemed to hold their breath. Toren continued, “It appears the legends that have been passed down for so many generations are only partially true. Galdrilene is not a crumbling ruin. It is in fact a thriving nation.”

Whispers ran through those gathered and Toren let it run for a moment before raising his voice to get their attention. “The dragons of Galdrilene are called Guardians. It is their duty to protect and help.”

Kalila watched disbelief cloud the faces in the room.

“Some of those legends were unfortunately true. There are black dragons. They and their riders are everything our legends told of.”

The fear in the room thickened. Kalila glanced at Lalani. Outside of a slight furrow between the mage’s pale eyes, her face remained impassive. Toren took a deep breath. “Another thing our legends were wrong about is magic. It does not drive the user insane.”

“How can you know this?” Kalila recognized Haden’s voice. He stood at the front, his muddy brown eyes full of distrust and anger. “Are you taking the word of whoever came with that dragon?”

“Do not speak out of turn Lord Haden.” Toren scowled at the man. “I am not trusting the word of the man who came with the dragon. I am trusting the word of my sister, Kalila, who thankfully has been returned to us. She has seen the black dragons and their riders. Our half-sister, Sadira, is one of them. The scars you see on my sister’s face are the work of Sadira.”

Kalila lifted her chin as all eyes turned on her.

“She has also been to Galdrilene. Kalila can use magic.”

A collective gasp went up as the crowd pressed back. Toren ignored their reaction. “I can also use magic. More than that, I have been called to hatch a dragon.”

Kalila shook her head slightly. If they moved back anymore, they would crush the people at the back of the room.

“As such,” Toren continued without pause, “I am required to step down as the King of Markene. I cannot perform my duties to Markene and reside in Galdrilene at the same time.”

All of the nobles began to talk at once, looking at one another fearfully. Lord Haden alone stepped forward, brushing his collar length brown hair back. “Then who will be king?” he asked, triumph in his eyes.

Toren leveled a look at him. “As the sitting King of Markene and holding the throne by right of inheritance, by the laws of this nation, I have the right to name my successor.”

Haden squared his shoulders and took another step forward. Apparently his desire for the crown overruled his fear of magic and dragons. The crowd behind him leaned forward, all eyes flickering between Toren and Haden.

Toren drew himself up and Kalila felt a warm rush of pride. He looked so much like their father at that moment. His eyes swept over the gathered nobles. “My sister, Kalila, will assume my station. Markene now has a queen.”

Amid more gasps and shocked stares, Toren stepped away from the throne, removed his crown and set it on the seat. Ignoring the rumblings of outrage, Kalila stepped forward, picked the crown up and placed its heavy weight on her head. Toren knelt to one knee, “My queen.”

Lord Haden lurched forward, the veins in his face standing out. “You can’t do this! A woman on the throne? Markene doesn’t have a queen!” The formal speech of court fell away as he took three more steps toward the dais, his hands clenched into fists at his side. “Markene will be in shambles. No one will accept it!”

As he approached another step, Defenders moved to block his path. Kalila glared at him. “Toren was well within his rights to appoint me to the throne. It mentions nothing of male or female in the law.”

Haden’s face turned redder. Maybe she should have brought a Healing mage as well; he was going to burst a vessel somewhere if he kept this up. “That the appointed to the throne is male is implied in the law!” he spat.

This was a make or break moment. If she wavered even in the slightest, the confused nobles in the room would side with Haden and she would lose the throne. Kalila pulled herself up and looked down her nose at him with an icy stare. “Implied or not, it is not specified. I am a direct blood line to the throne. I am sorry that you hoped to wrest control of Markene, but it will not happen.”

She looked up and swept the room with the same hard look. “I am my father’s daughter and I have every right to assume this position. It is according to law and by the wishes of my brother, the former king.”

“But…” Another lord’s voice rang out. “We have never been ruled by a queen. The people will revolt.”

Kalila shook her head. “Because something has never been done before in this nation, does not mean that it cannot be done. Change comes to our world whether we like it or not. Shadow Dragons ride the dawn. Sadira will bring them here. She is more powerful than you can imagine and the magic she uses is twisted and evil. I have no wish to see Markene fall to her or see any of you placed in the agony I suffered at her hands. I will not back down. I will not allow Markene to fall,” she dropped her gaze to Haden’s face, “and I will not stand by and allow this nation to be ran into the ground.”

She looked again at the other man who’d spoken. “As far as the people, how they react depends largely on you. If the nobles accept it, the people will. If you do not accept it, you run the risk of them supporting me and turning on you. If it is a gamble you wish to accept, then by all means, take it. Remember though, commoners are often far more accepting of change than you are. Their lives are ever in flux and change must be embraced by them. They care more of feeding their families and keeping a roof over their heads. They have no time for the petty intrigues that plague the lives of pampered nobles with too much time on their hands.”

More murmurs ran through the gathered people and worried looks filled more than one face. She’d struck a chord with them. Did they really want to take a chance on the preferences of the people? Kalila had always been a much loved daughter of the king by the people. They had adored her as child, loved her as a young woman, and mourned her loss when she went missing.

Haden tried to leap forward and was stopped by the Defenders who wrestled him to his knees. Kalila stepped down from the dais and approached Haden. He glared up at her. She kept her face smooth as she gave him a frosty look. “I will give you this one chance to swear your fealty to your new queen. If you do not, I will be forced to exile you since I would not be able to trust you.” Not that she had any intention of ever trusting him.

Haden glanced back at the others and she followed his look. More than one edged away from him, already showing where their loyalties would lie by putting distance between themselves and him. Haden turned back to her, anger raging in his eyes. Slowly he bowed his head. “I swear fealty to you my…queen… My house and my life are at your command and disposal until my death or you release me from my oath.” The last was said through gritted teeth.

Kalila almost laughed in his face, but managed to hold her emotions in check and maintain perfect composure. “Your pledge is accepted, Lord Haden. Your life and house are under the wing of my protection.” Sure they were. He pledged his allegiance to her now but it didn’t take a Spirit mage to see he would plant a knife in her at the first opportunity.

Haden climbed to his feet, turned on his heel, and stormed out of the room shoving past those nearest the door. The room seemed frozen for a moment as everyone stared at her. As it thawed, one by one the rest approached and made the same oath and then filed like a herd of sheep into the great room of the castle where the servants laid out a massive feast.

As the last left the room, Toren stepped to her side and touched her arm. “You handled that well sister. Better than I would have. I believe you indeed have what it takes. Markene is in good hands.” He turned and looked at Kellinar, still loitering near the side door. “Do we stay for the feast, or should I get the few things I have gathered and prepare to leave now?”

Kellinar motioned toward the great room. “I don’t know about you, but I haven’t eaten yet today and I have every intention of enjoying the food Markene has to offer.”

Toren smiled and offered Kalila his arm. “May I escort you, my queen?”

She nodded and looked back at her younger sisters who stood in a confused bunch, looking to their mother for direction. “Come along, girls. I don’t believe you will find much help in mother, she appears to have given up.”

Reluctantly, they left her side and moved toward Kalila. Her mother watched them go and turned the other way, leaving through the side door. The mages and Defenders arranged themselves around them as they moved into the great hall.

Kalila ignored the sting of her mother’s departure and moved to the head of the high table, taking the tall-backed chair. A servant approached her, hesitation in her every movement. She set a bread board on the table and curtsied low. “I beg your pardon, your majesty, but is what you said about magic true?”

Kalila nodded at the woman. “Please stand and tell me why you ask.”

The servant stood, her eyes on the floor and hands clasped tightly in front of her. “My…my son. He made a ball of light out of nothing two months ago. I have kept him hidden, terrified for his life. I know I should have turned him in but…” she looked up at Kalila then, desperate tears shining in her eyes. “He is my only child. I couldn’t…”

Kalila smiled and placed her hand on the woman’s arm. “Send for him. We will see that he makes it to Galdrilene where his magic will be embraced and he will learn to use it properly.”

A tear spilled over and ran down the servant’s cheek. “Thank you my…queen. Thank you.” She dropped a quick curtsy then nearly ran from the room.

Kalila glanced at Kellinar who sat to her left. He nodded, acknowledging that he had heard the exchange. She felt a very small sense of relief and hope. If the servants were already adjusting, the people would too. With them behind her, Haden would have a hard time overthrowing her.

The sun had long set by the time Kellinar and Shryden landed in Haraban. With weary movements, he unbuckled the safety straps and slid from the saddle. He waved at Paki and Miya and called, “Hello ladies.”

Shryden reached for him. “They welcome you back.”

Kellinar nodded, sensing Shryden’s happiness at seeing Paki. It was as hard on the blue to have his mates divided. It seemed like it had been forever since they’d been here. The days spent waiting to see if Loki would be alright and more waiting to transport Kalila to Markene had seemed to stretch on forever. Not that he minded the time spent with Anevay, and Shryden had enjoyed being with Latia, but they had worried constantly about those left in Haraban.

Kellinar pulled off the catcher strap and tossed it up over the saddle. “It seems strange to leave the saddle on you all of the time,” he sent to Shryden. “Are you sure it doesn’t bother you?”

“I barely notice it anymore and it is by far the safest thing to do. If things start to unravel, the few minutes it takes to secure the saddle could make a big difference,” the blue sent back.

Kellinar gave the dragon a pat on the shoulder. “I suppose you’re right. Let me know if it gets uncomfortable.”

“I will. Taela comes.”

Kellinar took a deep breath and turned as a door banged open and his bondmate stormed down the garden path. When she reached him she threw her arms around him in a tight hug. He hugged her back, waiting for the explosion.

He didn’t have to wait long. After a moment she shoved him away and glared at him. “What were you thinking? You could have gotten yourself killed!”

Kellinar crossed his arms. “I did what I had to do.”

“What you had to do?” Her eyebrows rose. “Do tell me why using your magic wasn’t part of what you had to do.”

He frowned. “What are you talking about? I did use my magic.”

Exasperation flowed through the bond as she planted her hands on her hips. “I’m talking about before you almost ended up with an arrow through your back.”

“I…” Kellinar ran his hands over the smooth braids tight against his scalp. Why hadn’t he used a shield of air?

“You were trying to get through to people without scaring them more,” Shryden sent.

“Thank you, buddy. I owe you one.”

“Yes, you do,” came the smug sending from the dragon.

Kellinar dropped his hands. “We were trying to handle it without scaring people any more than they already were.”

“Fine lot of good that did you. You ended up injured and still had to scare them with magic.” Her arms were crossed now and her foot tapped ominously.

“We had to try. I’m not a Shadow Rider. I’m not going to go in blasting people just to scare them. I did what I had to and no more. I didn’t even let Shryden eat a single one of them.”

She softened immediately and stepped forward to wrap her arms around him again. “I know,” she mumbled into his chest. “You scared me.”

He stroked her hair, pleased that her lightning quick moods had changed in his favor. “Shryden tells me you healed Sehlas.”

Taela tipped her head back and smiled at him. “We did or rather Maleena did. Serena and I were just headed to a meeting with Sehlas and my father. A week of being able to feed himself and move around has done wonders for him.”

The quiet sadness in her eyes tugged at his heart. “What? Isn’t that good news?”

“He’s lost everything. He brother stole his throne, his wives and now that he’s well, his brother branded him a traitor and placed him in exile. He can’t even go home.”

“A traitor? On what basis?” Times like these made him glad he didn’t have siblings.

She shrugged and stepped back. “He really doesn’t have a specific charge. Probably because he is just grabbing at straws. He doesn’t want Sehlas back because he was much loved by his people and they will want him back on the throne.”

They started walking down the path toward the door. “I didn’t want to marry him, but he was a fair ruler, considerate of his people, and good at maintaining a nation.”

The wheels in Kellinar’s mind started to turn. Sehlas had no place to go and Kalila needed all of the help she could get. Perhaps if he couldn’t take back the throne of his own nation, he would be willing to help secure someone else on theirs. When they entered Bahar’s study, Serena and a man Kellinar assumed was Sehlas were already there.

As they sat down, Bahar made introductions. Kellinar nodded at Sehlas noticing a sad flicker in the other man’s eyes when he looked at Taela. Sehlas nodded back. “It is a pleasure to finally meet you. Taela and her father speak highly of you.”

Kellinar raised an eyebrow. “Of me?” He glanced at Bahar. “Are you finally softening to me, old man?”

Bahar smiled. “Barely, you impudent pup.”

Kellinar chuckled and leaned back in his chair, propping one ankle on the opposite knee.

Sehlas glanced back and forth between them, uncertainty in his expression. Bahar cleared his throat and sat up straighter, his face taking on a serious expression. “I called you all to this meeting to ask your help. Sehlas has been a longtime friend of mine and what his brother has done troubles me greatly. Sehlas informed me that as much as he appreciates my friendship and hospitality, he has no wish to remain here as a permanent guest. For which I am thankful because it means the Sehlas I knew is fully restored.”

“What can we do to help?” Serena asked. “I suppose he can go to Galdrilene if he wishes and make a new life there.”

Sehlas leaned forward. “I want to do something to help in your efforts against these Shadow Riders. Whether that be something I can do in this Galdrilene of yours or somewhere else.”

Taela opened her mouth but Kellinar dropped his foot to the floor and leaned forward, resting his elbows on his knees. “Actually, if you want to do something to help, there is a young Weather mage who has just taken the throne of Markene.”

Sehlas’ eyes widened. “The old king is dead? When did Toren become a mage?”

“He didn’t. Toren’s magic is fire and he hatched a red egg. He is a Dragon Rider now.”

Sehlas scratched his chin thoughtfully. “Who is the young mage then that took the throne? Surely Haden would have stepped up.”

Kellinar rubbed his hands together slowly. “Haden wanted to take control, however, he appears to be extremely incapable of actually handling a nation. His own house is a mess. The young mage that took the throne instead is Kalila, Toren’s sister.”

“Kalila.” Shocked filled Sehlas’ face. “A woman took the throne?” At Kellinar’s nod he shook his head and clasped his hands together in front of him and looked Kellinar in the eye. “You do realize Haden will attempt to tear her apart don’t you? And what can she possibly know about running a nation? She was one of the younger daughters and certainly had no training.”

Kellinar nodded again. “Kalila has been through a lot in the last couple of years. She is mature well beyond her age. We have provided her with an advisor who has experience. However, as you obviously know well, she can use all of the help she can get. Would you be interested in going to Markene as another advisor? You seem fairly well-versed in the politics of Markene.”

Sehlas leaned his elbows on his knees and steepled his fingers. “Of course, Markene is—was—one of my northern neighbors. Hanover borders Turindar to the north and Markene is on the other side of that. Still, it was a nation I learned about. I know much of what goes on and which houses are strong or weak, or would make the best allies.”

Bahar braced his hands on his desk and looked at Sehlas. “So my friend, is this something you would like to take on or would you prefer to go to Galdrilene?”

Sehlas sat in silence for several long moments before looking at Kellinar again. “I assume much hangs in the balance of this woman holding the throne.”

“Kalila is the only one in Markene who can truly comprehend the evil of the Shadow Riders. She has unfortunately spent time in their hands.” Kellinar shifted. “Only she truly knows how to prepare for them. Others in Galdrilene would have been able to do it, but Kalila is someone the people know and she has a direct blood line to the throne.”

Sehlas nodded. “Then I will go. At least I know there I can still do some good.”

Taela smiled and crossed her legs. “I have no doubt you will be an excellent help to Kalila. You are a better man than I once gave you credit for.”

“I am happy you see me that way now. I truly am sorry you felt so desperate to escape the marriage arranged to me.” His face softened slightly. “I did care about you. If you had come to me with it, I would have spoken with your father.” Sehlas glanced at Kellinar. “I am happy you found someone.”

Taela blushed, a chagrined look on her face. “I’m so very sorry for what I did to you.”

Sehlas waved away her words. “Water under the bridge. This is what life is now.”

Bahar slapped his hands on his desk and stood. “Good. Now that this is settled, Kellinar, would you mind taking a walk with me?”

“If you like.” Kellinar stood slowly. What in Fates name did Bahar want?

Taela’s father remained silent for a long time as they walked through the empty halls. Finally he clasped his hands behind his back and looked at Kellinar. “I can understand where your feelings toward royalty come from. I have been to Trilene. I have seen the Mallay.”

Kellinar frowned. “Excuse me?”

Bahar smiled in return. “No need to deny it or beat around the bush. During the couple of weeks you were here, I came to know you and you aren’t quite the person you presented on our first meeting. You took fun in needling me that first time and purposely said things to anger me.”

Kellinar started to say something but Bahar gave a wave of his hand to silence him. “No need to worry, I didn’t come on this walk to attempt to chastise you. For one, it wouldn’t do any good.” Bahar chuckled. “I wanted to speak with you to offer a little advice.”

“Alright.” Kellinar nodded, wondering what advice the man wanted to impart.

“You may be a Dragon Rider, but you are still young and brash. You carry a chip on your shoulder for anyone in the position of authority.”

Kellinar didn’t try to deny it, in fact, he still wasn’t sure he fully trusted Bahar.

Taela’s father continued, “In this battle that appears to be looming on the horizon, you are going to have to forge alliances with nobles whether you like it or not. At some point, you are going to have to trust one to do what’s right.”

Kellinar snorted. “Easier said than done.”

Bahar nodded. “Yes, I suppose it will be. But it won’t help your cause to alienate them. And it won’t help you if you can’t ever trust them.” He smiled slightly. “Not all of us are like the rulers of Trilene. In fact, you may be surprised how many in the High Houses of the Trilene District aren’t the way you think they are.”

Sure they weren’t. A life of stealing all manner of things for many of the High Houses and waiting to have one of them kill him told him all he needed to know about those who resided in the Trilene District. He nodded anyway. Bahar didn’t have a clue, but he had gained enough respect for the man to refrain from telling him he was a moron to his face.

“Is that your advice then?”

“It is.” Bahar stopped and faced him in the hall. “Make sure sense overcomes childhood conditioning. Learn to trust, even those you aren’t sure deserve it. And try to keep from pulling every one of their strings the first time you meet them. Give them a chance to get to know you before you throw sarcasm in their face.” Bahar clapped him on the shoulder. “You’re a good man. You should let more people see that side of you.”

Kellinar stood in silence as Bahar walked back the way they had came. Slowly he turned and walked the opposite way. He would go sit with Shryden for a while and think some things over. Tomorrow, he would take Sehlas to Markene and then it would be time for them to leave for Trilene. He tried to think of those in the Trilene as anything other than the underhanded, back stabbing, worthless rats that they were. He knew of only one who wasn’t. Maybe Bahar had a point. He was a Guardian of Galdrilene now, perhaps it was time to put away old prejudices and move forward. Somehow, he didn’t think it would be that easy.

Kirynn tapped her foot impatiently. Around her, the ladies of Shadereen gossiped and carried on with inane conversations. She’d been stuck with them and their endless chatter all day. In Shadereen, it was apparently the custom for the ladies to gather in the castle to prepare for feasts and festivals. If that wasn’t annoying enough, it was also the custom that the men and women didn’t mingle until whatever they were celebrating began.

She sat to the side of the large dressing room and avoided the massive skirts of the ridiculously confining dresses the women wore. Kirynn had taken one look at the offered dress and made an excuse to leave for a moment. It took her no time at all to Slide to Galdrilene and get her own. She’d go to this event naked before she put on one of those frilly high-necked monstrosities.

One of the many ladies swirled past her in a cloud of perfume. She paused in front of Kirynn. One of the wives of the Council of Seven, she thought the woman’s name was Eranya, though she didn’t remember which man she was attached to.

Eranya smiled down at her. “Are you going to get ready? Are you sure you don’t want to borrow the dress I offered?”

Kirynn shook her head; not in a thousand years. “I will get dressed in a moment.”

Syrakynn chuckled in her mind. “Those women are going to have a fit when they see you.”

“They are going to have a bigger fit when their men see me,” Kirynn sent back.

After three days of talks with the king and the Council, Shadereen had accepted Galdrilene as an ally. Now, three weeks later, many still weren’t sure how they felt about Vaddoc. She got the impression they felt they were choosing the lesser of two evils.

One thing she could say about the Shaderians though, once they decided on a course of action, they jumped in with both feet. Within days they had announced to the nation everything that transpired and then this gala, ball, thing, whatever they wanted to call it had been planned to celebrate their new found allies and hope for a future not ruled by Shadow Riders.

Slowly the room emptied. Kirynn waited for everyone to leave before collecting her dress and slipping into it. She wasn’t shy about changing clothing in front of others, but she didn’t want to listen to their scandalized remarks while she dressed.

In the fashion of Boromar and the dress she had worn to her introduction ceremony after Syrakynn hatched, this dress’ silky material clung to every curve of her body. Unlike the dress she wore to the ceremony, this one didn’t have a high collar. Instead, the front swooped low in a deep V, revealing a considerable amount of her breasts and the Di’shan pendant that nestled above them. Though ankle length, it had slits up both sides that bared her legs nearly to the hip when she walked.

There was a practical reason behind the slits. In case of a need to fight, it freed her legs from the constraints of a full skirt. Kirynn also would not be piling her hair up on her head in a ridiculous bunch of curls. Her braid kept her thigh length hair neatly contained and out of her way. It would be fine like that just like it always was.

Kirynn rummaged in the sack she’d brought for several small containers. Another thing the noble ladies here lacked—besides a decent brain between them—was a good knowledge of face paint. She rarely ever used it, but it was something her mother insisted she learn. Kirynn smiled at the thought of her mother. She hadn’t completed more than the first two rounds of weapons training as a child, but she had been proud of Kirynn for finishing it all and becoming a valuable soldier.

Her mother’s voice echoed in her thoughts as memories of her mother sitting her down to learn face painting filled her mind. “You are a great warrior and have excelled well beyond your age-mates. But there are times when battles are not to be fought with zahris or other sharp weapons. Sometimes, they are fought on the battle grounds of the mind. The weapons for these wars are far more subtle.” Her mother had opened a case full of powders and vials. “You are stunningly beautiful, my daughter, and these will enhance that. Men can be conquered with the right visuals. Their minds are easy to manipulate when they aren’t thinking with the right one. Women will either despise you or want to be you. Either of the scenarios can be manipulated to your advantage.”

Her mother was a hard woman and even though she chose not to become a Defender of Boromar, she still had little room in her life for silliness or things that were a waste of time. She smiled, thinking of her mother among the ladies of Shadereen. There would have been little tolerance for the gossiping and preening.

Kirynn settled in front of a mirror. She didn’t have the extensive case her mother had, but it was enough. In short order her eyes were enhanced. Without it looking like she applied much of anything, her lashes were darker and thicker, her eyes drew attention and appeared larger and greener. Her lips held a touch of color giving them a fuller look and her cheekbones were highlighted.

She observed her handiwork. Yes, her mother would be proud. Subtlety was the key her mother had always said. Highlighting everything that was already there while making it look completely natural. Kirynn smiled, thinking of the member of the Council of Seven she had her eye on. Something about him made her think he would make a good bed partner. From the gossip in the dressing room, she gathered her assumptions were right.

Kirynn stood, placed the items back in the pouch, and left the room. Music floated down the hall from the big open double doors at the end. It sounded like the party had already started. That suited her just fine. She walked forward, swaying her hips so that her legs flashed through the slits in the dress.

The doors opened onto a large balcony with two sets of sweeping stairs leading down from either side. Kirynn descended the stairs, glancing across the huge room where people crowded around the edges at various tables and dancers already moved about the middle of the floor. As Kirynn passed two men she smiled at them and watched shock fill their faces while their eyes roamed over her body.

The looks and expressions were as she expected. The men’s jaws dropped and their eyes widened as they tried to look and not look at her at the same time. The women’s expressions ranged from shock, to envy, to outrage. She glided past them all and into the middle of the room where the dancers were. Several men faltered over their feet and received glares from their dance partners.

Kirynn strolled up to where Vaddoc moved across the floor with a beautiful young woman. She smiled sweetly at the woman who gaped back. “Excuse me honey, but I would like a moment to dance with my fellow Dragon Rider.”

The girl-woman backed off with a dirty look. Kirynn ignored her and slid into Vaddoc’s arms. He rolled his eyes slightly. “You did not have to do that.”

She laughed. “It’s good for her to be reminded I have first claim on you, even if I don’t plan on making that claim tonight.”

He glanced across the room and then looked back at her. “Still planning on tripping Lord Deslin into bed?”

“Unless you think he will be able to resist me.”

As they danced he moved an arm’s length away and eyed her up and down with an appreciative light in his eyes before pulling her close again. “I doubt there is a man in the room that could say no and more than a few who will be sorely disappointed that they aren’t your intended target.”

Kirynn smiled. “Surely you don’t plan on spending the night alone.”

He chuckled. “I have no intention of spending it alone.”

She turned her head as they swirled past the crowd and looked at the gathered women. “Who is your target?”

“You interrupted my dance with her and likely destroyed her sense of self-beauty.”

Kirynn couldn’t help laughing. “It isn’t my fault the women of Shadereen have no idea how to properly dress.”

“I used to think it was quite attractive,” he said, humor flashing in his amber eyes. “But then some woman from Boromar ruined it for me.”

“I don’t know how you can see around those awful dresses.”

He leaned forward and whispered in her ear. “Easy, I imagine them without the dresses.”

This time she roared with laughter. “I think either I’m wearing off on you or you’re spending too much time with Kellinar.”

He laughed with her and then grabbed her hand. “Go catch your target.” Kirynn made a half-spin and stepped away from the dance with him.

She made it halfway across the dance floor before Lord Mannoc stopped her. Tall, with dark hair to his shoulders and golden eyes, he was a standard Shaderian man. A cocky smile lit his face as he asked her to dance.

Irritated, Kirynn took his hand. She didn’t like him much. Something about him rubbed her the wrong way. He looked at her as they moved through the steps together. “So what are you and Vaddoc to each other?”

Ah, he wanted to test the waters with her. She smiled slightly. “We are fellow Dragon Riders, good friends and occasional bed partners. Why do you ask?”

For a moment he looked taken back by her blunt reply. “You do say what you are thinking.”

She shrugged. “Why play games? Might as well get to the point don’t you think?”

He nodded, a thoughtful look in his eyes and said, “Then I will get to the point with you. I would like you to join me tonight in my quarters.”

Kirynn laughed and his eyes narrowed. “What do you find funny?”

“Lord Mannoc, it isn’t going to happen.”

A scowl knotted his brows together. “May I ask why?”

“Of course.” She smiled sweetly. “Number one, you have a wife, or have you forgotten her? Apparently you have, if the conversations I listened to all day are any indication. Did you forget I spent the day with all of the ladies? Gossip seems to be their favorite past time and according to the gossip tree,” she leveled a look at him, “you couldn’t find it with both hands and a map.”

He dropped his hands and stepped back, anger storming in his eyes. Kirynn reached up and patted his cheek. “I don’t feel like giving lessons tonight.” She turned and walked away, leaving him there to fume.

Her target, Lord Deslin, stood only a few feet away. Not quite as tall as the others and with a receding hairline, he wasn’t the most handsome man in the room. It wasn’t his looks that drew her but instead the way he used his hands. Something about the simple way he held a glass of wine, or smoothed his scroll-worked coat, told her those hands would know what to do. Kirynn stopped and smiled up at him as he gazed back, though not at her face. A look of chagrin passed over him. He cleared his throat, looked away from her body, and met her eyes.

“Would you like to dance with me, Lord Deslin?” she asked, putting a subtle inflection on the word dance to give it a double meaning.

He held out his hand, his eyes dropping again before jerking back to her face. She smiled wider, loving the rush of the hunt as she placed her hand in his. He drew her hand up and kissed it, his eyes still locked on hers. “I would love to, my lady.”

She stepped into his arms and whispered in his ear, “I’m no lady.”

Deslin coughed and cleared his throat again then slowly stepped among the dancers with her. Kirynn glanced at Vaddoc as he moved by, the same pretty woman as before in his arms. By her smile, Vaddoc had charmed her thoroughly. It would be a good evening for them both.

Kirynn padded quietly about the room, collecting her shoes and stockings. She lifted her dress from where it lay in the corner. The snug bodice was ripped. Well, she couldn’t fault Deslin for being impatient. She’d driven the poor man to the brink of insanity before finally permitting him to touch her in that way.

A smile spread across her face. He’d been good. Not as good as Vaddoc, but then Vaddoc had learned a lot from her. Even so, the romp in the bed with Deslin was worth a ruined dress. It wasn’t like she would need another one like it any time soon. She’d made it clear to the Council that she would attend last night’s ball but would refuse invitations to more. Every now and then it was fun to lady up and wear dresses and face paint, but only once in a very great while; anything more than that would drive her crazy.

Kirynn glanced at the dress again and shrugged; no point in bothering to put it on. It wouldn’t cover much now anyway. She slung it over one arm and held her shoes in her hand. Deslin continued to snore heavily among the twisted sheets on the bed as she left the room.

“Good morning, my dragon love,” she sent to Syrakynn.

“Good very early morning, my rider,” Syrakynn returned. “Namir and Cat still sleep in the courtyard while I perch on the wall and watch over them. I still don’t trust all of these people. Not that they would be able to kill Namir before he woke anyway, but we figure it’s best to head off a problem before it arises.”

Kirynn nodded. The dragon couldn’t see her but she would sense it. “I agree. It’s a shame there is no suitable place for you to sleep.”

“Perhaps one day the Earth riders can build something for us. I have memories of such things from before the War of Fire,” Syrakynn sent hopefully.

Ahead of her, a male servant dropped the tray he carried. It hit the floor with a clatter as dishes and their contents scattered. He stared at Kirynn, his eyes wide and his mouth open. She whipped around to look behind her. The hall was empty. She turned back. What was his problem?

The man dropped his eyes to the floor, red flushing his face until she wondered if he would burst into flames. What in the name of the Fates was wrong with him? He glanced in her direction once more before staring at his feet again. “Your pardon, my lady.”

Kirynn glanced down and rolled her eyes. Oh for Fates sake, what was their problem with a little bit of skin? So what if she was naked, he was a grown man; surely he’d seen a female body before. Although given the way the women here dressed, maybe they never took their clothes off around men, not even for a romp. She would have to ask Vaddoc.

She picked her way around the tray and its spilled contents, pausing in front of the servant. Kirynn laid her hand on the side of his face making him look up. “Why do you act as if you are embarrassed? It’s my body and I’m not embarrassed. Unless you feel it isn’t worth looking at.”

“N…no, my lady. It is most worthy of looking at. It is just… just not proper, my lady.”

She rolled her eyes again. “First of all stop calling me lady. And as for this, it’s called the female body and there’s nothing embarrassing about it. However, I can see you’re quite distressed over it.” She arched an eyebrow. “Hmm, perhaps you swing the other way?”

“What?” His eyes got bigger. “No, my— no, I just, it is not...”

She laughed at his discomfort. “I will continue on my way now so that you can get on about your day.”

“You shouldn’t torment them so much,” came Syrakynn’s amused sending.

“It isn’t my fault they teach their men that the female body is something to ogle at and play with instead of something natural,” Kirynn sent back as she continued down the hall to her room.

She closed the door behind her and tossed the dress on the floor. Using the basin on the table by the door, she washed away the remnants of the face paint before throwing on some clothes. She wanted a bath but figured if the people here were going to react so strongly to nakedness, then it would be better to have some clothes on before hunting down a place to bathe.

Kirynn stepped into the hall and felt a sharp sting in her neck. She reached up and grabbed at the area. Her hand came away with a small quill stained on one end with her blood and something else. Dark numbness rolled over her body. Somewhere in the distance, Syrakynn roared. A heavy weight settled around her neck cutting off her connection to her dragon. Kirynn fumbled for her magic but whatever had been on the end of the quill dragged her under.

The sound of water lapping at stone banks penetrated the darkness, echoing through the thick fog in Kirynn’s mind. Her wrists and shoulders ached and something cool and rough pressed against her back. She struggled to open her eyes. What happened? A memory of a sharp sting floated to the surface. A quill with something on the end… her thoughts faded, swallowed by the fog.

“She is coming around.” A male voice echoed in her ears.

“Good, it will be interesting to see how this works,” said the voice of a disembodied female.

Another female voice, different than the first, remarked, “As long as it does work.”

“If you’re afraid and would like to go up top and help the Kojen, feel free to leave.” The first female voice returned, a silky hypnotic tone to it.

Someone cleared their throat and the male voice asked, “Do I have to stay? You have her now. I’ve done my part in your experiment.”

The voice was familiar. Kirynn struggled to push past the darkness in her mind to remember where she had heard it.

The silky voiced female laughed. “Coward. Be gone with you. Go play like you are one of those siding with Galdrilene but don’t forget, I own you.”

“Yes, my lady.”

Footsteps crunched across gravel and echoed around her. Where was all of the echoing coming from? Kirynn finally convinced her eyelids to lift. The blurry world swam into view. She hung from a thick rope bound tight around her wrists. Kirynn dipped a toe down but it didn’t meet the ground. That would explain the pain in her wrists and shoulders. Someone was going to die for this and it wasn’t going to be her.

“Ah, you are finally awake.” The silky voice was back.

Kirynn’s head lolled and bumped against the rough wall behind her as she tried to look around. Torches flickered around a low ceilinged cave. An arch in one wall led into darkness, though her bond-enhanced eyes picked up the dim shimmer of the torchlight off a massive pool of water on the other side of it.

“Look at me.”

She struggled to get control of the muscles in her neck and managed to flop her head forward. A woman stood gazing at her from a safe distance so Kirynn couldn’t reach her with her feet. Red hair, so dark it was almost the color of dried blood, hung long around a pale face. Dark smudges marred the skin under deep green eyes. A thick black ring rimmed the outer edge of her irises. Who had eyes like that? They were creepy.

Creepy-woman smiled and her eyes held something twisted in them. Kirynn reached for Syrakynn and her magic at the same time and found…nothing. No magic, no dragon, just aching emptiness.

Panic flickered around the edges of her thoughts but she squashed it ruthlessly. Syrakynn wasn’t dead or she would be feeling Separation. Whatever stopped her from touching her magic must also be keeping her from the dragon.

Kirynn glared at the woman. “What have you done? If you have harmed my dragon, you will die.” She paused for a moment and smiled. “Well, you are going to die anyway, but it will be much slower if my dragon is injured.”

Another woman stepped to the side of the first. Her mousy brown hair was mostly covered with a head scarf. “Your dragon was fine the last I saw. Although with the Kojen tearing things apart up above, I cannot say for certain she still remains that way.”

Creepy-woman moved closer, looking at Kirynn through narrowed eyes. Mouse-woman’s hazel eyes widened in her olive-toned face. “Be careful, Azurynn, stay out of her reach.”

Azurynn cut her strange-colored eyes at the second woman. “I’m not a fool, Sulwyna.” She turned back to Kirynn. “You cannot sense your dragon? Then it appears my little experiment is working.”

A heavy rustling pulled Kirynn’s attention away. Two large shadows shifted in the cavern beyond the arched opening. A sick feeling crept into Kirynn as fear tried to claw at her. Shadow Dragons. She looked back at the two women in understanding. Shadow Riders.

“I finally sense some fear in her,” Sulwyna said.

Azurynn nodded. “I sense it too although it makes no difference.” The dark green eyes regarded Kirynn. “She’s been trained to control it and overcome it, haven’t you?”

Kirynn ignored her and sought the silence in her mind. When she found the emptiness, she began to explore it. It felt like an open hole but it wasn’t. Her exploration revealed a wall. Invisible and barely felt, but there nonetheless. The two Shadow Riders were still talking. Kirynn tuned them out so she could concentrate on the wall. She slid along it. Syrakynn was somewhere in the darkness on the other side.

There, a seam, but tightly closed.

“How long until it Separates her from her dragon?”

“It didn’t say. I had hoped it would have already,” Azurynn’s silky voice answered.

Kirynn’s eyes snapped open as dread clawed up her spine. Separate her from Syrakynn? What did that mean?

Azurynn cocked her head slightly to the side as she tapped one finger against her lips. “I sense the bond has weakened, though not as much as I would have liked.” She met Kirynn’s eyes. “I wonder if you will feel your dragon’s soul being torn away from you?”

Lose Syrakynn? Oh Fates, she had to get out of this. She couldn’t let Syrakynn be taken from her. Why would the bond be weakening? Kirynn wrenched against the rope, kicking at the creepy woman, ignoring the pain as the fibers cut into her wrists and blood trickled down her arms. “What have you done to her?” Fury rose up and buried the fear.

“Done to her?” Azurynn’s eyebrows rose slightly. “We have done nothing to her. But the chain you wear around your neck cuts you off from her and your magic, and it will eventually tear her soul away from yours. Already the ties that bind you two together are weakening. It’s quite fascinating really.”

Kirynn arched against the wall and pushed off, kicking her foot out again. Satisfaction flooded her as she clipped Azurynn’s chin. The other woman’s head snapped back as she fell, landing hard on the stone.

Kirynn smiled coldly as her body slammed back against the cold stone. Whether or not they succeeded in tearing Syrakynn from her, they were dead women. Azurynn picked herself up from the floor, hatred filling her ugly eyes. Sulwyna laughed. “I told you to stay back. If you would stop playing with her and use your senses, you would have known what she was planning.”

Azurynn rubbed her jaw and glared at the other Shadow Rider. “You could have warned me.”

Sulwyna shook her head. “It is your problem if you are not paying attention. You’ve been training as long as I have. I’m not here to hold your hand.”

Pain flooded Kirynn’s head. It felt like a metal spike being driven through her forehead. She groaned as the pain built and darkness pressed in.

Azurynn’s voice rang in her ears. “Sulwyna, if you break her soul shield, I won’t be able to observe the effects of the chain on her. She’ll be too far gone to register any of it.”

The agony lessened until nothing but a dull ache remained. Panting, Kirynn glared at the two women. She would get out of this.

Sulwyna laughed. “If only looks could kill, right Guardian?”

Kirynn took a deep breath, letting it out slowly while she centered herself and went back to her exploration of the barrier in her mind. It only took a moment to find the seam this time. She began to work at it, searching for a weak spot.

Syrakynn burned a long line of Kojen, doing her best to avoid the front line where Border Guards mixed heavily with the creatures as they attempted to beat them back. “Kirynn! Where are you?” she sent, trying to desperately to reach her missing rider. It had been hours and still only silence met her.

A ripple of weakness washed through her long body.

“Syrakynn,” came the sending from Shryden. “You’re fading!”

The red tried to clear her suddenly sluggish mind as she struggled to maintain flight, anguish crushing her heart. Kirynn must be dead. Namir roared in protest. Syrakynn managed to clear the combatants on the ground before crashing and sliding across the sand. She could barely lift her wings.

Paki landed next to her as Taela ripped away the safety straps. Another wave of weakness flooded Syrakynn and she laid her head on the ground. Taela appeared in front of her, putting her hands on either side of Syrakynn’s snout. “Please don’t fade, Syrakynn.” Tears swam in Taela’s eyes. “Your rider isn’t dead. I can’t find her, but I can still sense her. She isn’t far and she lives.”

Syrakynn reached out for Taela, the unused path to her mind unfamiliar, “I have no control over it. Something is tearing me away and I can’t stop it.”

“You have to fight it Syrakynn,” Taela sent back.

A heavy weight pressed down on Syrakynn as she closed her eyes. “There is no fighting Separation…”

Taela’s sobs filtered through the thick fog settling over her mind. The roars of the other dragons in the battle filled the air. Syrakynn took a deep shuddering breath as a sharp, painful tingle ran through every nerve. Her soul was coming loose.

She sighed deep and waited. There was nothing else to do. Nothing else she could do. Syrakynn only hoped Taela was wrong and Kirynn was dead. She didn’t want to go to Maiadar alone.

In the darkness that slowly pulled over her like a blanket, something stirred. A trickle of awareness. A tiny thread of a connection. Kirynn! Syrakynn reached for it and held on to it.

So faint it was barely audible in her mind, she heard her rider. “Don’t leave me, Syrakynn. I’m here; I’m trying to reach you.”

Another thread slipped through whatever kept them apart and Syrakynn felt a little bit of strength return. More threads slipped through allowing a connection the size of a thick rope. Strength raced through Syrakynn’s legs and wings.

Taela gasped. “Syrakynn, your color is returning.”

She opened her eyes and stared at Taela standing before her. “She is clawing her way back to me. I can sense her now.” More connection pushed through the weakening wall between them. Syrakynn wished she could help, but she didn’t sense what Kirynn fought against.

Kirynn ripped another hole in the seam and another. Syrakynn’s strength and love poured into her.

“She’s breaking it,” Azurynn growled.

Sulwyna gave Azurynn a flat look. “You messed it up.”

Kirynn ignored them and forced the seam wide open. The barrier fractured all the way around the dark hole. She attacked it with her mind. It shuddered then crumbled. Her bond with Syrakynn flooded her along with her magic. The presence of the red roared into her mind as Kirynn opened her eyes.

Flames raced up her arms to the rope. She hit the floor with a thud, her legs not ready for the sudden need to hold her up. Azurynn bolted from the room, but Sulwyna narrowed her eyes.

Pain burst behind Kirynn’s eyes but she didn’t care. Fueled by rage, she focused past it and threw a weave at the woman. Sulwyna screamed as fire erupted from every pore in her skin. The Shadow Rider fell to the floor, thrashing.

A rush of wind gusted past Kirynn as if something had sucked all of the air into the other chamber. She climbed to her feet and stumbled past the now silent and still burning form of Sulwyna. The muscles in her shoulders screamed from having the weight of her body pulled against them for so long. Kirynn rolled her arms, wincing as she stepped into the cavern. Azurynn and her dragon were gone.

A harsh scream filled the cave, echoing off the walls. Covering her ears, Kirynn turned toward the sound. A black dragon thrashed against the dark stone wall as its body collapsed in on itself. It withered and crumbled until it was nothing more than dull black scales stretched over the skeleton.

Kirynn stared at it. The thick, sickly sweet smell of burning flesh drifting on the smoke from the alcove clogged her throat and nose. Coughing, she pulled her shirt up over her mouth and nose and glanced back at the body. She could put the fire out, but she wasn’t going to. Let the pile of Kojen-dung burn until there was nothing left.

Kirynn looked around. How in the name of the Fates was she supposed to get out of here? She stepped to the edge of the water. It was a massive underground spring. A large tube ran diagonally from one side of the spring up into the stone wall. That didn’t get there by accident, which meant there was a way in and out of here.

She’d just discovered rough stairs cut into the wall when Syrakynn reached out to her, “Stay right there. I am coming for you and I don’t want the edge of the Slide to hit you.”

Kirynn sighed with relief and sank down onto the stairs. The air over the spring began to swirl like a whirlpool. The Slide widened until it cut through the ceiling and the side walls. Syrakynn’s beautiful, red body came through with Serena on her back. Paki and Taela came through right behind her.

They landed with a splash in the shallows where the water lapped at the rock. Relief and love flooded Kirynn. “I thought I might never see you again,” she sent.

The red gazed at her with her big, bright green eyes. “Next time don’t take so long to answer me when I call for you.”

Kirynn laughed. “Hopefully, there won’t be a next time.”

Serena and Taela ran up to her. Serena knelt on the step below, examining Kirynn’s wrists. “What happened to you? And what is that around your neck?

Kirynn reached up and felt the thick links of chain for the first time. She tried to pull it away and winced. Serena stopped her. “Don’t, it’s embedded into your skin.”

“How do I get it off?” Kirynn’s skin crawled. What had they put on her?

Taela looked at her with worry. “Kellinar is Sliding to Galdrilene to get Emallya. Whatever that is, it’s evil. I can see the symbols in the weave on it. It makes my head ache to read them, but I believe this came from the Kor’ti.”

Kirynn’s heart sank. Azurynn had created the chain. They had someone who could read the shadow book.

Puzzled, she looked up. “Why is Kellinar here? For that matter, what are you doing here? Aren’t you supposed to be in Haraban or Trilene or something?”

“We were supposed to be on our way to Trilene right now, but while you were down here lying about, there was a battle with a swarm of Kojen. We came to help since you were missing.” Taela smiled.

Kirynn frowned. “Azurynn and Sulwyna said I was their experiment. The Kojen must have been a diversion. I heard a man’s voice, but I can’t remember it well enough to recognize it but it seemed familiar. I was still coming around from whatever they had drugged me with. He wanted to leave and one of them told him he could go back to pretending.” She tried to bring the memory into focus but it wouldn’t come. “There is a rat among the Council it would seem.”

Serena frowned at the wounds on Kirynn’s wrists. “Why do you think it’s someone in the Council?”

“It had to be someone pretty high up to allow them entrance.” Kirynn glanced up at Taela who was staring at her. “What?”

“What was that name you said?”

“Azurynn?” Kirynn asked. “She was one of the Shadow Riders here. She can use the shadow side of Spirit magic. I was going to kill her but the coward ran.”

Taela shook her head. “No, the other one.”

“Sulwyna. She used Spirit magic too.”

“What happened to her?”

Kirynn shrugged. “I killed her. Why?”

Taela looked around the cavern. “Where is she?”

“In that alcove over there.” She waved her hand toward the arched opening.

Kirynn looked at Serena as Taela walked away. “What was that about?”

Serena shook her head still looking at the wounds. “I don’t know.” She sounded as if she had barely paid attention to the conversation.

“Are you trying to see if you can heal by frowning?”

“What?” Serena looked up, her expression startled.

Kirynn smiled. “You’ve been staring at my injuries and frowning since you arrived. I thought perhaps you were trying a new technique.”

“I’ve been trying to heal them, but that chain seems to be blocking my magic.” She stood and brushed her hands off with a frustrated grimace. “I think I will have to wait until it’s off before I can do anything.”

“We should get you out of here. Emallya would like you to return to Galdrilene to have the chain removed, and both Kellinar and Vaddoc are asking if there is room for them to Slide into this cavern,” came the sending from Syrakynn.

“Tell them we will meet them at Galdrilene. And tell them not to Slide here. The cavern is large but not big enough for two more dragons,” she sent back.

Kirynn raised her voice and yelled, “Taela, we need to get a move on before we have everyone in this Fate-forsaken cavern.”

Taela walked back from the smaller cave. “I know; Kellinar is pestering me about getting out of here.”

“What were you doing?”

Taela frowned. “What did Sulwyna look like? What is left of her is burned beyond recognition.”

“Brown hair, head scarf, hazel eyes, olive skin. I’ll have Syrakynn send you the image from my mind.”

Taela sucked in a deep breath and Kirynn raised an eyebrow. “What?”

“Sulwyna was Sehlas’ youngest wife. His brother didn’t throw her out; she left to become a Shadow Rider. I always thought she knew what I did in the garden when I broke Sehlas’ mind.” Taela glanced back at the small cave. “I’m glad you were able to kill her.”

Kirynn shrugged slightly and stood. “Glad to be of service. Let’s get out of here.”

She waded into the water next to Syrakynn and laid her hand on the red’s scales for a moment, relief filling her again. The loss of the dragon would have killed her, of that she had no doubt. With a deep sigh, she turned and pulled the catcher strap from where it had fallen in the water and fastened the wet cuff around her ankle. After leaping into the saddle she looked down at Serena. “Are you flying with me or Taela?”

Serena smiled. “Taela. No offense Syrakynn, but you seem to love pushing the limits more than me. You are too much like your rider and I don’t want the Slide back to Galdrilene to scare me half to death. Since Miya has already Slid back to Galdrilene to wait for me, I will be happy to hitch a ride with Taela.”

Kirynn shrugged. “Suit yourself.” What was the other woman talking about? Syrakynn just believed in getting things done in a timely manner which Kirynn appreciated. The red knew the limits and flew just within them.

Syrakynn waited until Taela and Serena were on Paki and the silver had a chance to shift out of the way before lifting off. Kirynn saw the image of Galdrilene form in the dragon’s mind as the Slide spun open.

Maleena paced along the edge of the inner terrace, waiting for Kirynn to arrive. Emallya and Bardeck waited patiently in the caldera with Vaddoc, Kellinar, and Anevay. She reached out for Tellnox, pleased to find that so far there were no Kojen in Calladar. The green and Mckale continued to patrol the eastern border of the nation. She didn’t like that he was there alone.

The other riders with dragons either too young to Slide efficiently or too young fly gathered around on the inner terrace. Belynn leaned against her red as she nervously chewed on a fingernail, her hazel eyes worried.

Brock paced along the other end of the terrace, his intense blue eyes staring down the caldera while Toren and his red Rahu stood on the ledge outside their hatchling lair. Nolan and Sumara stood together in tight-lipped worry.

The air rippled in a giant whirlpool as a Slide opened. Maleena stopped pacing and watched. Kirynn and Syrakynn came through first, followed by Paki and her passengers. The knot in Maleena’s stomach loosened at the sight of the red and her rider. She knew they were safe, but it was good to actually see it.

The red landed smoothly and Kirynn leaped down from the saddle. Maleena and Emallya hurried across the grass of the caldera to Kirynn, while she unbuckled the catcher strap and Paki landed.

Emallya studied the chain around Kirynn’s neck with tight-lipped worry.

Vaddoc strode toward Kirynn. “Are you alright?”

Kirynn glared at him. “Of course I am.”

He stopped a few steps away and folded his arms across his chest, one eyebrow raised. “You hardly look it.”

She glanced at her bloody wrists. “This? This is nothing and as soon as I get this shadow-blasted chain off, Serena will heal them.”

“You missed all of the fun this afternoon, what happened?”

Kirynn glared at him. “While you were having fun killing Kojen, I was stuck in some underground cavern with a lake, having a chat with a couple of creepy women. One of which is dead now.”

“Hold still,” Maleena said as she examined the heavy black links half-buried into Kirynn’s skin. Faint traces of Shadow magic still radiated from it. Etched into the metal were symbols. A few minutes later Taela joined her. Soon, she saw the symbols translated in the other woman’s mind. Maleena’s blood began to run cold as the meaning behind the symbols became clear and the weave that had been used was revealed.

“Right here.” Taela traced a symbol on one link with her finger. “This is where she went wrong. She forgot to add a single line in this area and it left a seam that Kirynn was able to break open.”

Maleena studied the images in Taela’s mind. Her Spirit sister was right. If Azurynn hadn’t missed that one line, Kirynn and Syrakynn would have been lost to them. She looked at Emallya. “Have you ever seen anything like this?”

Emallya nodded as Nolan and Anevay came closer to examine the chain. “Yes, during the War of Fire. I had hoped since we were unable to recover the Kor’ti they wouldn’t find anyone who could read it. Apparently they have.”

Serena frowned at the chain. “How do I remove it?”

“You do not. I will show Maleena and Taela how to remove it. Then you can heal the wound it will leave behind.” Emallya looked at Maleena. “This is going to hurt. Even if Mckale’s shield was working properly, it would still hurt. The bondmate shield does not protect against this,” her eyes flicked to Taela, “no more than it did when you used Shadow magic to help Paki.”

Maleena nodded. “I know. I can sense the Shadow magic in it but I can handle it.”

Taela turned to Maleena with a startled look. “Why isn’t Mckale’s shield working?”

Emallya smiled, a wealth of warmth in her eyes as they settled on Maleena. “Because she is pregnant. During the first few months the shield is adjusting to the new person growing inside. It will not quite work fully until the pregnancy is over, but it will get better as it progresses.”

“At least it will get better,” Maleena said. “I forgot how difficult it was without it.”

Kirynn nodded impatiently. “This is all fascinating, but do you think you can talk about it after you get this flaming thing off me?”

Emallya glanced at her. “Sit down and we will get it off.”

Kirynn flopped down in the grass as they knelt around her. “Merge with me and we will get this done.”

Maleena reached out for Emallya with her mind and felt the merge with her, and then with Taela. For moment, thoughts and memories from the other two women flowed into her mind; it was unavoidable at the beginning of a merge. Images of Dragon Riders strung up by their wrists on poles in a bloodied battlefield with black chains around their necks as their dragons lay dying flashed; of Bardeck in a tender moment; of Kellinar standing in the light of the setting sun and several more.

Once the merge was complete, Maleena was able to control the flow and isolate them so they didn’t bother her while retaining the present thoughts in the forefront. It had taken her several months in the beginning of her training to learn how to do that.

With the meaning of the symbols clear in their minds from Taela, Emallya began to show them the process of disassembling and separating the remainder of the weave from Kirynn. The pain from the Shadow magic beat at all three of them. Maleena’s head throbbed. Because of the merge she felt what the other women felt and they felt what she did, however she sensed it made it easier to have the pain divided among the three of them.

With sickening clarity, she saw the way the weave had embedded the chain into Kirynn’s flesh. The darkness, not visible when she was just looking at it, now showed as black, infectious lines webbing into Kirynn’s skin.

Carefully, line by line, they tore apart the weave while the agony of touching Shadow magic bore into them. Finally they had it down to only a couple of symbols which were unraveling on their own and fast.

“Everyone turn away,” Emallya gasped out in a strained whisper. “Kirynn close your eyes, this is the part that will hurt you.”

Emallya dropped the merge as she turned away both mentally and physically. Maleena tried to stagger away. Her head felt like it had been kicked by a horse. A loud pop and a shout of pain signaled the collapse of the rest of the weave. A piece of chain smacked her in the shoulder as it torn free from Kirynn’s skin.

Agony ripped through Maleena’s mind from the backlash of the collapsed weave and she felt Vaddoc’s hand around her waist to steady her. She barely noticed the roars of pain from the two silver dragons as her stomach lurched and she doubled over, vomiting on the ground. Vaddoc used his other hand to hold her hair out of the way.

When her stomach was finally empty, he helped her up onto the inner terrace and eased her down to sit. He crouched in front of her, his amber eyes worried. “Are you alright?”

Maleena nodded. The pain was already fading. “Thank you.”

“Do you need me to bring Mckale?” Tellnox sent.

Maleena took a couple of slow, deep breaths. “No, I’m fine now. I will be back in Calladar soon.”

She sensed the hesitation in the green through the bond before the reply came. “If you are certain.”

“I’m certain.”

She looked over at Emallya and Taela. Kellinar held Taela while she too emptied her stomach. Emallya leaned against Bardeck, her face ashen. She glanced at Maleena and smiled wanly. “It has been a long time since I have had to do that. I had forgotten how much it hurts.”

Maleena looked at Kirynn. Bits of chain stained with blood lay scattered on the grass around her. Although Anevay, Serena and Nolan had been quick to step in and heal her, blood still streaked down her chest and back. The two healers pulled back, murmuring in irritation. Serena appraised Kirynn. “No matter what we do, wounds caused by Shadow magic don’t heal right. You will have scars.”

Kirynn rubbed at her chest where the chain had laid. “I don’t care about the flaming scars; I already have plenty of those. I’m just glad that stupid thing is off. Why in the name of the Fates did it explode off me?”

Emallya looked at her. “It was the weave that bound it into your skin. When the weave collapsed at the end, it shattered and so did the chain. I know it hurt to have it ripped out like that, but it is the only way.”

“Well, I’m going to get a bath.” Kirynn stood and wiped at the blood on her chest. “At least I can get one here without someone drugging me.”

Vaddoc shook his head. “I am going to head back to Shadereen. I need to make sure the Kojen are gone and then see if I can figure out who it was that betrayed us.”

Kirynn paused, her face clouded with concentration. “I wish I could place the voice. He left before I was fully awake and the memory is buried under layers of fog.” Her eyebrows drew down. “I will find him and then I’m going to kill him.”

Vaddoc smiled, a hard glint in his eyes. “Bathe quickly then. I will not promise to save him for you if I find him first.”

Her eyes narrowed. “You will not steal this kill from me.”

He held up his hands. “Bathe quickly.”

Kirynn turned with a growl and sprinted toward the Great Hall. Vaddoc launched himself into his saddle with a chuckle. Maleena frowned slightly at him. “You know she will injure you severely if you kill him. Her thoughts were broadcasting loud enough that I think even the weakest Spirit mage heard them.”

Vaddoc crooked a smile at her. “It is fun to anger her, but there is a line between fun and stupidity. I am not a stupid man, Maleena. I will not take this kill from her.”

Maleena laughed softly as Namir lifted off, the wind whipping around her. She stood and walked past where Kellinar, Anevay and Taela stood with their arms around each other in a tight hug. A smile tugged at her lips. Kellinar had certainly found his place with his bondmates. Maleena climbed in the saddle and fastened the safety straps. The three bondmates still held each other as Nydara lifted off and opened the Slide.

“This is unacceptable!” Alrendoc slammed his fist against the large table and stood. As he started to pace the room, Kirynn kept her eyes on the members of the Council of Seven seated around the table. One of them was a traitor. It was possible that the traitor was directly beneath one of these men in rank though her gut told her otherwise.

Deslin rubbed the top of his forehead. “We must find whoever this is.”

Mannoc frowned. “I never thought I would see the day when a man of Shadereen would abandon his watch so thoroughly.” He shook his head. “To intentionally allow Kojen not only into Shadereen but into the heart of Marden, and Shadow Riders into the very belly of this fortress…”

“A sad day indeed,” the graying Rashar said gravely, his expression troubled.

As the talk around the table continued, Kirynn watched each of them carefully. Whoever it was, he was very good at hiding things. No twitch of an eye, no beads of nervous sweat, nor even strain in a voice gave away the traitor. It was a shame Maleena or Taela couldn’t be present at this meeting. Either one of them would have ferreted out the traitor in no time.

Kirynn leaned back in her chair and tuned out the mostly worthless discussion. How could they plan to keep it from happening again when the traitor sat among them? It didn’t help that they refused to believe it might be one of them. That was alright, she could be patient.

Azurynn sat at the desk she’d brought into the alcove off the main chamber of the Kormai. The large tome of the Kor’ti lay open on the top. A dull pain thrummed in her head as she carefully read through the symbols, searching for her mistake in the making of the chain.

It didn’t matter that she was a Shadow Rider. A Shadow Rider who used Spirit magic was a rare thing despite the fact there had been two of them at once until Sulwyna had gotten herself killed. It still hurt to use Shadow magic, but Azurynn had grown accustomed to the pain and largely ignored it.

She had learned long ago that pain could be pushed aside and ignored. A brief memory of her previous life flashed through her mind. The reeking sludge in the bowels of the boat where she and the other girls and women were forced to sleep, the sweaty men who came down for only one thing, the screams and cries of those who hadn’t accepted their fate yet. The smell of the sickness that so often took the women due to the living conditions.

Azurynn shook her head to dispel the unpleasant memories. She’d shown them. When her magic came to her and set her free, she ensured the men on the boats had all felt the horror and pain they had caused. Azurynn made sure they felt her revenge. They’d deserved it. Deserved it for what they’d done to her and the other women; for how they had twisted her. She could barely remember a time before that. A time before she’d been sold as a slave on the boats of Turindar.

Azurynn rubbed her temples. Enough of this. That life was gone. She was what she was now and her new life assured she would never face that kind of abuse again. There were more important things to think about now. She refocused on the book. Where had she gone wrong with the chain?

Ah, there, that symbol. Was that the one—

“Azurynn.” A mage walked into the alcove, interrupting her thoughts.

With a growl, Azurynn lashed out at the mage. The woman let out a soft cry as her eyes rolled back in her head and she fell to the floor, blood trickling from her nose.

Azurynn sucked in a deep breath and let it out, rubbing her forehead as if that would help the spike of pain. Now, where had she been? Oh yes, that symbol.

“Azurynn.”

She let out an exasperated growl and looked up. Sadira swept into the room and froze, staring at the body of the mage. She turned slowly and glowered at her with dark eyes that showed none of the deeply buried fear Azurynn sensed. “You killed another of my mages?”

Azurynn glanced at the dead woman on the floor and shrugged. “She interrupted me.” She sent Sadira a pointed look.

Sadira leaned her hands on the desk. “It took me forever to gather the mages we have. And yet you kill them. Do you know how hard it is for me to find more?”

“How tragic for you.” Azurynn turned back to the book, already dismissing Sadira from her thoughts. She smiled at the frustration rolling off Sadira as the dark-haired beauty left. Sadira didn’t dare push her too far and Azurynn knew it.

She concentrated again on the symbol. Azurynn now saw she had constructed it wrong. It didn’t bother her that the first try had failed. She would make another and this time it would do exactly what it was designed to do.

Kovan sat on one of the cushioned benches around the edge of the main chamber, sharpening his sword. He could have had someone else do it, but the task calmed him.

Sadira came stomping across the cavern, her pretty face twisted into a murderous expression. Kovan groaned, so much for feeling soothed. No doubt she was here to gripe about Azurynn.

Sadira stopped in front of him, her hands on her hips. “Do something about Azurynn. She can’t keep killing my mages.”

Kovan threw back his head and laughed, partly because the suggestion was ludicrous and partly because he knew it would irritate her. “Azurynn does as she pleases. Why don’t you do something about her? Oh wait, that’s right, she would kill you before your shadows could kill her. And because if she chooses to, she can get into your thoughts and make you kill yourself.”

“I am not afraid of her,” Sadira snapped.

Sadira was close to losing control, but Kovan didn’t care. He was an even match with her. If they ever went head to head they both had the same chances of coming out alive. Azurynn, however, was quick to kill and had no trouble reading the minds of those around her to observe their intentions. A fight with the blood-haired woman was not something he wanted. Kovan would rather get into it with Sadira.

“If you aren’t afraid of her, then you truly are insane.” He bent back to his sword.

“So she just gets to do as she wishes whenever she wishes? Like run off with a bunch of Kojen to Shadereen and not tell anyone.”

Kovan looked up at her again. Damn the Fates, why couldn’t he just kill Sadira and be done with it? “Azurynn doesn’t try to take over or give orders; she pretty much stays out of everything if we leave her alone. I don’t care what she does as long as she doesn’t challenge us for leadership because the Fates know she would take both of us down.”

“If we are the leadership, she should have to ask before running off with Kojen to play with her experiments. She got another Shadow Rider killed.”

Kovan narrowed his eyes. He didn’t like the situation with Azurynn any better than Sadira, but there wasn’t anything they could do about it. Fates knew he wanted to kill Azurynn but even if she was somehow an easy target, he couldn’t do it. He would love to see Sadira dead too. Kovan’s frustration over his inability to kill women rose to the surface. He couldn’t kill her, but he could piss her off. “Your father died almost two months ago.”

Sadira’s face became a frozen mask. “What?”

He shrugged and bent back to his sword. “Word came in yesterday. Apparently he died. Your brother became a Guardian and your sister Kalila has taken the throne.”

Sadira turned and walked away calmly. For a moment, he thought he had miscalculated how she would take the news. She almost made it across the cavern before grabbing a chair with both hands and hurtling it into a wall with a shriek. It splintered into wooden shards against the rock. Kovan ignored her and went back to work. That was the reaction he’d expected. More shrieks and crashes followed her as she continued down the hall. Several of the other Shadow Riders in the cavern watched the doorway Sadira had disappeared through with wary eyes.

Kovan chuckled. That should keep her busy for a while. He had just lost himself in the soothing motions of sharpening the blade again when Dusa landed at the mouth of the Kormai. Oksana ripped away her safety straps, jumped down and then stormed into the cave, her green eyes flashing. Kovan leaned back. “How did it go in Trilene?”

She shot him a glare. “I told you that either you or one of the other men would have been a better choice. They reacted just as I said they would. Those moronic Trilene and their views of women didn’t make it easy. I had to kill several of the ruling house’s children to get it through their heads that I was no longer one of their women to be kicked around.”

Kovan raised an eyebrow. “I’m surprised you didn’t kill the men who run the High Houses.”

“So I’d be stuck with a new bunch of idiots to deal with?” She shook her head. “Killing their children was far more efficient. It preserved the current leadership. Besides, people can watch adults be killed all day long. But start disposing of their offspring though and they come around fairly quickly.”

“And did they come around as we hoped?”

A servant carried a tray of damp cloths and a drink into the cavern. Oksana grabbed the drink and downed it before pulling a towel from the tray. “Yes, once I finally had their attention. They are not eager to change the way they run things. I told them they wouldn’t be able to run their nation the way they do if they sided with the Guardians.”

“You could have easily alienated them by killing their children.” Kovan sighed. “It was a risky move.”

Oksana shrugged and started wiping the dust from her face with the towel. “They can have more and if not then they should have taken me seriously to begin with.” She tossed the towel back on the tray. “I’m going to change my clothes.”

“You better watch out for Sadira.”

She paused. “Why? What happened now?”

He laughed. “Azurynn killed another of her mages and I told her of the changes in Markene.”

Oksana flipped her long, golden hair over her shoulder and rolled her eyes. “Sadira needs to let Markene go and stop obsessing over it.”

Kovan went back to sharpening the long blade. “I just said to watch out for her.”

Oksana snorted and walked through the doorway. She was the only other one besides Kovan and Azurynn who really wasn’t afraid of her. Oksana was a powerful user of Shadow weather and another even match for Sadira.

Sadira stared around her chambers, panting. Nothing was left untouched. She’d torn everything apart. How dare her father die unless it was by her hands? And now that rotten, scheming Kalila held the throne that was supposed to be hers.

She paced across the room, kicking the debris out of the way. Markene was hers; no one would take it from her. The rest of the world would belong to the Shadow Riders, but Sadira had every intention of ruling from Markene. She snatched a fallen vase and sent it shattering against the wall. Markene was hers!

Sadira turned cold eyes on Larna who cowered in the corner. “Clean this up.” Seeing only one sister left still irritated her. But Drisa had killed herself and there was nothing Sadira could do about it. Kalila, on the other hand, she had plans for.

She turned her back on the room as Larna scrambled to clean up the mess. Sadira felt calmer now. Azurynn was a thorn in her side but one day, she would get that woman too. As she walked into the main chamber, Azurynn looked up with hooded eyes. She sat with another black chain in her hands. A massive bruise spread across one side of her jaw. Her dark green eyes edged with black followed Sadira across the chamber and she had the feeling Azurynn had heard her thoughts.

Ignoring the feel of the woman’s eyes boring into her back, Sadira called Ranit to her. As soon as the dragon fully settled on the floor, she climbed into the saddle and fastened the straps.

Kovan strolled into the cavern and stopped. “Where are you going?”

A mocking smile spread across Azurynn’s face. “She is going to visit her obsession. Excuse me, her birth nation.”

Sadira narrowed her eyes at the woman. “You are a fine one to talk. I recall an entire fleet of ships filled with dead men.”

Azurynn’s smile remained in place. “I did what I needed to do and then put it behind me.” Her smiled faded as her eyes grew hard. “I don’t play games like you do.”

“You don’t know what you are talking about,” Sadira snapped.

“Don’t I?” Azurynn ran her fingers over the chain slowly. “You had every opportunity to do what needed to be done in Markene when you went back there to steal your sisters. Instead of killing everyone and walking away, you played games. You stole your sisters for pets and then allowed one to escape. You could have left Markene inhabited by nothing but ghosts. Now look at you, still trying to claim something that was never yours in the first place.”

“It was always mine,” Sadira hissed. How dare this woman air her mistakes like that? What are you going to do about it? a little voice whispered in her head. What can you do? She shook the thoughts away, determined to ignore Azurynn. She couldn’t keep from hearing the woman’s soft, mocking laughter though.

Kovan cleared his throat. “Are you sure now is the time for this, Sadira?”

Sadira shot him a withering glare. “This is none of your business.” At her command, Ranit left the cavern and launched into the sky. The air rippled into a black swirl as a Jump opened. They passed through into the icy darkness. When they came out of the other side, they were halfway to the Blood River.

She hated the short Jumps they had to make, but they couldn’t Slide like a Guardian dragon. Instead, they had to pass through the same void a soul sphere led to. They could streak back to the Kormai in a matter of seconds, but leaving was much harder and had to be taken in a series of Jumps through the void. The further they got from the Kormai, the shorter the Jump until just west of the Galdar River. After that they had to fly over land.

Another dark Jump spun open and the icy black enveloped her for a moment before they came out the other side. Sulwyna had complained that the whispers inside the void bothered her although Azurynn claimed their tortured cries were a form of musical entertainment. Sadira didn’t hear them though. It must be something only those who used Shadow Spirit magic were able to hear.

Again the black swirl spun open and the dark void surrounded her.

Kalila walked through the halls with Lalani on one side and Sehlas on the other. The group of Weather mages trailed behind, holding their own quiet conversations. She wasn’t their queen. They were here to protect her and help her protect Markene from any visits by Shadow Riders, particularly Sadira. Kalila knew that visit was coming. The skin on the back of her neck prickled and she suppressed a shiver.

She pulled herself away from her dark thoughts and tried to pay attention to Lalani and Sehlas. Both were well-versed in what it took to run a nation, although they often wanted to go about it in different ways.

Lalani approached everything in a cool, practical manner while Sehlas allowed more emotion into his advice, though his was no less practical. The two often quarreled with each other as they were doing now.

“Someone is stirring the pot in this nation and they need to be ferreted out,” Lalani said.

Sehlas shook his head, his hazel eyes troubled. “You cannot start randomly questioning people; it will turn them away from Kalila rather than drawing their support.”

Lalani arched one slim red eyebrow. “And what do you propose? Allowing whomever is causing the dissention to continue? I may not have the strength of a Dragon Rider; however, I am quite capable of detecting lies if I am touching a person. It is not as if I plan to torture people until they give me answers.” She stepped around a cat that refused to move, bending to draw her hand over its fur. Without missing a step she straightened and continued, “Torture is not condoned by me or by Galdrilene.”

Sehlas sighed, a patient look settling over his features. “Any kind of questioning would put people on the defensive. It would make them feel as if guilt is assumed until their answers prove them innocent.”

Lalani gazed at him a moment. “What is your point? If we bring someone in to question it is because we do assume their guilt.”

Kalila rubbed her temples. How many times were they going to have this argument? Sometimes it seemed as if the two argued just for the sake of arguing. They passed her mother standing in the doorway of her apartments. Kalila searched her face, trying to find some semblance of the woman she remembered.

Her mother gazed back with empty, muddy brown eyes. No, they weren’t completely empty. Something flickered in their depths, something that made the hairs on the back of her neck stand up. For a moment, Kalila thought she saw cold hatred staring back at her, but in the next instant it was gone and only the empty eyes of an empty woman stared back. Her mother stepped inside the room and shut the door.

Lalani’s cool gaze glanced back and then rested on Kalila. “She is one we should question.”

“What?” Kalila nearly stumbled. Sehlas’ hand grabbed her arm to steady her though she didn’t look at him. “You want to question my mother? She is an empty shell caught up in grief over my father; she no longer cares about anything. Even so, she is my mother. What exactly are you accusing her of?”

Kalila didn’t have a lot of warm feelings or memories of her mother. Those feelings from childhood always came from memories of her father. He had been doting, supportive, and loving. Her mother had always been more concerned with her status and making sure her daughters achieved the best status possible through marriage. Kalila remembered her as often being cold and calculating…

No, her mother wouldn’t betray her that way. She had always wanted the highest rank for them. What was higher than queen? Why would she want to remove her own daughter from the throne? It wasn’t as if her mother wanted it; she didn’t think it was proper at all for a woman to rule Markene.

The memory of her mother’s anger floated across her mind. The only emotion the woman had shown had flashed bright and hot the day after Kalila took the throne and her brother, Toren, left for Galdrilene. She recalled when her mother cornered her after the feast, and the shrieking accusations that Kalila had completely overstepped propriety and in the process stolen her only son from her. Had it really only been fifteen days since she took the throne? If felt like a lifetime already.

Could her mother be the cause behind this festering wound in Markene’s solidarity? Did her mother not realize that the very existence of this nation rode on its ability to stand strong as a unified force? The Shadow Riders would tear Markene apart from the inside out if there were weak links in the chain.

Lalani stopped abruptly in the hall, her eyes unfocused. Kalila stopped and looked at her in concern. “Lalani?”

The color drained from Lalani’s already light-skinned face as her pale blue eyes grew wide. “A Shadow comes. I can feel it.”

Kalila’s heart slammed into her chest,and for a moment, she stood rooted to the ground while she tried to rein in her fear. This was not the place for it. She laughed softly, shaking her head at the irony of such a thought.

Sehlas raised his eyebrows. “The approach of one of these Shadow Riders is a source of humor?”

Kalila turned to him, her emotions now held under tight control. “I was telling myself that now wasn’t the time for fear and then realized when a Shadow Rider is coming it is the exact time to be afraid.”

Shrieks of pain and terror echoed down the corridor from the inner courtyard. Kalila straightened her back and squared her shoulders. “It would seem our ‘visitor’ has arrived.” With far more bravado than she felt, she turned and walked toward the cacophony beyond the doors at the end of the hall.

The mages fell in around her as the Defenders placed themselves as a living shield in front of her and the mages. She paused when they reached the doors, took several deep breaths, then motioned the Defenders to open them.

Ranit crouched in the middle of the inner courtyard; despair and darkness rolled from under her outstretched wings. It was stronger than Kalila remembered. Ranit had matured in the last year and a half, and the blackness that accompanied her attested to it.

Kalila’s eyes roamed the courtyard. What she could see of it around Ranit churned her stomach. Several men lay in heaps of blackened, blistered skin. Green flames licked up one side of the courtyard wall, burning the stone as if it were wood. On the ground, several charred corpses lay. The stench of burning flesh and bone filled the air as the acid-like fire consumed them.

Lord Haden and his retinue cowered not far from the keep doors. She shot him a disgusted look. This was how he would have ruled Markene in a time when Shadow Riders had returned? Cowering in the corner at the first test of his backbone? She turned her attention back to the horror wrought by a single Shadow Dragon.

Several more bodies lay in the center of the courtyard mere inches from the tips of Ranit’s wings. Each one was sliced neatly in half. Kalila swallowed the bile that burned the back of her throat. It looked like the kind of damage the edge of a Slide would do if one wasn’t careful.

Fear clawed at Kalila’s insides as she regarded the woman standing in front of Ranit. “You are not welcome here, Sadira,” she said, relieved that her voice betrayed none of the terror pooling in her limbs.

Sadira walked slowly forward, her eyes narrowed as they swept the Defenders and mages. “So it’s true. I wasn’t sure how much I believed when I heard you were trying to steal my throne from me.”

Kalila lifted her chin. “The throne was never yours. It is mine by birthright.”

“Birthright?” Sadira spat. “I was the first born to the king. It’s my birthright!”

Kalila felt a tug on her magic as Katian linked their power together. A strong wall of air came up around them though she knew no one else could see it. She focused her attention back on Sadira, carefully avoiding looking at Ranit’s face. That ugly thing’s eyes haunted enough of her nightmares; she didn’t need to see them again in real life.

“I will never let Markene fall to you, Sadira.”

A cloud of oily black shadows flowed from Sadira’s hands and came up against the shield of air. They slithered across the surface of it and Sadira laughed. The sound of it made Kalila’s skin crawl.

“Really? This is the defense you offer Markene?” Her dark eyes flashed with a malignant light as the shadows started to ooze through the shield.

Every scar on Kalila’s body burned and itched as they remembered their touch. Sadira smiled as more tendrils broke through the shield and trailed through the air. “Your mages aren’t stronger than me, little sister. Not even when they are linked.”

“They aren’t the only mages here, Sadira. It seems that magic is something we have in common.”

Sadira’s eyes narrowed as more shadows slipped through. “It really doesn’t matter now, does it?”

Arryn glanced back at Kalila. “Lift the shield enough for us to get through. We can’t defend you from behind it.”

Kalila shook her head slightly. “You can’t protect me from this. She would kill you before you took two steps and enjoy every second of it.”

The first wave of shadows had nearly reached Kalila and the mages when an arrow flew through the air and thudded into Sadira’s back. She stumbled forward then looked down at the point protruding just below her left breast. Sadira turned with a hiss and looked at Ranit. “Take care of that.”

The black turned and set one of the gate towers on fire. Screams from inside it poured into the courtyard. Kalila watched in helpless rage as the tower and those inside it burned. Ranit’s fire had engulfed the entire structure; there was no chance for escape. Someone in that tower had given their life in defense of hers.

Sadira coughed and blood splattered her lip. She sneered at Kalila. “Another time sister.”

Ranit turned back to her rider as the tower blazed and Sadira pulled herself into the saddle, grunting and smearing the black scales with blood. Ranit opened her mouth and green flames poured out. Kalila instinctively cringed, waiting to feel the burn. She glanced at Katian. Sweat rolled down the other woman’s face as she struggled to hold the shield against the strength of the dragon’s fire. A lesser mage wouldn’t have been able to hold it, but Katian was strong in her magic.

The fire suddenly stopped and the black leaped into the air, her wings working in quick, heavy bursts. Out the corner of her eye Kalila saw several whirlpools in the air. Just as Guardian dragons erupted through the Slides, a pool of darkness swirled and opened. Shryden and Nydara both sent walls of flame at the Shadow Dragon. A shriek like the sound of nails across metal filled the air as the black dove into the dark opening and disappeared.

Katian let the weave go and slumped against the wall behind her. Kalila swayed slightly, feeling the backlash from the shared power. Sehlas steadied her. Within minutes the walls of the courtyard were groaning under the weight of seven dragons. Kirynn covered the burning wall and tower with weaves and the green fire finally sputtered and died.

The riders dismounted and followed the stairs down from the wall walk. As they approached, she heard Mckale. His eyes dulled to an iron-gray, he scowled at Maleena. “What was that? I told you to hang back.”

Maleena laughed softly. “That was Nydara’s doing, not mine. She is her own being. You know how strong her feelings are about Shadow Dragons. Besides, I was safe with her.”

“It was too dangerous,” Mckale growled.

Maleena patted him on the arm. “I’m pregnant, my love, not broken. I can still handle myself and my dragon.”

Mckale gave her a look and Kalila had the feeling Mckale would prefer to keep Maleena wrapped in swaddling and stuffed into their lair in Galdrilene for the duration of the pregnancy.

Kellinar nodded at Katian as he approached. He looked at Kalila with a wry grin. “Less than a month and already getting into trouble I see.”

She smiled back. “I’m trying. Sorry I couldn’t cause trouble sooner.”

His ice-blue eyes danced as he chuckled. “Between Kirynn disappearing and Sadira coming here, I’m starting to think I will never make it to Trilene.”

Kalila looked around at the riders. “Why so many of you?”

Maleena smiled. “Lalani’s distress and need came through quite clearly. However, it didn’t tell us how many Shadow Riders we would be facing when we arrived. Thankfully, it was only one.”

Kalila’s hands started to tremble now that the danger was over and she wiped her sweaty palms on her skirt. Drawing a shaky breath she glanced around the courtyard. “Thank you for coming as soon as you did. Katian was doing her best, but Sadira is so strong. If it hadn’t been for someone in the gate tower putting an arrow through her, I don’t think you would have arrived in time.”

Vaddoc frowned. “You need more protection.”

Kirynn nodded. “I think I know a couple of younger riders who could be stationed here, one of which who would do well with a little more responsibility. They are young to be fighting mature Shadow Dragons, but they would only need to hold them off long enough for us to get here.”

“Who?” Mckale asked. His arms were crossed over his chest and he still looked irritated, but the iron-gray of his eyes was slowly fading back to silver.

“Loki, for one. That boy needs direction, something to point his young energy at.” Kirynn held up a hand to stop the protests easily visible in the eyes of the others. “He may be young, but we can’t keep him on apron strings. He’s a fully-fledged Dragon Rider. The sooner we start treating him as such, the sooner he begins to act like it.”

Kellinar nodded. “I think you’re right, but he hasn’t completely recovered from his folly yet.”

“I know,” Kirynn said. “Jocelynn and her green Adirynn, along with Varnen and his blue Abrax can also come. Loki will come once he is healed. That would give a couple of mature riders to help.”

Kalila stared at them. “You would be willing to station Dragon Riders here?”

“We have to,” Taela said, her eyes sad. “We can’t leave Markene like this. In fact, I would suggest we station two or three in Haraban as well. They don’t even have a Spirit mage to summon help if they need it. We’ll have to talk to my father, of course, but I doubt he would object. Tallula and Tania can go to Haraban with their dragons.”

Mckale nodded. “That will only leave Toren, Belynn, Nolan, Brock, and Sumara at Galdrilene since their dragons have barely taken their first flights. Or in the case of Toren, too young to fly at all.”

“Galdrilene has survived before with nothing but young dragons,” Vaddoc said. “Besides, Bardeck and Mernoth are there and they handle all of the training.”

“And Emallya,” Maleena added.

He inclined his head toward her. “And Emallya when she is not off trying to save future riders or mages.”

Kirynn looked at Kalila. “Vaddoc and I will let Bardeck and Emallya know. I imagine it will only be a couple of days before we Slide them here.”

Kalila took a deep breath and felt some of her tension fading. Markene would have definite protection. The Shadow Riders were still a major threat, but her nation wouldn’t be helpless. Now she could concentrate on finding who was causing so much trouble in Markene. She didn’t need a faceless traitor tearing things apart again.

Kalila smiled gratefully. “Thank you for coming to our rescue and for providing a safety net for us.”

Serena laid a hand on her arm. “We are Guardians, this is what we do.”

Kovan looked up from the maps on his desk as Fonja knocked lightly at the open door. He scowled. He hadn’t called for the servant this evening. There was too much to do even if bedding down with her for a night sounded better. She never tried to fight him; in fact, she was quite willing and uninhibited which suited him just fine. He was not his father. He wanted a bed partner that was willing and enjoyed herself. Fonja gave him that, and in return, he was gentle with her.

“What do you want, Fonja?”

She shuffled nervously in the doorway, making no effort to come into the room. That wasn’t like her. Outside of the bed, she was always meek and withdrawn; however, she never acted afraid of him. Of the others yes, but not of him. Impatience shot through Kovan and he slammed a fist on the desk, feeling a flash of anger at the way she flinched. His mother had flinched like every time his father slammed a door or hit something.

Kovan ground his teeth together and tried to keep the anger out of his voice. “What is the problem?”

Fonja finally looked at him; her eyes were wet with unshed tears. “I’m…I’m with child. I wasn’t sure…for a long time.”

Kovan froze. With child? He couldn’t…wouldn’t be a father. His magic rose up, swift and strong. A simple weave and he would kill the baby and end the pregnancy. No child was going to turn him into his father. He would end it right now. Kovan stood abruptly and his chair clattered to the floor. She flinched again, terror pooling with the tears in her eyes.

He strode around the desk, grabbed her by the upper arm and hauled her down the hall toward the kitchen. When they reached it, he shoved her forward. She stumbled a few steps into the room and turned to stare at him.

“Pack some food.” He was growling at her but he didn’t care.

Fonja clutched her skirts and stared at him unmoving. “Damn the Fates to the void!” Kovan stormed into the kitchen after her and grabbed a burlap sack off a shelf. He yanked it open and shoved fruit, bread, cheese, and whatever else he could stuff in it, no longer sure exactly what was in the bag.

He thrust it into her arms and propelled her toward the main cavern. As they stepped into the massive cave he shouted, “Quillan, get down here.”

Azurynn looked up at him from the bench she reclined on, the black chain still in her hands. “Use her, put a babe in her belly, and toss her away. So you do have a nice cold heart in there somewhere.” A lazy smile spread across her bruised face.

“Shut up, Azurynn.” Kovan glared at her as his black dragon settled on the onyx floor. He shoved Fonja toward the dragon.

She looked at him with wide, panicked eyes and dug her heels in, fighting him for the first time. “What are you going to do?” She glanced at the massive black and the color drained from her face. “You’re not…not going to let him eat…”

“Stupid woman, get moving.” Kovan easily overpowered her and dragged her closer to Quillan. The closer they got to the dragon, the more she fought him. He grabbed her by the shoulders and shook her in a bruising grip. The burlap bag hit the floor and an apple tumbled out and rolled across it. Azurynn reached down, picked it up and took a large bite. Her hooded eyes watched them with an amused light. Kovan didn’t have time to care. He had to get Fonja out of here before he changed his mind.

Kovan lowered his face to Fonja’s until it was mere inches away and roared, “Shut up and stop fighting me.” He gave her another shake for good measure. “You have two choices. Either you leave now and never come back, or I use my magic to kill that baby right now and end the pregnancy.”

Fonja froze, her gray eyes wide and frightened. Kovan knew she had grown attached to him as some captives do, but she needed to forget about this place. “Do you understand me?” She stood mute. He shook her again, his grip tightening until he knew she would bear the bruises for weeks. “Choose, now! Before I take the choice from you.”

She started trembling; tears ran down her cheeks. She was terrified of him now but Kovan didn’t care. Because of her, because of that thing growing inside her, he was hurting her like his father had hurt his mother. It was her fault. How dare she allow herself to become pregnant? It didn’t make a difference that she hadn’t a choice. It was her fault and the fault of the child that he couldn’t control himself now.

“I’ll l...leave,” she managed to choke out. “Please, don’t hurt me.”

With a growl, Kovan shoved her roughly toward Quillan. The black gazed down at her with disinterest as she stumbled to his side. The dragon lowered his bulk to the floor and stretched out a leg. Kovan snatched up the burlap bag and followed her. Within minutes he had her in front of him in the saddle. He shoved the bag into her arms again and fastened the safety straps. There were none for her and he didn’t care. If she somehow fell from the dragon and died, it would solve everything.

As Quillan lumbered from the cavern and lifted off, Kovan turned that thought over in his mind. If she struggled even the tiniest amount, he would yank her from in front of him and be done with it. His mother’s face, her violet eyes alight as she smiled at him while he climbed the tree, floated across his memories and he ground his teeth together. He needed to get this over with.

A dark whirlpool opened up and the dragon dove into it. The empty blackness of the void enveloped them. Kovan felt Fonja stiffen in front of him. If she cried out, he didn’t hear it. The void swallowed all sounds. He still didn’t believe Azurynn heard voices in it.

They came out the other side of the Jump above the waving grasses of the Ash Plains. Quillan made a slow descent, landing heavily. Kovan pushed Fonja away from him. She barely managed to scramble down partway before falling the last few feet. The burlap bag landed next to her.

Without a word, he signaled to Quillan and the black lifted off, leaving Fonja sobbing in the grass. Kovan felt nothing. He really didn’t care if the fall made her lose the baby; in fact he was still tempted to kill it before they left. He didn’t care if she made it to safety or was killed by Kojen or thirst or any of the number of things that might kill her. As they made the Jump back to the Kormai, his mind was already turning back to the maps on his desk.

When he returned to the main cavern, he found Sadira on her knees on the floor. An arrow was sticking out from beneath her left breast and blood splattered on her lips. “What in the black void happened?”

Azurynn made no effort to help Sadira. Instead she laughed, the silky sound seemed more ominous. coming from the twisted Spirit user. “Lady Revenge came back with her tail between her legs. I’m guessing she didn’t manage to kill her sister or take her precious Markene.”

Sadira shot her a murderous look. “Flame off you worthless spawn of a back alley dog,” she said, coughing up more blood. She held her arm tight around her ribs, a small groan escaping past her lips.

She looked at Kovan. “Don’t just stand there, heal me.”

Kovan stared at her. He could let her die; it wasn’t like he was the one who shot her with an arrow, although he applauded whoever had done it. She narrowed her dark eyes at him. “This wouldn’t have happened if there had been more than one of us.”

Azurynn shifted a new link of the chain into her hands, staring at in concentration. “Some of us had more productive things to do.”

“Like playing with your dragon-blasted chains that don’t work?”

A dangerous light glinted in Azurynn’s eyes when she looked up. “Anything is more productive than the waste of time you just spent.”

Kovan cleared his throat. “Leave off, Azurynn.”

Sadira turned her cold, dark eyes on him. “Are you going to heal me or not?”

Was he? He hated this woman. If he let her die, he would only have Azurynn to worry about. None of the others were strong enough to challenge him except Oksana and he generally got along with her.

Bern came flowing out of the shadows along one wall, his bent and broken frame moving slowly. “Can’t afford to lose her.” His raspy whisper was louder than usual. “She must be healed.”

Kovan glared at the Benduiren. Bern was right and damn him to the void for it. He looked back down at Sadira. Healing her would hurt; he would make sure of it. Somehow, he knew it would make him feel better about leaving Fonja alive.

He grabbed her arm in a crushing grip and shoved the healing weave into her. Her screams made a pleasant backdrop against his anger at Fonja. Yes, this would make things right.

Kellinar looked up as they rode toward Trilene. Some wrenching of the world in the distance past had punched the ground up in a series of plateaus and canyons. The city perched on the edge where the prairie bled into the ravines. Atop the tallest plateau the Trilene District gleamed white in the sun. The wall of the district clung to the very edge of the plateau. The red-tiled roofs of the large High House rose above the wall. Pennants snapped in the ever present breeze.

A gentle slope led from that plateau down to the next larger one. More white walls encircled the Dellar District. And over six hundred paces below them on the level of the prairie lay the Mallay; imprisoned on two sides by the cliffs of the other districts and a high, dirty wall on the other two.

Kellinar glanced at the three women who trailed behind him, talking among themselves. Anevay had finally joined them now that Latia was adept enough at Sliding. It was nice to be together with both of his bondmates again, even if he did worry about them. With a sigh he looked ahead toward Trilene once more.

The heat of high summer pressed down on him and the humidity made his shirt cling to his skin. He’d forgotten how oppressive moisture-laden air could be after two and a half years spent away from it. The day he’d left Trilene, dressed as a woman, seemed so long ago.

Kellinar tensed as they rode closer. The last time he was here, he and Serena were running for their lives. Now he was back and would have to deal with the Trilene in order to bring the city under the protection of Galdrilene. But not just yet. He watched the edge of the road for the familiar signs. They’d passed the road that led to the large lake; it should be here. Ah, there it was.

Most people wouldn’t notice the flat, plain-looking rock a few paces off the road. It was ordinary enough, except it shouldn’t be there. However, most people didn’t spend their time worrying about rocks. Kellinar turned his horse and followed the signs with Taela, Serena, and Anevay behind him. The spindly trees west of the road swallowed them.

Worry ran along the bond from Taela as she brought her horse as close to his as possible. “Where are we going? In case you haven’t noticed, this isn’t a road.”

“I’m well aware this isn’t a road. It isn’t meant to be.” He flashed her a smile and scanned the trees. He saw the pair of shoes tied together by their laces and hung across a branch next to the trunk of the tree. He angled the horse past the shoes.

Taela sighed with impatience. “Will this wandering around in the woods take us to the Dellar?”

“We aren’t going to the Dellar. Not until I’ve had a chance to check the mood of the city.”

“Where are we going?” Anevay asked.

“I might be wrong,” Serena offered, “but I am guessing he is headed for the Thieves’ Entrance.”

Disapproval flowed from Taela and he resisted chuckling. He knew the argument that was coming.

“Thieves’ Entrance? Kellinar, it isn’t thieves we need to talk to. They aren’t going to be the people who make this decision.”

Exactly what he thought she would say. Kellinar leveled a look at her. “Taela, there is no better way to judge the tone of a city than observing the underside of it. Shadow Riders have visited both border nations and Markene. I won’t be foolish enough to think they haven’t been here. And you would be surprised at what the common folk can decide. How, given the proper circumstances and alliances, they can push even a king.”

Taela’s eyes widened, shock plain on her face. “What you are suggesting is sedition.”

“You look at this through the eyes of a royal, Taela. I don’t give a Shadow Dragon’s foul rear end if the people of the Dellar and Trilene Districts rot in the Kormai. And from what I know of them, they will be all too happy to do just that if they think they will gain something from it.”

Kellinar planned to take Bahar’s words to heart, but there was only so far he would go. “I won’t allow them to drag the people of the Mallay down with them. Call it sedition if you want, but I have no loyalty to the Trilene High Houses. My ties are with Galdrilene and Shryden. I’m a Guardian and that is what I intend to do. If there are those in the Trilene or the Dellar who don’t want to fall to the Shadow Riders then I will do my best to help them. However, any lingering loyalty I may have to this place lies with the people of the Mallay.”

Taela didn’t say anything, but her tightlipped frown and the disapproval rolling off her said volumes. She didn’t understand. Her father was a fair ruler. Kellinar knew the High Houses too well to expect this to go the way Taela hoped.

“I, for one, am interested to see this infamous Thieves’ Entrance,” Anevay said. Kellinar sensed she agreed with him. Anevay hadn’t been raised with kings and queens. She was raised in Galdrilene where the people were free to unseat leaders who failed to properly lead and Dragon Law was observed. She had heard enough about the Mallay to know the High Houses of Trilene were failing miserably in both of those areas.

Serena didn’t say anything for or against. Although the thoughtful expression on her face made him think she would side with him on this. Considering her past in this city, he would be surprised if she didn’t take his side. Kellinar hated to have Taela against him; hopefully experiencing life in the Mallay, even for a few days, would enlighten her to the way the city worked.

“I will stand with you,” Shryden sent.

Gratitude and love washed over him as he sent back, “I know you will. Taela will eventually understand, and if not, hopefully forgive me.”

“She will understand. Because of her magic and your bond, she can see the memories you have of this place. But our bond goes much deeper. We are one. I can feel what you felt in those memories. We will do what has to be done.”

He continued to follow the subtle signs that led the way around Trilene and into the canyon that cut behind the southern side of the city. Kellinar halted in a clump of scraggly trees on the rim of the canyon. The others followed suit. He looked back at them. “The trail that leads to the bottom is long, narrow and steep. I’m sure the horses can handle it; however, I would feel better if we led them down rather than ride. As much as I would hate to lose one of the horses, I would hate to lose one of you more. I know your dragons would be quick to Slide into the canyon to keep you from dying, but I don’t want everyone to know about them yet.” He glanced up. High above, four dark specks circled in the washed out blue of the sky.

They reached the ravine floor without mishap over an hour later. Not far from the end of the trail, close up against the stone wall, stood a long tying post. Kellinar tied his horse there and waved to Serena, Anevay, and Taela to do the same.

Taela stopped him as he started to walk away. “What about the saddlebags? Are you just going to leave them there with a bunch of thieves around?”

“Taela, the thieves of the Mallay don’t steal from their own.”

“How do they know who these horses belong to?”

“They don’t, but no one except a thief comes here.” He cocked a grin at her and started walking again. “Don’t worry, the horses and saddlebags are safer here than they would be in the Dellar or the Trilene.”

Kellinar walked a short distance from the tying post. A narrow stream flowed in the middle of the canyon floor. Deep shadows shrouded everything, bringing much needed relief from the heat; the sun only shone down here when it was at its height. The wall of the ravine rose up rough and uneven. At one point, it jutted out in a curve, hiding the wall behind it. Kellinar stepped around the rocky outcrop. The solid wood door stood flush with the rock.

Serena looked around. “I always wondered where this was. Does Loki know where it is?”

“I never showed it to him; he was too young at the time.” Kellinar laughed softly. “I highly doubt that stopped him from finding it though.” He knocked three times on the door and waited. It wouldn’t be long; someone was always on the other side. Whoever had taken his place as the leader—or the leader’s second—would hear the bell ringing when the door watcher pulled the rope and make the trek down to the entrance.

“Please be careful in there, Kellinar.” Concern filled Shryden’s sending. “Once you’re inside, there is no way I can get to you if something should go wrong.”

“I will be fine in here,” Kellinar sent. He tried to bury the seed of doubt deep inside him. Under normal circumstances, his words couldn’t be truer. These weren’t normal circumstances though; he used magic. Would they really welcome him or would they try to kill him?

“You can’t hide your doubt from me, no matter how hard you try. We are one,” Shryden returned. “Please be careful.”

Kellinar rubbed his forehead. “I will be very careful. Besides, Taela will lose her temper with anyone who tries to kill me and probably stick them full of knives.” His attempt to relieve the dragon’s anxiety with humor was only marginally helpful. He still felt apprehension flowing through his greatest friend. “If you adjust your flight pattern over the Mallay, you will see a broad stone balcony that fronts the Thieves’ Caves, much like what is in front of your lair only sized for people. I will make my way there and do my best to stay within your sight. Will that make you feel better?”

“Thank you, Kellinar.”

He felt Shryden shift in his mind as the dragon angled toward the Mallay. It shouldn’t take more than a few minutes to make it out onto the terrace. As long as someone hurried up and answered the shadow-blasted door.

Finally, he heard footsteps on the stone floor beyond the thick wooden door. A square in the upper part slid open and a pair of intense, pale blue eyes stared at him for a long moment before it slammed shut and the heavy latch slid back. The door swung open on silent hinges and an older man stood before them; his short, nearly white hair and deep lined face at odds with his strong body.

Kellinar waited; his body tense and his magic held at the ready.

The man lunged at him and engulfed him in a tight hug. “Kellinar, my boy!”

The tension in Kellinar melted away as he returned the hug. “Belan, it’s good to see you again.”

Belan stepped back but he kept one hand on Kellinar’s shoulder. “What happened to you? Where have you been?” He frowned and cocked his head slightly to the side. “And what in the name of the Fates did you do to your hair?”

Kellinar couldn’t help laughing as he clasped his hand on Belan’s shoulder. “It’s a long story. May we have entrance? I don’t mean to be rude or push you, but I have someone very important waiting to see me on the balcony.”

Belan motioned to the door. “Of course, of course.” He looked at the three women behind Kellinar and inclined his head with a smile. “Serena, it is good to see you again. Still in the company of the less reputable I see.”

Serena laughed softly and walked forward to kiss him on the cheek. “You know me; I can’t seem to stay away from the scoundrel.”

He turned to Taela and his eyebrows rose as he clasped his hands behind his back. “And who do we have here?”

Taela raised her chin. “I am Taela Shamirrin, daughter of Bahar, King of Haraban and a senior member of the Tower of Spirit.”

Belan’s white eyebrows nearly climbed into his hairline as he looked at Kellinar. “You bring a princess to the Thieves’ Caves?”

Kellinar sighed, sensing the prickly indignation flowing through the bond. Bahar had lectured him on dealing with royals in a more diplomatic way; apparently he neglected to lecture Taela on the opposite. “I assure you, she is much more than a princess. In fact, she isn’t even a princess anymore; she gave up that claim in order to accept a greater one. Beyond that, she is my bondmate.” Seeing the confused look on Belan’s face he explained, “Like a wife, only more.”

The other man threw his head back and laughed. “A wife? You? I never thought I would see the day you would settle down.” He glanced at Serena. “I’m surprised it wasn’t you.”

Serena shook her head. “Kellinar and I are very good friends, nothing more.”

Belan turned to Anevay. “And we have another stunning woman of an unusual but beautiful skin color. Who might you be?”

Kellinar laughed inside; if Belan was surprised he had a wife, he was about to be even more so. “That is Anevay, also my bondmate, my wife.”

“Your…” Belan looked at him like he’d grown and extra head. “Two wives? You truly are crazy my old friend. One wife to nag is enough for any man foolish enough to settle down and yet you have taken two. I’m not sure if I should envy you or feel sorry for you.”

Two sets of eyes, one dark blue and one rich brown, narrowed at Belan. Kellinar cleared his throat. “We are happy enough.”

He glanced at Taela again and shook his head before looking at Kellinar. “Two wives and one a royal no less; you have changed, my friend.” He waved them toward the passageway beyond the door. “Come, come, join us. You will have to tell what has happened all this time to change you so much.” He held his arm out to Taela. “My lady, allow me to escort you in so that you may see how the other side lives.”

Kellinar stepped smoothly between them. Belan was a good man despite his status as a thief; his touch shouldn’t bother her through the shield, but he didn’t want to take any chances.

At the same time, Anevay flowed forward and gave Belan a dazzling smile as she laid her hand on his arm. “I would be delighted if you would escort me. Taela will prefer to walk with Kellinar.”

Belan seemed briefly stunned by Anevay’s beauty for a moment before he recovered. “It shall be my pleasure, my lady.”

They followed the dim tunnel through rock. Behind them the watcher closed the door. Just above their heads the long cord that ran from the door to the upper chambers and connected with a bell, draped along the hooks set in the ceiling.

Kellinar looked at his old mentor and noticed the new lines the last couple of years had carved into his face. “So, you are the leader of the thieves again?”

Belan nodded and ducked under a low spot in the ceiling. “That I am. I thought when you took over I was set for a nice retirement here in the Thieves’ Caves. But when you left, there really wasn’t anybody else that could do it. A few of them are good, real good, but they lack other knowledge, like the ability to read or count properly. There are a couple of men that stepped forward to learn. They are doing quite well now and have begun to take over a lot of the duties, but no one seems anxious for me to step down.”

He glanced back at Kellinar. “Honestly, I think they have been holding out in the hopes you would return.”

“Even with the charges that were laid against me when I left?”

Belan waved his words away. “We all know you didn’t really do it. They caught and put to death the man that did. Caught him right outside the gates of the Mallay the next morning they did. You didn’t have to leave.”

Oh Fates, they had killed the man they dragged away that day. It seemed so long ago now. Guilt tightened his chest. The man had fallen right in front of him, the memory of his terrified screams as he pled his innocence echoed through his memory. The man had died for no reason.

Not only had they killed the man, they had done it in cold blood. They knew exactly who they were looking for. Keepers had shown up at that inn looking for him and Serena a full five days after they escaped. They must have covered up their failure to find the true magic user by making one up.

He looked at Belan, feeling the weight of the senseless death on his shoulders. “What was his name?”

Belan stopped and rubbed his forehead with his free hand. “Felnar? Yes, that was it, Felnar.” He shrugged and started walking again. “Not that it really matters. He is dead. His magic can’t ruin the rest of us and we have far greater problems now.

It did matter though. Felnar had died in Kellinar’s stead. Died because Kellinar had been a coward and ran. He vaguely remembered Felnar. He had worked in the fishery gutting fish. He didn’t remember if he had a family.

“You were not a coward. You had to run. How else would you have come to me?” came Shryden’s sending. “If you had turned yourself in, I would have died with you. Taela would have no shield, Anevay would have no bondmate.”

Kellinar’s heart clenched at the thought of Shryden dying, still trapped inside his shell and a new guilt weighed him down. Even if he had known then that Felnar would die, he wouldn’t have stepped forward to save Felnar’s life, not since the trade would have been the death of Shryden.

“It isn’t your fault they falsely accused this Felnar, nor is it your fault they executed him.”

“I know, Shryden. I still feel bad about it; partly because even if I could go back and save his life by turning myself in, I wouldn’t. I didn’t even think of him after we left. I never wondered about his fate. I guess I just assumed the Keepers would realize they had the wrong man and let him go. I would gladly give my life to saves yours, but I would never condemn you to a certain death to save another. Even Taela and Anevay, if the choice had to be made between them or you, as much as it would hurt me to lose them, I can’t lose you. Perhaps that makes me a bad person.”

He heard Shryden’s mental snort in his mind. “Nonsense. Taela and Anevay love you dearly, but if they had to choose between your life or that of their dragons, they would choose their dragons. They would be devastated by your loss, but Paki and Latia are their first priority. We are one with our riders and our riders are one with us.”

A rush of love for the blue dragon filled him and he sent it through the bond to Shryden. It was returned full force, washing away the guilt he felt over Felnar’s death.

They wove their way through the tunnels and chambers that made a massive honeycomb under the plateau of the Dellar District. As they came closer to the upper chambers, more people began to fill the halls. Men in worn clothing, women in dresses that barely clung to them, baring large expanses of breasts. Younger boys and a few girls dashed through halls.

Kellinar raised his eyebrows. “Since when are girls allowed in the caves?”

Belan glanced down a connecting tunnel where two girls who were both probably between eight and ten spoke quietly to each other. “Girls become orphans too. I decided it seemed an awful shame that they had so few options other than becoming a whore. They have proven to be just as skilled as the boys at the trade of thievery. It took a bit of getting used to for everyone, but they have gained the respect of their peers and mentors alike.” He smiled at Kellinar. “Besides, they can often get where the boys can’t. People aren’t used to female thieves. They still think only the boys take up the trade. They don’t watch the girls as closely.”

Several people looked at the group and did a double take, calling out Kellinar’s name. As they moved through the halls, a small crowd trailed after them, many of them asking Kellinar if he was back, to which he just shook his head. He was; just not in the way they hoped.

When they finally reached the upper chambers, natural light flooded in from the multiple openings that all led to the broad, natural balcony. The upper openings would have stairs down to the veranda, but the only way in was up the steps at the front of the balcony. Only thieves and whores could climb those steps, unless they needed something, then they would be seen on the balcony.

It wasn’t good for too many to know the layout of the caves. The whores knew better than to say a word, none of them could afford to lose the business the caves offered. Not all of the men lived there. Every now and then one would take a wife and live a short distance away. Though not too many wives were willing to put up with the kind of life a thief led or the secrets he had to keep from her.

Belan paused when they reached his chamber. “I have something for you, Kellinar. It came almost two months ago. I kept it in the hopes you would one day return. Give me a moment I will get it for you.”

He ducked into the room and reappeared only seconds later with a piece of thick, expensive paper, folded and sealed with wax. Kellinar turned it over in his hands when Belan handed it to him. He knew the seal and who it was from. Tucking it into a pocket inside his lightweight cloak he looked at Belan. “I will read it later. First, we have a lot to discuss.”

A furrow appeared between Belan’s brows and he nodded. “Yes, we do. Things are not well here in Trilene I’m afraid. You would likely be better off taking these three lovely ladies and leaving the city, leaving the nation even, though I’m not sure where you can go and be safe.”

Serena frowned. “What’s happened that is so bad?”

Belan rubbed the bridge of his nose. “Come into my chamber.You can sit and have a drink and we’ll talk.”

Kellinar shook his head. “Let’s talk on the balcony.”

Belan put his hand down, a puzzled look on his face. “We can, although this conversation may be better had in private.”

“The balcony will have to do. I have a promise to keep. I know it makes no sense right now; however, I assure you it will soon.”

Belan nodded and led the way out onto the broad, natural stone balcony. Multiple groups of chairs sat clustered against the low wall around the edge. The Thief Lord walked to an empty grouping and sat. Kellinar sensed Shryden’s immediate relief the minute he stepped out into the open. He sent waves of comfort to the blue as he crossed the veranda.

Kellinar took in the familiar sight of the Mallay, sprawling out toward the city wall in a twisted tangle of narrow streets. The smell, forgotten in his absence, permeated the air. Kellinar rubbed his nose and glanced at Taela and Anevay. He sensed their revulsion. Nothing like the reek of old food, the canal sludge, occasional animal carcasses, and feces rotting in hot humidity to welcome one to the Mallay.

Except it wasn’t the same Mallay. The buildings were the same, the conditions were the same, but the people were different. Anxiety and hopelessness hung over the district like a cloud. It wasn’t like the people of the Mallay to look beaten and broken. Their lot in life was a hard one, but they stubbornly refused to give in or stop living because of it. The people he saw now looked ready to drown themselves in the canal.

“Tell me,” Kellinar said as Anevay, Taela, and Serena settled into chairs, “what has you so troubled about Trilene?”

His old mentor hesitated a moment before rubbing his forehead like it hurt. Finally, Belan sighed and looked at them. “Felnar may have been put to death, but it didn’t end there. One of the High Houses is no more. The two oldest daughters—Oksana and Paylana—the identical twins, do you remember them?”

Kellinar sucked in a deep breath. He remembered them, although until this moment he hadn’t made the connection. About his age, both with golden blonde hair. At one time he had only known of them from his escapades in the Trilene District. But at the mention of their names, his mind connected a distant and obscure memory of the two girls with a much more recent memory.

How had he failed to make the connection? Somewhere in the back of his mind, he’d known they looked familiar. Kellinar had last seen them in battle outside the Kormai where he had killed one of them. He thought it had been Paylana, though he wasn’t sure.

A squeeze on his hand drew him back to the present. He glanced at Taela, let his breath out and leaned back. “I remember them.”

Belan nodded as if he expected the answer. “They used magic. They used it to kill their entire house in front of a few dozen witnesses. Then they left with some sort of dark cloaked man. Left in a way that wasn’t natural.”

Yes, they would have had to leave with a Benduiren to end up in the Kormai. “So that is what bothers you so much?’

Belan leaned forward, placed his elbows on his knees and slowly rubbed his hands together. “I wish it was, Kellinar. Oksana came back a couple of weeks ago riding a big black dragon. At first, because she is a woman, the heads of the High Houses didn’t take her seriously.” He looked at the ground in front of him. “She killed a few children to convince them otherwise. Once she had their attention, Oksana let them know she wasn’t the only Dragon Rider and if they wanted to keep their life as they knew it, then they had best be ready to do as she and the others like her said.”

“And?” Kellinar pressed.

“And of course, being the greedy cowards that they are, they capitulated.” Belan wiped the sheen of sweat from his forehead. “I guess I can’t blame them completely. How were they supposed to stand up to a dragon? Or a woman willing to kill children with magic? How does one fight against magic? I guess the stories were all true. Magic does drive people insane. I don’t know where the dragons came from; maybe their insane magic created them like it did hundreds of years ago. I tell you, seeing that big black thing perched on the wall, staring at all of us with empty eyes, terrified me. I have never felt such hopeless despair.”

Serena rubbed Belan’s shoulder. “They carry hopelessness and despair beneath their wings like a cloud. It takes training to block it out.”

He turned startled eyes on her. “You have had encounters with them?”

“Unfortunately, yes.” Serena’s eyes hardened.

Kellinar took a deep breath. “I killed Paylana.”

Belan’s eyes widened even more as he looked at him. “How did you fight magic?”

Kellinar sensed Shryden tense, ready to dive in and defend his rider should this not go well. He looked his old mentor in the eye. “With magic.”

Belan stared at him for a long moment as comprehension slowly dawned on his face. “You…you can use magic?” Fear filled the older man’s eyes as he leaned away from Kellinar. “The charges were true?”

“They were true.” Kellinar kept his eyes steady on Belan’s. “The man they executed couldn’t use magic and they knew it. They showed up at an inn Serena and I were staying at five days after we left Trilene. They murdered Felnar in cold blood to cover up the fact they weren’t able find me.”

Belan stared at him as if he was afraid to move, afraid what Kellinar might do to him. Might as well get it over with. “Oksana was right, there are more Dragon Riders. More than you know. Oksana as you saw rides a black dragon. She and her dragon are evil. Her fellow Shadow Riders are evil.”

“Just like every coin has two sides, so do dragons. There is a whole other group of dragons. There are six colors of them and they are not evil. Their riders aren’t evil either. They call themselves Guardians and with good reason. They are your defense against Shadow magic and dragons.”

Belan slowly looked at the women. Serena nodded. “He speaks the truth. Have you ever known Kellinar to be evil?”

“The Kellinar I knew wasn’t, but magic drives people insane, everyone knows that. Oksana is proof.”

Kellinar shook his head. “Belan, my old friend, do I seem insane? Have I killed anyone? I could have come in here slaughtering people and demanding that you listen to me. Did I?”

Sweat beaded on Belan’s forehead as he turned back to Kellinar. “No, not yet.”

“Have I brought my dragon down on you and forced compliance under threat of death?”

Taela rubbed her temple and laced her fingers through his. Even with his shield, Belan’s strong emotions were affecting her.

After another long moment of silence, Belan cleared his throat, though his voice still sounded hoarse when he said, “Your dragon?” Belan’s voice came out hoarse.

Kellinar pointed at the dots circling high in the sky. “It is the reason we are out here on the balcony. He worried for my safety and wanted me somewhere he could see me.”

“You talk to him?”

“Of course; we are a part of each other. Our hearts, minds, and souls are one. We share thoughts and conversations in our minds frequently.”

Belan sat in silence for a long time, leaned back in the chair and stared at the dots slowly circling high above them. When his eyes finally dropped to Kellinar’s they were troubled, though they lacked some of the fear that had shadowed them before. “Oksana didn’t speak to her dragon in that way. Perhaps it was just for show, but every order she gave was spoken aloud.”

“It wasn’t for show. Shadow Riders are not a blending of two souls. The rider must give up half their soul in order to hatch a black egg. The dragon is an extension of them much the way your arm is an extension of you.” Kellinar propped his ankle on the opposite knee. “You consciously reach for a drink in the same way she gives orders, but you don’t hold conversations with your arm.”

Serena smiled. “And we don’t order our dragons about. In fact, it would impossible. They are linked to us, but they are still their own beings with their own thoughts and minds. We may request something of them, but we don’t order them.”

Belan shifted his gaze to her. “We? You mean you have a dragon too?”

Taela laughed softly. “Kellinar described you as a learned man. Did you fail to learn how to count?”

Kellinar ruthlessly suppressed his laughter. Belan wouldn’t appreciate it right now.

“Of course I can count.” Belan scowled at her.

She pointed to the sky. “Did you bother to count the dots up there?”

He gazed up for several seconds before looking back at her. “All I can see is a dot circling up there.”

Kellinar looked up; the four distinct dots were easily visible to him. Why couldn’t Belan see that?

Shryden’s mental snort came through loud and clear. “He is unbonded my unobservant rider. How you failed to think of this I don’t know, but it’s a good thing you have me. Next thing you know, you would fail to notice a wall and walk right into it.”

Kellinar shot a glare at the sky. “I would have thought of it in just a moment. If he can barely see you, then it is likely you can fly a little lower and still be safe from notice.”

“From those in the Mallay at least. You fail to see the wall again and forget the Trilene District is over six hundred paces above you and that is just the ground level. The wall and towers are higher. I think we are safer at this altitude for now.”

“I didn’t think of that. Thank you for your wisdom, my friend.”

Amusement ran along the dragon bond. “Friends don’t let friends walk into walls.”

Kellinar returned his attention to Belan. “I would have them fly lower, but Shryden reminds me that the Trilene District is quite a bit higher than the Mallay and we both think it best if no one sees them yet. We need to talk with the High Houses, but we don’t want them to feel they are being threatened.”

Belan crossed his arms over his chest, frowning thoughtfully at Kellinar. “You truly are different from Oksana and her ilk aren’t you?”

Kellinar nodded. “The Shadow Riders feel that it’s perfectly okay to force acquiescence. Galdrilene and all those who live there feel that a forced choice is no choice at all. Each person can be given information and options but it’s up to them to follow their own path. That is what we offer the Trilene—a choice.

“There is a war coming, a war between the dragons. The nations will not be able to stand aside. Unfortunately, a side must be chosen. We can only hope the Trilene will choose Galdrilene.”

Belan chuckled darkly. “I wouldn’t hold my breath if I were you. The Shadow Riders have already promised to uphold the Trilene’s way of life. Oksana told them you would force change upon them.”

Taela crossed her legs and leaned forward. “That is partly true, Belan. If a nation wishes to side with Galdrilene, they have to agree to follow the tenets of Dragon Law. If they agree and fail to uphold those laws then the dragons will enforce it, though not in the way you are thinking right now.”

Belan’s eyebrows drew down creating deep furrows in the skin between them. “What is Dragon Law and how would you know what I’m thinking?”

Kellinar smiled. “Her magic is Spirit magic; it deals with thoughts, emotions, and other things of the mind. And no, she isn’t reading your every thought, just those on the very surface.” He chuckled and shook his head; a little humor never hurt anything. “Which is fine for you, but she is my bondmate.We are linked in such a way that she can flit in and out of my mind any time she wants. If you think two wives is a crazy idea, try having one them able to get into your head whenever she wants.”

Belan visibly relaxed and laughed. “Perhaps you are a little insane after all, my friend.” He took a deep breath and let it out in a long sigh before leaning back in his chair. “Okay, lay it out for me. What is this Dragon Law? And, what if the Trilene don’t accept it? Are the people of the Mallay just doomed? Because I tell you things aren’t good here, Kellinar, not at all. Oksana rounded up several people and took them with her. Just rode through the Mallay and Dellar selecting people like they were sheep and forced them through some black whirlpool. She cut a couple of houses clean in half with that thing.”

Sadness rolled along the bond from Taela as she gazed at Belan. “Servants. I’m afraid any that were taken in all likelihood will never be seen again.”

“I figured it was something like that. We all do.” Belan said “She took young men and women both from the Mallay and several older men and women from the Dellar. If they were going as servants I can guess they needed all ages.

Serena laid her hand gently on Belan’s knee. “You wanted to know about Dragon Law?” When he nodded she continued, “It’s really very simple. Anyone can be anything they wish. A fisherman’s daughter can run a city; a king’s first born son can become a cobbler. Each person is allowed to choose their own destiny according to their interests and skills.”

She shifted to face him more fully. “A person does not inherit a throne by birth alone; they must first petition the Silver dragons for such a position. Leadership is so much more than blood relations. Silver dragons have a unique ability to discern the motivations of a person. If a carpenter’s daughter and King’s first born son both petition for right of succession, the Silvers will see them both and choose the one with the right mind-set; the one with the people’s interests closest to his or her heart.”

Taela smiled gently and picked up the explanation. “No man may gain success at the expense or sacrifice of another. If one chooses to run a fishery, that is fine. However, the workers must be compensated fairly and the working conditions must be decent. If there is a grievance by the workers, the Silver dragons and riders mediate. The man who runs it can’t lie and neither can the workers because the Silver Riders will see through it.

Anevay gave Belan one of her breathtaking smiles and picked up the conversation. “The education of everyone is of paramount importance no matter their station in life. Everyone must learn to read, write, count, chart the stars, learn about the history of various places, etc. An educated population is more in control of its self.

“There are no destitute. No Mallay Districts. Everyone works and pulls their weight except for the old, the young, and the infirm. The older generation brought us up, and cared for us as children, they deserve to be taken care of when age makes work difficult.”

Belan stared at them as if each had grown three heads. “That sounds great, but it’s impossible. No such utopia exists in the world.”

Kellinar chuckled. “I would have agreed with you a couple of years ago, until I went to Galdrilene. Dragon Law works quite well there.”

“Galdrilene?” Belan rubbed his temples and sighed. “Let me guess, Galdrilene is not the destroyed city of the tales.”

“No, it isn’t, my friend.” Kellinar ran his hand over the braids on his head and leaned forward a little. “Galdrilene is alive and well, and has been for quite some time. Boromar and Calladar have known about it for several centuries. They make a show of executing their magic users and then they send them to Galdrilene for training. The Calladarans also send some of their young men there to train. Some young men from Shadereen even go, though the rulers of their nation have no knowledge of it, or at least they didn’t until now.”

Taela watched him for a long moment. “So you see, Belan, magic users have been around for quite some time. How many have gone crazy and killed people?”

He appeared at a loss to answer. Finally, he shook his head. “This is a lot to take in all at once. Dragon Law certainly would change life here.” He let his gaze wander over the tightly packed buildings and streets of the Mallay. “The High Houses will never agree to such rules.” He looked Kellinar in the eyes. “I know that for a fact.”

Anevay frowned. “How are you so certain?”

Belan laughed and patted her hand. “Because I used to be one of them, my lady. Until I lost a war of houses and my conqueror decided to exile me here rather than kill me. It gives him great pleasure to see me reduced to this.” He glanced at Kellinar. “But I found friends and a young man that was much like a son to me. How do you think Kellinar knows how to read and is so well spoken? I took him under my wing when he was around seven or so. Smart lad he was. Never thought I would see the day he would be so stupid as to take two wives.”

“Reduced to this?” Taela raised an eyebrow. “I saw the amount of gold in one of the caves we passed; you haven’t been reduced too much.”

Serena shook her head. “It isn’t like that.”

“No, it isn’t.” Belan’s face lost its mirth. “I can see how it would seem so to you, but we keep only a small portion to ourselves and rarely spend what we do keep. You will find most of the caves that house the thieves’ quarters simple and unfettered by elaborate decoration. I am the leader of the thieves, but you will notice I wear clothing common for the Mallay. I buy my morning pitas from the women who sell them in front of their houses just like everyone else.”

Taela frowned, confusion in her eyes. “Then what is all of the gold for?”

“For this.” Belan swept his arm across the view of the Mallay. “The Thieves’ Guild in the Mallay has always existed to serve but one purpose; to keep the people of the Mallay alive. None of the jobs available to a man of the Mallay pay enough to truly keep the man and his family alive with the possible exception of becoming a soldier. Even with that, a Mallay man will never rise in the ranks. That is why every thief buys all of his meals from one of the women who spends her days cooking even as she chases children and errant chickens.”

His eyes saddened. “It doesn’t freeze solid this far south like it does in the farther north, but it still gets mighty cold in the winter. Without the Guild to purchase supplies for the cobblers here in the Mallay and warm bolts of cloth from the Traders, many children would perish during the winter. Without a lot of the food staples we buy from the Traders, many women would have no food to sell, nothing to feed her family. Her husband would become too weak to work and bring in the pittance that he is given. We are the heart of the Mallay. Without us, the body of this part of the city would die out.”

Taela shook her head. “You mean the High Houses would really allow people to die? How do they not notice that you keep this place afloat?”

A bitter look crossed Belan’s face. “They don’t even see the people of the Mallay unless we become disobedient, die off in enough droves that we clog the roads, or if sickness depletes that week’s available labor force. Even servants for the High Houses are hired from among the lower Dellar. The only people from the Mallay the High Houses notice are the thieves and only because they seem to adore wasting a lot of gold on their eternal House wars.”

Kellinar chuckled. “I always said we could never have made such a good living if the High Houses of Trilene weren’t such greedy backstabbers.”

Belan became solemn. “It’s because of that they will never agree to Dragon Law and never come under the protection of Galdrilene. That leaves the Mallay out of luck.”

Kellinar gazed over the district he’d grown up in. No, the Mallay wasn’t out of luck. “Belan,” he looked at his old friend, “I won’t let the Mallay fall to the Shadow Riders, not if they truly wish the protection of Galdrilene. As the leader of the Thieves, you are the closest thing to a leader the Mallay has. If you wish the protection of me, my dragon, and Galdrilene, we will give it to you.”

Belan gazed back with hard eyes. “What you suggest would tear this nation in two and cost a lot of lives.”

Kellinar nodded. “I know. Better a life lost fighting for freedom than one lived under the claw of a Shadow Dragon, don’t you think?”

“I do.” Belan said. “But it would take a lot of people in the Mallay to think that before it would work.” He paused and rubbed his chin, his eyes unfocused and thoughtful. “I don’t think we would be alone in such a fight. There are a few in the upper districts that would prefer what you have to offer over what Oksana brought to the table.” He slapped his hands on his knees. “I will see what trouble I can stir up.”

“We should probably at least speak with the High Houses first before we begin preparations for a civil war.” Taela looked between Kellinar and Belan, her brows drawn together. Disapproval and a touch of anger flowed along the bond.

“We will talk to them.” Kellinar rubbed the back of her hand with his thumb. “But those of us who have lived here know how this is going to go.”

Serena looked at him with sad eyes. “He is right, Taela. I was raised in the Dellar, but had plenty of dealings with the Trilene District. There are maybe a handful of High Houses that will join us, if that many. I expect the Dellar will split fairly evenly.” She glanced around at the Mallay and looked up at the walls of higher districts before bringing her eyes back to them. “It’s time for new leadership in Trilene, time for the upper houses to acknowledge the Mallay. This city, this nation, will be torn apart at the seams. But when it’s mended back together, everyone will be better off.”

Kellinar pulled the letter Belan had given him from his pocket and turned it over in his hands. “Yes, it will be.” He broke the wax seal and slowly opened the letter. “Maybe that isn’t such a bad thing.”

Anevay studied him. “Who is it from?”

“Arianna,” Kellinar answered absently while reading the flowing script. Las Fane had seen black dragons. Two Shadow Riders had visited and plans were underway to attempt resistance. She hoped he was safe and ended the letter the same way she always did, by offering to help him if ever he needed anything.

Kellinar looked up and saw a smile on Anevay’s face. “Is that the girl you saved when you were just starting out?”

He nodded and glanced back at the letter. Kellinar had protected Arianna from a brutal life so many years ago. How in the name of the Fates would he protect her and Las Fane from Shadow Riders? The Guardians were spread so thin.

“What does it say?” Taela asked. He knew she would be able to sense his frustration.

“She says Las Fane has been visited by Shadow Riders.”

Belan sighed. “It would seem they are everywhere.” He clapped Kellinar on the shoulder. “Go talk to the Trilene. The sooner we can begin tearing this place apart, the sooner others can be helped.”

Anevay glanced between them. “Does it have to be war? Can’t the people of the Mallay just leave?”

Belan chuckled. “And go where, my lady? These people,” he motioned to the buildings and crowded streets, “have nothing. The Thieves’ Guild has a lot of coin, but not near enough to support everyone while starting over. Besides, the Trilene needs the labor the Mallay provides. Even if they pretend they don’t, they won’t release the people of the Mallay easily. No, this is our home and we need to fight for it.”

Vaddoc and Namir soared over the small village of Welan that lay north of Marden and not far from the Blood River. They had a promise to keep. Below them, two newly constructed towers on either end of town rose at least six stories high. Scorched ground circled each tower.

As the massive gold landed just beyond the houses, several children ran to meet them with the adults not far behind. Before Vaddoc could even dismount, little Lenya had already snagged hold of the edge of Namir’s nostril. Vaddoc laughed as he jumped down. He removed the catcher strap and tossed it up on the saddle.

“Come wif me, Mir,” the little girl commanded, tugging on the dragon’s nose. With a rumble of happiness, Namir slowly followed the toddler. Cat trilled from the saddle and skated down the dragon’s side to run alongside the dragon and little girl.

Her mother approached slowly, the baby on her hip. Lenya beamed up at her. “Looky, Momma, my Mir came back! And he brought kitty wif him.”

The woman eyed the dragon uneasily. Vaddoc stepped forward. “Your daughter is beyond safe with him.” Fates, what was her name?

“I believe it is Anly, if my memory serves me correctly, and it usually does,” Namir sent. Vaddoc sensed the attention the dragon kept riveted on the little girl as she led him about like a prized pony.

“Anly? Is that your name?” he asked the worried mother.

She didn’t take her eyes off her youngest daughter. “Yes.”

Vaddoc studied her closely. Her voice was sad and her eyes held the red-rimmed, puffy look of one who had cried until there were no tears left. “Is everything alright?”

Anly turned her eyes on him for a brief moment before returning her attention to her daughter. “No, it is not. My husband was a Border Guard. He died in the battle at Marden. He was a good man and now I am left alone with three children and no idea what I will do.”

The battle at Marden, one designed to be nothing more than a distraction. “I am sorry Anly; even dragons cannot protect everyone when Kojen are over running things.”

She looked at him again. “I do not blame you, or your dragon. You are Shaderian, you know as well as I do that people die when there are Kojen.”

A failed shield and deep brown eyes, like bottomless pools filled with pain, flashed through his memory. Images of his father and older brother followed. Yes; he knew all too well the pain Kojen brought to families.

Medar came striding up the street. “Vaddoc, it is good to see you again.” He chuckled. “Never thought I would say that to a Dragon Rider. Where is Kirynn?”

Vaddoc smiled and clasped forearms with the heavyset man who doubled as the mayor as well as the innkeeper. “Medar, you certainly look better than the last time I saw you. Kirynn is patrolling another area. How are the horses doing?”

“They are doing great under my care; I would not have it any other way. Right now they are enjoying some time in the small pasture. I am unable to turn them out in the larger one.”

“Why is that?” Vaddoc sensed something under the man’s words.

Medar scratched the thinning hair atop his head. “Well, it would seem that those black dragons have decided that whatever they have been feeding on in the desert is no longer enough. They come through those black whirlpools of theirs and snatch up farm animals, people, and whatever they can catch easily.” He pointed to the towers. “We built those and keep them manned as lookouts. They sound a horn as soon as they see the signs. Did you know the air starts to ripple and swirl even before it turns black? Anyway, they sound a horn and people know to grab as many animals as they can and get them into barns; and women and children know to get inside.”

Vaddoc looked at the charred ground around the towers. “What burned?”

Medar frowned. “Those black demons have burned the towers twice. We built the first real sturdy, but soon learned to make it bare minimum. We put them up, the blacks burn them down. I suspect these will only last a few more days before we have to build them again.”

That the black dragons were breaching this far into Shadereen to hunt was disturbing enough, it was even more so to hear they were burning things down. Namir reached for him, “Since Mckale and Maleena have been battling these same troubles in Calladar, do you want me to speak with Tellnox and Nydara and see if they would be willing to come here?”

“Yes. If they have a solution to the problem, I would like to see it implemented in Shadereen. Thank you, Namir.”

Vaddoc turned to Medar. “There might be a fix for that. Give Namir a few minutes to discuss it with some friends of ours.”

Medar nodded.

Though Namir kept an eye on the group of children that scampered around him and even scaled his side to climb on his back, Vaddoc sensed the gold’s conversation with Tellnox. He smiled as he watched several older children sitting on Namir’s back.

The gold stretched out one large wing and angled the trailing edge toward the ground. The children looked at the wing then back toward the dragon’s head. Namir bobbed his head in encouragement. One of the more intrepid children placed his foot carefully on the extended wing, drawing a chuckle from Vaddoc. He knew what was coming; those wings were slippery. Namir was bringing one of the favorite games of the children of Galdrilene to the children here.

The boy put his weight on his foot and it went out from under him. With a shriek he went skidding on his stomach down the widest part of the wing near the dragon’s body. With a light thump, he slid off the trailing edge of the wing and dropped the last few inches to the ground. The boy sat for a moment as if processing what had just happened before leaping to his feet with a whoop and running back toward the dragon’s front leg.

Another boy leaped onto Namir’s wing and slid to the ground. It wasn’t long before a steady stream of children were climbing up the dragon’s side, with the aid of the catcher strap, and walking carefully down his back before jumping onto the extended wing. Even the smaller children joined in with the older ones helping them up. Cat dashed in and out of them, meowing and enjoying the attention they gave him.

Vaddoc couldn’t help laughing as Lenya, squealing with delight, went careening down the golden wing of “her” dragon.

“Tellnox says they know what to do and are coming,” came Namir’s sending.

Two horns blared in frantic blasts over the town as three whirlpools filled the sky. People screamed and started to run until Namir’s welcoming bugle froze them in their tracks. Three dragons Slid through into the sky above Welan.

The answering bugles of the red, green, and silver dragons filled the air. Lenya jumped up and down while clapping and laughing in delight.

Tellnox, Syrakynn, and Nydara landed not far from Namir and his crowd of young admirers. “Sykynn!” Lenya’s shout carried across the open grasslands at the edge of town as she dashed toward the red.

Syrakynn lowered her head as the little girl neared and huffed a gentle breath at her. Lenya giggled and did her best to hug the red’s large snout. “You broughts me more dragons, Sykynn?”

The red rumbled in acknowledgement. Lenya turned to Kirynn as she leaped down from the saddle and propped her foot on the dragon’s leg to remove the catcher strap. The redhead barely had time to toss the strap up on the saddle before the little girl wrapped her arms around Kirynn’s legs. “Thank yous for bringing me more dragons.”

Kirynn gently pried her arms away and knelt on one knee so she would be more level with the child. “How could I not bring a little one as cute as you more dragons?”

Lenya beamed at her and looked at the green and the silver. “What their names?”

Kirynn pointed. “That big green one is Tellnox and the nearly as big silver is Nydara.”

“Will they play with us like Mir?”

“I’m sure they will.” Kirynn smiled. “Why don’t you go ask them while we see if we can help the grown-ups with their towers?”

Lenya ran up to the new dragons. Vaddoc found himself laughing yet again. Apparently her way of asking was to take hold of the edge of Tellnox’s nostril with her tiny hand and proceed to pull him toward the group of children. The green obliged her without protest. Before long the four dragons basked in the sun rumbling happily while the town’s children climbed all over them and slid down their wings.

Mckale walked up and clasped forearms with Vaddoc. “I hear you have an issue with lookout towers down here. We had the same problem in Calladar for a little bit. Towns would build them and the Shadow Dragons would burn them down.”

Medar nodded. “That is exactly what is happening here.”

“I can help with that.” Mckale smiled at the innkeeper.

Anly, who had watched the children play in silence, turned to Vaddoc. “I would really like to see this, but Annoc will start to fuss if he has to be held much longer.” She paused and glanced back at the dragons. “Do you think they would mind if he crawled around them? He is too little to Slide on wings.” Her expression said she would never have believed such a thing if she hadn’t seen it. “He would really enjoy seeing them closer. My oldest daughter, Tenyi, will help watch after him.”

Vaddoc smiled at her. Who would have thought this nervous mother would ask if the dragons would be willing to babysit her youngest. “Of course they will not mind.”

“Will they…will they step on him? Maybe it is not a good idea. He is so little.”

Maleena stepped forward. “They won’t step on him. Dragons love children; there is no safer place in the world than with them.”

Anly stared at the small, violet-eyed woman for a long moment. “If you are sure…”

“I’m very sure.”

Anly walked slowly over to Namir and gazed up into his amber eyes. “Please be careful with him.”

Namir lowered his head until his eyes were level with hers. “Vaddoc, please tell her that I will protect her little one with my life.”

“Namir says he will protect Annoc with his life. Your little one is more than safe.”

Anly slowly set the baby down. Annoc blew a few spit bubbles and then crawled toward the dragon’s front foot. He sat next to a talon far bigger than him and immediately leaned over, put his mouth on it, and began teething on the hard rounded surface at the front as drool ran down it. Namir rumbled the dragon equivalent of a chuckle and cocked his head so he could better keep an eye on the youngster trying to gum his way through the dragon’s claw.

Anly sighed. “I would pull him away from teething on a big, dirty claw but he would just go right back to it.”

Kirynn laughed. “As if we didn’t all eat dirt as small children.”

“Very true,” Mckale said as he turned to Medar. “Let’s see what we can do about your towers.”

Medar led the way to the nearest structure. Mckale eyed it up and down. “It could be taller. Can you have your man come down? I’m afraid I’m going to have to remove this one in order to erect another.”

“Remove it? How?” Medar looked a little nervous.

“I’ll have Kirynn burn it down. Don’t worry, it won’t take long and she hasn’t lost control of a fire for a long time.” Mckale glanced at the redhead with a smile. “In fact, the last time I saw her loose complete control of her magic we were camped next to a lake and she burned every stitch of her clothing off.”

Kirynn laughed. “Yes, I did.” She winked at Medar. “I promise not to burn my clothes off or your town down.”

Medar swallowed. “Do what you need to do.” He cupped his hands around his mouth and yelled up at the man in the tower, “Come down from there, Haddoc.”

A young man climbed down the ladder on the side of the tower and walked up to them. “Is something wrong?”

“No.” Medar shook his head and clasped his hands behind his back. “These friends of ours are going to take down this tower and put a better one in its place.”

Haddoc looked at them. “How long will it take?”

Mckale shrugged. “A few hours for both towers.” He motioned to Kirynn. “Take it down.”

Vaddoc couldn’t see her magic weaves but he saw the product of them. The tower burst into flame all at once, burning so hot they all had to step back from it. Within minutes it was reduced to a pile of ash.

Mckale looked at Maleena, concern flickering in his eyes. “Are you ready for this?”

“Of course.” She nodded.

“We have been doing this a lot lately, if you need to rest…”

Maleena smiled. “Mckale, I’m fine.”

Vaddoc looked between them, confused. “What does Maleena have to do? I figured this would be something to do with Earth magic.”

“It does,” Mckale said. “However, it will work better if I can weave heat into it. For that, I need Maleena to bind Kirynn and my powers together. I will also need a shield from you. In Calladar we borrowed Belynn for the fire and Brock for the shield. By the time we were done with fortifications on the border towns, Belynn and Brock were both exhausted and really needed to return to their dragons.”

“We’ve barely been in Taragen at all in the past couple of weeks. We’ve spent all of our time along the border,” Maleena said then rubbed her hands together. “This tower is down let’s get to work.”

Vaddoc watched her take a deep breath, as her eyes unfocused a little, and he knew she already worked to bind the powers together. Mckale walked over to where the tower had stood. He knelt and placed his palms on the ground.

Medar gasped as the earth turned to something that looked like thick liquid. Gradually, the ground began to flow upwards like a slow moving river. As the sun passed slowly overhead the thick, liquid earth climbed higher, moving in a slow vortex until it was taller than the height of the old tower.

“Vaddoc, can I get a shield?” Mckale asked without looking away from his work.

Surprised, Vaddoc nodded at his friend. “How much of one?”

“Everything except my hands; they’ll be protected by Kirynn’s magic. Everyone else might want to step back, this is about to get very hot.”

Vaddoc reached out for his magic and wove a strong shield around Mckale, leaving only his hands exposed.

Gradually, the liquid earth began to heat until it glowed white hot. Tremendous heat waves poured off the vortex, forcing everyone except Mckale to step back. Vaddoc fed more magic into the shield. It was best to maintain the shield rather than set it. He would be able to tell if any part of it started to weaken sooner.

Vaddoc noticed silence from the direction of the dragons and turned to look, although most of his focus was on the shield that protected his friend. All four dragons were curled in sleep, their wings still spread out. In the shelter of their shade, the children of the town gathered like a large pack of puppies with Cat right in the middle of them. Lenya and several other younger ones were sound asleep, while the older children reclined on the grass talking quietly.

Annoc was asleep in the shadow next to Namir’s head, one pudgy little hand lying against the bottom edge of the gold’s jaw. Every now and then, one amber eye would open a crack as the dragon checked on his youngest charge. The rest of the town’s adults gathered not far from the dragons, watching Mckale work.

Kirynn settled crossed legged into the grass. When Vaddoc raised an eyebrow she shrugged. “I might as well relax; it isn’t as if I’m doing anything that requires concentration. I’m just a pass through for magic right now.”

Vaddoc watched as Mckale continued to sculpt the tower. He glanced at Maleena and though sweat rolled down the side of her face, she didn’t waver. After several more minutes, Anly got up and left, striding purposely into town. She returned quickly carrying a plain parasol. She went to stand next to Maleena, using the parasol to shade the shorter woman from the sun.

Finally, the vortex of molten earth slowed. It began to ripple like water moving over rocks as it spiraled upwards. “Kirynn, can you follow the weave and start to draw the heat out as I finish?” Mckale asked, his voice strained.

Kirynn stood up and brushed her hands off, her eyes on the forming tower. “I got it.”

Little by little, beginning at the bottom, the ripples smoothed out and hardened until the completed tower stood in the sunlight. Mckale remained kneeling for a moment, breathing heavy.

Maleena wiped her hand along her brow and took a shaky breath. She smiled at Anly. “Thank you.”

Vaddoc let go of the shield and eyed Maleena. “Are you okay?”

She nodded. “Yes. Binding that much power together for such a long time is tiring, but I’m alright. I could really use a drink though and once Mckale recovers, he will too. Maybe something to eat as well.”

Medar turned wondering eyes from the tower to her. “I welcome you to my inn. The ceilings are high and the temperature is quite comfortable. I will be happy to serve the mid-day meal.”

Maleena inclined her head. “Thank you, Medar. Your hospitality is most welcome.”

Vaddoc turned to examine the new tower. Built entirely of seamless, gray-speckled stone, it was functional and beautiful at the same time. Single petal roses climbed the outside of it, each petal so detailed it seemed as if they would shift in the next breeze. As he looked closer, he noticed tiny, life-like dragons among the thorns. A staircase wound around the outside of the tower to the top where the lookout area was covered with a round peaked, stone roof.

One side of the roof held the dragon and crossed swords of Galdrilene in raised relief. The other held the standard of Shadereen, three circles linked together in a triangle with a lion tail scimitar through them—a symbol of their defense of the border—and the eternal watch of the three sister nations, though one nation no longer existed.

Mckale rose slowly to his feet and stood straight, though weariness showed on his face. “Medar, please lead the way to your inn. I will need to rest a short time before I can tackle the next tower. The rock layer is much deeper here in Shadereen, it took considerable effort to draw it up.”

Medar nodded and motioned for them to follow. “Right this way.” He glanced at the tower again then looked at Mckale as they followed him into town. “Will it withstand the Shadow Dragons?”

Mckale shrugged. “Not indefinitely. It will have to be remade at some point. It’s made of solid granite. Maleena binding Kirynn’s Fire magic to mine allowed me to superheat it and draw it up easier. It also allowed me to infuse it with a weave that requires the two powers to work. It will keep Shadow fire from eating away at it like it does other stone. Eventually, if subjected to repeated Shadow fire, the weave will break down and the tower will start to suffer damage. However, it should be a few years before that’s necessary.”

Medar shook his head. “I wish all structures were made that way.”

“A lot of them used to be made in this manner, except for the weave. That wasn’t discovered until recently, thanks to another Guardian named Anevay who has the very rare ability to create new weaves.”

Anly stopped to gather the sleeping Annoc. “Thank you, Namir, for taking such good care of him.”

Namir rumbled softly as she turned and walked toward a small house. Vaddoc smiled as he stepped through the door of the inn into the cool interior. It seemed the dragons had made permanent friends in this village.

They sat down to a simple meal of stew and warm, soft bread. Medar offered them a pitcher of water and another of wine. Maleena and Mckale struggled a little with the twin sticks offered as eating utensils. Mckale worked at learning them while Maleena gave up and used one of the sticks to stab the pieces of food in the soup.

Vaddoc savored the familiar tastes and textures of the food. He glanced at Kirynn as she ate the stew with obvious relish.

He smiled at her. “It is good, is it not?”

“It’s delicious. I don’t think I’ve ever tasted anything quite like it.” She plucked a small piece of meat out of it with the twin sticks she had finally mastered. “What is this? It has an interesting flavor, good but different.”

Vaddoc hesitated, should he tell her what the small chunks of “meat” were? “That would be ‘meat’ harvested from an adult sand spider.”

Kirynn dropped the sticks as if they had bitten her. They splashed into her soup and she nearly knocked over her chair in her leap to avoid being touched by the broth. Her green eyes narrowed at him. If looks could kill he would have dropped dead. Another glance at her face told him she was seriously considering using more force than a look any moment.

Testing his luck, he chuckled and popped another bite of the meat in his mouth. Maleena glared at him from across the table. “That wasn’t nice, Vaddoc.”

She looked at Kirynn. “You’re very angry with him right now; however, you will regret it with every fiber of your being if you follow through with what you’re thinking.” She stabbed another vegetable, avoiding the meat chunks. Then she glanced at Kirynn and said, “Although you will likely not regret what you’re thinking now,” before turning her glare back on Vaddoc.

Vaddoc looked at Mckale who studiously ate everything in his bowl as if it required his absolute attention. “Not going to come to my aid, my fellow Borderman?”

Humor flashed in Mckale’s silver eyes when he looked up and shook his head. “I’m not getting between you and Kirynn. Tellnox would be very upset if I died. Besides, you have angered my bondmate and I have to live with her.” He flashed Maleena a smile when she turned her glare on him. “She is not happy with you right now.”

Vaddoc turned to his tiny friend. “Would you have preferred I lied to her? I will admit it was amusing to watch the fearless Kirynn run from her food though.”

Kirynn growled and sat back in her chair. With deliberate movements she grabbed the sticks and plucked a chunk of meat out of the bowl and tossed it into her mouth and proceeded to chew, her eyes locked on his.

Vaddoc laughed. “Think of it as payback. They scare you, you eat them.”

The last of their meal was interrupted by a loud horn sounding from the other tower. The thunderous roars of the dragons drowned out the horn and shook the walls of the inn. Kirynn leaped to her feet and ran out the door with Vaddoc close behind her.

In the sky above the town, three whirlpools swirled and turned black. Vaddoc raced down the street to Namir. He yanked the catcher strap down, fastened it with quick movements and leaped into the saddle. Children piled out from under his wing screaming in fear. They ran as a group toward the houses, the older carrying the younger.

Black dragons burst into the air. Maleena hadn’t made it to her dragon, but Nydara didn’t wait. She leaped into the air with a powerful down stroke of her wings and landed in front of the group of children as a Shadow dove toward them. The silver whipped her head around and shot a stream of fire at it while the children dashed under her. She held her wings low to better cover them. With a shriek, the black broke out of the dive and climbed into the air, the scales on its face and neck smoking. As it continued to climb, Cat streaked out from under Namir and raced across the grass to the safety of Nydara.

Maleena stopped in front of Nydara, cautioning the children to stay beneath the dragon. She stood with her hand on the silver’s breastplates, concern clear in her violet eyes.

Namir, Syrakynn, and Tellnox rose to meet the trespassers. The riderless black dragons splintered away from each other. Vaddoc felt the gold shift to go after one of them. It turned in the air and spit sickly green fire at them. The safety straps held him in the saddle as Namir made a tight roll to avoid it. The gold breathed a wall of bright-orange flame but missed by inches.

Tellnox streaked across the sky in pursuit of another Shadow. The black in front of Namir spat more green fire at them, but again the gold dodged and retaliated, this time scoring a long burn on the black’s side before dodging more green fire.

Vaddoc wove his magic in a tight weave, trusting the dragon completely to keep them alive for the moment. As Namir came out of the roll, Vaddoc threw the weave up.

A large square of light sprang into the air; too late for the Shadow to avoid it. It hit the shield head on with a smack. Dazed, it tumbled part way to the ground before opening a Jump and disappearing into the foul blackness of the whirlpool.

Namir turned to find another, but they too were already entering their Jumps. The last one losing a chunk of its tail to Syrakynn as it ripped free of the red. Namir glided toward the ground as people poured out of their houses and ran to the children still huddled under Nydara.

The silver lifted her wings and looked at each child as if ensuring they were all there and safe. Anly made it to the dragon first and scooped Lenya into her arms, tears running down her face. The children ran to their parents as cries of relief went up.

Medar watched Namir and the other two land. He approached the riders as they dismounted, obviously shaken by the brief but intense battle in the sky. “I am at a loss on how to properly thank all of you.” He looked at Nydara. “You especially. You acted so quickly. I hate to think how many of the children we would have lost if you had not.” Medar turned back to Vaddoc. “You truly are so very different from the Shadow Riders and their dragons. Earlier, when Namir said he would protect Annoc with his life, I am not sure I wholly believed it. After seeing the silver one place herself directly in the path of danger to do just that…” He rubbed the top of his head for a moment before continuing, “please forgive me for ever doubting.”

Vaddoc clapped the innkeeper-mayor on the shoulder and smiled as Cat rejoined ‘his’ dragon. Namir rumbled in pleasure at finding the feline safe and unharmed. “There is nothing to forgive, Medar. We were raised with the same tales as everyone else. It is hard to believe when you have not seen it for yourself.”

Medar nodded. “I will see to it that news of what happened today is spread far and wide.”

Mckale stepped forward, a serious look on his face. “I think it’s time to ensure your other tower is up and ready to go.”

Kellinar strode through the gates of the Trilene District and into the Dellar. He had known the Trilene would never agree to the terms of Galdrilene’s protection. Fates forbid that people other than those born to the High Houses might actually be able to lead the city, or that someone from the Mallay be taught to read. No, the Trilene would rather throw their lot in with the Shadow Riders than be decent human beings.

He glanced at Taela as she walked on his left side, a deep frown on her face. She had truly expected the Trilene to be reasonable. Kellinar had known they wouldn’t be or at least not enough of them. Only two of the High Houses had been willing to accept Dragon Law.

Lord Vesnar of House Vesnar had thrown his support to Kellinar. That wasn’t a surprise since they had a truce that bordered on friendship. Ever since Kellinar had refused to sell Vesnar’s daughter, Arianna, to the boats in Turindar—not to mention Kellinar quietly slipping into the Vesnar’s house with Arianna’s letters so they knew she was safe.

Lord Telain wasn’t too much of a surprise either; the man had always been fair to deal with. Though Kellinar wasn’t too sure how far he could really trust either of them.

The other eight houses, however, had turned out just like Kellinar expected. The only reason Taela, Serena, and he had left the Trilene District with their heads still attached was because of the three dragons who had made their presence known. Anevay had left for Shadereen that morning after being called again to heal wounds inflicted by Shadow Dragons. She’d decided to stay on the border for now and Kellinar couldn’t decide whether he was relieved she was out of Trilene or terrified because she was on the border.

Stupid. The whole thing was stupid. Stupid Shadow Riders and stupid flaming people.

Serena’s touch on his arm drew him from his internal rant. “Kellinar, I know this might not be the best time…I need to talk to my mother. I need to convince her to come with us.”

Taela shifted the shawl she wore over her shoulders and studied Serena. “What about your father?”

Kellinar snorted. “Her father is the south end of a north bound pig. A man with his nose so far up the hind end of the Trilene he will go whichever way they do.”

“Kellinar is right. My father is the main reason I was banished from my home. He has spent his life gaining status though he will never be part of the Trilene. By the time he kicked me out, our house had become high-ranking in the Dellar. My father is unbending and he was beyond offended that I had almost brought unthinkable shame to his house.” Serena toyed with the end of her shawl, staring at it as if it held the answers before raising her eyes to Kellinar’s. “I have to try to save my mother though.”

Kellinar put an arm around her shoulders and hugged her. “Serena, you certainly don’t need my permission. If you want to try to speak to your parents, then do it. If you want us to come with you, we will.”

“Thank you, Kellinar,” Serena whispered.

He linked hands with Taela and followed Serena down the street. It bothered him to see the hurt lurking in the depths of her eyes. Serena had done a good job of moving on with her life, the practical side of her would take nothing less. The other side, the much smaller, much quieter part of her, still longed for the love and affection from her parents that she had grown up with.

No one paid much attention to them as they walked the streets of the Dellar. The soft, well-woven fabrics were dyed in dark colors only Trilene residents or high-ranking Dellars Lord Vesnar of House Vesnar could hope to afford. Their well-made boots and the jewel-tipped, golden Di’shan pendants made their right to be there obvious.

When they reached a large house with a blue door, Serena stopped. The big houses ran in a long row down both sides of the street. Each shared a wall with its neighbor on either side. Serena hesitated so long that Kellinar reached passed her and banged on the door.

“Kellinar!” She sucked in her breath and looked at him with wide eyes.

He smiled and shrugged. “They won’t know you are here if you don’t knock, no matter how hard you stare at the door.”

Moments later a middle-aged maid answered the door. “May I help…Serena?” The scowl on the woman’s face made it clear she wasn’t pleased to see her employer’s daughter.

Serena squared her shoulders. “I wish to see my mother.”

“You aren’t to be here. Leave.” The maid started to swing the door shut.

Serena slapped her hand against the door, using her bond-enhanced strength to force it open. “You will get my mother for me now.”

The maid sent her a tight-lipped glare and turned away from the door, leaving it standing wide open. She wasn’t gone long before Serena’s father, Farlain, came to the door. His blue eyes looked like they were ready to pop out of his beet-red face. “What in the name of the Fates are you doing here?”

“I need to see my mother.” Serena glared back at him, her hands balled into fists at her sides.

“You will get your dragon-blasted butt off my front stoop and never darken my doorway again!” He waved a beefy finger in her face. “I made that perfectly clear last time.”

A slender woman with big green eyes moved like a wraith in the room behind Farlain. She came close and laid a frail hand on his thick arm. “Please, Farlain. Please let me speak with her.”

Farlain yanked his arm out of her timid grasp and pushed her away. “Shut up, Sereanna.” He turned to Serena. “This is not your home. You have no parents here. We had a daughter; she died.” The woman sobbed as Farlain slammed the door shut in Serena’s face.

Serena stood for a moment, staring at the door. Kellinar ground his teeth together and felt a gentle squeeze on his hand as Taela tried to flood him with soothing emotions. Serena turned to leave and the sun shimmered on the unshed tears in her eyes.

Kellinar pulled his hand from Taela’s and reached out for his magic. To the void with this load of Shadow crap. The door exploded into the house, tiny splinters flying across the room. Farlain turned with a yell and stared at Kellinar. It didn’t take him long to gather himself up. He stormed toward Kellinar with one meaty hand raised. “Get out of my house, you filthy—”

Kellinar walked into the room, grabbed Serena’s father with a weave of air and slammed him against the far wall. Farlain gasped and sputtered, unable to move anything but his head. Kellinar glared at him. “You will shut up and hang there while Serena speaks with her mother. If you so much as say another word, so help me Fates, I will gag you with another weave.” He smiled coldly. “And yes, this is magic. Yes, Serena can use it too and guess what, it doesn’t drive a person insane. The only thing that drives people insane are pompous, dragon-blasted gits like you.”

Taela curled her fingers around Kellinar’s forearm. “Be careful. Serena is hurt and angry, but she would still be very upset if you killed him.” She looked at Farlain and sniffed, turning away from him with the haughty nose in the air style only a princess could carry off. “Even if he is the flea infested whelp of a back alley cat.”

Kellinar snorted and suppressed a smile. She did have a way of making a man seem less significant than a bug beneath her shoe.

Serena stepped into the room with him. She only glanced once at the man pressed against the wall, his feet dangling a least two paces off the floor, and turned away.

“Farlain, what…?” Sereanna walked into the room.

“Mama?” Serena reached her hand toward her mother.

Sereanna gasped and held both arms out, enfolding her daughter in a tight hug. “Serena baby, what is going on?”

“The Keepers were right. I can use magic. I hatched a dragon, mama. But not one of those evil black dragons. I use my magic to heal people when they are sick or hurt.”

Sereanna stepped back a little and cast a frightened look at her husband. “Why did you come here?”

“There is a war brewing, I want to protect you. Will you come with me? Please?” Kellinar’s heart nearly broke at the tone of hopeful pleading in Serena’s voice.

Sereanna backed further away and whispered, “I can’t. I love you, Serena, I always will, but I can’t.”

“Mama…please.”

Sereanna clasped her hands in front of her and shook her head, tears spilling down her thin cheeks. “I can’t. I’m not strong like you. I never was.” She lowered her head and stared at the floor. “You should go now. Go knowing I love you.”

Serena stared at her mother for a long time before turning toward the shattered door. Kellinar let the weave go, dropping Serena’s father unceremoniously on the floor.

As they stepped out onto the street, Farlain barreled through the door and grabbed Serena’s arm. “You ungrateful little wench, look what you did to my door!”

Kellinar reached for his magic again but never got a chance to use it. Miya landed heavily in the street, her wings whipping the air around them. The street emptied of people as she stuck her snout straight into Farlain’s face, smoke curling from her nostrils. She slammed her thoughts into Farlain’s head with such force even Kellinar could hear it in his mind. “You will take your hands off my rider.”

Farlain had no choice. He screamed and let go of Serena, grabbing the sides of his head as he sank to the ground and passed out. Even gentle, direct communication from a dragon was extremely loud and uncomfortable for the unbonded. And there had been nothing gentle about Miya’s message.

Serena stared at the man on the ground who was supposed to be her father and walked away. She ran her hand over the yellow’s face. “Thank you, my love. Now fly before they all jump over the city wall and kill themselves. There are terrified enough of dragons. They haven’t been treated well.”

Miya glared at the unconscious man on the ground and then lifted off, as Kellinar pulled Serena into a hug. “Are you alright?”

Serena clung to him for a minute, letting her tears fall. Finally, she stepped back and wiped her face. She lifted her chin. “Let’s go, there is nothing here for me.” She glanced back at the house once. “I was a fool to think there ever was.”

She looked back at him, firm resolution in her eyes. “Time to tear this place apart. It wasn’t what I hoped for; it isn’t what I would choose if there was any other way. Unfortunately, the people of the Mallay will never have anything in life if we don’t.”

Taela nodded slowly, her eyes sad. “There is no other way. Not enough people care here.”

Kellinar linked his hand with Taela’s again as they walked toward the Mallay.

Maleena sighed with relief and rubbed her hand over the slight mound of her belly as Nydara landed behind the house of Mckale’s family. Fates, she was tired. The time spent in Shadereen trying to get towers up for as many towns as possible had been exhausting and the skirmish with the Shadow Dragons at Welan had been only one of several they had to handle.

It seemed strange the Shadow Dragons showed up at every town they went to, almost as if someone was tipping them off. They had numbered more than three every time after Welan. Maleena slid off the silver and dropped to the ground as Tellnox landed. She rubbed her temples.

Latia landed right after Tellnox and a tired Anevay began unfastening her safety straps. After Sliding back and forth between Shadereen and Trilene several times, she finally decided to stay with them for a little while.

Maleena unbuckled the catcher strap then straightened and arched her back, bracing her hands on her lower back as she did. It would be good to relax for a day or two. Between creating the watchtowers in both Calladar and Shadereen, it had been over a month since she had seen Mckale’s family.

Mola’s sharp barks of joy heralded the arrival of Barden and Sonja as they rounded the barn. “Mckale, Maleena, it’s good to see you and your dragons again,” Barden called as he crossed the grass that had turned green in their absence. He paused as he took in Latia and Anevay. “And you bring another with you. Mckale, you must have a knack for finding beautiful women.”

Sonja rolled her eyes at her father and smiled at Maleena. “I see the babe finally makes its presence visible.”

Maleena ran her hand over the small mound again. “Yes, and has begun to kick.”

Mckale walked up and put an arm around her. “Sonja, Father, I would like to introduce Anevay and her dragon, Latia. Anevay is the bondmate of a good friend of ours.”

Bardeck glanced at the yellow dragon and back to Anevay before holding out his hand. “It is a pleasure to meet you, Anevay.”

She placed her hand in his and laughed when he kissed the back of it. “Your father is a charmer, Mckale.”

“It’s a shame you missed the Spring Dance, Maleena,” Sonja said, a wistful look in her eyes. Happiness radiated from her like a warm sun.

“You didn’t miss it though, did you?” Maleena said.

Sonja danced in a small circle, her face glowing. “No, I did not.”

Maleena peered around the yard behind the barn. The mid-day sun shone down on the goats roaming in one small pasture while the horses grazed in another larger one. “Where is your new husband? Are you still living here?”

Barden scowled slightly. “Yes, they both live here now.”

“Only until Yaden can build our house.”

Mckale’s father snorted. “He’d better get a move on, he only has a year.”

Anevay frowned. “What happens in a year?”

“The new husband has one year to build his wife a house,” Mckale answered. “If he fails to complete it in the year, the wife’s family has the right to negate the marriage on the grounds that he can’t provide for her and any future children.”

“Yaden will not fail. He and his family have already begun.”

“Barden,” Grandme came striding around the barn. “Leave Sonja alone. I approved of Yaden. Do you really think my judgment so bad that I would approve a man who would be incapable of finishing a house in a year? Do you think I would really approve a man who would not be good for Sonja?”

Barden flushed a little. “I didn’t say that, mother. I was merely—”

“Doing what you’ve been doing since Sonja came to me with who she wished to dance for.” The old woman drove her finger into Barden’s chest. “Just because you don’t care for his father is no reason for you to constantly disparage Sonja’s choice. The man I approved.”

Barden grumbled something under his breath then said. “Why don’t we go in?” He looked over at Maleena, Mckale, and Anevay. “You must be tired. Have you eaten?”

Mckale shook his head. “Not since the morning meal.”

Maleena’s mouth watered, she had missed the slices of ham they ate in the mornings in Calladar. “I can’t wait until the morning meal tomorrow.”

Barden laughed. “You’ll not have to wait. Kaden is on patrol, so there is actually still a slice of ham left from this morning.

Maleena walked toward the house, enjoying the soothing emotions of Mckale’s family. Though sometimes overwhelming, the emotions were generally happy and peaceful. Her mind wandered to the little house tucked into the woods outside of Lowden. Had anyone taken it over or did it sit abandoned and lonely? How badly did the Kojen tear it up? One day, she would have to return.

As they sat at the table, Mckale and Barden filled plates for Maleena and Anevay. Anevay raised an eyebrow and Maleena quickly explained the custom. Barden settled into a chair and cleared his throat. “I’m sure you are hoping for some time to relax, but the ball planned to celebrate the arrival of Guardian dragons was rescheduled and is now fast approaching. I am to send a message the minute you arrived back. Lord Arandrall wants you to tour the training grounds and the city so people can have a chance to see and meet you. The outlying towns have had that chance but the people of Marden not so much.

Maleena took a bite of the ham, savoring its flavor. She’d rather hoped they would miss the ball. Now they were supposed to tour the city as well and meet more people. Well, at least she was getting used to meeting people. Maleena reached out for Nydara just for the mental touch. The silver was hunting, far into the mountains.

The baby kicked as it always did when she reached for Nydara as if it too enjoyed the mental touch. Would the babe have any magic? Would it hatch a dragon one day? The thought weighed on her mind as the conversation between the others flowed around her. One of Emallya’s children had been born without a spark of magic. Emallya had outlived that child and many of that child’s descendants. Because of the War of Fire, she had outlived all three of her children. Even without the war though, she would have outlived all but one of them. Mages lived longer, but not nearly so long as a Dragon Rider. Maleena couldn’t imagine how hard it must have been for Emallya to watch her children grow old while she had remained youthful.

The baby kicked again and she absently rubbed her belly and prayed the Fates saw fit to make this child a Dragon Rider.

Two days later Mckale, Maleena, Anevay and Lord Arandrall walked through the training grounds. They had toured the city the day before and met so many people it made Maleena’s head ache. Today wasn’t so bad; the Border Guards were well-trained and disciplined, mostly going about their tasks as if nothing out of the ordinary was going on.

Arandrall kept a running commentary for Maleena and Anevay’s sake, explaining the purpose of different areas. Maleena didn’t pay much attention to the constant descriptions until the words “captured Kojen” caught her attention.

“I’m sorry Arandrall, my mind wandered a bit. Can you repeat that?”

“Certainly.” Arandrall smiled at her. “I said our next stop is the pit. As you know, we train Border Guards to put up mental walls to protect against the mind attacks of the Kojen. The final stage of that training is to confront an actual Kojen. You can’t learn to defend against an opponent in a swordfight without having an opponent to train against. The same applies to the Kojen. A Border Guard in training can spend hours learning to build mental walls, but until he is faced with having to hold that wall against a mental attack while still using his weapons at the same time, he won’t know how solid his training is.”

They stopped in front of a gate set in a wall. “We capture and keep a couple of Kojen in order to train new Border Guards or provide a refresher course for any who have been injured and unable to patrol for a while.”

Arandrall produced a set of keys and unlocked the gate. Maleena stepped onto a small platform. Another wall, this one about waist high, greeted her. To her left and right, a walkway ran at ground level around a large pit. There were two gates in the low wall, each one with a ladder next to it.

Maleena peered over the wall into the pit. At least twenty paces deep and over a hundred paces across, it must have taken forever to dig. Arandrall stopped next to her and looked into the pit. “Here we can control the outcome of a trainee’s battle. If he is unable to defend his mind and succumbs, we can render the Kojen unconscious and rescue our man. The Kojen remains chained at all times so that his movements are restricted. This allows our trainees to learn to fight two battles at once. One battle, as you know, is the physical one, while the other is the mental one.”

He pointed at two large, iron cage doors set across from each other in the wall of the pit. “We usually keep two. Kojen are not particularly good at fighting, depending mostly on their mental attacks to bring down or at least handicap their opponent. A dual battle is good since it more closely simulates what a Border Guard will encounter on patrols. It is reserved for those on the last level of training. One of our current Kojen though gives the trainees a hard run.”

Mckale frowned slightly. “Why is that?”

Arandrall rubbed his chin and Maleena sensed he was thinking over his answer. “He is a strange one. He never uses a mental attack for one thing and for another he is extremely skilled with whatever weapon we place in his hand.”

Maleena turned that over in her mind as several young men in full battle gear filed onto the walkway around the pit. They circled the pit until they stood on the far side near one of the ladders. Arandrall stood up straight. “I arranged this tour to coincide with the training of high level students. Those young men are close to becoming full-fledged Border Guards.

Anevay frowned. “Do we have to watch this?”

Arandrall shook his head. “Of course not, but I wanted you to have the opportunity if you so wished.”

Maleena stared down into the pit. Something tickled the back of her mind. “I will stay and watch,” she said without looking up.

Anevay leaned back against the higher wall behind them. “I might as well stay then, but I probably won’t watch much of it.”

Across from them an older man unlocked the low gate and lowered down the ladder. One young man stepped through the opening and slowly climbed down the rungs to the dirt floor of the pit as his age-mates called encouragement.

Once he stepped off the ladder, it was pulled up and the gate closed. Maleena watched as the man below set himself, his blades already drawn. On the walkway, several of the young men moved to the chains that ran through a pulley and into the wall. The heavy chains rattled across the stone as they pulled.

Below, the cage doors slowly slid up revealing darkness beyond. A loud roar split the morning as one of the Kojen charged out, a thick manacle around one ankle. The mindless emptiness of its thoughts skated along the outside of the dragon shield. The Kojen reached the end of the chain and momentarily stumbled. It swung the wooden sword in its hand at the man.

Maleena watched the other door as the next Kojen came out. His movements were slow and methodical; he didn’t roar or rush to the end of his chain. She sucked in a breath as his emotions hit her. Frustration, anger, and determination. He didn’t use mental attacks because he wasn’t a Kojen.

Without thinking, she turned and ran around the walkway to where the older man stood at the gate, watching the battle unfold. “You have to stop this, now.”

He turned to her with a startled look that softened as he took her in. “It will be alright, my lady. I won’t allow the young man to be seriously injured.”

He thought she was worried about the man. “Open this gate.”

Mckale, Anevay, and Arandrall had caught up with her. Mckale placed his hand on her arm. “Maleena, there is a Kojen down there. It isn’t safe.”

She shot him a glare. “Mckale, open this gate or so help me I will give you a headache that will last a week.” Her face softened. “Please.”

He stood for a moment as if weighing his options. “Are you certain of this?”

Arandrall gasped. “Mckale, what are you thinking of doing? You can’t let her down there, she’ll be killed.”

Maleena narrowed her eyes at him. “I may not be excellent with a sword, but I am hardly defenseless.” She turned back to Mckale and laid her hand on his cheek. “I am more than certain. Trust me.”

With a sigh, he reached over and placed his hand against the iron lock.

Anevay gasped. “Mckale, have you lost your mind? I can’t heal death!”

Maleena watched him weave a little of his power into it. With a click, the gate swung open. The older man gaped at him. “What are you doing?”

Mckale’s silver eyes hardened. “What needs to be done, Sword Master.”

Maleena turned to the man. “Lower the ladder.”

The Sword Master backed up, his hands in the air. “I will take no part in this.”

Arandrall gripped Mckale’s shoulder. “Mckale, I beg of you, stop this foolishness. I have no wish to watch your bondmate killed. Nor do I wish her dragon to kill my Kojen defending her. You know the risks the Border Guards must go through to capture Kojen.”

Mckale pulled free of his grasp, grabbed the ladder and lowered it into the pit where the combatants battled on, oblivious to what was unfolding on the walkway. Mckale turned iron-gray eyes on Maleena. “I go first.”

Maleena didn’t argue; it would have been pointless anyway. She followed him down the ladder with quick steps.

When she reached the bottom, she turned and walked toward the man and the Kojen that towered over him with Mckale on her heels. The young man caught sight of her. “What are you doing here?” He looked wide-eyed at Mckale. “Get out!” Panic edged his voice.

The true Kojen saw her and charged faster than the trainee could think to attempt a defense. Mckale pulled his swords and moved to intercept, but her hand on his arm stayed him. Maleena didn’t even flinch. She slammed a weave into its mind. With a low whine it crumpled to the ground unconscious at her feet.

The young man stared at Maleena open-mouthed, just out of range of his other opponent. Not that he needed to worry, the other one stood just as still and also staring at her.

She looked at the trainee and then up to the walkway. “That is a Kojen.” She pointed at the one on the ground. “He had no emotions, no real thoughts, only bloodlust.” Maleena turned and walked toward the other.

The young man held out his hand as she passed, the gesture almost pleading. “My lady…”

Maleena sidestepped his hand and came to a stop directly in front of the other towering creature. Though she was within arm’s reach of the big male, she felt no fear of him and she sensed none in him. Even the anger had subsided and was now replaced with curiosity, though the frustration still remained. He was fairly young. He didn’t look as fully developed as Hakan or the other men of the Ke’han she had met, nor were the curling horns as heavy.

She looked up at him. “This is not a Kojen,” she called to those on the walkway then addressed the big male directly, “You are a Ke’han.”

Surprise flowed through the Ke’han as he stared at her and nodded. Maleena turned and looked up at Arandrall and spoke with barely controlled anger in her voice. How could they not realize he was different? “A Ke’han is not a beast. They are a tribe with traditions, customs, and beliefs. They have families. They love, they feel, and they are not mindless. The Ke’han can’t attack mentally, that is why he has never attacked that way. That ability came when Galdivan rounded up and captured many of the Ke’han and twisted them into what you know as the Kojen.”

Mckale looked at Arandrall. “She speaks the truth. We met a band of them on our way here. They said they are often mistaken for Kojen.”

Arandrall looked at Maleena and back to Mckale. “They said. You mean they can speak?”

Mckale nodded and Arandrall shook his head. “This one,” he pointed to the Ke’han in front of Maleena, “has never made a sound. If he is not a Kojen, then why did he never say anything?”

Maleena looked up at the Ke’han. “Can you speak at all?” The big male slowly shook his head and she picked up mounting frustration. “I use Spirit magic. It’s similar to what your Shamas use. Do you mind if I use my magic to try and sort out why you can’t talk?”

After a long moment the Ke’han signaled his consent. Maleena sent a tendril of Spirit magic toward him, unsure if it would even work. She sensed Ke’han’s emotions but their minds worked differently than any other minds she had encountered; perhaps a natural protection of some sort.

She stood before him for some time, her mind wholly focused on the Ke’han as she attempted to follow the strange and unfamiliar paths in his mind. Every now and then colors would flicker as something almost like thoughts nearly came to the surface. Pain slowly built in her temples from the effort of probing his mind.

Suddenly a battle scene burst into her head. Border Guards swarmed around her and her younger brother. Three little desert deer, the result of the day’s hunt, lay tossed to the side as she fought for her life. Anguish closed over her heart as her brother went down on the sword of a Border Guard. She cried out as something crashed into the back of her head and dropped to her knees as the world spun. Her hands were roughly bound behind her back. In front of her, her brother’s blood spilled into the sand. The grief built into a roar of sorrow. She threw her head back and shouted her heartache to the sky. It was cut short by a sword hilt smashing into her throat.

She doubled over wheezing and gasping as she tried to draw a breath through the crushing injury. She tried to gasp out a question to her captors but all that came out was a rasping sound.

The memory-vision faded slightly as time rushed forward and the raspy sound slowly weakened until there was nothing left. The blow to the throat had stolen her voice.

Maleena’s eyes flew open. Her heart pounded wildly as she pulled in a grateful breath.

Mckale pulled her into his arms. His silver eyes, full of worry, searched hers. “What happened?”

Maleena took a few more deep breaths to slow her heart. The baby kicked and she ran a hand over her belly, sending soothing emotions to it. When she felt steadier, Maleena stepped back. “Their thoughts and memories, once accessed, are quite strong.” She looked up at Arandrall. “This Ke’han can’t speak because your men damaged his vocal chords when he cried out his grief over his brother that your men killed.”

“Mckale,” she turned to her bondmate. “Please, release him from his chains.”

The Sword Master shouted down at them. “No. You can’t release that thing. He will try to kill all of us. We have many young trainees here there are not up to facing a Kojen.”

Maleena turned slowly, her eyes hard. “He is not a thing. He is a Ke’han. He is not a Kojen. Haven’t you listened to a word I said?”

“You are insane!” The Sword Master yelled.

Disgusted, Maleena wove the memory-vision into a magic weave and threw it at the Sword Master. His eyes blanked as he stood there gasping.

“What did you do?” Arandrall asked, a frown on his face.

Maleena glanced at him. “He is seeing and feeling what I just saw and felt. It won’t harm him in any way and it will help him see that this is not a Kojen.”

Mckale bent down and placed his hand on the shackle. The metal responded to his magic by separating and stretching until it was a straight piece. The Ke’han bent and rubbed his ankle then stood and held his palm out to Mckale.

Mckale laid his palm on the Ke’han’s. “I am Mckale, rider of the Green dragon Tellnox and a Guardian of Galdrilene.”

The Ke’han tried to mouth something and stopped. Maleena felt his frustration rise again. “May I try to get your name from your thoughts?”

He nodded and she reached out with her magic again. This time it was easier and gentler. The name floated to the surface. She smiled and held out her palm, “Hello Hesutu, I’m Maleena, rider of the Silver dragon Nydara and a Guardian of Galdrilene.”

Hesutu placed his palm on hers and nodded his head, his black eyes relieved.

“Come with us. It’s time you were returned to your people.”

The trainee backed away as they crossed the pit. Arandrall and the Border Guards on the walkway made room as they came up the ladder. The Sword Master studied Hesutu with a frown on his face. “I’m truly sorry. I had no idea…”

The head of the Council of Nine stared up at the Ke’han, his eyes wide. He turned to Maleena and Mckale. “I think we need to have an emergency meeting of the Council. Would this…Ke’han be willing to join us? It would seem we have much to discuss.”

Maleena looked up at Hesutu who nodded. “This Ke’han has a name, Lord Arandrall. It is Hesutu. Just as you would prefer to be addressed by your name rather than ‘this person,’ so would he appreciate it.”

“Of course.” He nodded to the Ke’han. “My apologies, Hesutu. This is most unusual for us.”

The young warriors stared in shocked silence as they led the Ke’han passed them. Several cries of alarm filled the training yard outside the wall of the pit when they exited with what many thought was a Kojen.

Arandrall stopped and pinched the bridge of his nose, his eyes closed. Finally, he dropped his hand and looked at them. “Is there a way one of your dragons can create one of those portals? This place is going to be stirring like a kicked ant hill as it is without leading him all the way to the Council chambers.”

Mckale shook his head. “A dragon has to come through the Slide at the same time others or things are being transported through. One of them might be able to open one large enough to permit that here in the yard, although I can’t guarantee the Slide won’t cut through one of the yard walls. However, there is not near enough room in the Council chambers for a Slide to open.”

“What about the roof?”

“The roof is possible,” Mckale said. “You will have to clear the yard first.”

As Arandrall barked out orders to clear the yard, Maleena sensed Mckale reaching out to Tellnox. Within moments the massive green hovered above them, the strong strokes of his wings keeping him in place buffeted the air around them. When the yard cleared, Tellnox spun open a Slide. One edge sliced cleanly into one of the training yard’s walls.

Mckale ushered them all through the Slide as the green entered at a slow and measured pace. It was strange moving through a Slide on foot. This was a first for Maleena. Though she still moved one foot in front of the other, she couldn’t feel anything beneath them.

It was over quick. In seconds they were standing on the roof of the keep that held the Council chambers. They made their way down the plain wooden stairs to the hall below. Arandrall gathered servants as he went. Cries of fear went up when they saw Hesutu only to be silenced by Arandrall’s sharp voice. He ordered pen and paper brought to him and wrote out notes as he walked. Soon there were servants dashing away with the sealed papers. Maleena wasn’t sure if they were really in such a hurry to follow instructions or if they just desperately wanted away from what they thought was a strangely acting Kojen.

Arandrall hustled them into the Council chambers when they reached it and shut the door. Arandrall turned to them. “While we wait, why don’t you tell me about the Ke’han.”

Anevay nodded. “I would like to know too.”

Maleena smiled and for the next hour she told them about their week spent with Hakan’s camp.

Lord Frenale was the first of the other Nine to arrive. He yanked open the door, strode through and slammed it behind him. Short and on the heavy side, his dark eyes flashed. Brandishing the note in front of him, he stormed across the chamber to Arandrall. “What is the meaning of this? I needed to visit my estate today and inspect this spring’s crop of foals. Instead I’m running around Marden because you have some great emergency.”

Arandrall pointed at the Ke’han that Frenale missed in his outrage. Frenale turned and froze, his mouth agape. With a small cry he stumbled back against the wall. “What in the name of the Fates?” He glanced at the Head of the Nine, his chest rising and falling with heavy breaths. “What is this?” Fear rolled off him and slid around Mckale’s shield. Maleena breathed a sigh of relief, happy the shield seemed to be working much better now.

Lord Holden strolled through the door, his eyes on the note as if he was reading it yet again. “What has happened, Arandrall? The last time you called one of these we had more dragons in Mar—” He looked up and froze. Unlike Frenale, he noticed the Ke’han standing in the room.

How Frenale had failed to see him the moment he walked in was beyond Maleena. Like the other Ke’han males she had met, Hesutu stood a full nine paces tall. The curling horns added another half a pace of height. He towered over Mckale and the Calladarans by more than two paces.

Maleena, at barely five paces tall, was dwarfed by everyone in the room, although she was used to it. The Calladarans weren’t. Hesutu stood straight and proud, though Maleena sensed his discomfort. She locked eyes with him and gave a small smile of encouragement. She knew what it was like to be looked at by everyone as if you were something unnatural.

One by one the rest of the Nine arrived, all of them reacting to Hesutu the same. Although with the exception of Frenale, all of them kept their emotions under tight control and behind well-constructed mental walls.

Arandrall waved a hand to the chairs around the table. “Please, Council members, take a seat.”

The men slowly moved to the chairs, their eyes locked on Hesutu. Maleena, Mckale, and Anevay remained standing next to him. Arandrall remained standing as well though he leaned on the table as he looked at the assembled men. “It has come to my attention that there are a people residing in the desert called the Ke’han. “This,” he motioned toward Hesutu, “is a Ke’han. His name is Hesutu. Apparently the Ke’han are what Galdivan used to create the Kojen.”

Arandrall related all that had occurred in the training pit and then with the help of Maleena and Mckale, told the Council everything he had learned.

“This is preposterous!” Frenale slammed his fist onto the table. “Galdivan turned wild beasts into the Kojen. Everyone knows this.”

Lord Haden rubbed his chin, his eyes on Hesutu. “It does sound rather outrageous. However, how do you explain this?” He motioned at the Ke’han.

Frenale snorted. “Isn’t it obvious?” He jabbed a finger in Maleena’s direction. “She uses Spirit magic. She probably has it under some kind of mind control.”

“You are out of line.” Arandrall drew himself up to his full height and glared at Frenale.

Mckale leaned his fists on the table, the silver in his eyes fading to iron gray. “Are you suggesting my bondmate lies?” Frenale shrank back slightly.

Lord Sarrandrall ran his hand through his light-brown hair, his pale gray eyes on Arandrall. “You have to admit, it could be a possibility.”

Arandrall shifted his glare to Sarrandrall. “Dragon Riders of Galdrilene do not lie.”

Lord Yennale shifted, his discomfort breaking through his mental shield. “As unlikely as this sounds, I don’t doubt the word of Galdrilene. Like Arandrall, I have been there.” He rubbed the graying goatee on his chin and shook his bald head. “This presents a whole host of issues.”

Frenale puffed up like an indignant rooster. “What issues?”

Lord Holden leaned back in his chair. “Issues of inhumane treatment.”

“Inhumane? Have you lost your mind?” Frenale scowled at him. “The Kojen are animals. Most likely these Ke’han are animals too.”

A flush of anger rushed through Maleena and it radiated off Hesutu. “They are not animals.”

“Even animals,” Lord Arandrall held up his hand when she opened her mouth to protest, “I’m not saying they are or that I think they are. However, for those in the room that insist on this thinking,” he looked pointedly at Frenale, “even animals deserve a certain degree of treatment.”

Lord Holden shook his head and looked at Arandrall with sad silver eyes. “Do you realize how indiscriminate we have been with killing Kojen? How many of them have been these Ke’han? When we have found groups with females and young, we have slaughtered them all in our fear. Even when a few pleaded for mercy, we just assumed the Kojen were learning to speak or that it was a trick of some kind.”

Lord Clayden rubbed his forehead. “How were we to know? Even now, how are we to know the difference?” He glanced at Hesutu. “With no offense intended, you look so much like a Kojen, I would not be able to tell you apart.”

“For one,” Mckale said standing straight but keeping his glare on Frenale. “Kojen never have females or young with them. Those are kept strictly in the Kormai. If you come across a group with women and children, you have found Ke’han.”

“Is there a way the males could mark themselves so we don’t accidentally engage them?” Arandrall asked.

Maleena looked at Hesutu who seemed to be thinking it over. He reached his hand, palm up to her. She instantly placed her hand on his. Thoughts, though difficult to hear, flowed into her. Thankfully, they weren’t overpowering like his memories had been. She turned to Arandrall. “Hesutu says he can’t make such a decision. He is barely old enough to be considered a grown man. The elders of the tribes will have to convene in order for a decision like this to be made.”

Frenale waved his hand toward Hesutu. “If he isn’t an animal, why doesn’t he speak for himself? You could probably tell me what a horse thinks.” He snorted again, “Elders. Please, are the rest of you actually believing this drivel?”

Being bound by the laws of Galdrilene was a heavy weight. Maleena reached for Nydara, needing the connection to keep her rising temper in check before she did something she would regret. Nydara’s love and patience flowed into her like a healing balm. She closed her eyes and drank it in for a brief moment. When Maleena opened her eyes again, her serenity had returned. “He can’t speak because the Border Guards who captured him crushed his vocal chords—after they killed his younger brother.”

Anevay glared at Frenale. “No wonder the downlands are such a mess with people like you in charge. Even when the proof is standing in front of you in the flesh, you refuse to believe. Perhaps it’s time the dragons searched for your replacement.”

Frenale jumped to his feet, his face beet-red again. “How dare you insinuate I am unfit to lead.” His voice shook with the anger that radiated from him. “You have no right—”

Mckale leveled a piercing look at him. “Actually, we do. You agreed to Dragon Law when you accepted Galdrilene’s protection. If you insist on persecuting a people because they look like Kojen, the dragons will replace you. This isn’t even a decision of riders; it’s the decision of the dragons.”

Frenale glared at all of them. None of the other Nine raised a voice in his defense. None of them even looked at him except Sarrandrall who gazed at Frenale with cool, calculating eyes. Frenale threw his hands in the air and sat with a thump in the chair. He crossed his arms over his chest and slouched down. “To the depths of the Kormai with all of you.”

Arandrall let out a weary sigh. “If the Ke’han decide they aren’t willing to mark themselves, we will have to figure out another way to identify them so they aren’t inadvertently harmed in our search for Kojen.”

Lord Sarrandrall cleared his throat. “Not to rain on your dance here, Arandrall, but how do you even know how the Ke’han feel about the Kojen? They are some sort of distant relation, how do we know they aren’t in league with them.”

Frenale brightened and sat up straighter in his chair.

Maleena laughed softly. “You are truly reaching, Lord Sarrandrall. However, I can answer that question. The Ke’han view the Kojen as an abomination that should be destroyed. They have tried to capture their own Kojen and show them the proper way to behave. Their Shamas were unable to reach through the blood lust and chaos in the minds of Kojen to find any thoughts. The Kojen will kill Ke’han as quickly as they will a human.”

Arandrall nodded. “There is your answer, Sarrandrall.”

Lord Sarrandrall leaned back in his chair and nodded, silently watching the others at the table. His mental walls were strong, still Maleena sensed something wasn’t quite right. She considered touching his mind but decided against it. It would be rude to do so. In all likelihood, he was just processing all of the new information thrown at him.

“Each of you,” Arandrall looked at all of the men at the table, his eyes lingering longest on Frenale, “will draft an explanation of this new information for your lower ranks along with orders to refrain from engaging any Kojen seen with women and children for now. As for the men who are alone, Border Guards are to attempt communication before entering into battle with them until we have time to investigate this further.”

Lord Holden nodded, his face pensive. “Hopefully, the Ke’han will pause to listen.”

“Also,” Arandrall turned his gaze on Maleena and Mckale. “I need to meet with some of these people. I need more than just Hesutu to go on. I will accompany you when you return him to his people.” He glanced around the table. “As will Lords Holden, Yennale, and Sarrandrall so that several of us may witness the differences between Kojen and Ke’han.”

“Why not me?” Frenale leaned forward angrily.

Arandrall sent him an icy look. “This is to be a learning and peacemaking visit. I don’t need anyone along who can’t control their emotions. You have the skill of a trainee when it comes to that.”

Frenale leaped from his chair again, this time sending it clattering to the floor. “You can’t speak to me that way.”

Arandrall stood as well, locking eyes with Frenale. The tension in the room soared. Mckale’s shield kept most of Frenale’s anger at bay though some still leaked through, enough to cause a dull ache to start behind Maleena’s eyes. The baby kicked and she absently stroked her belly, sending soothing thoughts to the little one.

The silence in the room stretched and thickened. None of the other men in the room moved as they watched the silent battle of wills. Mckale often reminded Maleena of a half-tamed wolf and after spending time in Calladar, she knew why. Arandrall was the head of the Nine not just by birthright but also by strength of will. In a sense, he was the alpha of Calladar.

Finally, Frenale dropped his eyes and backed up a step. Arandrall kept his cold, intense stare fixed on the man. “I can speak to you that way. You may be a member of the Council of the Nine; however, I am the Head of the Nine. You will do well to remember that Frenale. You are ill-suited to a meeting with the Ke’han and so you will remain behind. You are new to the Council so I will excuse your behavior this time. Your father was a good and steady man. It would do you well to honor his memory by emulating him.” He glanced around at the other men. “The others I didn’t choose, it has no bearing on your abilities.”

The other men nodded. None appeared ruffled by Arandrall’s decision. Frenale glared at each of them for a moment before striding from the room, slamming the door behind him. Arandrall took his seat again. “Draft your explanations and orders. I will speak with the Sword Masters. The sooner we can get Hesutu home, the better. This meeting is adjourned. I expect those accompanying me to return within the hour. I trust that is long enough.”

Sarrandrall nodded. “More than long enough to make arrangements.” His gaze flickered across Mckale and Maleena as he stood.

After the men filed out of the room, Arandrall turned to Mckale and Maleena. “If you don’t mind, I ask you to remain here until we assemble to leave.”

Maleena nodded. “Of course.”

“As long as you send someone with the mid-day meal,” Mckale said. “Maleena needs to eat and so do I.”

Arandrall inclined his head. “I will have it sent up immediately.” He hesitated at the door. “Hesutu, is there anything in particular you would like to eat or drink?”

Hesutu seemed surprised by the question. Until a couple of hours ago he’d been chained and caged like an animal. After a moment’s pause, the Ke’han shook his head.

As Arandrall closed the door behind him, Maleena sank into one of the chairs with a soft sigh. Mckale sat next to her and she sensed his concern. Anevay sat as well.

“Maleena?” He took her hand in his.

She smiled wearily at him. “I’m fine, just a little tired. I’ll feel better after I eat and drink.”

Hesutu seemed agitated and she turned to him. “What’s wrong?”

He held out his massive hand to her and she placed her palm on his. The thought came through clearly; he must be really worried. “Can you find them?”

Maleena smiled at him and shook her head. “I can’t find them. However,” she hastened to add when his shoulders slumped, “my dragon Nydara should be able to. She may not be able to locate your exact family, but she should be able to find the Nagi of the camp we met.”

She reached out to Nydara, “You can find them right?”

“Now you ask.” The sending was accompanied by a mental snort.

“Can you or not?”

“Of course I can. Dragons can always find each other. It will be more difficult because of our differences, somewhat like you and the Ke’han, but I can do it. I will start searching now for Amara.”

Maleena sent a wave of love to the dragon. “Thank you.” She turned her attention back to Hesutu. “The headman of the camp was named Hakan, do you know him?”

Hesutu nodded eagerly, a smile spreading across his face, revealing his fangs. He held his hand out. Again, Maleena placed her palm on his. “My headman’s cousin and my uncle.”

Mckale cleared his throat. “Anevay, can you heal the damage to his vocal chords?”

“I don’t know.” Anevay hesitated. “I can try though I’m not sure my weaves will work on him.”

She stood and walked up to the Ke’han that towered over her. The several inches she had on Maleena didn’t make her look any taller next to Hesutu. Anevay placed her hands on his arm and closed her eyes. Maleena watched the magic threads of healing weave together and flow up his arm to his throat. Anevay stood like that for several minutes before pulling the weave back and releasing it.

“Well?” Mckale leaned forward, an expectant look on his face.

Hesutu looked down at the dark-skinned healer. “Thank you.” His voice was raspy, with little more sound than a whisper, but it was a voice.

Anevay shook her head. “I wish I could do more. The damage was done quite some time ago. Perhaps a year?” She looked at him questioningly. When he nodded she continued, “I thought so. Injuries left too long don’t heal right. Couple that with our obvious differences and it’s the best I can do. I’m sorry.”

“There is nothing to apologize for,” Hesutu rasped.

Maleena smiled at Anevay. “You are just as good at healing as Serena.”

Her friend sent her a mock glare. “You aren’t supposed to go poking around in my head.”

“I didn’t.” Maleena laughed softly. “When you broadcast your thoughts like that though, I can’t help hearing them.”

Someone knocked at the door to the room. Before any of them could move to stand up, it swung open and a line of servants carried platters of food and pitchers of drink. Maleena drew in the wonderful smells filling the Council chamber and her stomach growled in approval.

They ate their meal in silence. Hesutu seemed intent on trying everything. What had he been fed while imprisoned?

As they finished the meal, Nydara reached out for Maleena. “I have found them. The connection with Amara wasn’t easy to make, but with some work I was able to bridge the differences. They are quite a distance from where we met them. Amara has let Angeni know that we are coming.”

“Thank you, Nydara.” Maleena looked at Hesutu. “Nydara has found Hakan’s camp.”

The Ke’han smiled again his eyes alight with anticipation.

Anevay sat back. “I will accompany you to meet the Ke’han so I can carry personal observations back to Galdrilene and then to Trilene.”

The other woman’s longing tugged at Maleena. “Send my love to everyone.”

Mckale raised his eyebrows. “You aren’t staying?”

“I’ve barely had any time with Kellinar and Taela lately,” Anevay said. “I miss them.”

“Understandable.” Mckale nodded and looked at Maleena. “Still, it was a comfort having you around.”

Anevay reached across the table and took Mckale’s hand. “You have nothing to worry about. The pregnancy is moving along just fine. There is nothing for me to do here.”

He smiled at her and Maleena sensed the relief he felt at Anevay’s words. “I have trouble not worrying. Especially with so much going on and the need to fly so much, the battles in Shadereen, and everything that still needs to be done.”

Anevay glanced at Maleena and they shared a look before the healer turned back to Mckale. “She is strong and capable, Mckale. Pregnant doesn’t equate to being an invalid or broken.”

He nodded. “I know. Really I do, it’s just—”

The door swung open, interrupting him as Arandrall, Holden, Yennale, and Sarrandrall entered with a group of Border Guards. Maleena and her companions stood. Mckale crossed his arms and a slight frown formed on his face. “Border Guards?”

Arandrall nodded. “It isn’t that I don’t believe you; however, if this were to go wrong somehow, we can’t go unprotected.”

Maleena looked over the group of twenty Border Guards. Hakan’s camp was one of those with a Nagi. The long, low-slung dragon would take down every one of those men if she thought her camp was threatened.

Maleena sensed the sudden turmoil within Tellnox, Nydara, and Latia. Bound to protect both the Ke’han and the Calladarans, the possibility of the two against each other in battle disturbed and saddened them.

As they made their way up to the roof again, Maleena sent waves of comfort to the silver. It wouldn’t come to battle between the two; the group of Border Guards was only a precaution.

The dragons awaited them on the roof. While Mckale explained to Arandrall and the others what to do once the Slide opened, Maleena stepped up on Nydara’s leg and reached for the saddle. She brought her leg up to place her foot in the stirrup and had to twist a little to reach high enough. Though not large yet, her expanding middle already made getting in and out of the saddle more difficult. Maybe they would Slide back to Galdrilene at some point and see if another stirrup could be added below the one she normally used so she wouldn’t have to reach as far with her foot when gaining the saddle.

As she settled in the seat and began to fasten the safety straps, Anevay leaped into Latia’s saddle and Mckale helped Hesutu up behind him on the massive green.

“We must lift off first since I have to control the Slide this time. Amara gave me a very clear picture; however, this is a place none of us have physically been, so I prefer to open it myself. Amara was kind enough to send scents, feelings and other general information about the place.”

Maleena nodded and ran her hand over the silver scales of Nydara’s neck. “I agree. It’s best for you to open the Slide, I have no wish to become lost in it.”

The silver lifted into the air and Maleena sensed her gauging the size of the Slide she would need to get them all through as well as the distance of the low wall that ran around the top of the roof.

After several moments with Tellnox and Latia waiting behind her, Nydara opened the Slide. Maleena glanced down at the men on the roof. The wind from three dragons trying to hold themselves in position buffeted them and they each stood with an arm raised over their faces as if trying to keep any dust away.

Nydara angled her wings and moved slowly into the Slide. When they emerged, the desert stretched around them. A hot wind smacked Maleena in the face and she wiped away the sweat that immediately beaded on her forehead. Below them, a wide, shallow canyon stretched out. Several other smaller canyons branched out from it like limbs on a tree.

Hakan must be taking precautions too. Instead of a box canyon, he had his camp in this open one with plenty of escape routes.

The dragons landed in a way that placed them between the Ke’han and the Border Guards. Maleena heard some grumbling about that but ignored it. They could be as displeased as they wanted. The dragons’ duty was to protect them all against harm, not against irritation.

The warriors of Hakan’s camp lined up much like the first time Maleena had seen them. A living wall of protection for those behind them. A baby’s cry rang out and was quickly hushed. For a moment, no one moved. Arandrall and the Council members stood staring as the Ke’han gazed back warily.

Maleena eased off Nydara’s back and walked toward Hakan with Mckale at her side.

Without taking his eyes off the Bordermen, Hakan put a fist over his heart. “It is good to see friends again. You have brought a member of my family with you?”

“It’s good to see you again too, Hakan.” Mckale emulated the fist over heart before turning and waving Hesutu forward.

A gasp rose up from the Ke’han. Avendala pushed her way between the males and ran to Hesutu, a cry of relief coming from her. Several of the men lurched forward to stay within a protective range of her.

Avendala hugged Hesutu tight. He returned the hug and Maleena sensed he was torn between maintaining the cool, collected attitude of the adult males and clinging to her like the young male he still was.

Maleena smiled. “I guess you do know each other.”

Avendala backed up a step and ran her hands down the sides of Hesutu’s face. She glanced at Maleena. “My older sister’s son.” She looked back at Hesutu. “Is Gad somewhere too?”

A sense of despair flowed from Hesutu and reflected in his dark eyes as he shook his head. “Gad is dead,” he rasped. “I fought as hard as I could, but I could not save him.”

Tears welled in Avendala’s eyes as she nodded, accepting the news. Hakan came forward and enveloped his nephew in a brief hug before he stepped back. “We will properly mourn Gad when we meet with your camp. For now, let us deal with this.”

Mckale turned to Arandrall. “Hakan, this is Lord Arandrall, the Head of the Council of Nine whom led Calladar. With him are Yennale, Holden, and Sarrandrall,” he pointed to each one in turn, “other members of the Nine.”

Then he looked at Arandrall, “This is Hakan, headman of this camp of Ke’han.”

Arandrall approached slowly, a wary look in his eyes that was mirrored in Hakan’s. When he was within arm’s reach, Hakan held his hand out, palm up. “Welcome to my camp, Arandrall.”

Arandrall hesitated. “Lord Arandrall.”

Hakan inclined his head slightly. “I am aware of the title you carry; however, you are not a leader to me or mine, your title means nothing here. Here, you are just Arandrall. I am not a headman to you and yours, my title means nothing to you. For the purpose of this meeting, I am just Hakan.”

Maleena suppressed a smile as she watched Arandrall swallow his pride and place his palm on Hakan’s under the direction of Mckale and thank the Ke’han for the welcome.

A gasp of surprise went up from the Border Guards as Amara, her burgundy scales flashing in the sun, ran past. The long dragon was surprisingly agile as she flowed across the ground, the dark blue mane around her head tossing in the breeze. She stopped in front of the dragons and Maleena sensed a conversation between them.

Arandrall stared at Amara, his eyes wide. “What is that?”

Maleena brushed away the strands of hair blown into her face by the wind. “That is Amara. She is a Nagi. She protects this camp in the same way dragons protect their riders. Her scales are as hard as dragon scales and although she can’t fly, she can breathe fire. I wouldn’t recommend making any threatening movements toward the Ke’han.”

Arandrall frowned slightly and nodded. He looked toward the Border Guards. “You heard her. Keep your weapons sheathed unless there is no other choice.”

Hakan motioned for Arandrall and the other Council members to follow him. “Please, join us and meet the Ke’han.”

The men of the camp opened ranks and allowed them through, though they still stood alert, their eyes on the group of Border Guards. As they entered the camp, Maleena and Anevay were immediately drawn away to the group of women.

Angeni looked at Maleena and smiled widely. “You are with child now.”

Maleena laughed and nodded. Pamuya patted Maleena’s belly with a wrinkled hand. The baby kicked against it and Pamuya smiled. “It is a strong babe. You will have to bring it to meet us after it enters this world.”

“I promise,” Maleena said as she glanced toward the men. Arandrall and the other Council members lowered themselves awkwardly to sit on the bare, hard ground with a circle of the Ke’han men. She turned back and followed the women over to the cushions and rugs spread out on the ground for them. Maleena sat gratefully on a large cushion and accepted a drink of spiced tea from the second’s mate, Algoma. In her mind, she felt Nydara’s and Tellnox’s pleasure as they communicated again with their distant cousin.

They spent the rest of the day there, returning as the sun settled low in the western sky. Anevay had Slid directly to Galdrilene from the Ke’han’s camp. Mckale and Maleena ended up spending the night in Arandrall’s house rather than disturb Mckale’s family.

The next afternoon after attending a morning of meetings with the Nine, they escaped to spend some time relaxing.

Maleena leaned into Mckale’s warm side as they strolled along the wall walk of the city wall. Both of them were keyed up from the tension of the past couple of days, neither ready to go back to Mckale’s family’s house yet. Things were quiet along the wall. Border Guards patrolled but otherwise they were alone. The view of the land sloping away to the Blood River in the distance, washed by the golden sun as it began its afternoon descent, was both beautiful and peaceful at the same time. They paused to take it in. Above them, Nydara and Tellnox soared out over the land, enjoying an afternoon flight in the nice weather.

Maleena leaned back against Mckale, enjoying the feel of his arms around her. “Is it common to bring one’s love to walk on the walls?”

She felt the rumble of his quiet laughter against her back. “More common that you might think. The view from up here is unquestionably pleasant. More than one Border Guard has knelt upon the wall walks to beg his love to dance for him in the spring.”

Maleena glanced down the wall at the guards keeping a discrete distance. “I wondered why they were leaving us alone.”

She felt his breath on her temple as he bent to kiss her lightly near her hairline. “You handled the past two days very well.”

“How so?” She turned her head and looked up at him.

“A Ke’han in a pit, a roomful of upset people, the meeting with the Ke’han, more meetings; you are handling groups of people better these days.” He smiled at her, his silver eyes shining.

Maleena chuckled softly. “That still doesn’t mean I’m looking forward to the ball.”

“You will do—”

He cut off in a heavy grunt as something stabbed into the back of her upper shoulder.

With a cry she lurched forward and spun, ignoring the warmth that spilled down her shoulder blade. Mckale sank to his knees. “Maleena? Are you…?”

The broad head of an arrow stuck out from his chest. Blood poured down the front of him. Tellnox’s roar ripped across the sky as the dragon made a sharp turn and dove for the wall.

“Mckale!” Maleena pressed her hands around the arrow shaft in a futile attempt to stem the flow. She looked down the wall walk at the guards and screamed desperately for help. The sound of their feet pounding against the stone echoed in her ears.

Tellnox landed on the wall with enough force to crumble a section of it. Smoke curled from his nostrils as he turned on the running guards with a snarl. Maleena held out a hand to the angry green. “Tellnox, no! They’re trying to help.”

The green pulled back and allowed them to come near. As shouts rang out along the wall, more guards ran in their direction. One of them reached toward her but Mckale’s hand clamped down on his wrist. “Don’t.” Mckale’s eyes were steely.

The guard looked Maleena in the eye. “You have to back up. We can’t help either of you if won’t move your hands.”

“Either of us?” She looked at him in confusion, a slight haze curling around the edges of her mind. Beneath her hands, Mckale coughed and blood sprayed his lips.

“Please, Di’shan, we are used to dressing battle wounds. Word has already been sent to Arandrall. I’m sure he will send one of the healers.” The use of her title pulled her from the haze enough to focus on his pale gray eyes as he said, “I have been to Galdrilene. I know what being a Silver means. I know I shouldn’t touch you, but if you won’t move your hands on your own, I will have to move them for you.”

With a sob, she slowly withdrew her hands. Another guard knelt next to her. “I have to apply pressure to your shoulder.”

His voice sounded familiar and she looked at him as her head swam. “My back?” It was Kaden, Mckale’s brother.

He nodded. “The arrow went through him and hit you too. You’re bleeding badly.” His steady voice contradicted the worry in his eyes.

Nydara landed behind the guards, her claws grabbing purchase and knocking several stones to the ground. Her anxious eyes filled Maleena’s vision.

Maleena gritted her teeth as something pressed against her back. Pain lanced into her and she leaned forward with a groan. An arm went around her to steady her and a flood of emotions and thoughts crashed through her.

In front of her, Mckale coughed more blood as the men around him worked efficiently. The world grew darker. Tellnox’s frantic emotions in her head and the overload from Kaden’s touch became too much. The baby kicked as if sensing something was very wrong.

The man who had told her to move her hands glanced up and barked, “Kaden! Keep her awake.”

A sharp sting on her cheek pulled her out of the haze briefly. “Maleena, you have to stay awake.”

“Nydara,” she cried out in her mind.

“I’m here. I’ll always be here. Stay awake, Maleena.”

The world tilted and spun slowly. “How is Mckale?”

She sensed the dragon’s hesitation. “He isn’t good,” came Nydara’s worried sending.

Darkness clawed at the edges of her consciousness again as Kaden’s sudden spike of terror overwhelmed her.

Azurynn walked through the Kormai filled with triumph. Striding into the main cavern she held the black chain aloft. “I’ve done it. Now all I need to do is test it.”

Sadira glared at her but said nothing. Kovan slowly stood. “Where do you plan to test it? Another raid into Shadereen?”

Azurynn shook her head. “No, they have systematically removed our advantage there, even with our dragons’ interference.”

“Where then?” Kovan watched her uneasily.

She smiled, enjoying his discomfort. Azurynn really didn’t care what they thought of her, just as long as they remained afraid enough to let her do as she wished. Kovan and Sadira might both be a match for her in strength but she held the advantage.

“I’m thinking someplace further west. A place with younger, less experienced riders.” Azurynn ran the chain through her fingers, her eyes pinned on Sadira. “Maybe a place that hasn’t seen enough force from the Shadow Riders. One that might feel comfortable since the last one they encountered ran with her tail between her legs.”

Hatred and anger rolled off Sadira. Azurynn relished the pain that spiked in her head from the other woman’s emotions. Tonight, in her bed, the buildup would be agony. It was worth it. Sadira rose from the cushioned bench. “One of these days, Azurynn—”

“Now, now, Sadira. Down girl.” She flipped her thick hair over her shoulder and walked to where her dragon, Murynn, rested. “Don’t get your feathers ruffled. After all,” Azurynn stopped and peered over her shoulder at the other woman, “I’m trying to help you.”

Kovan raked his hand through his hair. “What are you suggesting, Azurynn?”

She smiled at him. “According to my source, there are a small number of young Guardians ‘protecting’ Markene. I’m suggesting we pay them a visit.”

Sadira snorted and crossed her arms. “Those young dragons will simply call in the more experienced Guardians and we’ll be in a pitched battle again. How will that help you test your little toy?”

Azurynn narrowed her eyes at Sadira. “You are a simpleton, aren’t you? I don’t suggest we fly in there with dragons blazing. Unlike you, I know how to make a more subtle approach. They run patrols on a regular basis. I suggest we take one of these young riders by surprise. His or her dragon will have to be rendered unconscious fairly quickly in order to prevent it from sending a distress call.” She sent Sadira a haughty look. “You couldn’t handle things last time; do you feel you and Ranit are competent enough to handle the task of taking down one young dragon?”

“Of course we can.”

Azurynn laughed lightly at Sadira’s growled answer. “Remember not to kill the dragon. My test won’t work if the dragon is already dead.”

Sadira opened her mouth but Kovan spoke up before she could get a word out. “Either hurry up and kill each other or drop the insults so we can go.”

Azurynn eyed him up and down. “Careful, Kovan, or maybe we’ll kill you.”

He shrugged and called Quillan down. He glanced at her as the big black settled to the floor. “Do whatever, Azurynn, I tire of hearing you.”

A slow smile tugged at her lips. “My, my, my aren’t we testy? You seem to have lost your good temperament…oh when was that?” She tapped her lips, pretending to think hard as she ignored the cold look he sent her way. “Oh I remember now, about the time you threw your pregnant little maid out. You never did say why you did that. It’s something you’ve kept closed up tight behind sturdy walls in your mind. Perhaps you should fetch her back or choose another to take to your bed. Your lack of bed partner seems to have affected your good sense.”

Azurynn wove a heavy web as she watched his fist ball up. “Remember, Kovan, I can see your magic the minute you start to weave it. I can also read the thoughts running through your little mind right now.” She narrowed her eyes. “If you wish to test it so badly, go ahead.”

The younger Shadow Riders watched the confrontation with mixed expressions. Tension hung thick in the air as their emotions rolled over Azurynn. A mixture of fear and hope that they would actually kill each other and be out of the way.

Sadira shifted slightly on the peripheral of Azurynn’s vision. Without taking her eyes off Kovan she sent a warning to the dark-haired beauty. “Sadira, lovely, don’t get any ideas. I’m quite capable of handling multiple weaves.”

Oksana walked between them on the way to her dragon. “Oh, leave off you three. You’re like three wet cats in a bag. Stop your scratching and spitting long enough so we can get something done.”

Azurynn barely flicked her eyes at the blonde; a little annoyed at the lack of respect Oksana seemed to give her.

Kovan glared at Azurynn for a long moment before turning his back, stepping up on Quillan’s leg and then pulling himself into the saddle. Disappointment and relief washed through the cavern.

Azurynn watched him closely and kept her attention on Sadira as she climbed on Murynn. Sadira climbed on Ranit without looking at her.

Kovan finally turned his cold eyes on her. “Are we going to test this thing of yours or not?”

With another lazy smile at him, she signaled Murynn to take off.

Jocelynn walked down the hall of the castle at Markene. Where had Loki gone off to now? Honestly, the boy needed to take his duties more seriously. Especially since an undercurrent of dissension still flowed through the nation even after the visit by Sadira. Granted, Sadira’s visit had made the people understand exactly what they were up against. The story of Haden’s display of abject fear, witnessed by many, had spread like wildfire as had the story of Kalila’s firm stand. It had cemented her place on the throne and yet still someone stirred up trouble.

Minor trouble to be sure, but it still undermined what Kalila was trying to do here. Jocelynn glanced down a long hall. It wasn’t likely the boy was hiding in here. Exasperated, she reached out for her green, Adirynn. “Can you get Merru to answer you?”

“I have tried several times.” The green’s irritation mirrored her own. “You would think after what happened last time, they would know better.”

Jocelynn flipped her long red-blonde braid over her shoulder. “If he gets into enough trouble that Kellinar has to come after him again…well it might be the first time ever that a Guardian has killed another Guardian in the history of Galdrilene.”

“Abrax and Varnen are out searching, perhaps they will find them,” Adirynn sent.

Jocelynn looked over her shoulder as Kalila’s advisor Lalani turned into the hall. “Lalani, have you seen Loki or Merru anywhere?”

Lalani raised her thin, arched eyebrows. “Missing again is he?” She shrugged slightly. “I am sure they will turn up.”

Jocelynn watched the woman walk away. She was no Silver, but her gut told her Lalani knew more than she was saying. What was the woman up to? What did she know of Loki’s whereabouts?”

She turned and walked back down the long halls until she reached the inner courtyard. The mid-day sun shone brightly against the stone and reflected off Adirynn’s rich green scales as she walked toward the dragon. She sent a brief glare in the direction of the sun. Wonderful. Now she got to spend the rest of the day out in the bright sunlight searching for the boy. She didn’t get along well with the sun. Her skin was quite fair and she burned easily, often breaking out in a rash if in it too long. With an irritated sigh Jocelynn buckled the catcher strap on. She was going to have to Slide to Galdrilene after this to see a healer again. She leaped off Adirynn’s leg and caught the saddle, pulling herself the rest of the way up. Maybe when Serena or Anevay got back to Galdrilene they could work up a weave of some sort to keep the sun from bothering her so much. A moment later she had the safety straps tight across her thighs.

As they rose in the air, Jocelynn caught sight of Abrax to the north, soaring over the trees and the low craggy hills. The sun rippled along his scales like blue fire. If Abrax and Varnen had the north, she would take the south. Hopefully she wouldn’t be too tired or too burnt to a crisp to enjoy the evening with Varnen. They weren’t bondmates, but they had still developed a deep attachment to each other. She was glad they got assigned here together.

Adirynn turned south. They began to make long sweeps across the wide expanse of the prairie that reached to the Galdar River and then continued on the other side, stretching all the way to the desert.

Kellinar sat down. It had been a busy morning. He smiled to himself; it had been a busy night too. He had to admit, it was nice having Anevay back with him. Kellinar had worried more about her when she was on the border than he ever had when she’d been in Trilene. He couldn’t convince either of his bondmates to stay in Galdrilene where it was safe. If they had to go throwing themselves in front of swords, at least they were with him. Although the knowledge Anevay and Latia brought back with them about the Ke’han certainly made Anevay’s return interesting. Who knew there were Kojen-like beings that weren’t really Kojen out there?

Serena, Anevay, and Taela settled down in chairs around him on the wide terrace in front of the Thieves’ Caves. The cacophony of the Mallay provided familiar background noise. As late afternoon set in, the herders brought their goats and geese in from the pasture. Hawkers still called out their wares, babies cried, people argued or laughed, and goats bleated loudly at being put in their small pens.

Between them, Belan and himself had gotten a lot done that day. The seeds of dissension were spread, helped along by those few in the Trilene and Dellar Districts who wanted nothing to do with the Shadow Riders. Down on the docks, in the vineyards, around dinner tables, and in the out of the way corners of the markets, people whispered that maybe there was another way. That the cost would be high but maybe it was worth it.

The city of Trilene was a boiling cauldron about to explode.

Anevay, Taela, and Serena all leaped to their feet at the same time as Shryden’s urgent sending flowed into Kellinar’s mind. “There are two distress calls. One from Nydara and Tellnox; Maleena and Mckale are injured, Mckale badly. The other is being broadcasted by Adirynn and Abrax in Markene, something has happened to Loki and Merru. I’m getting a call from Merru as well, but it’s very faint.”

Kellinar rose from his seat as the dragons dived toward the terrace. Which did he go to first? It felt like he was being torn in half on the inside.

Serena shook her head, worry clear on her face. “Kellinar, you, Anevay and Taela take care of Loki, the danger is there. From what I’m getting from Tellnox through Miya, it’s bad. I will see to Maleena and Mckale.”

Seconds later the dragons were landing on the terrace and at the bottom of the stairs. Kellinar sprinted to Shryden and started to jump in the saddle.

“Catcher strap,” Shryden reminded him. “I won’t fly until you have it on.”

Cursing, Kellinar snugged the strap down and buckled it tight then leaped into the saddle. “Alright it’s on. You can take off while I get the other straps on.”

The blue launched into the air.

The sun sat cocked to the west when Jocelynn decided to take a rest. They’d covered the south for miles and most of the west. She let herself down from the large green and settled on a rock outcropping. In front of her, the ground fell away for at least two dragon lengths. She and her dragon could rest here and still keep a good lookout. The sun burned down on her and she glanced at her arms. They held the distinct pink shades of a sunburn that would deepen. Glancing back she eyed the two shrubby trees behind her. Turning around, she laid her hands against the trunks and let her magic flow into them. They bent easily to her will, leaning over her and lacing their branches together, creating a well-shaded place for her to sit.

Drawing her legs up, Jocelynn rested her arms across her knees and stared out over the land. Where had Loki gone? Should she let Kellinar know he was missing? She shook her head. No sense making him worry when there was likely nothing to worry about.

“He should have been back by now,” Adirynn sent. “He was only flying patrol. They’ve been acting pretty good lately.”

Jocelynn looked at her dragon. “What are you getting at?”

“I don’t think they would have just taken off like that. Not after the last time.” Adirynn turned anxious green eyes on her. “I’m worried.”

She sent waves of comfort to the dragon. “It hasn’t been that long, maybe a couple of hours. He probably just grew bored with patrol and decided to fly for fun afterward. Loki is young; he likely didn’t think to tell anyone.”

“It isn’t like Merru not to answer us,” Adirynn’s sending was full of worry.

Do you think you should send a message to Shryden?”

The dragon huffed a heavy breath and indecision weighed heavy in her sending. “I don’t know. I hate to have them all running here for nothing. And yet if something is wro—”

The dragon jerked her head up, her wings raised in agitation.

Jocelynn jumped to her feet. “What? Adirynn, what is it?”

“Merru just sent a distress call. He’s been unconscious…” She swung her head toward Jocelynn. “It’s bad. Get on, fast!”

Jocelynn leaped into the saddle, fumbling with the safety straps in her hurry. “What happened?”

“I don’t know. It’s fuzzy and weak. His distress call isn’t reaching very far.” The green let out her breath in a long hiss. “A soul separator.”

“A what?” Jocelynn grabbed the handles on the front of the saddle as Adirynn leaped off the outcropping into the air. Her wings pushed them forward with powerful strokes.

“A soul separator. What nearly took Syrakynn. They have a working one. I already sent a call to Shryden. He and the others have already Slid. There are Shadow Dragons.”

Dread settled in Jocelynn’s stomach as the green spun open a Slide and dove into it.

Fire burned across the sky as they came through the other side. A black dragon nearly crashed into them and Jocelynn was thrown against the straps as Adirynn twisted away. Shryden came within touching distance as the blue flew at the black, grabbing it by the throat.

The blonde on the back of the Shadow shrieked curses at him as a black arrow coated in sickly green lightning leapt from her bow. It burned across Kellinar’s shoulder. With a roar, Shryden released the black dragon and snapped instead at its blonde rider.

Syrakynn blasted fire at another black. Latia streaked through the air after a man and his Shadow. Namir crashed into the Shadow that Latia chased. The two dragons tumbled through the air as their riders tried to aim weaves at each other.

Jocelynn searched the ground and saw a group of Kojen standing around Loki and Merru. Adirynn flew at them, landing a few paces away though she didn’t stop. Instead the green charged into them snapping at them and crushing them in her jaws.

More came running from a copse of trees. Jocelynn loosed the safety straps and leaped off the running dragon, her zahri in hand. Her feet hit the ground and she rolled, coming up ready to fight. The Kojen turned and charged her. Jocelynn set the zahri in her hands and waded into them; the blades on either end of her weapon were immediately bathed in dark blood.

On her left, Varnen fought through the Kojen with his twin blades and Abrax at his side. Sweat rolled down Jocelynn’s face as time took on no meaning. Using every trick taught during her training in Boromar, she cut down her enemies. Adirynn had her back leaving her free to concentrate on those that came at her front.

Surprised, she saw Kellinar, Taela, Anevay, and Vaddoc working their way through the Kojen. Jocelynn glanced at the sky. It was empty of Shadow Dragons. Kirynn appeared at her side, flashing a smile as she took down the Kojen. “Hello zahri sister,” she called.

Jocelynn smiled back and nodded, acknowledging Kirynn’s welcome but not taking time to shout back. Bringing down Kojen took more effort for her than it did Kirynn. No one was as good as the flame-haired woman.

After several more felled Kojen, Jocelynn turned to find her next target only to realize there wasn’t another one. Instead, all she saw was a sea of dead Kojen littering the grass, their dark blood staining the ground.

Kellinar looked around to make sure no more Kojen were going to charge out of the trees before turning back to the gold dragon and his young rider.

Merru was sprawled in the grass with his eyes fixed on Loki who lay with his hands bound behind his back, and a heavy black chain around his neck. Loki struggled to a sitting position and tried to pull his hands from their bonds as blood seeped from under the ropes.

Kellinar ran to him. Pulling out a knife, he sliced through the ropes

Loki grabbed at the chain as he staggered to his feet and stumbled toward Merru. He yanked on the black links, tearing his skin. The chain wouldn’t come free. Loki screamed as he tried to pry it away from where it had embedded itself in him. Blood ran down his chest as the skin ripped more.

His heart in his throat, Kellinar grabbed Loki’s wrists, pulling his hands away from the black chain that seemed to have burrowed further into the boy’s skin. “Stop! It won’t come off that way.”

Loki’s eyes were wide and frantic. “Get it off me, Kellinar! It’s tearing Merru away from me!” He twisted away from Kellinar and tore at the chain again. Tears ran down Loki’s cheeks as he struggled to rip the metal from his flesh.

“Loki, Anevay and Taela are here. Taela can remove it. Try and be still.” Kellinar’s voice and hands shook as he tried to get Loki to sit down.

Kellinar glanced at Merru. A ripple ran over the dragon and some of the gold faded from his scales. His heart pounded and terror welled up inside him. Oh Fates, they were too late. They were going to lose them.

“I can’t…I have to get it off. Merru is fading!” Loki screamed through panic-filled sobs, yanking at the chain again with bloodied fingers.

Taela threw herself at Loki, tackling him to the ground. Closing her eyes, she placed her hand on the necklace and pinned him down with surprising strength. Kellinar, Vaddoc, Kirynn, and Anevay rushed to help her as Loki writhed and thrashed, shouting that he had to get to Merru.

A ripple worked its way down Merru’s body, taking with it more of his color.

“Merru!” Loki managed to yank his hand from Kellinar’s grip and lay it on the gold’s snout. “Merru, no! No, no, no...stay…”

Another ripple flowed along Merru. Kellinar’s heart thundered in his ears and tears welled in his eyes. He watched in helpless frustration. Why hadn’t Adirynn called for Shryden and him sooner?

Taela didn’t move or open her eyes, but Kellinar felt her through the bond, working frantically. Tears ran down Kellinar’s face as he struggled to hold Loki and ignore the boy’s screams to get the chain off. He tightened his grip as Loki fought to reach for the black links. Kellinar glanced at Merru again. The golden scales had faded even more and the dragon’s bright blue eyes were closed. “Hurry, Taela,” he pled through gritted teeth.

Taela’s eyes flew open, lines of strain creased her face. “Everyone off. Loki, close your eyes and look away, it’s coming off.”

Everyone sprang back as the necklace exploded. It ripped through his flesh and sent shards of metal flying through the air. Loki opened his eyes and scrambled on hands and knees to Merru, crying in relief as the gold color of the dragon’s scales slowly brightened.

Kellinar reached for Taela as she doubled over from the pain of the chain’s backlash, the knowledge of the agony in her head slamming through the bond. He felt her stomach heave and quickly pulled her hair away as she vomited on the ground. When she was done, Kellinar pulled Taela away from the mess and held her as the pain slowly ebbed.

Anevay crouched next to Loki and examined the wound left by the necklace, heedless of the blood running down the side of her own face. She looked at Taela. “It’s clean, there is no metal left in his skin.” She closed her eyes and Kellinar saw the effects as she began to heal Loki.

Kellinar helped Taela to her feet when she was ready. She smiled unsteadily at him. “I think it might be best not to tackle those chains alone. It was bad when we took Kirynn’s off, but the backlash was divided between three of us.” She rubbed her forehead. “Taking it all was…painful.”

He shook his head at her understatement and knelt next to Loki putting his hand on the boy’s shoulder. Anevay still sat in the grass with her hands on the boy, a small furrow between her brows as she worked to remove the damage done by the chain. As he watched her, anger built inside him. How in the name of the Fates had this gotten so far?

Kellinar looked up and asked, “How did this happen? How were they able to take him without anyone noticing?”

Jocelynn straightened, a worried look in her pale green eyes. “We did notice, but we didn’t realize anything had happened to him. He has had a habit in the past of taking off and not answering calls to him. When he didn’t come back from patrol, we thought he was off having fun.”

Kellinar sent her a hard look. “Why didn’t you call for me?”

“I didn’t want to have you running back here—“

“You will call us the minute any of you go missing from now on,” Kellinar growled.

Taela laid her hand gently on his arm. “Kellinar, they did what they thought was right at the time. They were already searching for him.”

“We were almost too late,” he snapped at her. Fates, he’d almost lost Loki twice now. “If we had known sooner—”

“It would have changed nothing, bondmate. We wouldn’t have known where to look until Merru could send out a call.”

Kellinar closed his eyes and took a deep breath, letting it out slowly, trying to calm the anger he knew was just a reaction to his fear. When he opened them, he looked at Jocelynn. “She’s right. I’m sorry I lost my temper.”

She nodded. “Don’t worry about it. I understand. If I had known…”

He shook his head. “I know. Like Taela said, there was no way to know. From now on though, if any of you come up missing, I want an alert sent out to everyone immediately.”

Jocelynn sucked in a breath. “The other distress call from Tellnox and Nydara, what happened? Are Maleena and Mckale alright?”

Kellinar’s heart lurched as he reached for Shryden.

“There has been no word,” the blue sent.

His stomach twisted. Hopefully they were alright. He glanced at Jocelynn. Varnen stood with his arm around her waist. “Your help today was good to have. You did well against the Kojen.” He smiled slightly. “You reminded me of Kirynn, wading into them like that. Well, except your braid is blondish-red instead of red-red.”

Kellinar leveled a stern look at her. “As appreciated as your help was, don’t think I didn’t see your catcher strap swinging free when you came through your Slide. There is always time for that. It can mean the difference between life and death.”

Jocelynn nodded. “I won’t forget again.”

Serena marched through Arandrall’s house as a startled Border Guard from the roof led the way. They rounded the corner and she saw a man pacing in front of a large set of doors. Several other Border Guards stood in the hall, many of them covered in blood.

The pacing man stopped and looked up. “Who is this?”

The guard with her shrugged. “She rides a yellow dragon and says her name is Serena, and she is here to take care of Mckale and Maleena.”

The man looked at her. “I am Arandrall. My personal physician is with them now.”

Serena snorted. “In all likelihood creating more damage for me to fix.” She strode past them and through the doors. Maleena and Mckale lay unconscious on a large bed, Maleena on her back, Mckale on his side. A man bent over Mckale.

For a moment, Serena was torn. Thoough Maleena looked pale and drawn, from what she had learned through the dragons, Mckale was the more seriously injured. She cast another glance at Maleena, worry for her friend and the babe she carried filling her. But as Serena approached, it was clear Mckale needed her more.

The man looked up. “Who are you? I don’t let a bunch of people in the room when I have patients.”

She fixed him with a stern look. “I’m Serena, rider of the Yellow dragon Miya and a Guardian of Galdrilene.” Titles always worked best with these kinds of people. She stepped next to the bed and looked down at her friend. Mckale was much too pale, pain etched lines in his face and blood smeared his mouth where it had been hastily wiped away. The crude bandages packed around the arrow were soaked red. Without looking up she said, “I also use Healing magic. I can do what you can’t.”

She reached for the arrow shaft and snapped the broad head off.

The physician grabbed her arm. “If you pull the shaft out like that he will bleed to death.”

Serena leveled an irritated look at him. “He’s bleeding to death now. Trust me; I have no intention of letting him die.” She smoothed Mckale’s dark hair away from his face. “Do you hear me? If you even think of trying to die on me I will march into Maiadar and drag you out by this thick hair of yours.”

With one swift movement Serena pulled the shaft from his chest. He grunted even in his unconscious state. Blood flowed freely. She ignored it and laid her hands on him. Working quickly, she wove several weaves and temporarily patched the worst areas of bleeding, a technique Serena learned while working to save Emallya’s life after the battle at the Kormai.

When she had the bleeding slowed to nothing more than a small amount of seeping, she set to work on the wound itself, carefully fixing blood vessels and mending flesh. One of his ribs had been broken too. He had to have been hit at close range.

When Serena finally pulled her magic back, only a thin scar marred his chest. Her strength was drained and her legs shook slightly, making it hard for her to stand. Picking up on her problem, the physician helped her to a chair.

She sank into it with a grateful sigh. The physician looked between her and Mckale. “Is he healed?” When she nodded he asked, “Why does he not wake?”

Serena laughed. Why did everyone always expect those who were healed with magic to suddenly spring out of bed and be back to normal as if their body had gone through nothing? “My magic can heal his injuries but it can’t put blood back in veins, nor can it take away the exhaustion caused by pain.” She yawned. “I have a mixture of herbs to give him to help with that though.”

The physician glanced at Maleena. “What about her?”

Serena stood and walked to Maleena’s side of the bed. A quick search with magic told her Maleena wasn’t at death’s door though she had lost more blood than she should have, especially for being pregnant. Enough to make her faint. It was mental overexertion that held her to unconsciousness though. Serena glanced at the doctor. “Has anyone touched her?”

He nodded. “The guards had to put pressure on her wound to stem the bleeding. Then they tried to support her when she started to collapse. They also carried her here. Why?”

Serena shook her head. “She is a Silver. With Mckale unconscious, his bondmate shield is weakened. Anyone who touched her would have overwhelmed her with any emotions they were feeling at the moment.”

Suppressing another yawn, she placed her hands on Maleena. At least her injury wasn’t nearly as extensive.

The physician frowned. “How is it you can touch her?”

Serena offered him a tired smile. “I have had extensive training on controlling my emotions around Silvers. Also, my mind is quiet right now; it will still be uncomfortable for her but nothing like what she must have experienced earlier.”

Turning back to Maleena, she began work on the rather deep puncture wound. One side was cut deeper than the other. Serena reviewed the scene Miya had played out for her after receiving it from Tellnox. Most likely Maleena had driven the arrowhead deeper on one side when she jerked away.

After healing Maleena, Serena staggered back to the chair with the help of Arandrall’s physician. He looked at her with a worried frown on his face. “Is there anything you need?”

Serena rubbed a shaky hand through her short black hair. “Something to eat and drink please. You can also let them know outside that these two are healed. Maleena should wake before too long. Mckale will take a little longer; his body has a lot of catching up to do.”

The man nodded and left the room.

She reached out for Miya, “Please send word of Mckale and Maleena to the others. I know they are likely very worried.”

“I will send it. Loki is healed by the way. Both he and Merru are alright now.”

Miya sent her a full account of what happened. Relief filled Serena, she’d hardly had time to even think of them.

Arandrall entered the room a few moments later, followed by a servant bearing a tray. Arandrall pulled a small table over to where she sat and the servant set the tray with a bowl of thick stew, a warm slice of bread, and a pile of early berries on it. A large pitcher held cool tea. “Thank you.”

“I’m sorry it isn’t more,” Arandrall said, sitting in another chair. “The kitchens are right in the middle of dinner preparations. They put together a meal for you from what was left after the mid-day meal as best they could on such short notice.”

Serena shook her head. “It looks fine to me.” She poured tea into the cup and took a long drink. After setting the cup down, she dug into the food, her energy-drained body ravenous.

Arandrall and Serena looked up as Maleena stirred. Serena abandoned her food and moved quickly to her friend’s side. Maleena’s violet eyes flickered open as she raised a hand to her face. “What happened? We were standing on the wall and—” She pushed herself up, her expression near panic. “Mckale?”

“He is healed and will be fine.” Serena rearranged the pillows as Maleena turned and ran her hand over Mckale’s face. “Lean back, you need to rest. Losing any blood is not a good thing, losing what you did when pregnant is even worse. Your body needs more of it to keep you and the babe alive.” Serena glanced at Arandrall. “Bring my cup of tea. Also I need a pitcher of hot water.”

Arandrall immediately brought the cup over. While he went to the doors and spoke with someone in the hall, Serena put the cup in Maleena’s hands. “Drink, you need fluids.”

Maleena took a long drink and Serena sighed, glancing at Mckale. “I swear between the two of you and Loki, I think you are trying to run us Yellows ragged.”

“Loki?” Maleena looked up. “What happened to Loki?”

Serena straightened the blankets around Maleena, pleased to feel the baby kick against her hand. “Shadow Riders put one of those chains on him. This one apparently didn’t have the same flaw as the one they placed on Kirynn.” Tears stung her eyes and she blinked them back. “It was close; we almost lost Loki and Merru.”

A memory of Loki, standing next to her in an alley with his bright blue eyes watching her expectantly flashed through her mind. The Shadow Riders had the power to bring such heartache to the Guardians.

Azurynn leaped from Murynn’s back, exaltation rushing through her. The chain worked. Now she could make more of them. Watching the boy-rider thrash on the ground, bloodying his wrists trying to break free to get the chain off had given her a perverse amount of pleasure.

His emotions had poured through her, letting her know the chain didn’t suffer from the same flaw her first had. A small twinge of disappointment dampened her happiness. She hadn’t been able to watch as the chain separated them fully. Azurynn wanted to see that, wanted to see what happened after the souls were separated. The dragon, she knew, would die. But what happened to the rider? They didn’t turn into anything like the Benduiren, so what then? Did they kill themselves?

Azurynn tapped her lips thoughtfully while Kovan, Sadira, and Oksana dismounted from their dragons. She would have to make sure she got the opportunity to see the full separation one day.

“What in the depths of the void were you thinking?” Sadira stalked up to her. “You could have gotten us all killed.”

In too good of a mood to care about Sadira’s ranting, Azurynn laughed. “We were well matched, especially since our dragons can Jump back to the Kormai.”

Sadira scowled at her. “We lost another group of Kojen too.”

Azurynn shrugged. “So, more can be made. Besides, now we know the chains work. You take care of the Kojen and I will begin more chains.” With a smile she walked away to gather the lengths of chain.

Oksana watched Azurynn leave with relief. The woman gave her the creeps. One of the younger Dragon Riders that kept tabs on Trilene distracted her from her thoughts of the disturbing shadow Spirit user.

“Oksana.” The man bowed to her. Radwan, she thought his name was although she really didn’t care. “There is trouble in Trilene. The Guardians didn’t leave and from what I can gather, they plan to protect the Mallay.”

Oksana sneered. Oh yes, they would care about that worthless section of the city. “They are starting a rebellion are they?”

Radwan nodded. “It looks like it. If it comes to that, there will be an all-out war in Trilene.”

Oksana considered the information carefully. “Let them.”

“L…let them?” Radwan looked startled.

She nodded. “Yes, let them. I think a battle against our true numbers would do the Guardians good. Besides, I have a score to settle with one of the Guardians in Trilene. His murder of my sister will not go unpunished.”

“Yes, my lady.”

As Radwan turned to leave, Oksana stopped him. “Radwan, wait. Turindar and Hanover have accepted the protection of the Shadow Riders have they not?”

When he nodded she continued, “Send word to them of the building rebellion in Trilene. Make it clear we expect them to bring their armies to bear and there will be serious consequences if they don’t, starting with every child of the ruling families. After the last encounters with the Shadow Riders, I think it is high time Galdrilene sees what they are truly up against.”

Radwan raised an eyebrow. “Won’t they bring the armies of their supportive nations?”

A slow smile spread across Oksana’s lips. “They won’t be expecting such a thing. For the most part, they will expect a battle with the Trilene and some of the Dellar with a few Shadow Riders as back up. I think it’s time to bring our full forces to the front. Make sure those we can trust in the Trilene District are aware of the plans. Make them feel reassured that the Shadow Riders will not turn our backs on them in their time of need.” She laughed softly. “After all, we can’t pass up such a perfect opportunity.”

Radwan bowed and left.

“Starting a war are we?” Kovan walked over. “And without consulting anyone else?”

Oksana rolled her eyes. “Oh please, you are itching for a big battle and plenty of people to kill as much as anyone else. I’m tired of hiding in the Kormai and slinking around. Trilene is ours; we should be openly claiming it and occupying it. Galdrilene isn’t afraid to do that with Markene.”

“We would lose a lot of the younger Shadow Riders.”

She shrugged and glanced at a group of them across the cavern. “So, Ranit and Dusa have both already laid more eggs. We can make more.”

Kovan stared at the group. “We could. We might also lose some of our main group.”

Oksana snorted. “If I die, I die. As far the others, I’m sure we’d both just be devastated if Sadira and Azurynn died.”

Kovan chuckled. “So true. I will go speak with Sadira and Azurynn. This will take a little time to prepare for. While I talk to them, you can start the wheels turning by having the Kojen called in. We will need a large amount of them.”

Kellinar walked through the twisting streets, sensing a change in the Mallay as the people ferreted away the weapons brought to them from Galdrilene. A month with purpose had given them hope. The men walked with straighter backs, the women smiled more. They all knew the price in lives was going to be a heavy one, yet still the growing pride among them was palpable. The people were taking action, refusing to let the Trilene walk all over them.

The boiling point was near. Already the city guards found it more difficult to move about the city as people ignored them and blocked roads. Little infractions to cause trouble and irritation. Infractions that at first had them arresting people left and right until the jails were so full of prisoners that the Trilene had no choice but to let many of them go.

Strangely, as the people of the Mallay grew bolder, the Trilene District grew quieter. An itch between his shoulder blades told him something was wrong. He felt the letter in his pocket. Tonight he would write Arianna and fly to Las Fane to give it to her.

Belan appeared silently at Kellinar’s side as he approached the market square. “Something isn’t right.”

Kellinar raised an eyebrow. “You think? The Trilene are never this quiet in the face of such insolence.”

“It’s more than that.” Belan shook his head. “They may be quiet about the Mallay, but there are whispers flying all over the Trilene District. Lord Vesnar is keeping an ear out but he’s heard nothing set in stone yet. Still, something is giving them a feeling of security.”

Had Vesnar really heard nothing or was he holding out on them? How far could a lord from the Trilene be trusted? Kellinar watched the people in the market square in silence. How many of them would live through this? Had he been wrong to suggest a rebellion? He ran his hand over the close spaced braids that ran tight against his head. “It’s too late to stop things now. I hope I wasn’t wrong to bring this on them.”

Belan clapped him on the shoulder. “You merely gave them a possible direction. They set it in motion knowing the challenges and the price that will have to be paid.”

Kellinar looked Belan in the eye. “Do they know, really? Trilene has never seen a war quite like this. They know many of them will die, they know in the end if they lose the war then they may lose their homes and the only place they have ever known. Knowing it and actually facing it are two different things.”

Anevay came walking out of the market, a smile on her face as she examined a beautiful scarf worked in reds and browns. Her dark, expressive eyes lit up when she saw him and his heart warmed at the sight of her. The way the sun glinted off her black hair and made her creamed coffee skin glow took his breath away.

She moved to walk with them. “Good morning, bondmate.”

“Good morning to you too.” He bent to kiss the top of her forehead, savoring the scent of her hair and skin. “Where is Taela?” He made a quick scan of the market square but didn’t see her. Though he did see one of the ladies working a stall turn her back and snub a woman from the Dellar; something that wouldn’t have happened a little over a month ago.

Anevay put an arm around his waist, the shawl looped over her other. “She is flying with Paki this morning.” A small frown crossed her face. “She senses something isn’t quite right. The emotions coming from many of those in the Dellar and Trilene are those of waiting. Biding time. They have something planned.”

On his other side, Belan nodded. “See what I mean. Something is up and it likely isn’t good.”

Kellinar looked at Anevay. “Do you think we made a mistake by instigating this?”

Her eyes softened and a gentle smile touched her lips. “No, my love. I don’t think we did.” She paused and looked around at the cramped buildings and people clad in the cheapest material they could find. “These people deserve better than this. If they are willing to fight for something better, then we should help them.” She turned back to him. “If they hadn’t been willing to fight for freedom, then no amount of instigation would have started all of this.”

He gave her a squeeze. “Whatever is coming, it’s coming soon. Don’t you need to return to Galdrilene and work on that weave of yours?”

Anevay laughed, the sound like music to him. “There is plenty of time to work on it. I’m pretty sure I know how to finish it. After all of this is settled here in Trilene, I will return and work on it for a while.”

Kellinar sighed. Of course he couldn’t convince her to leave Trilene any more than he could convince Taela. At least Anevay didn’t threaten him with knives. A rush of warm love flowed through him when he remembered the way Taela had lost her temper with him a few days before. Her fiery temper was a good match to his. Anevay with her sweet, gentle personality had been quick to douse the flames of temper between them but it hadn’t stopped him from spending some time in bed with Taela, making up with her.

They stopped not far from the Mallay city gate. Kellinar watched the groups of city guards and soldiers guarding the gate. Conspicuously absent were the Keepers, although it was said they now watched for magic users to turn over to the Shadow Riders to deal with.

“How many of them do we have on our side?” Kellinar asked Belan.

Belan blew out a breath while he looked at the sky as if it held the answer. “About half. Many of the common soldiers came from the Mallay you know. Becoming frontline fodder is one of the few ways out of the Mallay.” He brought his eyes back down. “Not as many higher ranking soldiers, which is to be expected. Of course, all of them who are loyal to Lord Vesnar and Lord Telain are with us. There might be one or two of the lower ranking that will side with us. All in all, we might end up with a handful of houses from the Trilene. That leaves the eight high-ranking houses and at least fifteen of the lower ranking Trilene houses against us.”

Kellinar nodded. They had more on their side than he’d thought they would. He glanced up at the walls of the two higher districts. “How many in the Dellar?”

“A little less than half.” Belan said. “I’ve been in battles like this before. To be honest, our odds aren’t good. Only you Dragon Riders give us the advantage.”

Kellinar shook his head. “It won’t be much of an advantage. Shadow Riders are guaranteed to be present. We will end up busy with them and may not be much help. Keep up the weapons training you’re doing in the canyon. The trained soldiers will help, but those just learning may still find themselves cut down in short order.”

Belan nodded and rubbed his hands together. “Sadly, you are most likely right.”

Kellinar stared at the buildings rising up tall around him. Something about the scene felt foreboding and the itch between his shoulder blades grew stronger. His stomach twisted. It was going to happen soon. Thankfully, Mckale and Maleena were recovered and ready to come to their aid, though Maleena had promised to stay out of the actual battle. Kirynn had informed him she wouldn’t miss it for anything. Vaddoc too would come. Not that he had doubted any of them. When he’d visited Calladar to see Mckale and Maleena, and explained the situation, Maleena had gone all mysterious and left after agreeing to stay out of the actual fighting. What did she have up her sleeve?

A flood of anxiety flowed through the bond from Taela. Kellinar met Anevay’s eyes, knowing she had felt it too. In moments, Paki streaked overhead toward the only place she had room to land, in front of the Thieves’ Caves.

Kellinar took off running with Anevay at his side and Belan on their heels. He thanked the dragon bond for the increased stamina of a rider as he ran flat out across the Mallay. Anevay stayed right with him, but they soon left Belan behind.

As they rounded the last twist in the street, Paki was taking off and Taela stood at the bottom of the steps to the terrace. Kellinar slowed as he neared, his eyes sweeping her for any injury. She didn’t speak, only reached out and grabbed his arm and hauled him up the stairs to a more private corner of the terrace.

“There’s an army.” Her voice shook slightly.

“An army?” Kellinar took her hand. “Taela, calm down. What army?”

She took a deep, steadying breath. “To the southwest, coming up from Turindar. A big one. This is what the Trilene has been waiting for. We won’t be fighting just the Trilene and Dellar; we will be taking on the bulk of the Turindari army.”

Kellinar slowly sat in one of the chairs to wait for Belan. “Did they see you?”

Taela flopped next to him and snorted. “Of course not. I may be rattled but I’m not stupid.”

He wrapped an arm around her. “I know you’re not.

Anevay sat quietly on his other side, her hand rubbing up and down his arm. There was nothing to do but wait for Belan and hope he could think of a good course of action. Trying to back down the rebellion, subtle though it had been so far, would be pointless. If the Trilene were calling in favors from Turindar, they meant to wipe out the Mallay regardless of what happened now.

Belan finally came jogging up the stairs, out of breath. “What’s going on?”

Kellinar looked up at him. “Turindar’s army is marching this way. This is going to go bad.”

Belan sank into a chair. “This changes things.” He leaned forward, his elbows on his knees and rested his forehead on the heels of his hands.

Silence stretched out. Finally, Belan raised his head and looked at them. “We have to get everyone out of the Mallay.”

Images of what the Mallay would be like with the combination of the Turindar army, those against them in the city, and whatever the Shadow Riders threw out at them ran through his mind. “This has become a giant trap; everyone will be slaughtered in the streets.”

Miya carefully lowered herself to the open space at the bottom of the steps. Serena removed her safety straps and jumped down. She paused to unbuckle the catcher strap and toss it over the saddle. As Miya lifted off, Serena ran up the steps. “There is an army headed this way.”

Taela nodded. “From Turindar, I know. I saw it.”

Serena shook her head. “No, I was farther north. The one I saw is coming from Hanover. I know they caved to the Shadow Riders. I can only assume Hanover sent it to help the Trilene.”

Belan laughed, the sound bitter. “This just gets better and better. Turindar and Haraban both on their way to help annihilate us.”

“Kellinar, I must fly for a while. It will be a little bit before I get back,” Shryden sent.

Startled by the sudden message, he reached out to the dragon, “Why, where are you going?”

“I will be back soon.”

Kellinar tried twice more to question the dragon but received no reply. He frowned and looked at Taela and Anevay. “Do either of your dragons know why Shryden suddenly took off?”

Taela shook her head, the confusion on her face mirrored by what he felt through the bond. “No, but Paki has just done the same to me.”

“Latia is still here, but she refuses to answer where the other two went.” Anevay looked shocked. Kellinar was surprised, Latia rarely gave her rider any grief. Unlike some dragons he could think of. He made sure those thoughts broadcasted clearly through his dragon bond with Shryden. Only a sense of amusement came back. The blue was doing a darn good job of hiding his thoughts.

He returned his attention to Belan. “When do we begin getting people out of the city and how do you want to do it?”

“It will have to be under the cover of darkness and before either of those armies get here.” He looked first at Serena, then Taela. “Any estimates on when they will arrive?”

“Not long,” Taela answered. “They are marching a good pace. Some of the supply wagons are lagging a bit but I imagine they will catch up by the time the army stops each night. A week, maybe less.”

Serena nodded. “Miya and Paki compared what they saw. Miya believes the Hanoverian army will arrive the same time as the Turindari.”

“We will spread word of the need to leave this evening after the men come back from the vineyards and docks.” Belan paused and stared into space for a minute before refocusing on them. “It will take several days to get this many people ready to move, especially with women and children. Still though, that should give us enough time.”

Serena frowned. “What about the people in the villages outside the wall?”

“We will send word, but it will be up to them what they do. Outside the walls, they have more freedom to run. Hopefully they choose wisely,” Belan said.

Kalila stood on the ramparts with Sehlas and Lalani, her Defenders arranged around them, watching Merru glide across the sky. Every now and then she needed a chance to relax and not think of everything that went with ruling a nation. Loki and the gold hadn’t patrolled beyond sight of the city in the month since they nearly lost each other. She supposed she couldn’t blame them; it had been a close call.

Jocelynn and Varnen patrolled farther out. Kalila smiled to herself. She really liked those two. Efficient and dedicated to their duties, they were also friendly. Watching them together also warmed the heart.

Merru bugled what she’d come to recognize as a welcome call. Above her the swirling heat wave look of a Slide opened and a silver dragon came through. Odd, there was no rider. What was Paki doing here without Taela? A lump of worry built in her gut. Surely nothing bad had happened to Kellinar’s bondmate.

As Paki landed in the inner courtyard, Kalila ran down the stairs from the wall walk to meet her. “Paki, what’s wrong?” she asked as she drew close, with the others right behind her.

“Your help is needed.”

The words thundered into her mind. Kalila grabbed her head as her knees buckled under the weight of the dragon’s thoughts. Sehlas’ strong arms kept her from hitting the stones. She looked up at the dragon through hazy eyes. “What help?”

“War visits Trilene as Kellinar tries to free the people of the Mallay from the Shadow Dragons. Hanover and Turindar have sent their armies to help the Trilene. All in the Mallay will be killed without outside help.”

Kalila nearly passed out from the strength of the thoughts filling her mind. She managed to nod. “Help will come.”

Paki bobbed her head in acknowledgement. “I will return. Wait for me and be ready. There isn’t much time.” She lifted off. Kalila took a shuddering breath as the wind from the dragon’s wings whipped around her. Within moments, the silver opened another Slide and disappeared.

Merru and Loki landed in her place. Loki jumped down from the gold and knelt in front of her, the catcher strap still on his ankle. “What happened? Why was Paki here without Taela?”

Kalila climbed to her feet with the help of Sehlas. “Trilene is about to come apart at the seams and the Trilene are doing their best to take out the Mallay.” She took a deep breath and rubbed her temples in an attempt to relieve the lingering ache and pressure from the communication with Paki. “Turindar and Hanover have sent their armies in support of the Trilene.”

“They’ll be crushed.” Worry filled Loki’s eyes.

“Not without a fight they won’t.” Kalila turned to Sehlas and Lalani. “Gather the Houses. Markene will march to the aid of the Mallay.”

Lalani shook her head. “Your people will follow you at this point, but the loss of life will be heavy. You may lose their faith and in the process your throne over this.”

Sehlas glared at the Spirit mage. “There are some things that are worth more than a throne. This is one of them.”

Kalila stepped back from Sehlas. “He is right. I am willing to put my throne on the line. I will not sit here and allow them to be slaughtered.”

“It is your choice.” Lalani inclined her head.

“Gather the Houses,” Kalila said and strode toward the keep.

Emallya hurried onto the outer terrace in surprise as Paki landed in the caldera minus her rider. Bardeck ran from the equipment cave. “Paki, what happened?”

Mernoth approached, his eyes on the silver. Paki swung her head toward him. Within moments, Mernoth played the events of the day in Emallya’s mind. She looked at her bondmate. He nodded and she turned back to Paki. “Galdrilene stands with them. Mernoth will bring us.”

Paki huffed a warm breath at each of them then launched into the sky.

Shryden covered the distance to Las Fane in less than two days. Since he’d never seen it, nor had the other dragons, he wasn’t able to Slide there. The white walls and blue-tiled roofs stood bright against the trees that surrounded it, and the dark blue waters of the bay where the Blood River let out into the Saragon Sea.

People screamed and ran as he landed on the wall surrounding the castle keep. He didn’t know where to find her. He knew only that she was a member of a high-ranking family. Not even Kellinar’s memory held the information. She had never told him which family.

There was only one way to go about finding her. “Ariana,” he broadcasted it across the whole city. Everywhere people dropped to their knees, their hands flying to their heads. He snorted, as if hands could keep his voice out. He wished he had more information to go on. One thing he knew for sure, they weren’t sympathetic to the Shadow Riders.

Arrows pinged off his scales. He ignored them. “Ariana, please. I don’t know how else to find you and Kellinar needs your help.”

After several minutes a young woman stumbled from the keep with an older man and regiment of soldiers gathered around them. None of them looked steady on their feet.

“I’m here,” she called up to him.

“What do you want with my daughter?” the older man yelled, his face clouded with anger and fear.

Shryden focused his thoughts on Ariana and her father. “The Trilene have fallen to the Shadow Riders. Kellinar is trying to save the people of the Mallay, along with Lord Vesnar of the High Houses.”

Ariana clung to a soldier’s arm though she still stood. Her adopted father was already on his knees. This girl had strength. She gazed up at him. “My father? What needs to be done?”

“Turindar and Hanover have sent their armies in support of the Trilene. The Shadow Riders will also throw their support behind the Trilene. Without help, everyone in the Mallay and anyone who supports them will be slaughtered.”

She looked at him, confusion written on her face. “How does Kellinar figure into this? Who are you and how are you connected to him?”

“I am Shryden. Kellinar is my rider and a Guardian of Galdrilene. We oppose everything the Shadow Riders stand for.”

Arianna struggled to remain standing. “We? There are more like you?”

“Yes. Will you help us? Your letter said Las Fane was against the Shadow Riders. Will you allow them to kill those in the Mallay?”

She looked at her adopted father then back to him. “We must discuss it. How long do we have? Can you give us a day? My father is king and can send the Las Fane army anywhere he wishes, but still, it would be best if we had the support of the other nobles.”

“I can give you a day. I will wait. I don’t know this place well enough to feel comfortable Sliding back.”

Shryden could see he had confused her with that last remark. She nodded anyway and together with her adopted father, she made her way back inside the keep.

Kellinar paced back and forth across the terrace. It had been three full days since Shryden left and though the dragon assured him he was alright, he let nothing else leak through. The Mallay was quieter than usual. Most of the men had left for the docks or vineyards that morning, but the market square was empty. Only a few men were missing from the district. Three or four of the herders had kept a portion of the livestock out of the city overnight, herding the animals well away. It was a small pooling of the individual herds, not enough to be noticed by anyone, but enough though to hopefully give the people a start somewhere else.

On the wall of the Trilene District high above, flashes of color could be seen as soldiers looked down at them. Not that there was much to see, most people were keeping to their houses as they frantically packed what they could carry.

The remaining goats bleated in protest at not being taken to pasture that day. Children were silent though as if picking up on the tension of their elders. Inside the Thieves’ Caves, packing was under way as well. By the next morning, the Mallay would be empty.

He turned as Belan walked out onto the terrace. “Vesnar will have his soldiers at the gate by morning; we should be able to get the men out.”

If he could truly be trusted to be there when it was time. “What about the women, children, and elderly?” Kellinar asked, suddenly worried. If the Shadow Riders arrived to head them off it would leave them trapped between the Mallay wall and likely Kojen. Pile of rotting Shadow carcasses, why hadn’t he thought of that?

“Kellinar, relax. That thought occurred to me in the middle of the night. Several of the thieves are going to take them out through the Thieves’ Exit tonight and hide them in the canyon. By this time the messengers will have informed every family in the Mallay.” Belan rubbed the back of his neck. “I hope there is someone left to lead them out of the canyon and to where ever we decide to go from here.”

Kellinar nodded, silently acknowledging the fact there might not be much left besides the women and children, and not even that if the Shadow Riders found them. Where in the name of the Fates was Shryden?

Serena and Anevay had flown reconnaissance that morning and came back with news that the two approaching armies were now accompanied by Shadow Dragons. The gut feelings that had always kept him one step ahead of trouble screamed at him to get out. Restlessness filled him and he resumed pacing. “How soon until we leave?”

“We will start moving the women and children as soon as full dark arrives. We’ll move them in small groups to keep it as quiet as possible. Then we’ll get the men through the city gate just before dawn when the guard on the Trilene and Dellar walls will be at its least watchful.”

Taela frowned. “Why can’t the men leave through the canyon too?”

Belan scratched his ear and kicked a pebble down the steps of the balcony. “If we all just disappear, they will come looking for us and we might all end up either trapped in the canyon or caught out in the open grass land. Neither scenario is a good one when there are so many to protect. This way works better. It gets those who can’t defend themselves to a relatively safe place while the rest of us leave another way. That way if there is battle, the innocent aren’t caught up in it. Then, if things go as planned, we can collect those in hiding.”

Kellinar’s gaze swept the familiar streets around him. “It will be difficult to move them in the dark.”

Belan nodded. “Difficult yes, impossible no. It helps that the city guards have abandoned lighting all of the lamps in the Mallay.”

“It helps and hinders at the same time.” Kellinar glanced at the sun. Still early afternoon. How was it possible for a day to move so slowly?

Taela approached and placed a hand on his arm. “Please sit down or find something to do. You’re driving me insane with all of this pacing.”

Kellinar ran his hand over the braids on his head. “You’re right. The day will go faster if I’m not staring at the sun.” He gave her a quick kiss and headed inside the caves to help.

The sun sank toward the horizon as night climbed into the western sky to replace it. Silence hung heavy over the district as families shared the evening meal together, aware that it might be the last time they saw each other.

Like the last few nights, the city guards lit the lamps around the Mallay gate and left the rest of the district plunged in darkness. Only a small sliver of moon hung in the sky, not enough light to give them all away.

Several of the younger thieves rushed out into the blackness as Kellinar waited with Belan, Anevay, Serena, and Taela on the terrace. In the silence he made out the scuff of a shoe against stone, and quiet whispers as women comforted children frightened by the sudden change as the first group rounded the corner.

Women, children and several elderly ascended the stairs with heavy packs on their backs, and one or two carried a chicken in a small wooden cage. The sleepy hens clucked softly as they were carried past and disappeared into the caves. At least once they got through the caves that fronted the terrace there would be light to see by. The anxious feeling that had been growing all day began to get worse.

“Shryden where are you? I need you here.”

“Don’t worry. I will be there by the time you leave the city in the morning.”

“Why won’t you tell me where you are? Why won’t Paki answer Taela?”

“We don’t want to get your hopes up.”

“What are you talking about?”

Shryden didn’t reply. What was he up to?

The arrival of another group pulled him from his thoughts. The women passed silently, many carrying babies or toddlers while their older children clung to their sides, their eyes wide with fear. A few women led a goat or two. Older children had dogs on tethers or carried cats, puppies, and kittens. Kellinar hoped the animals had sense enough to stay quiet for a while.

The night crawled by as the sliver of moon made its sluggish way across the sky. Kellinar barely sensed an imperceptible change in the sky as the last group of women disappeared into the caves. A sigh of relief escaped him. If nothing else, that was done.

The men slowly gathered in the streets, waiting to be told what to do next. Belan, and the thieves not occupied by the women and children, came out of the caves with small one-shouldered packs on their backs.

The men of the Mallay carried the same over one shoulder. In their free hands they clutched swords or quarterstaffs. Kellinar fell into step beside Belan as he walked toward the Mallay gate. Anevay, Serena, and Taela walked with him. The thieves followed behind them, mixing with the men of the Mallay as they stepped into the street. As they walked, the men stopped to open pens and coops, freeing the animals that would be left behind.

Kellinar noted with relief that the soldiers at the gate bore the colors of the Vesnar House. Maybe, just maybe, this would work. Then one of the dragons, obviously not his since the blue still hadn’t made an appearance, could open a large Slide to somewhere, anywhere, and they could get everyone through. It wasn’t the same as all-out war, which they were still prepared for, but given the odds, this was a better way. Freedom would be achieved either way and he would help the Mallay people face the loss of their home and figure out what to do with them all.

As they approached the gate, the soldiers swung them open. Lords Vesnar and Telain met them on the other side of the thick arched opening in the wall. More soldiers, some on foot and some on horseback, held tight up against the outside wall where they would be less visible. Kellinar recognized three faces from the Trilene District’s lower houses as well as a good many faces from the Dellar. None of them were Serena’s parents.

Lord Telain rode up to them on a heavy bay horse. “So far everything seems to be going smoothly. At this point, even if the Trilene attacked, the most they can do is chase us further away. I think we have this one and much easier than I expected.”

Kellinar’s hackles rose. Was the man an idiot? He must be. Who proclaimed victory before it was in hand?

Apparently, Belan agreed. He glared up at Telain with a cold look. “You should never tempt the Fates in such a way.”

Vesnar shook his head. “Telain, you—”

The sound of shafts zipping through the sky made them all turn. Arrows tipped with fire rained down into the Mallay from the Trilene and Dellar walls. They landed on the tightly packed thatched roofs of the buildings. An orange glow began to fill the sky as the district caught fire.

Vesnar stared in stunned disbelief. “What in the name of the Fates are they doing? Trying to drive the people out?”

Kellinar’s eyes traveled up the wall of the Trilene District. Standing among the guards were Lord Dobrane and Oksana. He knew for a fact she hadn’t been there earlier. She must have waited until Miya and Latia had flown afar near the end of the evacuation. “They didn’t do this to flush us out; they did it to keep us from getting back in.”

Anevay started to follow his gaze but Kellinar didn’t give her a chance. He shoved her and Taela back against the wall and out of the path of arrows. “Call your dragons back, now! It’s a trap!”

Two Slides opened as Miya and Latia burst through and landed quickly. Serena and Anevay sprinted across the sloping ground and leaped into their saddles. In seconds the dragons leapt into the air and disappeared into another Slide as a hail of arrows sailed through the empty space they left behind.

Belan turned worried eyes on him. “Where did they go?”

“Someplace they can properly fasten their safety straps without becoming human pin cushions,” Kellinar said, reaching for Shryden with his mind. “Shryden, my friend, I really need you now.”

“I’m coming. It took longer than I expected, but I’m coming now.”

Several dogs and cats streaked past them, fleeing the streets and burning buildings behind them. Kellinar and his allies waited as tension coiled tightly among them. The boiling point had been reached, the pot was about to explode.

Suddenly, the air filled with Guardian Slides and Shadow Jumps. The quiet crackling of spreading fire in the Mallay ripped apart as Kojen poured through a black swirl. Two more black Jumps opened releasing the Turindar and Hanover armies.

The Slides spun open a moment later. Through the ash and embers floating on the breeze over the Mallay wall, Kellinar saw Mernoth come through with a wave of Defenders and mages. Another Slide opened as Shryden flew through with an army of men beneath him. Armored men on horses galloped through the Slide along with foot soldiers bearing the standard of Las Fane.

Another Jump opened and more Kojen along with several people poured out of it with yet another Shadow Dragon. As Shryden landed, a Slide opened and Paki came through. Kalila rode beneath her, with the army of Markene.

Kellinar fastened the catcher strap and leaped into the saddle. He had only a moment to see Paki lift off again before everything converged and battle consumed the world. Shryden swung his head and burned through a wave of Kojen before leaping into the air. Two more Slides opened as the blue climbed higher. Kirynn and Vaddoc with a bunch of Shaderian Border Guards and soldiers came through one.

Maleena, Mckale, and men flying the Calladaran standard came through the other Slide with…Kojen wearing chainmail with bright red handprints on the front? And wingless dragons? He wasn’t sure what he was seeing.

“The Ke’han, Anevay told you about,” Shryden sent. “Not a lot of them, but it looks like they brought Nagas and Nagis with them.”

More dark Jumps opened as Shadow Riders flooded the sky. Far more than Kellinar had expected. Shryden rolled away from the green shadow fire. As the blue came out of the roll and dived at the nearest black dragon, Kellinar saw Jocelynn and Varnen along with the two riders from Haraban Slide into the battle.

He didn’t have time to worry about them. Shryden slammed into the black, ripping and tearing through the dark scales with his teeth and claws. Kellinar threw up a shield of air, blocking a weave by the rider of the black while working a separate weave and throwing it at the rider.

The black tore away from Shryden at that moment and the weave missed.

Syrakynn dodged through the aerial battle after letting Kirynn off to battle on foot, the way her rider preferred it. A Shadow Rider chased after Adirynn and Jocelynn. Syrakynn made a sharp turn and dived at the Shadow closest to the pair. Slamming into the back of the black from above, she flexed her claws, sinking the talons deep.

The black screamed, faltering under the weight of the older, larger red. Before its rider could turn and throw a weave, Syrakynn clamped her jaws over the human and ripped him from the saddle. His body crunched in her powerful jaws before she spit him out, tossing the lifeless body though the air.

Beneath her, the Shadow wailed as it disintegrated. Bits and pieces flew off as Syrakynn ripped her claws free. Without bothering to watch the desiccated carcass fall to the ground, she dodged a wave of green fire and turned on the next Shadow, a part of her keeping track of Kirynn in case her rider needed her.

Mckale fought a mixture of Kojen and men. The Kojen mental attacks came up against his dragon shield and failed, making them easy fodder. Even the men who came up against him lacked not only the training but the speed and stamina of the bond. He worked methodically, taking no notice if it was Kojen or human, his blades were already drenched in the blood of both.

Tellnox skimmed the battlefield spreading a wide band of fire through the enemy ranks as he went. There would be fewer opportunities to do that as the armies mixed further. Soon such a move would kill as many allies as it did enemies.

To his left, a large group of Border Guards worked their way through more Kojen. Several of the guards went down screaming. Mckale looked away, he couldn’t think about anything else at the moment except survival. Off to his right, Mernoth drove a Shadow Dragon and its rider into the ground. The gold tore at the black even as the Shadow shriveled beneath him.

Another down, too many to go. How had the Shadow numbers grown so quickly?

Kalila hung back from the battle that raged just beyond the cover she’d taken. The Defenders assigned to her stood their ground, prepared to die for the queen they’d sworn fealty too.

Looking over the blood soaked battlefield, she wasn’t sure they wouldn’t be called on to do just that. She glanced nervously at the sky through the branches over her head. If Sadira or Ranit caught sight of her…

The battle filled a massive area outside the Mallay gate. The smaller villages clustered near the city had been swallowed by it. Smoke billowed thick in the air as the villages burned to the ground. The Mallay itself was fully engulfed, the embers flying on the air and setting more fires. Her eyes burned and she held a cloth pressed to her nose and mouth. The stench of burned flesh choked the air as the Shadows carelessly burned enemy and ally alike.

The Guardians had ceased shooting flames at the boiling battleground, unwilling to burn their allies.

A strangled roar drew her eyes to the sky. In horror, she watched one of the larger Shadow Dragons rip out the throat of a blue dragon and drop the lifeless body onto the combatants below. Kalila’s heart stopped. A scream rang out over the battle rising above the din of the melee as Tania, the blue’s rider, threw herself recklessly at her opponents in an attempt to reach her dead dragon.

The heavy swung sword of a Kojen cut the dragonless rider down. Tears rolled down Kalila’s cheeks as blood sprayed through the air. Tania fell to the ground, her body trampled under the feet of soldiers from both sides as her sightless eyes stared at the sky.

Belan led the men of the Mallay in the only direction he could take them, straight through the middle. The men who followed him fought and died all in the hope of freedom from the Mallay and the Shadow Dragons. Many of the men were well acquainted with the quarterstaff and held their own fairly well. Only a handful of the men who had attempted to use swords were left.

As they cut a path through the battlefield, Belan prayed to the Fates they would meet no Kojen. The Fates weren’t listening. Belan took the throat of a Turindar soldier with his sword and turned to find a large group of Kojen wading through human enemies in their direction.

This would be the end, none of the men, not even himself, were trained to deal with this. He gripped the hilt of his sword tighter. They would at least go down fighting. With a roar to the men behind him, he charged forward. They didn’t hesitate to follow him.

When they were almost within closing range when long, low-slung creatures that looked like wingless dragons swarmed over the Kojen, ripping the beasts to shreds. In seconds all that was left of the Kojen were dismembered scraps.

Belan had only a moment to stare stupidly at the blood soaked ground where the Kojen had been before the battle reclaimed his attention. He had to get what remained of the Mallay men out of this mess. The dragon-like creatures moved with them, keeping pace and helping to make a path. Whatever kind of dragon they were, Belan was glad they were here.

Kirynn carved through Kojen and human, taking both down without hesitation. She kept her mind closed to the sounds and smells of the battlefield. She welcomed each Kojen that dared approach her and felt nothing for humans that fell to her blade.

There would be no easy end to this battle. No fire weave that could save them. Too many friends were mixed with enemies. She fought with every expectation of death; this was not going to end well. Not that it mattered, if one had to die, this was the way to go.

A part of her mind remained locked with Syrakynn, if the dragon died, Kirynn would make sure she was only a step behind.

Vaddoc beat back Kojen with one sword while his other arm pushed a group of three children from one of the villages back a few steps. Their screams of terror blended with the noise of battle. He didn’t have time to comfort them. Vaddoc wove a heavy shield of light, altering it so Nydara and Paki would be able to get through it, and glanced back to make sure of the children’s position before throwing it up around them.

Nydara or Paki would grab the children as soon as they could. They’d already plucked quite a few women and children from the protective shields he’d put around them. Where the dragons took them Vaddoc didn’t know, somewhere safer than here he was sure.

He cut through another Kojen, the heat from the burning houses at his back. More children and their mothers fled in every direction. Vaddoc cursed under his breath and ran after a woman clutching a toddler and dragging a small child by the hand.

The woman screamed and stumbled as a Turindari soldier swung a sword at her head. Vaddoc deflected the blow, using his second sword to take one of the man’s legs off. He took only seconds to ensure the man wouldn’t rise again before throwing a shield around the woman and her two children.

Shouts pulled his attention and he turned to see several men from the burning village armed with pitchforks, scythes, and whatever else they could grab defending a larger group of women and children from Turindari soldiers.

Even as Vaddoc moved to help them, several of the village men went down on swords and pikes. One woman went wild as a soldier broke through. She grabbed a large pot and smashed the soldier in the face. He yelled curses as the clay pot broke on his face and helmet, and hot water scalded his skin. His yells didn’t seem to faze the woman; she snatched up a heavy rake and began to beat the man with it as she screamed curses back at him.

Another woman, emboldened by the actions of the first, grabbed a cooking knife and ran toward the downed soldier.

Vaddoc left the women to their battle and joined the village men, fighting alongside them. Little by little the line was strengthened as women joined them with whatever they could find that would serve as weapons.

Emallya fought against the Kojen. How many times had she seen battles like this? How many years during the War of Fire had her nose been filled with the stench of blood and death as the noise of combat raged around her?

A Kojen rose up against her and she took it down, ignoring the blood that splattered across the ground as it fell. A Hanoverian soldier yelled something she couldn’t make out as he attacked her wildly. In two swift moves she took his life.

Mernoth and Bardeck fought a few yards from her, the bond telling her they both had sustained minor injuries. She slowly began to shift position, working her way toward them.

Emallya felt it the second the sword plunged deep into Bardeck’s chest. Pain ripped through her and she faltered. Mernoth roared his grief and rage, the sound filling the sky. A hole tore open in her soul; it felt much like when she’d lost Rylin. Her swords dropped from numb hands. Heedless of the battle around her and the weapons raised against her, Emallya tried to run to her bondmate and the fading Mernoth.

Agony exploded through her as a sword slammed across her back. She landed face first in the field, muddied by the blood soaking the ground. Her head swimming, she looked for Mernoth. His great dark eyes were closed as the last of the golden color washed from his scales.

Maleena stood at the edge of a dense copse of trees, well back from the seething mass of bodies engaged in battle. One hand laid protectively over her belly as she concentrated on the battle. She’d promised to stay out of the fighting, but that didn’t stop her from participating. Her magic pulsed like a raging river inside her as she targeted groups of Kojen through eyes burning from the smoke, taking them out with weaves that burst every vessel in their heads.

She coughed several times and squinted at a group of close to fifty Hanoverian soldiers as they came near. Maleena wove a different weave this time and watched as they dropped their swords, their faces going slack as they fell to the ground, their soul shields crushed.

It wasn’t nearly enough. At least a thousand Kojen ripped through the human armies. Though the combination of forces fighting for Galdrilene outnumbered their counterparts, the Kojen mental attack devastated their ranks. Without the dragon bond or Border Guard training to protect most of them, it was no contest.

Nydara and Paki flew back and forth over the expansive battlefield, diving down and pulling as many children and women as they could from danger. The Mallay had been cleared, but the battle spilled well beyond the walls of the city and surged through the small villages near the wall.

Above, Shadow Dragons and Guardians fought a vicious war and on the ground magic weaves flew back and forth between the mages from both sides.

Mernoth’s grief filled roar tore across the smoke filled sky. Maleena turned to see Bardeck fall. Emallya tried to run to him and was struck down.

Oh Fates, no! Maleena surged forward only to be stopped by Amara. The Nagi refused to let her move forward. Amara had promised to guard Maleena and keep her away from the battle. Her heart broke as tears poured down her face. All she could do was protect Emallya from a distance and hope the woman lived.

Oksana cut people down searching for the one man in the battle she wanted more than any other. He was here, somewhere. Today she would make him pay. Quillan landed with a heavy thud next to her, crushing several of the Turindari around her.

“We have to pull back,” Kovan shouted over the din.

She slashed a man across the face, nearly taking the top of his head off. “What do you mean pull back?” she yelled. “They are dying all over the field.”

“So are our forces. We are losing too many younger Shadow Riders and mages.”

Oksana shot him a venom-filled glare. “No! We aren’t done here! We haven’t won yet.”

Kovan shook his head. “And we won’t today, Oksana. This battle is a draw. Stay and die if you want. We are pulling out and taking as many of the Kojen with us as we can salvage.”

Oksana cut through the men rushing at her, anger making her take it further than needed to kill them. She hacked at their bodies in frustration as Quillan took off. Around her, the Kojen pulled back. Sadira already took a number of them through a Jump.

Fury boiled in Oksana’s veins but she had no choice. She wasn’t going to stand here until she was alone and vulnerable. She called Dusa to her with a furious shout, feeling only a twinge of relief that the dragon was still in good enough shape to fly in and pick her up.

Kellinar felt exhaustion seeping in around the edges of his concentration as he fought through the endless battle. Too many had died. Where were the men of the Mallay? His zahri weighed heavy in his hands as he saw a Ke’han, the red handprint on his chain mail ripped open. Sightless eyes stared back at him. He turned to the next opponent and moved without thought, instinct carrying him forward.

Less and less Kojen engaged him, several Turindari and Hanoverian soldiers threw down their arms and ran.

And then, as soon as it began, it ended.

Kellinar stood in an expanse of bloody mud and bodies. Smoke blocked out the sun as ash drifted on the air like snow. He turned slowly. A field of death stretched all around him.

Dead black dragons lay among the bodies. Sorrow wrapped around his heart as his eyes found Tania’s blue Aylene lying with her throat ripped out. He walked slowly toward her but stopped when he came across Tania’s trampled body.

He closed his eyes to the sight of a friend lying lifeless in the dirt. So much death. So much blood.

Screaming pulled him away from Tania and he searched for the source. His heart stopped. Mernoth and Bardeck lay among the dead. A dull numbness crept over him as he sought Emallya. Maleena knelt in the mess on the ground, one of Emallya’s hands clenched in her own as she screamed for Serena.

Emallya took in sips of air as tears leaked out the corners of her eyes. Bardeck and Mernoth were gone. Nothing remained to hold her in this world anymore. Maleena’s calling for Serena and her pleas to Emallya to stay finally pulled her from her reverie.

Her breath shuddered as she squeezed Maleena’s hand weakly. “Shh… Do not cry for me, Maleena.” With great effort she raised her other hand and stroked the hair away from the face that looked so like hers. “I am not ending today. I will go on through you and the babe you carry.”

“What?” Maleena asked as more tears fell down her cheeks, making tracks through the soot.

“Eileana was my youngest sister. You are of my blood. The last of my family. The only thing the Shadow Riders have not taken from me.”

Serena appeared at her side and moved to lay her hands on her. Emallya used the last of her strength to stay her.

Emallya took another shuddering breath. “Save your energy for others. I have no wish to be healed.” She smiled weakly into the stricken faces gathering around her. “My embers. You are everything I hoped you would be. I spent my life waiting for you.” Tears spilled over the corners of her eyes and ran down her temples into her hair. Cold seeped into Emallya’s limbs and crawled its way into her body.

Another shuddering, shallow breath pulled into her lungs as her heart labored. “I have spent…over five hundred years…making sure the embers burned again…it is…my time…”

She looked away from their faces. Above her the smoke swirled in the breeze. To her eyes, it almost looked as if ethereal dragons soared in the smoke. The world grew dark and the warmth of Maleena’s hand faded.

Icy cold washed over her and once again she stood in front of a translucent veil. Rylin waited for her on the other side. Beside the silver, Bardeck and Mernoth stood along with Ilyana and her blue, whole again, their scars gone. Bodies broke or grew old, but the spirit never did. To the other side, her children stood, along with Eileana, her mother, and her siblings. As she stepped through the veil, warmth spread over her. This time, nothing held her back.

Rylin lowered her great silver head. “I have missed you.”

Tears overflowed as she embraced the dragon. “I have missed you too.”

Maleena couldn’t stop the tears. Her heart felt as if it was breaking into a million pieces. Even the warmth of Mckale’s arms didn’t ease the hurt in her heart. Emallya was gone. Bardeck and Mernoth were gone. How would they go on without them? How would Galdrilene survive?”

Kellinar turned and walked away. He couldn’t breathe, couldn’t believe they were gone. They were the Guardians’ rock. Everywhere he looked death overwhelmed him. Tallula and her golden Seri lay in the battlefield as did Tania and her blue, and too many allies to count.

His only comfort was his bondmates had survived and Loki had remained in Markene. A tremor ran through him as sorrow overwhelmed him. Taela knelt in front of Maleena, smoothing her hair and talking to her, though Kellinar sensed Taela’s own terrible grief through the bond.

He watched Serena turn and make her way across the battlefield, searching for wounded to heal. Kellinar knew she was doing her best to think about something, anything other than the deaths of Emallya, Bardeck, and Mernoth.

Anevay walked up and put her arms around him. Kellinar clutched her to him and buried his face in her hair as her tears soaked the front of his shirt.

She cried out as something slammed into them, making him stagger back as a flash of pain dug into his chest. “Anevay?” A flash of black made him look up. Oksana looked him in the eye for a split second, malicious triumph twisting her face and a heavy black bow in her hands. A dark Jump opened as Oksana flew into it with her dragon.

“Kellinar…” Anevay breathed.

He looked down, his heart slammed in his chest as Anevay stared up at him, her dark eyes filled with pain. Her breath shuddered in her chest. Agony tore through him, her agony, it overwhelmed him.

“Anevay? Serena!” he yelled, panic flooding him.

One arm tightened around Anevay’s waist as her legs gave out and he raised his other hand to catch her head when it fell back.

Taela’s terrified and pain filled cry echoed across the battlefield as she raced toward them.

His heart pounded in his ears. “Serena!” Kellinar sank to his knees, easing Anevay down. Latia roared and landed next to them. Something had her pinned to him. With trembling hands he had to push Anevay away, barely registering the pain of something pulling out of his chest or the warm blood that spilled from the wound.

The broad arrowhead of a pure black bolt jutted from Anevay’s chest. “Oh no, Fates no! Anevay…” her name came out as a choked sob. “Serena!”

Kellinar looked frantically for his friend and healer. Serena ran toward him through the smoke and falling ash.

“Kellinar,” Anevay’s voice was no more than a whisper. “Always…loved you. From the first…”

“Shh...shh...” The sound came out shaky around the tears clogging his throat. He smoothed the ringlets of dark hair back from Anevay’s face. “Hold on, baby. Please hold on. Serena is coming. Please just hold on…”

Taela threw herself on her knees next to Kellinar, sobs shaking her body as she smoothed Anevay’s hair over and over. “No. No. No,” she moaned.

Anevay’s dark liquid eyes shimmered with tears as she turned them on Taela. “My bondsister…will always love…”

She looked back at Kellinar, pain filling her eyes and etching lines into her face. “It hurts, Kellinar.”

“I know, love.” He pulled as much of the pain from her as could, feeling Shryden move to block him from taking more than was safe. Kellinar brushed his knuckles across her cheek, the skin ashen under the creamed coffee color. Fear tightened like a vice around him. “Serena is coming, Anevay. She’s almost here.”

Serena staggered to a stop and fell to her knees across from him. Her eyes went wide and she gasped at the broad head arrow and the bloody mess on Anevay’s chest. She put her hands on the wound and closed her eyes.

Anevay’s face blurred as tears filled Kellinar’s eyes and he tightened his hold on her. If he could just hold onto her tight enough, she wouldn’t slip away from him.

She spasmed slightly in his grip and went still. Fear lanced through his chest as he looked frantically at Serena’s tear streaked face. Kellinar shook his head. No, Serena was here, Anevay couldn’t have…

He gazed down into Anevay’s face, one hand stroking her hair. “Anevay, wake up, love. Come on, wake up.” A strangled sob broke past his lips. “Please.”

Her beautiful eyes stared sightlessly back at him. He looked at Serena. “She can’t be dead, you were healing her.”

Serena stared at Anevay with hollow, lost eyes. “I couldn’t…not fast enough to save…” She raised overflowing eyes to his. “I wasn’t fast enough. I’m so sorry, Kellinar.”

With grief filled eyes, as dark and beautiful as Anevay’s, Latia laid her head next to them. A fading sorrowful keening coming from her throat. Ripples flowed along Latia’s scales, taking with them the bright yellow.

“Kellinar,” Latia’s voice was faint, full of regret and sadness. “I love you too. I’m sorry I didn’t protect her better. I’m sorry I didn’t feel the black Jumping in time. And I’m sorry we can’t stay with you. Forgive me. Take comfort that Anevay doesn’t go alone to Maiadar.”

Anguish crushed him at her words. “I love you too, Latia. There is nothing to forgive.”

The other dragons gathered around Latia, their voices raised in keening sorrow as they bid their friend and mate goodbye. Shryden raised his head and roared his grief to the sky.

Taela wrapped her arms around her middle and bent over until her forehead pressed against the ground, her body shaking with silent sobs.

Kellinar cradled Anevay to him, rocking back and forth. She couldn’t be gone. This was a nightmare he would wake from; it had to be. What had he done? How had he failed to protect her? Anguish gripped so hard his heart physically hurt. Kellinar drew a shuddering breath, his throat tightened around the lump in it, strangling him as he looked at Serena and whispered hoarsely, “Heal her for me. Please, Serena. Bring her back to me.”

Serena shook her head and swallowed, more tears spilling over. Her breath hitched in a sob and her face crumpled. “I can’t heal death, Kellinar.”

Kellinar bent his head and wept into Anevay’s hair as he continued to rock her. His chest constricted until he could barely breathe under the weight of the agony in his heart. “No, no, no. Anevay, I love you. I need you, Anevay…”

As their friends gathered around, Serena gently tried to pull Anevay from Kellinar’s arms. He tightened his grip on her, begging for her to come back. The anguish and pain ravaging his face broke her heart. Blood soaked the front of his shirt. It wasn’t all Anevay’s. The arrow bolt had hit him too.

With tears in his eyes, Vaddoc put his hands on Kellinar’s shoulders. “You have to let her go now.” His voice was thick with sorrow.

With Vaddoc’s help, Serena was able to get Kellinar to release Anevay. Mckale knelt and gently picked her up. With tender care, he laid her next to Latia’s body.

Kellinar gathered Taela into his arms and they sat there clinging to each other as the dragons gathered around them. Serena laid her hand on Kellinar’s arm. “I need to heal you before you bleed to death.”

He shook his head, the devastation in his eyes wrenching at her.

“Kellinar, I know how badly you hurt right now,” she choked back a sob. “But I don’t think Taela can handle losing another bondmate today.” She took a shaky breath. “And, I can’t lose another friend.”

Taela, her eyes red and swollen with her own suffering, gazed up at Kellinar. “Please, let her heal you. I can’t lose you too. I need you. Shryden needs you.” Their shared grief overwhelmed Serena. A fist closed around her heart.

The mention of Shryden seemed to cut through the dark place where Kellinar’s heart dwelled. He nodded, though he refused to let go of Taela. It didn’t matter; she would heal him that way. If only she could take away all of his pain.

By the time she’d closed the wound and healed the other minor physical injuries, Emallya’s body had been laid next to Bardeck and Mernoth.

Vaddoc, Mckale, and Varnen waded through the dead on the battlefield to return Tania and Tallula to their dragons.

The dragons raised their voices in keening sorrow as they set fire to each fallen pair, the intense heat reducing them to ash.

Shryden and Paki each laid their heads against Latia’s for a moment before they backed up and released their fire.

Mckale held Maleena as Emallya, Bardeck, and Mernoth disappeared behind flames. Serena walked up and put her arms around Maleena and Mckale, laying her head on his arm. Vaddoc, Kirynn, Kellinar, Taela, Jocelynn, and Varnen gathered around, leaning on each other in shared anguish. The surviving mages stood in a half circle, their faces wracked with grief as they said goodbye to a couple that had overseen Galdrilene for generations.

Smoke from the pyres billowed into the sky, further darkening the day. As the flames slowly died back, revealing only ashes, Belan approached them hesitantly, his eyes haunted by the sadness of the aftermath. “Kellinar?”

Serena turned to Belan. Lost in his hurt, Kellinar was in no shape to handle anything else. “Yes, Belan?”

Behind him, a raggedy group of men stood covered in blood and injuries. All that was left of the men of the Mallay. Over five hundred had left and less than two hundred remained. The cost of their freedom was immeasurable. She took a deep breath, pushing her sorrow away in order to deal with everything that still had to be done.

Belan cleared his throat. “We have some serious injuries all over the field that need to be healed so we can get the women and children from the canyon and take them…” He looked around. Inside the wall, the Mallay still burned strong.

Serena nodded. There was a lot of healing to do. “I will Slide to Galdrilene and bring back more healers.”

Kellinar stared over Taela’s head at the battleground. A blessed numbness settled over him. The Ke’han, many of their numbers remaining intact, gathered slowly together with the Naga and Nagi. Mckale sat on Tellnox, preparing to take them back to…wherever they lived.

Lord Vesnar and Lord Telain and their remaining soldiers held a large group of Turindari and Hanoverian prisoners. A few chickens and goats set loose from the Mallay wandered lost and confused among the dead.

The soldiers from the border nations and the Border Guards moved about the battlefield, systematically killing any Kojen or enemy soldiers still struggling for life. There would be no healing for them.

Kellinar’s eyes drifted over the many Mallay men strewn across the field. Did he cause all of this? If so, was it worth the cost? His eyes strayed to the pile of ash that had been Anevay and Latia. He had no answers. Deep down, he knew the price of freedom from the Shadow Riders, though tragically high that day, had come nowhere near being paid in full.

The future and the knowledge of the many battles to come, the many heartaches to visit them, weighed heavily on him. Anger slowly started to simmer in his blood as he looked up at the walls of the Trilene. No one walked them now. The cowards in the Trilene hadn’t even sent their own soldiers out and now they cowered behind their walls in silence. They should burn for what they did. For everything they had done.

Abruptly, he let go of Taela and stormed to Shryden’s side, grabbing for the catcher strap. Shryden turned a big, sad eye on him. “Your pain is my pain; your sorrow my sorrow. Nobody understands what you are feeling at this moment more than me.” The dragon hesitated then continued, “However, this is not the way Kellinar. I will not assist you in this.”

Kellinar sagged against the dragon’s side. “They should burn, Shryden. They should…” His eyes swept the field and the piles of ashes. The numbness and anger fell away as everything crashed down on him. “I have to get out of here.”

“I will fly you home. Paki will bring Taela.”

He pulled himself slowly into the saddle, fastening the safety straps by rote. The blue launched himself into the air. Kellinar didn’t look back as they left the battlefield, and the ashes of those he had loved, behind.

Maleena focused through the sorrow in her heart and the tears in her eyes as they slowly returned allies back to their homes. The overwhelming grief from the loss of her friends and from those on the battlefield made her head feel as if it were breaking apart. Women and children wept for husbands, brothers, and sons lost. Even sisters, aunts, and daughters had been lost. Her first taste of battle had left its mark in the form of a deep scar on her heart.

Smoke choked the air, the smell of burnt hair and feathers billowed out of the Mallay from the animals that had failed to escape. It mingled with the reek of death and the sickly scent of blood soaked, scorched earth. Bile rose in the back of Maleena’s throat and she gagged, coughing several times in an attempt to clear it.

Kalila and her guards waited patiently for the survivors. For now, the people of the Mallay and the surrounding villages would be taken in by Markene.

What was to be done with the prisoners from Turindar and Hanover had been decided by the dragons. A large swath of ash marked where the prisoners had been.

No enemy left behind to bite you in the tail later had been their reasoning. Though many had pled that they only followed orders, the dragons had informed them that their actions were their own to decide. Their path had been their own to choose and the blame could be laid at no feet but their own.

Dragon justice was swift and hard.

Kirynn and Syrakynn opened a Slide for Kalila, the people of the Mallay, and the survivors from the Trilene and Dellar Districts that had fought for them. Galdrilene would have to help Markene with its new burden of people.

Maleena shook her head. That could be dealt with later.

As the last of the allies were returned, Maleena stared across the field. So much lost. The dead of both sides beyond the dragons and their riders would be left. Maleena hoped the stench of rotting corpses would haunt the Trilene and Dellar Districts for weeks.

Mckale stopped behind her and placed his hands on her shoulders. “Everything is done that can be done here. Jocelynn, Varnen, and Serena took all of the healers home.”

Maleena swallowed the heavy lump in her throat. “I want to go home to Galdrilene for a little while.”

“I think that is what we all need for now.” He laced his fingers through hers as they walked to Nydara and Tellnox.

Maleena sat at the edge of the caldera, staring out at the glittering waters of the bay. One hand rested on her swollen belly while the other absently stroked Cat’s fur. Galdrilene mourned its losses. The hold felt empty, even with everyone home. The gaping hole of five lost riders and four lost dragons remained a raw and open wound.

Wiping the fresh tears from her eyes, Maleena contemplated the future without Emallya, Bardeck, and Mernoth. How would they go on without them? They all still had so much to learn. Could the Guardians make it through the coming war without the wisdom of the older couple and their dragon?

The view of the bay offered no answers.

Please note the following preview is an unedited, early version of the prologue from the exciting conclusion of the Dragon’s Call series, Ashes and Spirits. In the final version, the prologue will be fully edited and its content may slightly change.

Maleena stood in the middle of a blackened field. Ash floated through the air like snow. Tears streaked her face as she slowly turned and a fist closed over her heart. Tellnox lay still and crumpled on the burnt ground, his brilliant green scales charred. A long, jagged tear laid his neck open from jaw to shoulder. Mckale lay not far from Tellnox, his silver eyes staring sightlessly at the sky.

With a sob, Maleena turned away. Her eyes fell on Kellinar’s body. Next to him, Shryden’s now white scales were evidence of a dragon that died after his rider. Taela wandered lost and screaming through the battlefield. Paki’s body lay partially submerged in the perfectly round and still lake.

Syrakynn raised her voice in keening sorrow as she dragged herself across the ground to her fallen rider. With each passing moment, more of the red washed from her scales.

Loki leaned against Merru. Both of them bled heavily from too many wounds. Serena sat next to her dead Miya, her eyes filled with loss and desperation as she stared off into nothing.

Maleena turned, frantically searching for Nydara. The silver lay behind her, both wings shattered beyond repair and one back leg useless. It was too much. Too much sorrow, too much devastation, too much…

The screech of a Shadow Dragon spun her around. More Kojen charged over the battlefield. Maleena grabbed a discarded sword, maybe one of Mckale’s, and braced herself to meet them. Despite the pain in her wings, Nydara pulled herself forward. Using the last of her strength, the silver sent fire into the sky to hold off the Shadow Dragon while Maleena met the wave of Kojen.

There were far too many, but Nydara could no longer fly. Maleena fought with her last breath to defend the Silver. Pain exploded in her head as a hard swung Kojen sword connected. Darkness closed over her as she fell to the ground. Nydara’s grief filled roar echoed in her ears as the world faded…

The image shifted…

Maleena worked a weave she had only used once before under the direction of a much older dragon. Mckale and Tellnox tried to keep the Shadows at bay while Nydara made defensive moves as Maleena wove. It was nearly finished, two more threads…

A black dragon crashed into Nydara and the weave fumbled. A wave of white light burst away from Maleena, ripping apart and destroying everything in its path. The concussion from the exploding wave stunned Maleena and knocked Nydara from the sky. The still lake rushed up at them.

The last thing Maleena saw before the not-quite-water of the lake closed over her was the wave tearing her friends from the sky. Then the lake claimed her and the silver and their souls fled…

The image shifted…

And again ended with the deaths of her and those around her. Over and over the images shifted each one different and yet each one ending the same. The Shadow Riders won. The Guardians and their dragons were all killed.

Until the last image…

This one saw her friends mostly intact, the Shadow Riders and their dragons dead along with the Kojen. What she saw in the sky stunned her. As the image faded, Maleena saw herself in Mckale’s arms as he wept into her hair. Nydara lay nearby, her silver scales slowly fading.

A fading, familiar voice whispered through her mind. “The unfinished weave is the only way.”

Maleena shook her head slightly and reached for the voice, desperate to hear it one more time, but it was gone. She turned the images over, examining them for any information that could be gleaned. Each one had ended in her death. The last one though showed her friends still alive. Her life for those of everyone she loved. If Nydara was willing, it would be a fair exchange. Either way, it looked like she would likely die anyway. She would rather do so saving her friends and their dragons.

“I will make the sacrifice with you and we shall go together into Maiadar. It will be a worthy death,” Nydara sent.

Maleena sent a wave of gratitude to the silver. “Then we will do what we must do to ensure the lives of the others.”

Mckale and Tellnox would live; they would be there to raise the baby. Tears stung Maleena’s eyes as she pulled her hand back from the glass smooth surface of the lake, allowing her magic to dissipate. She swallowed the sorrow she felt, knowing Mckale would sense it and leaned back just as the sun broke the eastern horizon.

The unfinished weave… there was only one way to get it.

“Maleena?” Mckale’s gentle voice reached through the horror of the images as he knelt on one knee next to her. “What did you see? I feel your grief, is there no hope at all?”

She rested one hand on her large belly and took a couple of deep breaths to help steady her emotions and focus her energy on cleansing her heart of the lingering sadness brought on by the images, thankful Mckale could only read her emotions and not her thoughts. The images she’d seen would be forever burned into her mind.

Maleena looked into Mckale’s eyes. “There is hope. It is small and still everything won’t end happily for everyone, but its hope nonetheless.”

He ran his hand down the side of her face, gently brushing her hair back. “How will it end? What will happen?”

She shook her head and laid her palm on his cheek. “I have no way of knowing for sure, my love. The lake only shows what could be, what might happen in the future. It gives no solid answers. That is why Emallya said it was so dangerous. Too many people forgot that it only offers maybes.” Maleena didn’t plan to tell him that she had gone through all of the possible maybes the lake had to offer. It would do no good. The future would be what it would be.

Maleena placed her hand in Mckale’s. “Help me up; it grows uncomfortable to sit here for too long.”

Mckale’s large, strong hands helped her gain her feet. Her ever expanding belly made getting up from the ground difficult. She placed her hands on the small of her back and arched slightly to stretch. “I need to speak with Kellinar and Taela.”

“They are still in New Sharren. I think they feel if they keep busy enough with helping to build and resettle the Mallay people there, then they won’t have to think about Anevay.” Mckale frowned. “Why do you need to speak with them? And do you think you should be going that far at this point?”

A deep pang of sadness struck her heart at the mention of Anevay. Only two months had passed and she still found herself ready to ask her lost friend something only to remember she was now in Maiadar. Just as the pain of losing Emallya and Bardeck had yet to ease, she still felt the loss of Anevay. “I must talk with them because Anevay’s unfinished weave is the only hope I found.”

Mckale shook his head. “Taela already tried to figure out what Anevay was creating and has been unable to.”

She snorted. “Taela spent less than an hour in the records room. She didn’t really try and we won’t know for sure until she does.”

“As you said, the ability to read the book doesn’t equate to creating new weaves. That was Anevay’s talent alone.”

“I know.” Maleena nodded. “Still, I have to talk with them. Taela can try again—really try. She and Kellinar are going to have to face the loss of Anevay eventually. The rest of us have.” She sighed and glanced at the glass smooth surface of the lake. “If she can’t finish what Anevay began, there might be another way to get the rest of the weave. But it will be a huge risk to them both.”

“What way?”

“I’m not sure it can even be done yet. I will have to speak with Taela first. Until then, I’m not entirely sure of all the possibilities.”

“Fine. If you must talk in circles then you must. Sometimes you sound like Emallya with these enigmatic explanations.” Mckale shook his head. “We will go to the border, tomorrow.”

Maleena frowned at him. “No, I will go now.”

“Maleena, please. You need to rest more now. This alone,” he motioned toward the lake, “has drained your energy enough. If you want to argue about it, then I will speak with Nydara. See how fast you get to the border without a dragon.”

Nydara huffed a rumble of agreement. Maleena shot a glare at the silver, knowing the dragon would take Mckale’s side. “Alright, tomorrow then.”

She turned and walked toward the silver dragon. Mckale would have to help her into the saddle again. It seemed grace and ease of movement would continue to be a thing of the past until the baby was born. With a sigh she stopped next to Nydara and looked up at the saddle. Even with the second, lower stirrup added to this side, there was no way she could reach that with her belly in the way.

With mirth in his eyes, Mckale stepped to her side and held out a hand. “My lady.” He bowed slightly.

Maleena laughed. “You are really enjoying my lack of mobility aren’t you?”

“Of course, it means our child grows well and healthy. Besides, you look beautiful pregnant.” He bent and brushed a kiss across her lips.

She shook her head and rubbed a hand over her belly, feeling the baby kick strong. Now if only the child would quit propping his or her foot in Maleena’s ribs at night, she might get some sleep one of these days. She sent a mock glare at Mckale. “Don’t lie, Mckale. I look like a bloated cow. My stomach makes me wider than I am tall.”

Mckale threw his head back and roared with laughter; the deep timbre of it floating across the still and silent lake. When he regained control of himself, he looked at her with warm amusement dancing in his silver eyes. “You hardly look like that, my lady. I remember my mother’s belly getting much larger than yours when she was pregnant with Sonja.”

Maleena waved away the comment. “From what you have said, your mother was almost as tall as Sonja. I highly doubt a large, pregnant stomach made her look as unwieldy as I do.”

He chuckled softly. “You can look into my mind and see that I’m not lying. You are beautiful like this.”

She rolled her eyes and chose to ignore that comment. He very well may think she looked beautiful, but she didn’t feel it. She felt huge and uncomfortable. “Let’s get back to Galdrilene since you insist that I rest. Tomorrow I have to speak with Taela. If what I’m thinking is possible, there will be much to prepare for.”

Born in Kansas, I spent a lot of my childhood moving around. I’ve lived in Kansas, Oklahoma, Washington State (around Seattle), and southern California. I had many great adventures growing up. Right now I reside in Kansas again with my husband of 19 years, my three children, assorted cats, and my wonderful dogs Roxie and Abby. One of these days I will escape the plains and make my way back to my beloved Pacific Northwest.

I’ve been an avid lover of fantasy since I was a young child. Dragons, elves, fairies, dwarves, and other denizens of the fantasy world as well as magic have always fascinated me. As I grew up, I developed an interest in vampires, zombies and my interests branched out to take in paranormal and urban fantasy.

I don’t have any special writing credits to my name other than a wildly active imagination and the ability to form that imagination into written stories. Beyond writing and reading, I also have a deep love of neat stairways, doors, doorways, and gates. I’m also convinced chocolate is a food group.

Table of Contents

Praise for “Embers at Galdrilene”

Also by A.D. Trosper

Title Page

Copyright Info

The Design Team

Visit the Author

Dedication

Acknowledgements

The World of Dragon’s Call

Prologue

Chapter One

Chapter Two

Chapter Three

Chapter Four

Chapter Five

Chapter Six

Chapter Seven

Chapter Eight

Chapter Nine

Chapter Ten

Chapter Eleven

Chapter Twelve

Chapter Thirteen

Chapter Fourteen

Chapter Fifteen

Chapter Sixteen

Chapter Seventeen

Chapter Eighteen

Chapter Nineteen

Chapter Twenty

Chapter Twenty-One

Chapter Twenty-Two

Chapter Twenty-Three

Chapter Twenty-Four

Chapter Twenty-Five

Chapter Twenty-Six

Chapter Twenty-Seven

Chapter Twenty-Eight

Chapter Twenty-Nine

Chapter Thirty

Chapter Thirty-One

Chapter Thirty-Two

Chapter Thirty-Three

Chapter Thirty-Four

Chapter Thirty-Five

Chapter Thirty-Six

Chapter Thirty-Seven

Chapter Thirty-Eight

Chapter Thirty-Nine

Chapter Forty

Chapter Forty-One

Chapter Forty-Two

Chapter Forty-Three

Chapter Forty-Four

Chapter Forty-Five

Chapter Forty-Six

Chapter Forty-Seven

Tears of War Glossary

Ashes and Spirits Preview

Give A Little Magic...

About the Author